ATP

INDEX COPYRIGHT 2003

COPYRIGHT IS NOT CLAIMED AS TO ANY PART OF AN ORIGINAL WORK

PREPARED BY A UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT OFFICER OR EMPLOYEE AS
PART OF THAT PERSONS OFFICIAL DUTIES OR BY ANY OTHER THIRD PARTY
OFFICER OR EMPLOYEE AS PART OF THAT PERSONS DUTIES.

"ATP" is a registered trademark of Aircraft Technical Publishers. All original

authorship of ATP is protected under U.S. and foreign copyrights and is subject
to written license agreements between ATP and its Subscribers.

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. NO PART OF THIS PUBLICATION MAY BE

REPRODUCED, STORED IN A RETRIEVAL SYSTEM, OR TRANSMITTED IN ANY
FORM BY ANY MEANS, ELECTRONIC, MECHANICAL, PHOTOCOPYING,
RECORDING OR OTHERWISE, WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THE
PUBLISHER.
 Aircraft Technical Publishers Customer Service
101 South Hill Drive 6AM-5PM PST M-F

Brisbane, CA 94005 (800)227-4610

ATP Grid Index to Manufacturer’s Publications:

Raytheon Aircraft Co.

33 Series and 35 Series
Shop Manual

Secti on Topic__
General Information

33 Series Shop Manual

Record of Revisions
Record of Temporary Revisions
List of Effective Pages

1 Introduction
The Shop Manual
Table of Contents
Alphabetical Index
Supplementary Publications

2 General Information
Dimensions of Aircraft
Skin Plating Diagrams
Stations Diagrams
Special Tools
Access Openings
Empennage Lubrication
Power Plant
Fuel System
Oil System
Oxygen System
Approved Engine Oils
Air Conditioning System
Landing Gear
Storage
Battery

10/15/2003 Copyright Aircraft Technical Publishers Page 1 of 5

BC 0209 MM
Secti_on Topic
Light Bulb Replacement Guide
Engine Instruments
Finishes

3 Systems Description and Maintenance

Cabin Entrance Door
Balancing Control Surfaces
Rigging Control Surfaces
Electric Trim Tab System
Fuel System
Air Conditioning System
Brake System
Replacement of Sidewall Inflating Valve
Landing Gear
Pressure System
Gyro Instrument Air Filters
Ignition
Propeller
Suction Relief Valve
Static Air and Pitot System
Alternators
Starters
Electrical Utilization Load Chart
Standby Generator System
Flap System
Flap Position Indicator
Flap Limit Switch
Alternator Troubleshooting
Strobe Light
Standby Generator Troubleshooting
Beechcraft New-Matic Autopilot
Autopilot Troubleshooting Guide

4 Major Disassembly
Seats
Wings
Wing Bolts
Stabilizers
Wheels
Brakes
Propeller Governor

10/15/2003 Copyright Aircraft Technical Publishers Page 2 of 5

BC 0209 MM
Se_ction T_opi c
Windows
Flap Motor
Temporary Revision No. 4-2
Elevator Trim Tab

5 Major Maintenance and Overhaul

Main and Nose Wheel
Brakes

6 Electrical Wiring Diagrams

Wiring Diagrams

7 Replacement Schedule

8 Periodic Inspections

35 Series Shop Manual

Record of Revisions
Record of Temporary Revisions
Letter of Transmittal (Highlights of Changes)
List of Effective Pages

1 Introduction
The Shop Manual
Table of Contents
Alphabetical Index
Supplementary Publications
Models, Serials, Differences

2 General Information (Servicing)

Dimensions of Aircraft
Stations Diagrams
Access Openings
Skin Plating Diagrams
Special Tools
Empennage Lubrication
Ground Handling
Oil System
Fuel System
Landing Gear

10/15/2003 Copyright Aircraft Technical Publishers Page 3 of 5

BC 0209 MM
Section _
Topic

Landing Gear
Storage
Battery
Finishes
Engine Cleaning
Propeller Blade
Oxygen System
Air Conditiong System
Static Ground Cable
Light Bulb Replacement Guide

3 Systems Description and Maintenance

Flight Controls
Temporary Revision No. 3-1
Electric Trim Tab System
Balancing Control Surfaces
Fuel System
Oil System
Flap System
Landing Gear
Brake System
Static Air and Pitot System
Air Conditioning System
Vacuum System
Pressure System
Engine Instruments
Beechcraft New-Matic Autopilot
Autopilot Troubleshooting Guide
Strobe Light
Emergency Locator Transmitter
Fuselage Bulkheads
Cabin Entrance Door
Seats
Ignition
Alternator
Standby Generator System
Starter
Electrical Utilization Load Chart
Troubleshooting Guides
Propeller Deice System
Propeller Deice System Troubleshooting Guide

10/15/2003 Copyright Aircraft Technical Publishers Page 4 of 5

BC 0209 MM
Section Topi_e

4 Major Disassembly
Wings
Wing Bolts
Landing Gear
Flaps
Temporary Revision No. 4-2
Brakes
Wheels
Empennage
Engine
Windows
Propeller Deicer

5 Major Maintenance and Overhaul

Main and Nose Gear
Fuel Unit
Flap Actuator
Landing Gear Actuator
Propeller Deice Boot
Brake Master Cylinder

6 Electrical Wiring Diagrams

Wiring Diagrams

7 Periodic Inspection Schedule

8 Accessory and Component Replacement Schedule

End of Index

10/15/2003 Copyright Aircraft Technical Publishers Page 5 of 5

BC 0209 MM
33 SERIES

SHOP
IVI ANUAL
 ~3eechcraR
Debonair- ´•3´•3 Series
CD-1 Thru CD-nls CE-1 Thru CE-179

Bonanz;a 33 Series
CD-119 Thn? CD-1304´•, CE-180 Thru´• CE-771 Except CE-748

cl;l Thru CJ-148

SHOP MANUAL

SECTION 1 Introduction
I
SECTION 2 General Information

SECTION 3,........................ Systems Description and Maintenc~nce I

SECTION 4 Maior Disassembly II
SECTION 5...............................Major Maintenance and Overhaul
I:
SECTION b........,.,.,, Ele ctricalWiring Diagrams Il
SECTION 7 Replacement Schedule IC
SECTION 8....................................................,....Periodic Inspections t:

COPYRIGHT m BEECH 1989

33-590011-1C17
33-590011-1C
Revised: May 22, 1989
Reissued: January 21, 1986
 Published By
Commercial Publications
BEECH AIRCRAFT CORPORATION
Wichita, Kansas 67201
U.S.A.

of G~HA
1L Aubtion
~I Mcociation
 RECORD OF REVISIONS

MFG REV
NO DESCRIPTION ISSUEDATE ATPREVDA INSERTED BY

C17 See List of Effective Pages 5/22/89 2/23/98 ATP/MB

 RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS

P ATP REV INSERT DATE REV REMOVE

REV NO DESCRIPTION ISSUE DATE DATE BY REMOVED INCOR BY

4-2 Sec 4 pg 4-16 11/15/93 2/23/98 ATP/MB

 Liatad IMlaw ara the paqaa raaUlrad far thla publlccltlan. with ´•Ifactlvlty cumnt throuph the revlalon andlor niuu´• code ahown on the lower right corner ct chic peg..
and on tha tltla Etch papa b followed by an antry that denotea whether the papa I´• anil aa laaued, or 1a a prt of aome later revlaion or r´•luu´•.

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES r Always destroy superseded pages when you insert revised pages.

LOG OF REVISIONS

C Reissue....................´•.´•...´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•...3a"uary 21, 1966

01 Revision.........,........´•.....´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•..NOvember 1, 1973
02 Revision........................´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•..Ja"uary 30, 1974
03 Revision........................´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•.FebrI~!ary 28 1975
04 Revision........................´•´•...´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•3une 5, 1975
05 Revision......................´•.´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•September 26, 1975
C6 Rzvision.......................´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•..October 17, 1975
07 Revision........................´•....´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•.November 30, 1976
C8 Revision......................´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•March 8, 1977
09 Revision........................´•´•´•..´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•May 12, 1978
C10 Revision.~...................´•.´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•March 15, 1979
C11 Revision.......................´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•September 28, 1979
C1Z Revision.......................´•´•´•´•.´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•....June 26, 1980
013 Revision.......................´•....´•.´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•February 18, 1983
C14 Revision........~..............´•´•´•.´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•....June 20, 1983
015 Revision.........................~.´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•MaY 31, 1985
016 Revision.......................´•´•..´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•September 18, 1987
C17 Revision.´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•,,,.............,........,......,.,,..,.., May 22, 1989

LISTOF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Title Page C17 May 22/89 2-10 C2 Jan 30/74

Logo Page 2-10A t.hru 2-10E 08 Mar 8/77
C17 May 22/89 C9
A Page 2-10F thru 2-10G May 12/78
B Page C17’ May 22 2-11 09 May 12/78
1-1 and 1-2 016 Sep 18 2-12 thru 2-15 02 Jan 30/74
1-3 09 May 12/78 3-1 thru 3-2F 04 Jun 5/75
1-4 and 1-5 C12 Jun 26/80 3-3 C4 Jun 5/75
1-7 thru 1-10A 016 Sep 18/87 3-4 C15 May 31/85
1-11 thru 1-12A 015 May 31/85 3-4A thru 3-40 C15 May 31/85
1-13 02 Jan 30/74 3-5 C8 Mar 8/77
2-1 Orig 3-6 013 Feb 18/83
2-2 013 Feb 18/83 3-6A and 3-68 CX10 Nov 3970
2-2A 02 Jan 30/74 3-7 CX10 Nov 1970
2-28 thru 2-20 013 Feb 18/87 3-8 C/11 Aug 1971
.2-3A Ori 3-8A thru 3-8H C1S Sep 18/87
2-4 02 Jan 30/7P 3-9 02 Jan 30/74
2-5 and 2-6 Orig 3-10 and 3-10A C"10 Nov 1970
2-6A 014 Jun 20/83 3-108 and 3-100 C8 Mar 8/77
2-7 C14 Jun 20/83 3-100 thru 3-10J C9 May 12/78
2-8 016 Sep 18/87 3-10K C17 May 23/89
2-8A Clti Sep 18/87 3-11 and 3-12 C10 Mar 15/79
2-9 03 Feb 28/75
3-12A C9 May 12/78
3-13 Orig

~I IC1T
Baalc publicationa are aaaignad a part numb´•r which ´•pp´•´•n on the 1111´• pll(l´• with tha date ct the iuue. Subaeouent nvi´•iMI´• are id´•nlHkd by the addition of a
revialon code after the part number. Al after a part number denotea the tint revlalon to tha baale publlutlon, A2 the ucond, atc. Occaelonally. It ia neceeaary to
reiaaua and rspllnl a publication for the purpoae of obaoletlng a prevloua luu´• and outatandlng revlalona thereto. Ae theee r´•pl~m´•nl rel´•eue´• am made.
the coda will alao change to tha next luccaaalva latter of the alphabet at each laaoa. For exampla, B for the lint ralaaue. C for the second, etc.

When ordarlnq a manual, give (ha baalc numbar, and the raiaaua code when applicable:lfa complete up-to´•d´•# publlccltion Ie daalred. Should only revielon Pa0ea be
required. 8iva the baalc number and revl´•ion coda for tha particular aet of ravlalon paBea you dealre.
 LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES I Always destroy superseded pages when you inseR revised pages.

3-14 C2 Jan 30/74 .6-568 03 Feb 28/75

3-14A thru 3-148 08 Mar 8/77 6-566 01 Nov 1/73
3-140 thru 3-14F 016 Sep 18/87 6-560 thru 6-56F 011 Sep 28/79
3-15 C10 Mar 15/79 6-57 C11
3-16
Sep 28/79
012 Jun 26/80 6-58 C7 Nov 30/76
3-17 Orig 6-59 thru 6-61 C/11 Aug 1971
3-18 thru 3-180 C9 May 12/78 6-62 and 6-62A C3 Feb 28/75
3-18H thru 3-185 011 Sep 28/79 6-628 C7 Nov 30/76
3-19 C10 Mar 15/79 6-620 and 6-620 03 Feb 28/75
3-20 Ori 6-62E C6 Oct 17/75
3-20A and 3-208 C"10 Nov 197 6-63 07 Nov 30/76
3-200 and 3-200 09 May 12/78 6-64 and 6-64A C3 Feb 27/75
3-20E and 3-20F 02 Jan 30/74 6-64B C7 Nov 30/75
3-21 thru 3-27 0"8 May 1970 6-640 C6 Oct 17/75
4-1 012 Jun 26/80 6-65 C7 Nov 30/76
4-2 thru 4-4 C14 Jun 20/83 6-66 C/11 Aug 1971
4-5 017 May 22/89 6-66A C/15 Dec 1972
4-6 thru 4-6H C14 Jun 20/83 6-668 03 Feb 28/75
4-7 014 JunZ0/83 6-67 and 6-68 03 Feb 28/75
4-8 thru 4-16 012 Jun 26/80 6-68A and 6-688 C7 Nov 30/76
4-17 013 Feb 18/83 6-69 C/11 Aug 1971
4-18 thru 4-22 015 May 31/85 6-70 0/12 Sep 1971
5-1 02 Jan 30/74 6-70A C/15 Dec 1972
5-2 03 Feb 28/75 6-708 03 Feb 28/75
6-1 09 May 12/78 6-700 0/15 Dec 1972
6-2 thru 6-28 0"7 Dec 1969 6-700 07 Nov 30/76
6-3 06 Oct 17/75 6-70E thru 6-70H 0/15 Dec 1972
6-4 thru 6-13 0"7 Dec 1969 6-701 07 Nov 30/75
6-14 thru 6-16 07 Nov 30/76 6-71 C/12 Sep 1971
6-17 0"7 Dec 1969 6-72 0/15 Dec 1972
6-18 07 Nov 30/76 6-72A 03 Feb 28/75
6-19 0"7 Dec 1969 6-728 07 Nov 30/76
6-20 thru 6-24 07 Nov 30/76 6-720 C1 Nov 1/73
6-25 0"7 Dec 1969 6-720 C3 Feb 28/75
6-26 C1 Nov 1/73 6-73 07 Nov 30/76
6-27 thru 6-30 0"7 Dec 1969 6-74 03 Feb 28/75
6-31 07 Nov 30/76 6-74A 0/12 Sep 1971
6-32 thru 6-34 0"7 Dec 1969 6-748 0/15 Dec 1972
6-35 07 Nov 30/76 6-740 C3 Feb 28/75
6-36 thru 6-41 0"7 Dec 1969 6-740 07 Nov 30/76
6-42 and 6-43 0/12 Sep 1971 6-74E 03 Feb 28/75
6-44 07 Nov30/76 6-74F 07 Nov 30/76
6-45 thru 6-48 C*7 Dec 1969 6-746 01 Nov 1/73
6-49 07 Nov 30/76 6-74H and 6-741 07 Nov 30/76
6-50 03 Feb 28/75 6-75 07 Nov 30/76
6-50A and 6-508 0/15 Dec 1972 6-76 C3 Feb 28/75
6-50C and 6-500 07 Nov 30/76 6-76A C7 Nov 30/76
6-50E 01 Nov 1/73 6-768 C3 Feb 28/75
6-50F and 6-506 07 Nov 30/76 6-77 07 Nov 30/76
6-50H 01 Nov.1/73 6-78 0/11 Aug 1971
6-51 07 Nov 30/76 6-78A 0/12 Sep 1971
6-52 0/15 Dec 1972 6-788 01 Nov 1/73
6-52A 07 Nov 30/76 6-79 and 6-80 0/11 Aug 1971
6-53 thru 6-55 0/11 Aug 1971 6-81 thru 6-83 07 Nov 30/76
6-56 03 Feb28/75 7-1 014 Jun 20/83
521 6-56A 07 Nov 30/76 7-2 thru 7-6 C16 Sep 18/87
8-1 thru 8-7 C13 Feb 18/83
cb 8-8 C17 May 2._ ]989
C17. 8-9 thru 8-17 013 Feb 18/83
 SECTION

INTRODUCTION
 r

SECTION 1

Introduction
 BEEC;-1CRAFT
DEBONAIR/BONANZA 33 SERIES
SHOP MANUAL

The information contained in the NOTE

BEECHCRAFT 33 series Shop Manual supple-
ment comprises essential data on various Service Publications reissues or
items which apply speci fically to the revisions are not automatically
BEECHCRAFT 33 Series: Maintenance infor- provided to the holders of this
mation on items not ~ncluded here may be manual. For information on how to
obtained by referring to the BEECHCRAFT obtain reissues or revisions
Bonanza 35 Shop Manual. applicable to this manual, refer
to BEECHCRAFT Service Bulletin
Unless otherwise specified in the Shop No. 2001 or subsequent revision.
Manual, the BEECHCRAFT Bonanza may be
repaired in accordance with Federal AvS- WARNING
ation Agency’s "Aircraft Inspection and
Repai r" Manual A.C. 43.13-1A and "Ai rcraft Use only genui ne BEECHCRAFT or
Alterations", Manual A.C.43.13-2. BEECHCRAFT approved parts
obtained from BEECHCRAFT approved
The wiring diagrams for airplane serials sources, in connection with the
CD-1 through CD;1304, CE-1 through CE-612 maintenance and repair of Beech
and CJ-l thru C3-104 are contained within airplanes.
Section 6 of this Shop Manual.
Genuine BEECHCRAFT parts are
Refer the BEECHCRAFT Bonanza Wiring
to produced and inspected under rig-
Diagram Manual P/N 35-590102-7 for wiring orous procedures to ensure
diagrams pertaining to the following airworthiness and suitability for
Bonanza Model F33A a-i rplane seri al s CE-613 use in Beech ai rplane appl i ca-
thru CE-771, except CE-748, and Model F33C tions. Parts purchased from
airplane serials CJ-105 thru CJ-148. Refer sources other than BEECHCRAFT,
to the BEECHCRAFT Bonanza Wiring Diagram even though outwardly identical
Diagrams Manual P/N 35-190102-9 for F33A in appearance, may not have had
airplane serials CE-148, CE-772 and after the required tests and
and F33C ai rplane serials CJ-149 and i nspections performed, may be
after. different in fabrication tech-
niques and materials, and may be
NOTICE dangerous when installed in an
airplane.
Beech Aircraft Corporation
expressly reserves the right to Salvaged airplane parts, reworked
supersede, cancel and/or declare parts obtai ned from
obsolete any part, part numbers, non-BEECHCRAFT approved sources,
kits or publication that may be or parts, components, or struc-
referenced In this manual without tural assemblies, the service
prior notice. history of which is unknown or
cannot be authenticated, may have
CORRESPONDENCE been subjected to unacceptable
stresses or temperatures or have
If a question should arise con- other hidden damage, not discern-
cerning the care of your airplane, Ible through routine visual or
it is important to include the usual nondestructive testing
airplane serial number in any techniques. This may render the
correspondence. The serial number part, component or structural
appears the
on model designation assembly, even though originally
placard located on the underside manufactured by BEECHCRAFT,
of the fuselage, forward of the unsuitable and unsafe for air-
tie down on airplane serials CD-I plane use.
thru CD-1103 and CE-1 thru CE-163.
On airplane serials CD-1104 and BEECHCRAFT expressly disclaims
after and CE-164 and after, the any responsibility for malfunc-
model designation pi acard is tions, failures, damage or Injury
located inboard of the right flap
on the fuselage.

C16 1-1
 BEECHCRAFT
DEBONAIR/BONANZA 33 SERIES
SHOP MANUAL

caused by use of non-BEECHCRAFT

approved parts.

AIRPLANE MODELS AND SERIAL NUMBERS

BEECHCRAFT 33 (Serials 00-1 through CD-224, CD-233,

00-234, 00-236, 00-241, and 00-246
through 00-250)
BEECHCRAFT A33 (Serials CD-225 through CD-232, CD-235,
00-237 through 00-240, 00-242 through
00-245 and 00-251 through 00-387)

BEECHCRAFT 833 (Serials 00-388 through 00-813)

BEECHCRAFT C33 (Serials CD-814 through CD-1118)
BEECHCRAFT C33A (Serials CE-1 through CE-179)
BEECHCRAFT E33 (Serials 00-1119 through CD-1234)

BEECHCRAFT E33A (Serials CE-180 through CE-289)

BEECHCRAFT E33C (Serials CJ-l through 03-25)
BEECHCRAFT F33 (Serials 00-1235 through 00-1254)
BEECHCRAFT F33A (Serials CE-290 through CE-771
except CE-748)

BEECHRAFT F33C (Serials CJ-26 through CJ-148)

BEECHCRAFT 033 (Serials 00-1255 through GO-1304)

1-2 C16
 TABtE OF CONTENTS

SECTION Page

I INTRODUCTION

The Shop Manual. ....1-I

Table of Contents.......... 1-3

Alphabetical Index.............. ........._.

I-:

Supplementary Publications ...............1-11

II GENERAL INFORMATION

Dimensions of Aircraft ..2-1

Skin Plating Diagrams... 2-3

Stations Diagrams ........._

..2-6

Access Openings ..1-7

Special Tools............. ...........2-7

Empennage Lubrication ..2-7

Power Plant ..2-8

Fuel System........... 2-8

Oil System .............._ ........._

....1-9

Oxygen System...... ..1-9

Approved Engine Oils 2-t~

Air Conditioning System. I-IOA

Landing Gear.............. ............2-IOB

Storage. .............2-10D

Battery 2-1OF

Light Bulb Replacement Guide ........._ ........._.__.

1-10G

EngineInstruments ................2-1 1

Finishes. ............2-11

III S~STEMS DESCRIPTION AND MAINTENANCE

Cabin Entrance Door. ........._3-1

Balancing Control Surfaces ..3-1

Rigging Flight Controls ........._3-4

Electric Trim Tab System .......3-4,

Fuel System....... ...3-8

C9 1-3
 TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cantinued)

SECTION Page

III SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION ilND MAINTENANCE (Continued)

Air Conditioning System 3-10D

Brake System ..........._._. 3-10K

Replacement of Sidewall Inflating Valve j-1OK

Landing Clear ........._

j-IZ

Pressure System ......j-14A

Gyro Instrument Air Filters ........._._._..

3-14C

Ignition.. ........._._._..

Propeller.......... ........._
i-16

Suction Relief Valve ........._

3-16

Static Air and Pitot System ........._._._..

...............3-16

Alternators ............__.
3-18X

Starters. .j-18C

Electrical Utilization Load Chart ........._

.....3-18E

Standby Generator System ........._

.j-18H

nap System........ ............3-18I

Flap Position Indicator ........._._._.

.........._3-181

Flap Limit Switch........ 3-181

Alternator Troubleshooting .......3-20

Strobe Light ........3-20A

Standby Generator Troubleshooting ........j-ZOE

BEECHCRAFT New-Matic Autopilot ........3-11

Autopilot Troubleshooting Guide ...........3-24

IV MAJOR DISASSEMBLY

Seats ................4-1

Wings ...........................................4-1

Wing Bolts 5-3

Stabilizers ........._
4-7

Wheels ............_ 4;7

Brakes ..............4-11

1-4 C-12
 TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

SECTION Page

IV MAJOR DISASSEMBLY (Continued)

Propeller Governor ...4-15

Windows .............4-lj

Flap Motor 4-16

Elevator Trim Tab .........4-L7

V MAJOR MAINTENANCE AND OVERHAUL

Main and Nose Wheel ........._

..............j-I

Brakes. ..............~-I

VI ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS

Wiring Diagrams ..6-1

VI. REPLACE~VIEN1 SCHEDULE........... 7-1

VIII PERIODIC INSPECTIONS.... .......8-1

C12 1-5
 BEECHCRAFT
DEBONAIR/BONANZA 33 SERIES
SHOP MANUAL

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

A B

Access Openings Illus.2-7 Balancing Control Surfaces

Accessory and Component Aileron 3-I,Illus.3-2A
Overhaul 7-1 Elevator 3-2e,Illus.3-2D
Actuator Brush Wear, Electrical Rudder 3-2E,Illus.?-3
Trim Tab 3-48 Battery 2-10F
Actuator Installat~on, Electrical Charging 2-10F
Trim Tab 3-48 Maintenance Program 2-10G
Actuator Removal, Electrical BEECHCRAFT New-Matic A/P
Trim Tab 3-4A Autopilot 3-21
Adjustment of Cabin Entrance Troubleshoot~ng 3-24
Door and Latches 3-1 BEECHCRAFT Publications 1-13
Adjustment of Engine Brakes
Fuel Pump 3-8E Assembly 4-12, 4-13
Adjustment of Land~ng Gear Bleeding j-10K
Position Light 3-14A Disassembly 4-11, 4-!3
Adjustment Of Pressure Lining Wear Limits 3-10K
System 3-14C Master Cylinder Adjustment 4-13
Adjustment, Propeller Governor 3-16 Master Cylinder Overhaul 4-13
AileronRigging 3-4 Master Cylinder Removal
Air Conditioner System 2-10A,3-10E Installation 4-13
Belt Tension 2-10B Relining, Beech
Charging 2-10A and Cleveland 5-1, 5-2
Checking Compressor 0~1 2-10A Overhaul 5-1
Compressor Belt Installation 3-108
Compressor Belt Removal 3-10G C
Compressor Belt Tension
Adjustment 2-108,3-108 Cabin Door
-Compressor Installation 3-101 Latch Adjustment 3-1
Compressor Removal 3-101 Latch Lubrication 3-i
Condenser Installation 3-106 Removal Installation 3-1
Condenser Removal 3-100 quick Release Mechanism 3-1
Condenser Control Rigg~ng 3-100 Cable and Adjustment,
Evaporator Filter Replacement 3-101 Static Ground 2-10C
Evaporator Installation 3-101 Cable Installation, Electr~cal
Evaporator Removal 3-101 Trim Tab 3-4
Fi Iter´• Replacement 3-101 Cable Tension, Temperature
Functional Testing 2-10A,3-10G Effect on Illus.3-7
Leak Detection 3-10G Charging Battery 2-10F
Maintenance 3-100 Calibration, Fuel
Precautionary Measures 3-10E Quantity Indicator 3-80
Servicing 2-10A Compressor, Air Conditioner
Troublshootlng 3-10J Belt Removal 3-106
Ventilation Blower Instal 3-101 Belt Installation 3-106
Ventilation Blower Installation 3-101 Belt Tension Adjustment 3-106
Ai rpl a ne D i men s i on s 2-1 Installation 3-101
Alternators Removal 3-101
Removal and Installation 3-18A,3-18B Controls, Rigg~ng,
Servic-ing the 70 Amp 3-18A Flight 3-4,I11us.3-5,3-6
Servicing the 60 Amp 3-18A Control Surfaces,
Troubleshooting! 60 Amp 3-20 3-1,Illus.3-2A
Approved: Engine 0~1s 2-10 Cowl Flap R~gging 2-11
Autopilot 3-21
Troubleshooting 3-24

C16 1-7
 BEECHCRAFT
DEBONAIR/BONANZA 33 SERIES
SHOP MANUAL

D Flight Controls Rigging

Aileron Control System 3-4
Diagram, Stations 2-6 Elevator Control System 3-4
Dimensions, Airplane 2-1 Elevator Trim Tab 3-4
Door Quick Release Mechanism 3-1 Rudder Control System 3-4
Fuel Cells
E Inspection of Main Cell
Flapper Valve 3-8A
Electric Trim Tab Inspection of Fuel Cell
Actuator Brush Wear 3-4A Vent Lines 3-8C
Actuator Installation 3-4 Installation of Velcro Tape 3-8A
Actuator Removal 3-4 Leak Check 3-8G
Cable Installation 3-4 Maintenance 3-8A
Magnetic Clutch Installation 3-4A Removal 3-80
Magnetic Clutch Removal 3-4A Installation 3-80
Electric Utilization Load Chart 3-18E Reservoir 2-8A
Electrical Wiring Diagrams, Removal 3-8F
Index 6-2 Installation 3-8F
Elevator Balancing 3-2B,Illus.3-20 Fuel Flow Chart 3-8F
Elevator, Rigging 3-4,Illus.3-5 Fuel Injection 2-8
Elevator Trim Tab Fuel Pump Adjustment, Engine 3-8E
Actuator Assembly 4-18 Fuel System, Servicing 2-8
Removal 3-4A Fuel System Illus.3-8,3-8G,3-9
Installation 3-4A Fuselage Access Opengings Illus.2-7
Actuator Disassembly 4-17,4-18 Fuselage Skin Plating 2-4
Electric 4-20
Free Play Checking 4-20 G
Rigging 3-4,Illus.3-5
Empennage Lubricat~on Illus.2-7 Gear Rigging, Landing
Engine Gear Safety System, Landing 3-12A´•.
Fuel Pump Adjustment 3-8E Generator, Standby 3-18H
Instruments 2-11 Troubleshooting 3-20E
Starting 2-8 Governor Propeller Adjustment 3-15
Stopping 2-8 Governor Removal Installation 4-15
Timing the Magneto 3-140 Grimes Strobe Light 3-20C
Exterior Finishes 2-12 Gyro Filter Replacement 3-14C

F H

Filters Heat and Vent System Illus.3-lO

Air Conditioning 3-101 High RPM Settings, Propeller 3-16
Gyro 3-140 Horizontal Stabilizer Removal
Intake Air Illus.3-14B Installation 4-7
Pressure System 3-140
Finishes 2-11
Exterior 2-12
Interior 2-12 Ignition
Flap Installation Timing
Limit Switch Adjustment 3-181 of Magnetos 3-140
3-181 Preparing Magneto for Inst’l 3-140
Three-position
3-181 Timing Magneto to Engine 3-14E
Two-position
Motor 4-16 Injection, Fuel 2-8
Motor Removal Installation 4-16 Inspection
Position Indicator 3-181 Guide 8-1
Position Indicator Adjustment 3-181 Electric Propeller De~cer 8-15
Illus.3-19 Flap after High Speed Extension 8-17
System
Track Roller Installation 4-17 Fuel Cell Vent Lines 3-8C_´•´•~
Track Wear Limits 4-17 L.G. after High Speed Extension 8-1$
Main Cell Flapper Valve 3-8AL--~

1-8 C16
 BEECHCRAFT
DEBONAIR/BONANZA 33 SERIES
SHOP MANUAL

Installation of Velcro Tape O

In Fuel Cells 3-8A
Interior Finishes 2-12 Oil
Instruments Approved, Engine 2-10
Air Filter, Replacement 3-140 System Servicing 2-9
Engine 2-11 Openings, Access Illus.2-7
Removal and Installation 2-11 Overhaul Replacement Schedule 7-1
Overhaul, Main Nose Wheel 5-1
J Overhaul, Starter 3-380
Overvoltage Relay 3-18C
Jacking, Main Wheel 2-100 Oxygen System, Serv~cing 2-9
3ig, Rudder Travel Illus.2-6A

Periodic Inspections 7-1

Landing Gear Limit Switch 3-14 Pitot System 3-18
Landing Gear Motor Position Indicator, Flap
Installation 3-12A Adjustment 3-181
Landing Gear Motor Removal 3-12A Position Light Adjustment,
Landing Gear Position Landing Gear 3-14A
Light Adjustment 3-14A Power Plant
Landing Gear Rigging 3-12 Fuel Injection 2-8
Landing Gear Safety Switch 3-13 Starting Engine 2-8
Landing Gear Safety System 3-12A Stopping Engine 2-8
Maintenance Adjustment 3-13 Pressure Switch Adjustment,
Landing Gear System Landing Gear Safety System 3-13
Servicing Maintenance 3-12 Pressure System Illus.3-14B,3-14A
Landing Gear Uplock Rollers Adjustment 3-14A
Lubrication 2-10B Filters 3-14C
Leak Check, Fuel Cells 3-8G Propeller 3-16
Light Bulb Replacement Gu~de 2-10G Propeller Governor
Limit Switch Adjustment, Flap 3-181 Adjustment 3-16
Lubrication, Empennage 1llus.2-7 Installation 4-15
Lubrication of Cabin Entrance Removal 4-15
Door Latches 3-1 Publications, Supplementary 1-11
Lubrication of Uplock Rollers, BEECHCRAFT Publications 1-13
Landing Gear 2-100,3-12 Vendor Publications 1-11
Pump Adjustments, Engine Fuel 3-8C

Magneto
Installation Timing 3-14C Regulator Adjustment, Voltage 3-188
Preparing for installation 3-140 Removal and Installation
Timed to the Engine 3-140 Cabin Entrance Door 3-1
Main Wheel Fuel Cells 3-8C,3-80
Assembly 4-8 Vertical Instruments 2-11
Disassembly 4-7 Replacement and Overhaul Schedule 7-1
Jacking 2-10C Replacement of Sidewall
Overhaul 5-1 Inflating Valve 1llus.3-11,3-10K
Micro Switch Adjustment, Rigging
Landing Gear 3-13 Aileron 3-4
Cowl Flaps 2-11
N Elevator 3-4,Illus.3-5
Elevator Trim Tab 3-4,Illus.3-5
Nose Wheel Landing Gear 3-12
Assembly 4-8 Rudder 3-4,Illus.3-6
Disassembly 4-7 Rudder, Balanc~ng 3-2E,Illus.3-3
Overhaul 5-1 Rudder, Rigging 3-4,111us.3-6
Scraper 2-100 Rudder Travel Jig Illus.2-6A

C16 1-9
 BEECHCRAFT
DEBONAIR/BONANZA 33 SERIES
SHOP MANUAL

S Suction Relief Valve,

Adjustment of 3-16
Safety Switch, Landing Gear 3-13 Switches
Scraper, Nose Wheel 2-100 Safety, Landing Gear 3-12A
Seats Throttle, Warning Horn 3-14
Back Adjustment 4-3 Landing Gear Limit 3-14
Installation 4-1
Removal 4-1
Stowage (fifth and sixth) 4-1 T
Servicing
Air Conditioner 2-10A Tab, Rigging, Elevator 3-4,Illus.3-5
Alternator 3-18A,3-188 Table of Contents 1-3
Battery 2-10F Temperature Effect on
Fuel System 2-8 Cable Tension Illus.3-6A
Landing Gear 3-12 Throttle Warning Horn AdJustment 3-14
Oil System 2-9 Timing of Magnetos, Installation 3-14C
Oxygen System 2-9 Timing the Magneto to the Engine 3-14D
Shock Struts 2-108 Tires
Tires 2-10C Servicing The 2-100
Servicing Maintenance, Landing Replacing Sidewall Inflation
Gear System 3-12 Valve 3-10K,3-ll
Sidewall Inflat~on Valve 3-10K Tools, Special Illus.2-6A
Skin Plating Transmitter Replacement, Fuel 3-8C
Fuselage 2-4 Trim Tab
Wing 2-3 Electric 3-4
Special Tools Illus.2-6A Rigging 3-4
Stabilizers Troubleshooting
Installation, Horizontal 4-7 Air Conditioner 3-105
Removal, Horizontal 4-7 Alternator 3-20
Installation, Vertical 4-7 Autopilot 3-24
Removal, Vertical 4-7 Standby Generator 3-20E
Standby Generator System 3-18H
Troubleshooting Guide 3-20E
Starter, Engine 2-8 V
Starter 3-180
Starter Overhaul 3-180 Valve, Suction Relief 3-16
Static Air Pitot Vendor Publications 1-11
System 3-16,Illus.3-17 Vertical Stabilizer, Installation
Static Ground Cable, Adjustment 2-100 Removal 4-7
Static Lines, Clearing 3-18 Voltage Regulator Adjustment 3-188
Station Diagram ....1.............. 2-6
Stopping Engine 2-8
Storage W
Flyable 2-100
Indefinite 2-10E Wheels, Nose Main 4-7
Preparation for Service 2-10E Windows 4-15
Temporary 2-100 Surface Refinishing 4-15
Strobe Light 3-20A Windwhield Removal 4-15
Bullock Unit 3-20A Windshield Installat~on 4-16
Converter Troubleshoot~ng 3-20A Wings 4-1
Grimes Unit 3-200 Adjustment 4-60
Lamp Replacement 3-200 Bolts 4-3 thru 4-6
Removal Installation, Bolt, Nut, Fitting Inspection 4-6C
Tail Strobe Light 3-20C Magnetic Particle Inspection 4-60
Wing Strobe Light 3-20C Outboard Main Spar Cap
Trigger Circuit Troubleshooting 3-20A Inspection 4-6H
Trouble Aalysis 3-20A Installation 4-2
Troubleshooting Power Unit
Wiring
3-20A
3-20B
Leading Edge
Installation
Main Spar
4-6ec
Removal 4-68

1-10 C16
 BEECHCRAFT
DEBONAIR/BONANZA 33 SERIES
SHOP MANUAL

Wings (Cont~d) Tip Removal 4-1

i Removal 4-2 Wing Skin Plating 2-)
Tip Installation 4-2 Wiring Diagrams, Electrical 6-1

C16 1-10A
 SUPPLEMENTARY PUBLICATIONS

Following is a list of publications providing servicing, available are listed in the current Publications Price List.

overhaul and parts information on various components of Since wide variety of radio equipment is available and
a

the BEECHCRAFT 33 series which you may obtain to because radio manufacturers normally supply parts and

supplement the Shop Manual. In most instances, you should servicing manuals with each set, radio publications have

obtain the publications directly from the manufacturer or his not been included in the list.
distributor. Beech supplementary publications, are
available from Beechcraft Aero or Aviation Centers and As publications on additional components become available,
International Distributors and Dealers. Those which are so they will be added to this list of publica~ions.

NOTE

It shall be the responsibility of the ownerloperator

to ensure that the latest revision of publications
referenced in this handbook areutilized during
operation, servicing, and maintenance of the air-
plane.

VENDOR PUBLICATIONS

PUBLICATION PUBLICATION NO. VENDOR

ITEM PART NO.

Alternator 1100657, Service Bulletin, Test and 16-262 Delco-Remy Division

1100643 Maintenance of "Delcotrons" Gener;ll Motors Corp.

Service Parts List, OF-Al Prestolite Compan)

ALX-9409 Equipment List,
and Technical Data 511 Hamilton St.
ALT-8403
Toledo. Ohio 33694
ALV-Y407
ALT-9422

642056A1 Service and Overhaul Instructions X30531 Teledyne Continental

Motors

Starter MHJ-4003 Equipment List, Service OF-Al Prestolite Company

Parts List 511 Hamilton St.
Toledo. Ohio 336r)4

Battery PS12-11 Service Manual CSM-1277 Teledyne Battery

Products
Redlands, California

Engine 10-470 Operator’s Manual X30024 Teledyne Continental

Motors
Service Parts Catalog X30023A Teledyne Continental
Motors
Maintenance and Overhaul X30022A Teledyne Continental
Manual Motors

10-520 Operator’s Manual X30041 Teledyne Continental

Motors
Service Pans Catalog. X30040A TcleJpne Continental
Motors
Maintenance and Overhaul X30039A Teledyne Continental
Manual Motors

Tips on Engine Care TeledyneContinental

Motors

C15 1-ii
 1/ENDOR PUBLICA TIONS (Continued)

ITEM PART NO. PUBLICATION PUBLICATION NO. VENDOR

Fuel In- Overhaul Manual and X30091 Teledyne Contincnt;ll

jection Illustrated Parts Catalog Motors
for Continental Fuel
Injection System

Magneto MCD662 Service Information for 660 9-55221 Slick Electro Inc.
Series Aircraft Mangetos

Parts Catalog, Model 662 700 Slick Electro Inc.

400 and 600 Catalog and Service Manual 1020 Slick Elecrro Inc.
Series

S6RN Installation, Maintenance L526 Bendi~ Aviation

and Operations Instructions Corporation
S-600 Overhaul Instructions L551 Bendix~Aviation
Series Corporation

S-600 Service Parts List L552-1 Bendix Aviation

Series Corporation

Propeller BHC 92ZF Overhaul Instructions, 110 Hartzell Propeller Inc.

101/8447 Handbook

Owner’s Propeller Manual 106 Hartzell Propeller Inc.

PHC-A3VF4/ Hartzell Propeller 115 C Hartzell Propeller Inc.

V8433-4R Owner’s Manual

PHC-C3YF- Hartzell Propeller 115 C Hartzell Propeller Inc.

1RF/F8468-6R Owner’s Manual

or

PHC-C3YF-IR/’’´•
8468-6R

BHC-C2YF-IBF/ Hartzell Propeller 115C Hartzell Propeller Inc.

F8468 Owner’s Manual

or

BHC-CZYF-IB/
8468

F12A-41 Service Manual Flottorp Universal Aircraft

8400-0 Model F12 Industries

BHC-L2YF-IBF/ Hartzell Propeller 11SC Hartzell Propeller Inc.

FS468AR Owner’s Manual

2A36C23 Service Manual and 720415 McCauley Industrial Corp.

-CP/84B-0 Parts Catalog

3A32C76S/ Service Manual 720415 McCauley Industrial Corp.

82NB-2

1-12 C15
 VENDOR PUBLICA TIONS (Continued)

ITEM PART NO, PUBLICATION PUBLICATION NO. VENDOR

Propeller Model IF-i Garwin Handbook of Overhaul 825 Garwin Incorporated

Governor Instructions

C710452 Overhaul Manual with 33017 Woodward Governor Co.

Parts List (10-520 Engine)

021 0680 Overhaul Manual with 33080 Woodward Governor Co.

Parts List (10-520 Engine)

A:!10680 Overhaul Manual with 33080 Woodward Governor Co.

Parts List (IO-470-N Engine)

Strobe Light 1000 Instruction and Service Manual 50082 Bullock Magnetics. Corp.

Strobe 60-1 750-3 Overhaul Manual with 33-40-58 Grimes Manufacturing

Light
Power Supply Illustrated Parts List Company, 515 North
Russell Street
Urbana, California

Autopilot B-5 Flight Control System Ground 3952 Brittain Industries

alid Flight Check Procedures P.O. Box 51370
Tulsa, Oklahoma 74151

B-5 AutomaticFlight Control 3950 Brittain Industries

System Maintenance Manual P.O. Box 51370
Tulsa, Oklahoma 74151

B-7 Flight Control System, Flight 3959 Brittain Industries

Procedures Manual P,O. Box 51370
Tulsa, Oklahoma 74151

B-7 Troubleshooting Manual 3960 Brittain Industries

P.O. Box 51370
Tulsa, Oklahoma 74151

Air Conditioner Model 508 Abacus Automotive I,D. 160717 Abacus International

Compressor AirConditioning P.O. Box 3?7

Compressor Dallas. Texas
Service Manual 75221

C15 1-12A
 BEECHCRA FT PUBL ICA TIONS

PART NO. PUBLICATION

92-31498 Alternator Service Manual,

Beech Aircraft Corporation

98-36486 Overhaul Instructions for Vertical

indicators used on
Display Engine
BEECHCRAFT Bonanza series aircraft. I
92-30582 Servicing and Maintenance Instructions and Illustrated Parts Manual for:
Main Wheel Assembly P/N 95-300001-1,-5,-6, -67 and -73.
Nose Wheel Assembly P/N 95-32669 and P/N 95-32926.

98-35012 Servicing Maintenance Instructions and Illustrated

Parts Breakdown for the Main Wheel P/N 36-8001-3,
Nose Wheel P/N 36-8002-1 and Brake Assembly P/N 36-8001-9.

1303761\ New-Matic B-4 Autopilot Operating Servicing instructions,

Beech Aircraft Corporation.

130409 New-Matic Autopilot Maintenance Instructions,

Beech Aircraft Corporation.

98-35776 Maintenance Information and Illustrated Parts Breakdown for

35-380094 Landing Gear Motor.

98-35850 Electronics Components Maintenance Manual and Parts Breakdown

B-5, B-5A, B-7, B-VII, B-VIII Autopilot.

98-35655 B-5 and B-7 Owner’s Manual Automatic Flight Control Systems.

Cq 1-13
 SECTION

GENERAL
INFORMATION
 trl

SECTION 2

General Information
 12 FT. 2.1IN.

i/

iu
i~li,

ill

CD-1012 AND AFTER

j
0.0 IN.

FT. 6 IN.
I
7

i 8 FT. 3 IN.
’----~-‘--e

THRUS 100 W.L.

6 FT.’6.5 IN.

4.4"

.5" (MIN. CLEARANCE WITHTIRE AND SHOCK DEFLATED)

IN. DIA.

ill ill

FT. 6.7 IN.

Figure 2-1. Dimensions of Aircraft Models 33, A33, B33 and C33

2-1
 12 FT. 2.1 IN.

o
i

32 FT. 9.9 1N.

26 FT. 7.6 IN.

8 FT. 31N.

THRUST 100 W.L.

6 FT. 6.5 IN.

jI
I I~J
4.40

7.5" (MIN. CLEARANCE WITH TIRE AND SHOCK DEFLATED)

84 IN. DIA.

1
Figure 2-2. Aircraft oimensions; C33n, E33, E33A and E33C (without
Kit 33-4002-3)

2´•2 C13
 12 FT. 2.1 IN.

i
i

32 FT. 9.9 IN.

26 FT. 7.6 IN.

8 FT. 3 IN.

W.L.
i
THRUST )100
i
6 FT. 6.5 IN.

’7 4.40

7.5" (MIN. CLEARANCE WITH TIRE AND SHOCK DEFLATED)

84 IN. DIA.

I
--t

´•z

if
F33-6079
9 FT. 6.7 IN.

Figure 2-2A. Aircraft Dimensions; F33

2-2A
C2
 12 FT. 2.1 IN.

i I~
Ij

I/
14i

26 FT. 7.6 IN.

r
6 FT. 6.5 IN.
100 W.L.
I

;r; 1 8 FT. 3 IN.

rr

3.60

7.5 IN. (MIN. CLEARANCE :WITH TIRE AND SHOCK DEFLATEDI

84 IN. DIA.

GJJbOl´•l
I
9 FT. 6.7 1N.

Figure 2´•2B. Aircraft Dimensions; G33, F33C (prior to CJ´•52,except f6r CJ-39,
without Kit 33´•4002-3) and F33A prior to CE-316

2-29 Ci3
 12 fT. 2 IN.

26 FT. 8 IN.

r
100 W.L.

6 FT. 7 IN.

i 7.5 IN. (MIN.

3.50

F--~)DETALFED
CLEARANCE WITH TIRE AND SHOCK

84 IN. DIA.

I 2

I I
r33C´•607.10

Figure 2-2C. Aircraft Dimensions; E33C (with Kit 33-4002-3)

and F33C (with Kit 33-4002-1 or -3)

C13 2-2C
 12 FT. Z IN.

~Ja
33 FT. B IN.

26 FT. 8 IN.

6FT.7’N´•
I~ir

OPTIONAL LI*00ACt DOOR

i
3.50

7.5 IN. IMIN. CLEARANCE WITH TIRE AND SnOCK DEFLATEDI

80 IN. DIA. Ct-491 AND ArT~P

i 7~
P~4

Figure 2-20, Aircraft Dimensions; F33A (CE´•316 andafter), F33C

(CJ-39, CJ-52 and after without Kit 33´•4002-1)

2-20 C~3
 1 2 3
4 5 a

r i
i
I ==Er^-==:
i--------’-- ---------c---;
------~,__ __1.

i..~--------

1. 040) 4. (.032)

2. (.040) 5, (.040)

3. (.032) a. (.040)

Figure 2-3. Ming Skin Phtfng

Legend for Figure 2-4

1. (,020) rl. (.125 RoyaUte)

2. (.020) 12. (.018)
3. (.016) 13, (.020)
4. (.032) 14. (.020)
5. (,020) 15. (.020)
s. (.020) Is. (.020)
7. (.016) 11. (.020)
s, (.032) Is. (.020)
9. (.020)
19. (,020)
to. (,020) 20. 125 ABSB~O Plastic
Sheet)

2-3
The skin thickness of the leading edge of the vertical stabilizer
(Item 9) is .032 inch on E33C aircraft, serials of CJ-1 and after.

-,------1-´•------------c-----
I
2
i:’ I

i
´•.c,___ 1
’’’----L-----i.

1 4

5 13 12

,-´•l~r=-====--------’ --r--,

a--"-
C1
7 _ _L-I __,Jc/

V is

19
9 It 10

7 9 20
I
,c’=’- -r-----

I/,

,-r
.j
i--’-\L-----------------´•´•

r--------1

I
‘\i ,--bL

..I -I--------
-r-
---1

c--------,

5 33-(36

Figure 24. Fuselage Skin Plating (33, A33 and B-33)

2-4
C2
 3

_,_,-----’-r-
IL II
I I L:
2
lj
r7
2"--t

i
i?
3
2

2 2 I

I 2

CI h I
,_______

j_,
2 ~TL_ __?-e
-----cy~,

V r
2

4. (.125 Royallte)
j C4 i. Cola)
2. (,020) 5. (.093 ABS #10 242
Plastic Sheet)
3. (.032)

3 325

c--´•-----

r I
I

r-r-

;----,i---
I

i. ,_

-´•-;-i.___-----

a 3

~Z
I~
ill

-"---’-~Pv-----i i
L-.--

c--------i
--1

r I

;_L-J-~-------

Figure 2-5. Fuselage Skin Plating (C33 C33A)

2-5
h3

54.495

51245
38.403

25.810

23.06

131.00 272.00
36.150
10[).00 1l7.187
i 3.500
eaoo B~al ns.eM
58.50
-YT’~
71
67.525

~-i-
7
15.250
257.808

~-J/j’ 179.00
207.00
233.50 35.750"
46.000
LB8.550

56,250

-t-
151.oo

i ’-----i 23.81
45.00

lu 86.00
IU,
j 80.047
94.094
108.261
23.881
122.150
31.1539.375 ,I 148.875
4.50 12125 33.Q45 49:00 41
53.00
83.547
r175.281
59.00
191.00
94.094
66. 13.00 103.641 ,d

1Ls.llt12a.?5
\36.188
148.875
162.563
175.281-1 ~191.00

Figure 2-6. Station Diagram

 NOTE

POINTING WAND
DENOTES CHANGE

TS1171-1 Tsrzn-s TK1817 922-2 TS1=22´•5

TS1171-2
TS1176-2
50-590013

TS1222-3 LOWER FORWARD WING BOLT WRENCH (CD-I thru GO-765)

T51222-j LOWER FORWARD WING 80LT WRENCH (CD-766 and after. CE-l and airer
CJ-156 and after)

TS1171-2-. LOWER FORWARD WING NUT TORQUE WRENCH ADAPTER (CD-l thru CD-
1304. CE-I thru CE-927, CJ-1 thru CJ´•155)

TK1817 922-2 LOWER FORWARD WING NUT TORQUE WRENCH ADAPTER (CE-927 and
after, CJ-156 and after)

TS1222-5 UPPER FORWARD WING BOLT WRENCH (9/16 inch hex for NAS1SO bolts used
GD-1 thru CD-1304, CE-1 thru CE-400 except CE-394 and CE-395, Cj-l thru CJ-
30. and far 131790-1 bolts used CE-1305 and after: CE-J94. CE-495. CE-401 and
after: and CJ-31 and after)

TS1222-6 UPPER FORWARD WING BOLT WRENCH (112 inch hex for MS20010 bolts used
interchangeably with NAS1JO bolts CD´•1286 thru CD-1304, and CE-3n thru CE-
400 except C~-394 and CE-395]

TS1222-3 UPPER FORWARD WING BOLT WRENCH (5/8 inch hex for NAS152 bolts used
interchangeably with 131790-1 bolts CD-1305 and after. CE-394. CE-395. CE-401
and after; CJ-S1 and after)

TS1171-1

50-590013 UPPER FORWARD WING BOLT TC~3UE WRENCH ADAPTER (CD-1 thru CD-
1304, CE-1 thru CE-400 ercept CE-394 and CE-395. CJ-1 thru CJ-30)

TS1~71-2 UPPER FORWARD WING NUT TORQUE WRENCH ADAPTER (CE-39J. CE-
395, CE´•401 thru CE-927, CJ-31 thru CJ-155)

TK1817 922-2 UPPER FORWARD WING BOLT TORQUE WRENCH ADAPTER (CE-928 and
after, CJ-156 and after)

TS1222-5 UPPER AND LOWER AFT WING 80LT WRENCH

TS117‘1-1

50-590013 UPPER AND LOWER AFT WING NUT TORQUE WRENCH ADAPTER

P’N 810 33524000 PIN 36-590015

RUDDER TRAVEL JIG TOW HANDLE

figure 2-7. Special Tools

C14 2-BA
 1 2 1 1 2 1

i
I

L- --1

1. ELEVATOR TRIM TAB ACTUATOR

2. ELEVATOR TRIM TAB CABLE
3. AFT FUSELAGE ACCESS

Figure 2-8. Fuselage Access Openings

~1

1 SAE NO. 20
EVERY 100 HOURS

SAE NO. 20
EVERY 100 HOURS

/ii
i
I/

33601-6

Figure 2-9. Empennage Cubrication

C14
2-7
 BEECHCRAFT
DEBONAIR/BONANZA 33 SERIES
SHOP MANUAL

POWER PLANT STARTING AND SHUTDOWN OF ENGINE

The 33 series airplanes prior to Serial Refer to the applicable Owner’s/Pilot’s

CD-301 land i-ncluding CD-386 and (3~-387) Operating Manual for starting and shutdown
are powered by a Continental Motors Cor- procedures.
poration IO-470-J, 6 cylinder, wet sump,
fuel injection engine developing 225 FUEL SYSTEM
horsepower at 2600 rpm for takeoff and
continuous operation. The IO-470-K CAUTION
engine, i nstalled on serials CD-301
through CD-1254 (except CD-386 and Any time the fuel system is
CD-387), is identical to the IO-470-J drained or a fuel cell is empty
engine in all respects except in the for any reason, air may enter the
design of the sump housing. Serials system. If the possibility that
CD-1255 and after are powered by IO-470-N air has entered the system does
engines developing 260horsepower at 2625 exist, startand operate the
rpm for takeoff and continuous operation. engine onthe ground until all air
Serials CE-1 through CE-345 (except for is removed from the system. Oper-
CE-324), and serials CJ-1 through CJ-30, ate the engine for several minutes
are powered by the IO-520-B fuel injection on each tank until proper engine
engine which develops 285 horsepower at operation is assured. Refer to the
2700 rpm at takeoff and continuous opera- appl icable Pi7 ot’ s Operating
tion. Serials CE-324 and CE-346 through Handbook and Airplane Flight Man-
CE-815 and serials CJ-31 through CJ-148 ual before starting and operating
are powered by the IO-520-BA engine, which the engine.
differs from the 10-520-8 engine only in
the damper pins installed in the engine. SERVICING THE FUEL SYSTEM
Serials CE-816 and after and CJ-149 and
after are powered by the IO-520-BB engine, Service the fuel cells of all 33 series
which differs from the IO-520-8A engine ai rplanes, Seri al CC-i and after, with
in that it has an improved crankshaft and 80/87 octane fuel or the next higher rat-
other changes related to the crankshaft. ing: 33 series airplanes, Serial CE-1 and
Engine maintenance and overhaul informa- after, and C3-1 and after, must be ser-
tion may be obtained by referring to the viced with a fuel octane rating of 100LL,
applicable vendor publication. 100/130 or the next higher rating. The
fuel cells on 33 and A33 airplanes consist
FUEL INJECTION of a 25-gallon (22-9a11on usable) tank
that is installed inthe leading edge of
The Continental Motors fuel injector is each wing. An opening is provided in the
of the multi-nozzle continuous flow, man- leading edge for filling each tank. In
ifold injection type, consisting of an addition tothe main tank, the 33 and A33
engine-driven fuel pump, a fuel and air airplanes may also have a I0-gallon aux-
metering assembly, a fuel manifold valve, iliary tank in each wing. The filler neck
and a discharge nozzle for each engine for the auxiliary fuel tank is located
cylinder. For a detailed description of outboard and aft of the main fuel tank
the Continental fuel injector and its filler neck.
components, adjustments and maintenance
procedures, consult the applicable vendor The 33 series airplanes, Serial CD-388 and
publication list in this manual. after CE-1 and after and C3-1 and after
may de equipped with either 25-9alion
usable 40-gallon
CAUTION
I22-gallon
37-gallon usable) fuel
or
tanks. The
Pressure adj ustments on the location of the filler neck for either
engine-driven fuel should be size tank is the same as the location of
mace only by BP,,~ ontinental the filler neck for the main fuel tanks
Authroized Service Station. Pump of the 33 and A33 airplanes. The 33
pressure and fuel flow are part series airplane Serials CD-514 and after,
of the basic Injection system CE-1 and after, and CJ-l and after that
calibration. have the 40-gallon (37-gallon usablej
tank
installation, are also equipped with a

2-’8; C16
 BEECHCRAFT
DEBONAIR/BONANZA 33 SERIES
SHOP MANUAL

visual fuel gageeach filler neck to

at ply of fuel to the engine during slow
permit partial filling
when maximum pay- rolls, uncoordinated maneuvers, fast
load is desired. The tab end indicates turns, slips, etc. 03-23 through CJ-30,
30 gallons of fuel and the tab slot 25-ga17on (22-gallon usable), and 03-23
denotes 35 gallons, through CJ-40, 40-gallon (37-gallon usa-
ble) non-baffled fuel cells are equipped
Inspecting and cleaning the fuel strainers with tank type reservoirs. 03-31 and
is of utmost importance as a regular part after, 25-gallon (22-gallon usable), and
of preventive maintenance. The frequency CJ-40 and after, 40-gallon (37-gallon
of inspecting and cleaning of the fuel usable) non-baffled fuel cells incorpo-
filters wi 11 depend upon service condi- rate a con-collapsible reservoir. This
tions and fuel handling equipment and reservoir is made of the same material as
cleanliness. However, when operating in the fuel cell and has a special sponge
localities where there is an excessive core to retain its shape, and an extra
amount of sand or dust, the strainers long connector assembly for the pickup of
should be inspected at more frequent fuel.
intervals. It is recommended that the fuel
strainer located in the fuel selector tank The fuel system non-collapsible reservoir
valve be inspected and cleaned every 100 is available for existing 25-gaflon
hours. Also the in the fuel 22-gallon usable) 40-gallon
screen
injection control unit should be inspected I or
37-gallon usable) non-baffled fuel cells
and cleaned every 50 hours of operation of CJ-l through C3-30, 00-1 through
and no later than 100 hours. Any fuel 00-1234 and CE-1 through CE-389.
lines or fittings disconnected for main-
tenance purposes shall be capped. After NOTE
inspection and cleaning procedures, the
fuel system should be carefully checked The installation of thi s kit alone
for leakage. does not qualify an airplane for
acrobatics.
FUEL CELL RESERVOIR

A fuel cell reservoir, incorporated in

some of the fuel cells of the acrobatic
airplanes provides an uninterrupted sup-

C16 2-8A
01L SYSTEM (refer to Continental Aircraft Engine Service Bulletin
M58´•8). Recommendations relative to transition from a
SERVICING THE OIL SYSTEM straight mineral oil to a detergent oil, as outlined in Civil
Aeronautics Administration ’%wer Plant Branch Report
The 33 series aircraft, Serial CD-1 and after (10-470 engine) No. 1" titles "Evaluation of Aircraft Engine Field and
are equipped with a 10 quart wet sump oil system. Aircraft Lubrication Oils", apply to the use of Specification
Serial CE-1 and after and CJ-l and after (10-520 engine) are MHS24A detergent oil. It is advantageous to begin using
equipped with12 quart wet sump oil system. The oil filler
a this oil when the engine is new or has just been overhauled.
cap is accessible through an access door located at the top However, if an engine has been using straight mineral oil for
left side of the engine cowl on aircraft prior to Serial a considerable period of time prior to changing to MHS24A

CD-1235, CE-290, and CJ-26. On aircraft Serial CD-1235 oil, it is generally agreed that the oil should be drained after
and after, CE-290 and after, and CJ-26 and after, the oil five ten hours of operation and the condition of the oil
or

filler cap is accessible by opening the left side of the engine screen checked. If an abnormal amount of sludge is found,
cowl. To drain the engine sump, remove the right hand the oil should be replaced at approximately five hour
engine access plate and unscrew the sump drain plug in the intervais, until the condition of the screen appears normal.
right hand side of the engine crankcase. An oil drain trough
may be used to convey the oil over the side. The oil and On aircraft equipped with the 10-520 engine, the engine
filter should be changed every 100 hours of engine should be serviced with oil per Continental Motors
operation aircraft which are equipped with 10-520
on Specification No. MHS24A only. However, a straight
engines and a full flow type oil filter. On all other 33 series mineral oil may be used on all engines for the first 20 to 30
aircraft equipped with 10-470 engines and an oil strainer, hours of engine operation in order to promote faster ring
the oil should be changed every 20 to 30 hours of engine seating and oil control.
operation. While changing the old oil, the strainer should be
removed from the oil pump housing and cleaned
thoroughly. If sludge deposits are heavy, subsequent OXYGEN SYSTEM
changes should be made at shorter intervals. Before draining
the oil, run up the ~ngine until the oil reaches operating SER VICING THE OXYGEN SYSTEM
temperature to complete draining of the oil.
assure IOP~ONALJ
Suggested oil grades are listed herein, but requirements will
vary with individual circumstances. The determining factor
for choosing the correct grade of oil is the air inlet
temperatureobserved during flight; inlet temperatures WARNING
consistently near the maximum allowable indicate that a
heavier oil is needed. When the average air temperature is at Keep fire and sparks away and never smoke in
approximately 400F, use the lighter oil. the proximity of oxygen. Tools, equipment and
hands must also be kept clean when servicing
the oxygen system, since deposits of oil or
OUTSIDE AIR RECOMMENDED other hydrocarbons are Mghly inflammable
TEMPERATURE VISCOSITY when exposed to high concentrations of
oxygen. Furthermore, the presence of other
Below 400F SAE 30 foreign particles
in the oxygen lines may result
Above 40"F SAE 50 in leaks that will both exhaust the oxygen
supply and present a fire hazard. As an
safety precaution, use only the
additional
For normal operation, any reputable brand
of dewaxed compounds and leak-testing soaps
anti-seize
straight mineral oil of aircraft quality
should give recommended for breathing oxygen systems.
satisfactory service. However, certain benefits may be
derived from the use of detergent oils which are
compounded to meet Continental Motors Corporation a. On earlier model Debonair (prior to CD-932),
Specification MHS24A, especially when operating in check cylinder pressure by slowly opening the shut-off
extreme temperature ranges of high or low temperatures valve on the oxygen console just forward and to the left of

Cg 2-9
 APPROVED ENGINE OILS

COMPANY APPRO VED BRAND NAME

BP Oil Corporation 3/25/70 BIP Aero Oil D65/80

Castrol Limited 1/5/67 Grade 40, Castrolaero AD, Type III

(Australia) Grade 50, Castrolaero AD, Type II

Continental Oil Company 11115/60 *Conco Aero S No. 65 (SAE 30)

*Conco Aero S No. 80 (SAE 40)
Conco Aero S SAE 10W30

Delta Petroleum Company 10/21/70 Delto Avoil Grades 30, 40 50

Gulf Oil Corporation 8/7/58 *Gulfpride Aviation Series D

Humble Oil Refining Company 1/25/63 Esso Aviation Enco Aviation

In Grades E65,E80, E100, E120
10/7/68 Grade A100

Kendall Refining Company 9/20/60 *Kendall Aviation Oil Type D

Pennzoil Company 11/10/67 Pennzoil Aircraft Engine Oil, Heavy Duty

Dispersant, Grades 30, 40, 50

Phillips Petroleum Company 4/18/58 Phillips 66 Aviation Oil Type A

(Replaced HD Aviation Oil)

Quaker State Oil Refining Corporation 8114/70 Quaker State AD Aviation Engine Oil
Grades 20W/30, 40 50

Shell Oil Company 8115/58 Aeroshell OilW

12/20/63 Aeroshell Oil W tin 4 grades)
Grade 120(Nominal SAE 60)-
Military Grade 1120
Grade 100 (Nominal SAE 50)´•
Military Grade 1100
Grade 80 (Nominal SAE 40)
Military Grade 1080
Grade 65 (Nominal SAE 20 or 30)
Military Grade 1065

Sinclair Refining Company 11/20/67 Sinclair Avoil 20W´•40

Socony´•Mobil 11/21/60 hAero Red Band HD (SAE 50)

"Aero Gray Band HD (SAE 40)
*Aero White Band HD (SAE 30)
Mobil (Aero Oil 65) Ashless
Mobil (Aero Oil 80) Dispersant
Mobil (Aero Oil 100) Aviation
Mobil (Aero Oil 120) Engine Oil

Standard Oil of California 8/12/58 *RPM Aviation Oil (Compounded)

Texaco, Inc. 3/20/62 *Texaco Aircraft Engine Oil D100

"Texaco Aircraft Engine Oil D80
9/24/64 Texaco Aircraft Engine Oil Premium AD
Grades65,80,100

Union Oil Company of California 11/9/70 Union Engine Oil HD Grades 80 100

The oils designated with an are ash residue type oils. The balance of the oils are ashless.

2-10 Cg
the pilot seat. On later model Debonairs, Serial CD-93? and WARNING
after, the cylinder pressure is connected directly to the pre-
ssure gage on the console. A face shield should be worn when servicing the
lines. refrigerant, coming in contact with the

eyes, can cause the loss of sight.

CAUTION

Always open the shutoff valve slowly to pre- a. Remember. this is a high pressure system. When
vent damage to the system, disconnecting a line, loosen the fittings just enough to bleed
off pressure slowly. then disconnect the fitting.
b. Remove the access panel from the center of the b. Whenever a line is disconnected, purge the entire

partition located directly beneath the forward side of the system with a vacuum pump operating at the 1~5 micron

pilot’s and copilot’s seats, then close the shutoff valves on level.
both the cylinder and console, c. Use only refrigerant R-13. other refrigerants. par
c. Slide the pilot’s seat slightly to the rear until the ticularly those containing methyl chloride, will cause rapid
recharge outlet of the filler valve is clear, then remove the deterioration of the aluminum compressor components.

cap from the recharge outlet and connect the supply cylinder d. When servicing the system with refrigerant. avoid
to the filler neck, smoking or working near an open flame. Refrigerant passing
d. cylinder shutoff valve and slowly fill the
Open the over an open flame will produce a highly toxicphosgene gas.
f Hook the service unit the connections located
system to 1800 50 psi at a temperature of 70"F. This e. to

pressure may be increased an additional 3.5 psi for each under the copilot’s seat. When charging a completely purged
degree of increase in temperature: similarly for each degree system, charge with 2 pounds of refrigerant. After charging.
of drop in temperature, reduce the pressure for the cylinder the sight glass should be observed for bubbles or a milk~

by 3.5 psi. appearance caused by an insufficient refrigerant level. If it i~

e. Close the shutoff valve, disconnect the supply necessary to add refrigerant to a partially charged system.
cylinder, replace the filler valve cap, and slide the seat add refrigerant slowly until a satisfactory condition is ob-
forward to its normal position, served through the sight glass.
f. Slowly open the shutoff valve on the cylinder,
leaving the console shut-off valve closed until the system is
to be used. CHECKING COMPRESSOR OIL LEVEL

The air conditioner compressor oil level should be checked

AIR CONDITIONING SVSTEU by a qualified air conditioner service man if the refrigerant
(CE-602 and atter) charge is lost (evidenced by oil loss). The air conditioner
system requires 12-14 ounces of 500 viscosity oil (Texaco

Servicing the air conditioning system consists of periodically Capella E or equivalent) to maintain 4 ounces in the com-

checking the refrigerant level, checking compressor oil presser.

level, checking the compressor belt tension, and changing
Recharge the system as outlined under
the system air filter. Check the compressor oil level as follows:
CHARGING THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
whenever the refrigerant level is low, air has entered the a. Fabricate a dipstick by bending a wire to a 90’

system, or components carrying refrigerant are replaced. angle so that 1-1/2 inches of the wire will insert into the

Refrigerant leaks may be detected by inspection with a compressor.

flameless leak detector.
ENGINE COMPRESSOR
i
FIREWALL ’t

AIR CONDITIONING FUNCTIONAL rrsT

With the engine running at 1,000 rpm and the system on.
observe the sight glass, if refrigerant appears milky or bub- ;´•´•il~

bles appear charge the system as noted in CHARGING THE lI

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM in this section. Check the

system for leaks using a flameless leak detector.

COMPRESSOR
o
FUSE olL
CHARGING THEAIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM ENGINE
FILLER
BAFFLE
35´•425´•1 PLUG
I

When working on a refrigerant air cooling system, observe

the following special servicing precautions. Figure 2-10. Servicing Compressor

C8 2-10A
 b. dipstick with a flat black paint. Allow
Paint the WARNING
sufficient time forpaint to dry.
c. Start engine in accordance with the applicable Do not unscrew the valve body assembly until
Pilot’s Operating Manual and run the air conditioner. Run air all air pressure has been released, otherwise it
conditioning system for 15 minutes with the engine running may blow off, resulting in injury to personnel or
atlow rpm to allow oil to accumulate in the compressor, damage to equipment.
Observe engine operating limitations as noted in the applic-
able Pilot’s Operating Manual. Shut down engine in accord- b. Jack the strut 1/4 inch off the fully compressed
ance with the applicable Pilot’s Operating Manual. position and block it in place. Slowly loosen the valve body
assembly, making certain that all air has escaped before
d. Relieve the air conditioner system pressure by completely removing the valve body.
loosening the compressor filler plug just enough to bleed off c. Fill the strut with MIL-H-.560h hydraulic fluid.
pressure slowly. Slowly extend the strut from the blocked position, then
e. After the system pressure is relieved, remove the clean and reinstall the valve body assembly, less valve core.
oil filler plug, d. Compress strut completely to expell excess air and
f. Insert dipstick through oil filler port, slowly rotate fluid. Then extend strut and install valve core.

clutch shaft until the dipstick will insert to the bottom of the e. Remove airplane from jacks.
compressor. f. With the airplane empty except for a full fuel load
g. Withdraw dipstick. oil should register on the dip- and oil, inflate the shock struts until 3 inches of the piston
stick 5/8 inch below filler port. Add oil as necessary, to are exposed on each main gear and 3-1/2 inches are exposed
obtain this measurement. on the nose gear.
h. Install oil filler plug with O-ring and secure plug.

CAUTION
NOTE
If a compressed air bottle containing air under
Make sure that the O-ring is not twisted and that extremely high pressure is used. care should be
no dirt or particles are on the O-ring or seat. The taken not to overinflate the strut.

plug should be snug. Do not overtighten plug.

g. Rock the airplane gently to prevent sticking or

i. Charge the air conditioning system as noted in binding the strut.

CHARGING THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM. h. Remove all foreign material from the exposed pis-
j. Check area around filler plug for leaks. If leaks ton of the shock strut with a cloth moistened with hydraulic
exist, do not over tighten the filler plug. Remove the filler fluid.
plug, as described in steps "c" and "d" and install a new
O-ring. Secure the plug and recharge the system as noted in LUBRICATION OF LANDING GEAFI UPLOCK ~OL-
steps "h" and "i". LERS (CD- 1 through CD- 1256, CE- 1 through CE-349,
CJ-1 through CJ-30)
EEL T TENSION ADJUSTMENT
Lubricate the upiock roller bearings with SAE 20 oil every
After 36 to 48 hours
operating time, a new belt will stretch to 50 hours. Every 100 hours pack the bearings with grease.
its normal operating length. The belt tension should be MIL-G-23827. or at any time bearings are subjected to
checked at this time and adjusted (by tightening the adjust- degreasing.
ment bolt on the idler pulley bracket) so that a belt tension

gage, placed at point midway between the idler pulley and Every 100 hours clean the uplock rollers with solvent and
the compressor will register a belt tension of 70 pounds or lubricate them as follows:
with a 0.13 inch deflection with 6.38 pounds load. After ad-
justing the belt tension, be sure the belt has ample clearance a. Place the airplane on jacks, and partially retract
on all sides. the landing gear.
b. Remove the bolt the
uplock roller and
attaching
the center hinge point of the "V" brace
drag leg.
LANDING GEAR c. Remove the uplock roller bearing from the bolt.
d. Hold a finger over one end of the denter bearing
SEI~VICING THE SHOCK STf~UT race of the uplock roller and place the fitting of the grease

gun against the opposite end of the bearing, then pump

Initially the nose strut is filled with 5001550 cc hydraulic fluid grease into the bearing inner race. This will force grease into
and the main struts with 800 cc hydraulic fluid. (Use MIL-H- the bearing cavity through the hole in the inner race. Com-
5606 hydraulic fluid). pletely fill the bearing with MIL-G-23827 grease.
e. Reinstall the bolt attaching the uplock rollers at
After placing the airplane on jacks remove the air
I a.

valve cap and depress the air valve core to allow the strut to
the center hinge point of the "V" brace drag leg. Check the
uplock roller for free movement and a clearance of .010 to
fully compress. .020 inch between the roller and the uplock block. If this

2-108 C8
clearance is not correct, the uplock must be adjusted as MAIN WHEEL JACKING
indicated under RIGGING THE LANDING GEAR in Sec-
tion 3 of the Model 35 Shop Manual. A main wheel jack adapter is included with each airplane
prior to CE-317. The jack adapter is available a4 oprion;ll
LUBRICATION OF LANDING GEAR UPLOCK ROL- equipment on serial CE-317 and after. ~rrials CD-I and
LERS (CD-1257 and after, CE-350 and after, CJ-31 after. and serials CJ-l and after. Before raising the airplane.
and after, and earlier airplanes which have complied be sure the shock strut is properly inflated to the correct
with S.I. 0448-21 1) height. If the strut is not inflated to the recommended height.
it will be impossible to insert the jack adapter into the main
On these airplanes the bolt attaching the uplock rollers at the wheel axle. A scissor type jack is recommended for indi-
center hinge point of the "V" brace drag leg is a grease bolt vidual wheel jacking. When lowering the airplane. caution
with a grease fitting. Using a grease pressure gun filled with should be exercised so the shock strut will not become

grease (MIL-G-23827), lubricate the uplock bearing through compressed and force the landing gear door against the jack
the grease fitting. This should be accomplished every 100 adapter.
hours, or any time that the bearings are subjected to de-
greasing.
CAUTION
NOTE
Do not walk on the wing walk while the airplane
The grease fitting drag leg, directly above
on the is on the main wheel jack.
the uplock roller bearing, does not supply lubri-
cation for the uplock roller bearing. SER~CING TIRES

STA TIC GROUND CABLE AND ADJUSTMENT (CD- I The nose wheel tire is a .00-5 4-ply tire. The main wheel

through CD-1256, CE-I through CE-310, CJ-1 tires are 6.00-6 h-ply prior to airplane serials CD-IZSX anti
through CJ-30) CE-301 and CJ-30. On airplane serials CD-1?58 and after:
CE-301 and after: CJ-31 and after, the main wheel tires are

The staticground cable attached to the nose gear is designed 7.00-h h-ply.
to discharge static electricity on touchdown and need not

make contact with the runway as the charge will are from the
cable. The cable should not drag on the runway while taxiing CA UTION
as this may create considerable radio interference and lead
to rapid wear of the ground cable. Tires that have picked up a fuel or oil film must

be washed down as soon as possible with a

The following adjustment to the static ground cable is detergent solution to prevent contamination of
recommended. the rubber.

a. Inflate tires to correct air pressure (see SERVIC- Maintaining proper tire inflation will help to avoid damage
ING TIRES in this section), from landing shock and will minimize tread wear and aid in
b. Adjust the tip of the cable to provide 5.75 .II preventing tire rupture caused from running over sharp
inches of free cable between the attaching bolt and the stones and ruts. When inflating the tires, inspect for cuts,

bottom of the cable. cracks, breaks, and tread wear. The pressure of a service-
able tire that is fully inflated should not drop more than 4
The cable should then be between 1/4 to 1/2 inch from the percent over a 24-hour period.
ground.
TIRE PRESSURES

WARNING NOSE MAIN

SERIALS GEAR GEAR
Do not wrap or tie the static ground cable to the
mud scraper, landing gear fork, axle or any Prior to CD-1272.
other part of the landing gear. Interference bet- CE-301 CJ-31 40 30

ween structure and wheel well may develop.

CD1272 and after.
NOSE WHEEL SCRAPER (CD-l through CD-1254, CE-301 and after,
CE-1 through CE-348, CJ-1 through CJ-30) and CJ-31 and after 40 33 to 40

The nose wheel clearance should be checked frequently to Airplane serials prior to CD-1272. CE-301 and CJ-3 I using
ensure that the scraper is not contacting the tire. Cleveland wheels and brakes, inflate 33 to 40 p.s.i.

C8 2-10C
 NOTE d. FUEI, CEL,LS Fill to capacil~ to minimile fuel

vapor and protect cell inner liner\.

Beech Aircraft Corporation cannot recommend e. FL,IGHT CONTROI. SURFACES I,ock with
the use of recapped tires. Recapped tires have a internal and external 1ock4.
tendency to swell as a result of the increased f. GROUNDING Static ground airplane securt´•l!
temperature generated during takeoff. Increased and effectively.
tire sizecan jeopardize proper function of the g. PITOT TUBE Install cover.

landing gear retract system, with the possibility h. WINDSHIEL,D AND WINDOWS Close all win-
of damage to the landing gear doors and retract dows and window vents. It is recommended that covers be
mechanism. installed over windshield and windows.
i. PREPARATION FOR SERVICE Remove all
STORAGE covers and tape, clean the airplane andgive it ii thorough
inspection, particularly wheel wells, flaps, and control
The storage procedures listed are intended to protect the openings.
airplane from deterioration while it is not in use. The prim-
ary objectives of these measures are to prevent corrosion i. engine has a total time of more than 9.c
If the
and damage from exposure to the elements. Three types of hours and the oil
consumption has stabilized, drain the
storage are considered, break-in oil after a ground warm-up and install oil per Tele-
dyne Continental Motors Specification MHS-24A.
a. FLYABLE STORAGE 7 to 30 days. Preflight the airplane.
b. TEMPORARY STORAGE up to 90 days.
c. INDEFINITE STORAGE TEMPORARY STORAGE 30 TO 90 DA YS

FL YABLE STORAGE 7 TO 30 DA YS MOORING See FLYABLE STORAGE.

b. ENGINE PREPARATION FOR STORAGE
a. MOORING If the airplane cannot be placed in a Operate engine (Preferably flight) until oil temperature
in
hangar. tie down securely at the three points provided. Do reaches normal range. Drain oil supply from sump while
not use hemp or manila rope. It is recommended a tail engine is still warm and replace drain plug.
support be used to compress the nose strut and reduce the i. Fill sump to full mark on dipstick gage with
angle of attack of the wings. Attach a line to the nose gear, lubricating oil meeting the requirements of MIL-C-6519.
b. ENGINE PREPARATION FOR STORAGE- Type II. which will mix with normal oil and provide protec
Engines in airplanes that are flown only occasionally tend to tion against corrosion.
exhibit cylinder wall corrosion much more than engines that Remove top spark plug and atomize spray
are flown frequently, preservative oil. (MIL-L-46002. Grade I)at room tempera
i. Check for correct oil level and add oil if ture. through upper spark plug hole of each cylinder with

necessary to bring level to full mark. piston in the down position. Rotate crankshaft as each pair
Run engine at least five minutes at 1200 to of cylinders is sprayed. Stop crankshaft with no piston at top
1500 rpm with oil and cylinder head temperatures in the position, and thoroughly respray each cylinder. Reinstall
normal operating range. spark plugs.
c. DURING FLYABLE STORAGE Each seven Apply preservative to engine interior by
3.
days during flyable storage, the propeller shall be rotated by spraying the above
specified oil (approximately two ounces)
hand. After rotating the engine six revolutions, stop the through the oil filler tube. Seal all engine openings exposed
propeller 600 or 1200 from the position it was in. to the atmosphere using suitable plugs, or moisture resistant

tape, and attach red streamers at each point. Affix a tag to

the propeller in a conspicious place with the following nota-
WARNING tion: DO NOT TURN PROPELLER -ENGINE PRE-
SERVED. Seal the propeller blade spinner cutouts with
Before rotation of propeller blades. ascertain tape.
that the magneto switch is OFF. throttle in
CLOSED position and mixture control is in the c. FUEL CELLS Fill to capacity to minimize fuel
IDLE CUT-OFF position. Always stand in the vapor and protect cell inner liners.
clear while turning propeller, d. FLIGHT CONTROL SURFACES Lock with
internal and external locks.
I. Arrangements should be made to have the e. GROUNDING Static ground airplane securely
airplane flown at least 30 minutes each week in order to keep and effectively.
the internal parts of the engine lubricated. Ground running f. PITOT TUBE Install cover.

of the engine will not provide proper heating of the oil g. WINDSHIELD AND WINDOWS Close all win-
without possible damage to engine and components due to dows and window vents. It is recommended covers be instal-
lack of air flow, and will result in condensation of moisture led over windshield and windows.
in the oil supply, increasing the possibility of cylinder/crank- h. BATTERY Remove and store according to stan-
shaft rust. dard practices.

C8
2-100
 i. PREPARATION FOR SERVICE quently if bore inspection indicates corrosion has starred.
Replace all desiccant and protex plugs. Before spraying. the
i. Remove all covers, tape, and tags. Clean the engine shall be inspected for corrosion as follows. Inspect
airplane and give it a thorough inspection, particularly wheel the interior of at least one cylinder on the engine through a
wells, flaps. and control openings. With bottom spark plugs spark plug hole. II cylinder shows start of rust, spray c~lin-
removed, hand turn propeller several revolutions to clear der corrosion preventive oil (MIL-C-6529. Type Il)and turn
excess preservative oil, then reinstall plugs, prop over five or six times, then respray. Remove the
Preflight the airplane and flight test, rocker box cover from the engine and inspect the valve
mechanism.
INDEFINITE STOI~AGE d. PROPELLER Coat blades with preservative oil
and wrap with moisture proof material and tape. If propeller
a. MOORING See FLYABLE STORAGE. has been removed, coat all parts with preservative oil, wrap
b. ENGINE PREPARATION FOR INDEFINITE with protective material to exclude dust, and then tape.
STORAGE Drain the
engine oil and service with lubricat- e. FUEL CELLS Drain fuel cells.
ing oil. M1L-C-h529. Type II. i. Flush. spray, or rub a thin coating of light
i. Immediately after servicing with the corro- engine oil on the inner liners of all fuel cells which have
sion preventive mixture, fly the airplane for a period of time contained gasoline.
not to exceed a maximum of 30 minutes. After 24 hours, remove cells and store ac--

2. It is recommended the
propeller be removed cording to standard practices. Do not remove or handle fuel
and the engine removed from the airplane. The propeller cells until 24 hours after oil has been applied.
shaft should be coated with preservative oil and wrapped
with moisture proof material and tape, f. FLIGHT CONTROL SURFACES Lubricate all
flight control surface
hinge pins. bearings. bell cranks.
NOTE chains, control rods and quadrants and coat tightl) with
corrosion preventive compound (MIL-C-16 173).
If engine is removed from the airplane a tail i. Lock with internal and external locks.
mooring stand must be used.
g. GROUNDING Static ground airplane securel!
3.
Remove the top spark plug from each cylin- and effectively.
der and spray thoroughly with corrosion preventive mixture h. PITOT TUBE Apply a thin coating of grease.
MIL-C-652Y. Type 11 (221" to 250"F). Specification M1L-G-10924. and install cover.
4. Install protex plugs in each of the top spark i. WINDSHIELD AND WINDOWS Close all win-
plug holes, making sure that each plug is blue in color when dows and window vents and install covers over windshield
installed. Protect and support the spark plug leads with AN- and windows.
4060-1 protectors, j. LANDING GEAR Coat the extended portion of
5. Place a bag of desiccant in the exhaust pipes the shock struts with light weight oil.
and seal openings with moisture resistant tape. k. TIRES Install covers. Check air pressure period-
h. Seal cold air inlet to the heater muff with ically. Inflate as necessary.
moisture resistant tape, i. WING FLAP TRACKS AND ROLLERS Coat
7. Seal engine breather by inserting a protex with corrosion preventive compound. Place flaps in re-

plug in the breather hose and clamping in place, tracted position.

X. Wrap engine with moisture proof material m. BATTERY Remove and store according to stan-
and tape after desiccant bags have been installed. dard practices.
9. Attach a red streamer to each place on the n. INSTRUMENT PANEL Cover with barrier
engine where bags of desiccant are placed. Either attach red material and secure with tape.
streamers outside of the sealed area with tape or to the inside o. SEATS Install protective covers.

of sealed area with safety wire to prevent wicking of mois- p. LANDING LIGHTS Cover with barrier mate
ture into sealed area, rial and secure with tape.
10. If the
propeller has not been removed, affix a q. STALL WARNING UNIT Remove and store
tag in a conspicuous place with the following notation: DO according to standard
practices. Tape connections.
NOT TURN PROPELLER ENGINE PRESERVED. r. LOOSE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Remove
and store in a dry temperate room.
c. DURING INDEFINITE STORAGE The cylin- s. AIRFRAME Cover static ports and all openings
der protex plugs shall be inspected weekly. The plugs should with barrier material and secure with tape to exclude rain.
be changed as soon as their color indicates unsafe conditions sun, and foreign matter.
of storage. If the dehydrator plugs have changed color in
one-half or more of the
cylinders, all desiccant material on PFIEPAI~A TION FO~
the engine should be replaced.
i. The cylinder bores should be resprayed with a. Remove all covers, tape, and tags from the ;lir
corrosion preventive mixture every six months or more fre- plane.

C8 2-10E
 b. cylinder plugs and all paper, tape, and
Remove all 28 volt system (CE-748, CE-772 and alter; Ccl- 149 and
dehydrating agent used to preserve engine, after)
c. Drain corrosion preventive mixture and reservice
with recommended lubricating oil, Per Teledyne Continental On serials CE-748, CE-772 and after and CJ-149 and after, a

Motors MHS-24B. 24 volt, 110 ampere hour Teledyne battery is provided to

d. propeller if it was removed. Rotate
Reinstall the operate the electrical system. The battery is located on the
propeller to clear preservative oil from the cylinders,
excess right side of the engine compartment, just forward of the
Install the spark plugs, battery, and rotate propel- firewall. The battery is accessible for servicing by raising the
e.

ler by hand through all compressions of the engine to check right engine cowl door and removing the battery box cover.
for liquid lock. Reinstall cowling and start engine in the
normal manner.
The battery should be maintained in a fully charged stale at

f. Give the airplane a thorough cleaning, visual in- all times and the electrolyte level checked at regular inrer-

and test fly the airplane. vals. Never add anything but distilled water when adjusting
spection
the electrolyte level battery. If electrolyte is added
in the
battery is low, a high concentration
each time the level in the

BATTERY of sulfuric acid may cause dissolution of the plates. Under

high temperature condiiions this may be indicated by the
presence of black particles in the electrolyte
of the affected

CAUTION cells.

Confirm 14 or 28 volt system before connecting

external power.
NOTE

SERI~CING THE BA TTERY

14 volt system (CD-l and after; CE-I thru CE-771, Do not fill the battery over 3/8 inch above the

except CE-748; Cf- 1 thru CJ- 148) seperators. Only lead-acid equipment should be
used when servicing lead-acid type batteries. Do
On airplane 12-volt, 33 ampere
serials CD-I thru CD-387, a not use tools that are used on nickel-cadmium

Reading R33 battery is located behind the firewall on the batteries.

righthand side. Access may be obtained by raising the right
hand engine cowl and unfastening the Dzus fasteners and
opening the battery access door.

On airplane serials CD-388 and after, a I?-volt 33 ampere NOTE

BEECHCRAFT 1 18649 battery is located on the right side of
forward of the firewall. Access Do not overfill the battery. When the battery
the engine compartment just
the right engine cowl and cells overfilled. and acid will spill
forservicing is obtained by raising are water on

the lower portions of the engine accessory sec-

removing the battery box cover.
tion and lower fuselage. Neutralize the acid in

On serials CE-I through CE-498, CE-511 and CE-512, a any such spillage immediately with a water soiu-
12-volt, 35 ampere battery is provided to support the tion of sodium bicarbonate (baking soda).

electrical system. Serials CJ-SZ thru CJ-148, and CE-499 thru

CE-77l,except CE-511,CE-512, and CE-748 are provided
witha new light weight, 12 volt, 35 ampere battery (PIN 36-
380025). The battery is located and accessible in the same
manner as the BEECHCRAFT battery.
BATTERV CHARGING
The battery should be maintained in a charged condition at

all times and the water level should be checked at 25 hour

intervals. Fill the battery with distilled water only. The
The battery should be charged at a rate that will not produce
gassing or bubbling of the electrolyte. Monitor battery tem-
Reading R33 battery should be filled to 1/4 inch above the
perature during the charging cycle to ensure that cell temper-
separators. The BEECHCRAFT and other batteries should
ature does not exceed 1 15"F. If the temperature reaches this
be filled to 1/2 inch above the separators. Avoid overfilling
the battery since overflowing or spewing electrolyte may
limit, the rate of charge should be reduced. The manufac-
occur if battery is subjected to high temperature and/or high
turer recommends charging the battery at a rate of 2 amperes
until four consecutive hourly readings show no rise in spe-
charging rate. Specific gravity must be kept within the pre-
cific gravity and voltage for each cell. Refer to the Service
scribed limits on the battery box placard. The battery box is
Manual (P/N GSM-1277) for additional information on the
of acid-resistant construction and incorporates a vent line
recommended by the battery
charging procedure manu-
and a battery drain line which will carry any acid or hydro-
facturer (Teledyne Battery Products).
gen gas overboard.

C9
2-10F
BATTERY MAINTENANCE PROGRAM LIGHT BULB REPLACEMENT GUIDE (28 voIt ays-
tem) (CE-748, CE-772 and attar) (CJ-149 and atter)
A systematic battery maintenance program should be es~ab-
lished and carefully followed. LOCATION BULB NUMBER

a. The battery should be removed from the airplane Alternator Out Light 31:
for service. Cabin Overhead Light 1863

b. A log of the services performed on the battery ClockLight ,67

should be maintained. Compass Light 3~7

c. The battery should be removed from the airplane Condenser Door Open Light 3~7

and serviced after 100 flight hours or 30 days, whichever Courtesy Light 1H~4

occurs first. If the ambient temperatures are above 90"F or Flight Compartment Flood Lights 312

the time between engine starts averages less than 30 mi- Fuel Select Light 3~7

nutes, the time between servicing should be reduced. During Instrument Post Lights 3~7

periods when the ambient temperature is below 32"F, the Instrument Wedge Lights Zh7

battery should be maintained in a fully charged state to Landing Gear Intransit Light 3~7

prevent freezing. Particular attention should be given to Landing Gear Uplock Light 327

maintaining correct specific gravity of the electrolyte. When Landing Light ´•1.Sgh

water is added, the battery should be charged sufficiently to Light Tray Assembly Zh7

thoroughly mix the water with the electrolyte. Map Light IJye

d. The log of battery service performed should be Navigation Light (Tail) A7e I’-~j

evaluated to determine the need to service the battery at the OAT Light
above recommended intervals or to extend the intervals if Reading Light 303

justified. Accurate water consumption data is a valid baro- Rotating Beacon (Lower) D7080A.s-2´•1
meter to use for adjustment of the servicing intervals. Rotating Beacon(Upper) D7080A 1-24

Subpanel Post Lights ?~7

Strobe Light (Tail) 30-081-1
Strobe Light (Wing) 30´• 1467-1
Tail Light 4.596

09

2-1 OG
ENGINE INSTRUMENTS b. Position the control arm attached to the wheel
well cover, up and forward so that the flap control rod
BEECHCRAFT Bonanzas (CE-350 through CE~408) are parallels the control arm. Connect the rod to the control
equipped with vertical readout engine instruments; arm.

operated electrically, lighted internally and installed in a

box assembly which is installed in the instrument panel. A c. Adjust the control rod linkage so that the door
male connector attached to the rear of each instrument fits pulls in snug against the opening.
into a female connector attached to the rear of the box
assembly. As the instrument is removed from the box
assembly, the male connector is pulled from the female NOTE
connector, removing the instrument from the electrical
circuit. When adjusting the rod end linkage, keep rod
end threads in bearing by observing threads
through sight hole in the rod end.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF
VERTICAL INSTRUMENTS
d. Set the push-pull control in the pilot’s
a. Remove the six screws holding the plastic compartment to the closed position.
instrument retainer plate to the box assembly and remove

the plate. e.Rig the push-pull control arm assembly, at the

wheel well cover (right hand side), in the forward position

b. Pull the desired instrument straight out. so that the control rod will center over the arm hinge. A

maximum of .06 inches forward of the arm hinge center is

permissible. An amount greater than this maximum may
NOTE cause the control to override center and lock.

The EGT indicator must have the thermocouple f. Attach the control rod ball joint link to the arm

leads removed from the back of the instrument assembly and pull the control to the full open position. The
after it has been pulled from the box assembly. nap should open approximately 4 inches measured at the
aft inboard end of the flap to the face of the exhaust stack
flame shield.
c.Reinstallation may be accomplished in the reverse

of the removal procedure.

FINISHES
CAUTION
The following list is included to be used as a reference
In the event of a malfunction of an instrument should it become necessary to touch up or match an
or the dimming circuit, check the electrical interior or exterior finish. Each paint is listed according to
circuitry, wiring, and connectors. If the fault is specific type and whether an exterior or interior paint.
not in these items, do not attempt to repair the
instrument itself. Replace the instrument and Short cut masking jobs for your paint department are
return the defective instrument to Beech possible when you use pre-cut paint patterns and numbers.
Aircraft Corporation. Stripe patterns and numeral patterns are available from the
C.O. Dicks Co., 8850 Hubbell, Detroit 28, Michigan.

COWL FLAP RIGGING Theircurrent listings include 4, 12, and 20 inch Call.
(CE- 7 and after, CJ- 1 and after, CD- 1255 and after) Numbers and Numerals. Time can be saved when using
these patterns and a much neater final paint job can be
a. Attach the flap control rod end to the flap, expected.

C9 2-11
 PAINTS

LACOUER Part Number

(Exterior Colors)

San Mateo Wheat .I IX6XJ-4.i

Black ´•118684-55
Morning Glory Blue .118684-5.
Toreador Red .118684-49
Sunshine Yellow .1 18684-47
White 1 18684-5 7
Beaver Brown .118684-59
Castle Tan ´•118684-61

LACQUER

(Interior Colors)

Castle Tan ´•]18684-61

Alpine Blue ´•118684-6~
Seminole Beige .1 18684-71
Nairobi Pearl .118684-79
White 118684-7,17
ArcticBeige l1X684-735
Sandusky 118684-’37
Sable Brown 118683-~57
Turquoise 118684-7,75
Pumpkin 118684-79
Broadway Blue 118684-3,83
Sun Beige 118684-785
Sienna Gold 118684-8~7
Torch Red 118684-3~’)
New Bronze 118684-475
Instrument Black ANAColor514

VIN YL

(Interior Colors)

Alpine Blue 118684-113

Chairman Gold 118684-479
Chairman Red 118684-481
Chairman Blue 118684-483
Olive 118684-485
Executive Brown 118684´•487
Parchment 118684-489
Red Antique 118684491
Walnut 118684-493
Blue Antique 118684-494
Rawhide 118684-495

DA Y GLO COLORS

Fire Orange 118684-123

Flash Green 1 18684-125
Rocket Red 118684-127
Lightning Yellow 118684-129
Blaze Orange 118684-131

2-12 C2
 VINYL ACRYLIC ENAMEL lCD-391, CD-392, CD-394, CD-397,
CD412, CD-414, CD-416, CD-4 18,
C’D-421, CD-422 and CD451
thru CD-771/

(Exterior Colors)

Turquoise 118684-135
Cadmium Red 118684-137
Castle Tan 118684-139
Beaver Brown 118684-141
Pacific Blue 118684-143
San Mateo Wheat 1 18684-145
Sunshine Yellow 118684-147
Blueberry Blue 118683-14’,
Black 118684-151
Matterhorn White 118684-153

ENAMEL (CD-772 thru CD-1199, CE-I thru CE-248, CJ-7 thru

c~- 131

(Exterior Colors)

Pacific Blue 118684-1

Morning Glory Blue 118684-i
Blueberry Blue 118684-5
SurfGreen 138683-7
Shamrock Green 118684-9
Turquoise 118684-11
San Mateo Wheat .118684-13
Lemon Yellow .118684-15
Saturn Gold ´•118684-17
Castle Tan .118684-11)
Beaver Brown .118684-~1
Flamingo 118684-~j
Huntsman Red .118683-’5
Toreador Red .118hX4-27
Chianti Red .1186X4-?9
Matterhorn White .118684-31
Black 118684-33
Sable Brown 118684-223
Sunshine Yellow 1]8684-23 1
YMetallic Gold I 1 8 684-2 60

"Effective CD-1007 thru CD-1199

and CE-2 thru CE-248

ENAMEL fCD-1200 thru CD-1234, CE-249 thru CE-289, CJ-74

thru CJ-251

Morning Glory Blue I 18684-3

Blueberry Blue 118684-5

Surf Green 1 18684-7
Shamrock Green 118684-9

Turquoise ´•118684-11
Lemon Yellow ´•118684-15
Castle Tan ´•118684-19
Flamingo .118684-23
Huntsman Red ´•118684-25
Toreador Red ´•118684-27
Chianti Red ´•118684-29
Matterhorn White ´•118684-3]
Black ´•118684-33

Cp 2-7 3
 1 18684-3 33
Peacock Turquoise
118684-335
Terrace Blue
118684-337
Sahara Tan
118684-33’)
Beige
Prairie
118684-341
Antique Cold
118684-343
Klondike Yellow
118684-345
Beechwood
Red 118684-347
Embassy
Marlin Blue 118684-349
118684-351
Bahama Blue
Pavonne Blue 118684-353
118684-355
Matador Red
118684-357
Sunburst Yellow
Jade Mist Green 118684-3 59
118684-361
Astro Blue

ENAMEL AND URETHANE (CD-1235 and after, CE-290 thrLi

CE-464, CJ-26)
ENAMEL URETANE

Morning Glory Blue 118684-3

Blueberry Blue 338684-5

Surf Green 118684-7
Shamrock Green 118684-9 118684-307
Turquoise 1 1 8684- 1 1
Lemon Yellow ´•118684-15
Castle Tan ´•118684-19 118(,84-312
Huntsman Red .118684-25
Toreador Red ´•I 18684-27 1 18684-316

Chianti Red ´•118684-29

Matterhorn White ´•118684-31 118684-318
Black ´•1 i 8684-3 3 1 18684-3 19
Gold ´•118684-3C) 118684-3?3
Champagne
Jubilee Gold 118684-221
Sable Brown 118684-223 ]18684-320

Capri Blue 118684-265

Metallic Gold 1 18684-271
Omaha Orange 118684-273

Kingston Gray 118684-299

Peacock Turquoise 118684-333 118684-407
Terrace Blue 118684-335
Sahara Tan 118684-337 118684-411
Prairie Beige 118684-339
118684-341 118684-415
Antique Gold
Beechwood 118684-345 118684-419
Embassy Red 118(,84-347
Marlin Blue 118684-349 ]18684-393
Bahama Blue 118684-351 118684-395
Pavonne Blue 118684-353 118684-397
Jade Mist Green 118684-359 118684-403
Gamma Gray 118684-497 118684-521
Really Red 118684-499 118684-53,3
Vendetta Red 118684-501 118684-525
Bristol Blue 118684-503 118684-527
Crater Blue 118684-505 118684-525)
Bright Gold 118684-507 118684-531
Calypso Orange 118684-509 118684-533
Mesa Gold 118684-511 118684-535
Mandarin Orange 118684-513 118684-537
Citrus Green 118684-515 118684-539
Olive Green 118684-517 118684-54~
Yellow Jacket 118684-519 1 18684-543

2-14 C2
 ENAMEL AND URE~HAIVE (CE-465 and after)

ENAMEL URETHANE

Shamrock Green 118684-9 1 18~84-307

Castle Tan ´•118684-19 118684-311-
Toreador Red -118684-27 118(,84-316
Mafterhorn White ´•1 18684-31 118684-318
Black .1186&4-33 118684-31~
Champagne Gold ´•118684-39 118684-323
Sable Brown 118684-223 1 18684-320
Peacock Turquoise 118684-333 1 18684-407

Sahara Tan 118684-337 11 Rh8Lt-4 I I

Antique Gold 118684´•341 1 18684-415

Beechwood 118684-345 1)8684-4)~

Marlin Blue 118684-34C) 118h83-79?
Bahama Blue 118684-351 118684-;L~5
Pavonne Blue 118684-353
Jade Mist Green I 1 8684-3 59 lll(h84-40j
Gamma Gray 118684-4’)7 11K684-51,1
Really Red 1 18684-499 18684-5;33
Vendetta Red 118684-501 118684-j75
Bristol Blue 118684-503 1186X4-577
Crater Blue 118684-505 1 18684-520

BrightGold 118684-507 1 186,84-531

Calypso Orange 1 18684-5(r) 11X6XJ-53j

Mesa Gold 118684-511
Mandarin Orange 1 18684-5 1 i 1 18(,84-537
Citrus Green 118684-5\5 I \X684-53CI
Olive Green 118684-517 118684-541
Yellow Jacket 118684-5 1~ 118684-543

2-15
CS
 SECTION

SYSTEMS
DESCRIPTION AND
NIAINTENANCE
 IE

SECTION 3

System Description and

Maintenance
ADJUSTMENT OF CABIN ENTRANCE DOOR aluminum catch. Pull the handle that disengages the hinge
AND LATCHES pin retainers and remove the door.
(CJ-l and after)

To ensure proper closing and sealing of the door, make the CA UTION
following adjustments:
Support the door carefully to avoid damaging
a. If air leaks by the lower latch with the door the wing when the quick release frees the door.
completely closed and the door seals in good condition,
loosen the four retaining screws in the edge of the door and
move the latch tongue guide outboard to add tension on To reinstall the door, position the door so that the hinge
the latch tongue. pins slide into the hinge slots, then push in the quick release
b. If air leaks by the upper latch, remove the top sill (red)handle until the retainers engage the holes in the hinge
catch and remove washers from the back of the sill or file to lockthe hinges in place around the hinge pins. Bend the
off the back of the sill to obtain a tighter fit. aluminum catch back in place over the handle and secure
c. Add thin shims under either hinge to raise or lower the handle to the catch with one wrap of MS20995C47-5
the aft portion of the improperly fitted doors. lock wire.
d. Adjust the door latch mechanism as follows:

i. Remove the bolts securing the arm rest to the DOOR QUICK RELEASE MECHANISM
door and remove the arm rest.
2. Remove the screws securing the lower
upholstery panel to the door frame. The cabin door can be instantaneously jettisoned by 3
3. Release the push-fasteners securing the quick release mechanism in the event of an emergency. The
upholstery panel in place and remove the panel. The quick release mechanism actuates the door latches throu_ell
push-fasteners may be released with a screwdriver modified a lever and cam arrangement. To prevent accidental
by making a 90-degree bend near the end and cutting a activation of the mechanism the red handle that actuates
notch in the end of the blade, the release is secured to the escutcheon on the door b~ an

4. Working through the access hale below the aluminum catch and a single strand of safety wire. The wir~
inside handle, remove the two screws securing the link to breaks and the aluminum catch straightens out to release
the threaded latch tube. Turn the tube to the right to the handle when the latter is pulled. The cam on the lever
shorten or to the left to lengthen the latch bolt until to which the handle is attached then rotates to actuate the
properly adjusted, then reconnect the latch tube to the link link that unlatches the upper and lower door latd,es.
with the two attaching screws. Simultaneously, an actuator on each end of the quick
release lever rotates and, through interconnecting links
withdraws the retainers that lock the upper and lower
NOTE hinges in place around the hinge pins. This completely
releases the door from the fuselage.
Changing the length of the latch tube will
change the length of the wire or cable operating
the upper lock latch. BALANCING CONTROL SUR FACES

AILL~RON
With the inside handle in the locked position,
5.
check that the inside handle unlatches when the door is BALANCING THE AILERON
unlocked with the outside handle. To synchronize the (Figure 3-1)
handles, remove the small upholstery panel above the door

window by removing the attaching screws and releasing the When the aileron control surface is being repainted, suspend
push-fasteners, then remove the nut and bolt on the door it by the trailing edge so that excess paint will drain toward
catch. To synchronize the handles, adjust the cable to the the leading edge. After any repainting or repair, the finished
proper length by screwing the turnbuckle in or out. surface should be check balanced to ensure that its static
moment about the hinge line is within the prescribed limits.
L UBRICA TION OF CABIN DOOR LA TCHES The painted aileron assembly must be nosetheavy by 0.2 to
1.5 inch-pounds. The static moment of the aileron is
Lubricate the hinges, hinge pins, and all moving parts of the defermined by multiplying the unbalanced weight of the
latch and quick release mechanism with MIL-G-21164 aileron assembly times the perpendicular distance from the
graphite grease as necessary for proper operation, hinge center line to the center of gravity when the chord
line is horizontally level. The weight is measured in pounds
CABIN DOOR REMOVAL AND INS~ALLATION and the distance in inches. The static moment of a 100
percent balanced control surface is 0.0 inch-pounds. A
To remove the door, unsafety the wire securing the quick tail-heavy surface exhibits static underbalance. A
release (red) handle in place and straighten out the nose-heavy surface exhibits static overbalance.

C4 3-1
CHECKING BALANCE e. The distance "D" must be perpendicular to the
hinge line.Measure "D" from the hinge line to the
The balance must be checked in a draft free area with the suspension point of the cup.
aileron completely assembled in flying condition. All f. Remove the cupl contents, and string, then weigh
painting, including stripes and touch-up, must be them.
completed. The tab, static wicks, and hinge bolts must be
attached. The chord line must be horizontally level and the
hinge line must be properly supported when the static NOTE
moment is measured. Although many different methods of
check balancing exist, they can be categorized under the Since any weighing error is magnified by the
following two headings: distance "D", weighing is most important and
a. Counterbalancing The application of a known must be done carefully on scales that are

force or weight at a measured distance from the hinge line certified for accuracy.
to counter the unbalance moment of the aileron assembly.
b. Actual Force Measurement Measurement of the
force applied by the aileron surface on a single support at a
g. Calculate the static balance as follows:
known distance from the center line of the hinge. i. The weight of the cup and contents is
designated by "W".
EOUIPMENT REOUIRED TO PERFORM CHECK 2. The over or underbalance moment is
BA LANCING designated by "M".
3. M=WxD
a. A stand with knife edge supports as illustrated in The following is a typical example of a
4.
Figure 3-1. The knife edges must be in the same horizontal balancing calculation: Assume the aileron is overbalance
plane. (nose-heavy) and the paper cup was suspended from the
b. A paper cup or similar
light weight container, trailing edge. Assume that the aileron balances with the
c. Approximately 1poundofleadshot. chord line level at ’LW .150 pound" and "D 10.0
d. A certified beam balance weighing device inches", then...
calibrated in units of .01 pound or less.
e. A straight edge, ruler, and spirit level. M .150 x 10.0

M 1.50 inch´•pounds. The product of "W x D". In

BALANCING PROCEDURE this instance, "M" is within the required static
balance range and is therefore acceptable.
COUNTERBALANCING METHOD
h. Thepainted ailelon assembly mustbe nose-heavy
by 0.2 to inch-pounds. The center of gravity of the
1.5
a. Locate the chord line by placing a straight edge at aileron is forward of the hinge center line causing the
the inboard end of the aileron assembly so that one end is surface to be nose-heavy.Proper aileron balance is obtained
on the trailing edge and the other end is centered on the by adding or removing lead rod at the leading edge of the
leading edge. Mark the chord line with a suitable marker, aileron. The rod is 15/32 inch diameter and is installed in
such grease pencil, then remove the straight edge,
as a brackets attached to the leading edge of the aileron. When
b. Fit the correct size bolts in the hinge brackets and adding additional lead rod the maximuni total of the length
mount the aileron on the knife edge supports. Ascertaitl of the rod to be added is not to exceed 5 inches. Add
that the aileron is free to rotate about the hinge line. additional rod at the center brackets.
c. To determine if weight should be added or

removed, suspend a paper cup from a point near the center

of the aileron trailing edge. Use a short length of small CA UTION
diameter string secured to the surface with a small piece of
masking tape as illustrated in Figure 3-1. The cup must be When a lead rod is added to obtain correct
free to hang vertically. balance, it must be installed securely with
d. Add small quantities of lead shot to the cup until rivets. A loosely installed rod will vibrate and
the aileron balances with the chord line level. Check this by may cause an undesirable vibration of the
holding the spirit level aligned with the marked chord line, surface.

32 C4
 A
5´•I~
c

A
O

KNI~ EDGE

STEEL TUBE WITH PIG LEAD

D--------´•C1 MASKING TAPE
(PLACE NEAR AILERON HINGE LINE)

JIG MUST BE HORIZONTALLY LEVEL

VIEW A-A

DETAIL B 36´•151-lA

Figure 3-1. Balancing the Aileron

04 3-2A
ELEVATOR BALANCING PROCEDURE FORCE MEASUREMENT
METHOD
BA LANCING THE EL EVA TOR
Locate the chord line by placing straight edge at the
(Figure 3-2) a

inboard end of the elevator so that one end is aligned with

When elevator control surface is being repainted,
the the center of the torque tube and the other end is centered
suspend it by the trailing edge so that excess paint will on the trailing edge. Mark the chord line by grease pencil or
drain toward the leading edge. After any repainting or other means on straight edge. Fit
the rib. Remove the

repair, the finished surface should be check balanced to correct size bolts in the outboard and hinge brackets
center

ensure that its static moment about the hinge line is within and mount the elevator on the knife edges. Ensure that it is
the manufacturers prescribed limits. The complete elevator free to rotate about the hinge line. Support the trailing edge
assembly, painted or unpainted, including the control arm behind the center hinge point with a spindle resting on a
and the tab control rod should not be tail-heavy over a levelled beam balance platform as illustrated. The spindle
maximum moment as noted: must be vertical througl-~out the balancing procedure. Hold
a spirit level against the marked chord line and level it by
12.0 inch-pounds on airplane serials prior to CD-1023. extending or contracting the spindle or by using blocks and
I

shims under the spindle. Measure the perpendicular distance

7.8 inch-pounds on airplane serials CD-1023 and after, from the hinge center line to the point supported by the
CE-1 and after and CJ-1 and after, spindle. Ensure that the spirit level and rule are removed
from the surface and read the reaction on the beam
The static nloment is the total unbalanced weight of the balance. Calculate the static underbalance moment "M’’
elevator control surface multiplied by the perpendicular from the formula:
distance from its hinge center line to the center of gravity.
wl~en the chord line is horizontally level. The weight is M D(R-T) inch-pounds where,
measured in pounds and tile distance in inches. The static D Perpendicular distance from the hinge center line to the
moment 100 percent balanced elevator control surface
of a spindle point (inches).
is 0.0 Ib. A tail-heavy surface exhibits static underbalance. R Reaction (Pounds) read from the beam balance.
A nose-heavy surface exhibits static overbalance. T Tare, i.e. spindle plus levelling blocks or shims on the
scale platform (Pounds).
CHECKING BA LA NCE
EXAMPLE
The elevator balance must be checked in a draft flee area

with the elevator completely assembled in flying condition. D is 13.5 inches, R is 1.49 Ib, and T 1.00 Ib.
All painting, including stripes and touch-up, must be M 13.5 (1.49 1.00);M 6.6 inch-pounds

completed. The tab, tab push rod, static wicks, and hinge M is within the range which is satisfactory.
bolts must be attached. The ci~ord line must be horizontally If M is not witlzin the prescribed range, refer to step i under
level and the hinge line must be properly supported when BALANCING PROCEDURE COUNTERBALANCING
the static moment is measured. Although many different METHOD.
methods of check balancing exist, they can be categorized
under the following two headings: CHECK BALANCE BY COUNTER BALANCING

a. Actual Force Measurement Measurement of the EOUIPMENT REOUIRED TO PERFORM CHECK

force applied by the elevator surface on a single support at BA LA NCING B Y COUNTER BA LA NCING
a known distance from the center line of the hinge.
b.Counterbalancing The application of a known a. A stand with knife edge supports as illustrated in
~orce or weight at a measured distance from the hinge line Figure 3-2. The knife edges must be in the same horizontal
to counter the unbalance moment of the elevator assembly. plane.
b. A paper cupor similar light weight container.

CHECK BALANCE BY FORCE MEASUREMENT c. Approximately 2poundsofleadshot.

d. A certified beam balance weighing device
The equipment required to perform the check balance by calibrated in units of .01 pound or less.
force measurement is as follows: e. A straight edge, ruler, and spirit level.

a. A stand with knife edge supports as illustrated in BALANCING PROCEDURE COUNTER BALANCING
Figure 3-2. The knife edges should be in the same METHOD
horizontal plane.
b. A certified beam balance calibrated in units of .01 a. Locate the chord line by placing a straight edge at
Ib. or less. The balance should have a flat weighing platform the inboard end of the elevator assembly so that one end is
and its capacity should equal tare plus 2.0 Ibs. minimum. on the hinge center line and the other end is centered on

c. A support spindle similar to the illustration and the trailing edge. Mark the chord line with a suitable
Levelling blocks, as required. (Blocks spindle tare). marker, such as a grease pencil, then remove the straight
d. Astraightedge,rule andspiritlevel. edge.

3-28 C4
 h. Calculate the static balance follows:
b. Secure the trim tab in its neutral position with a as

small piece of masking tape.

i. The weight of the and contents is
c. Fit the correct size bolts in the hinge devises and cup

mount the elevator on the knife edge supports. Ascertain designated by "W".
2. The over underbalance moment is
that the elevator is free to rotate about the hinge line.
or

d. To determine if weight should be added or designated by "M".

3. M=WxD
removed, use a short length of small diameter string secured
The following is a typical example of a
4.
to the surface with a small piece of masking tape and the

cup hanging vertically as Slightly

illustrated in
Figure 3-2. balancing calculation: Assume the elevator is underbalance
loosen the forward top screw on the elevator leading edge (tail-heavy) and the paper cup was suspended from the
horn. If the elevator balances with the chord line level at
tip. Suspend a paper cup on the inboard side of the tip and
"W 0´•60 pound" and "D 12.6 inches". then
wrap the string around the screw. Secure the string to the
surface with a small piece of masking tape aft of the top

center line shown in M 0.60 x 12.6

forward screw and near the hinge as

Figure 3-2. The cup must be free to hang vertically.

M 7.6 inch-pounds. In this instance. "M" is
within the required static balance range and is
CA UTION therefore acceptable.

Be certain the forward top screw on the i. complete

The elevator assembly, painted c,r

is secured after the unpainted including the control arm and the tab control
elevator leading edge tip
rod, must not be tad-heavy over a maximum as noted:
elevator has been balanced.

12.0 inch-pounds on airplane serials prior to CD-1023.

e. Add small lead shot to the cup until
quantities of
the elevator balances with the chord line level. Check this
7.8 inch-pounds on airplane serials CD-1023 and after.
by holding the spirit level aligned with the marked chord
CE-1 and after, and CJ-l and after.
line.
f. The distance "D" must be perpendicular to the
hinge line. Measure "D" from the hinge line to the
If the static balance does not comply, remove the elevator
suspension point of the cup. the elevator
horn cover and add or remove solder to bring
g. Remove the cup, contents, and string, then weigh
balance within required limits.
them,

NOTE
NOTE

the Coat the weight with a corrosion preventative

Since any weighing error is magnified by
material such as zinc chromate primer to
distance "D", weighing is most important and
scales that are insulate the dissimilar metals. Replace the
must be done carefully on
elevator horn cover and recheck the balance.
certified for accuracy.

3-2C
C4
 COUNTERBALANCING
Cc D -i

MASKING TAPE
(PLACE NEAR ELEVATOR
HINGE LINE)
CONTAINER

VIEW A-A
TOP FORWARD SCREW

JIG MUST BE HORIZONTALLY

LEVEL FOR UNDERBALANCE CHECK

MASKING TAPE A
’CONTAINER
DETAIL B

MASKING TAPE
(TO SECURE
IN NEUTRAL)
´•;1

’i :I

ELEVATOR
HINGE

i
i
CLEVIS

8
8-

KNIFE EDGE

I~
D

55´•1528
JIG MUST BE HORIZONTALLY LEVEL

ACTUAL FORCE MEASUREMENT

Figure 3-2. Balancing the Elevator

3´•2D 04
RUDDER on the trailing edge. Mark the chord line by grease pellcli or

other means on the rib. Retnove the straight edge, i-it

BALANCING THE RUDDER correct size bolts in the outboard and center t~inge brackets
(Figure 3-3) and mount the rudder on the knife edges. Ensure tllaI it is
free to rotate about the hinge line. Support the trailing sdge
When the rudder surface is being repainted, suspend it by behind the center hinge point with a spindle restince on a
the trailing edge so that excess paint will drain toward the levelled beam balance platform as illustrnted. The spiildlc´•
leading edge. After any repainting or repair, the finished must be vertical ttlroughout the balancing procedtlrc. ~lolil
surface must be check balanced to ensure that its static a spirit level against tile marked cl~ord line and level it h~´•
moment about the hinge line is within the manufacturers extending or contracting the spindle, or by using blocks and
prescribed limits. The complete rudder assembly, painted or shims under the spindle. Measure the perpendicular distance
unpainted including the control arm should not be from the hinge center line to the point supported by the
tail-heavy over a maximum of 8.4 inch-pounds. The static spindle. Ensure that the spirit level and rule are rcn;ovccl
moment of the rudder is determined by multiplying the from the surface and read the reaction on the bcatn
unbalanced weight of the rudder assembly times the balance. Calculate the static underbalance nlornent (M)
perpendicular distance from the hinge center line to the from the formula:
center of gravity when the chord line is horizontally level.
The weight is measured in pounds and the distance in M D(R-T) inch-pounds where,
inches. The static moment of a 100 percent balanced D Perpendicular distance frorn the hinge center line to the
rudder assembly is 0.0 inch-pounds. Tail heaviness indicates spindle point (inches).
static underbalance while nose heaviness indicates static R Reaction (Pounds) read from the beam balance.
overbalance. T Tare, i.e. spindle plus levelling blocks or shims on the
scale platform (Pounds).
CHECKING BALANCE
EXAMPLE
The rudder balance must be checked in a draft free area

with the rudder completely assembled in flying condition. D is 13.8 inches, R 1.49 Ib. and T is 1.00 Ib.
All painting, including stripes touch-up, must be
and M 13.8(1.49 1.00); M 6.8 inch-pounds.
completed. The tab, static wicks, and hinge bolts must be M is within the range which is satisfactory.
attached. The chord line must be horizontally level and the If M is not within the prescribed range, refer to step II.
hinge line must be properly supported when the static CHECK BALANCE BY COUNTER BA LANCE.
moment is measured. Although many different methods of
check balancing exist, they can be categorized under the CHECK BALANCE BY COUNTER BALANCING
following two headings:
a. Actual Force Measurement Measurement of the
applied by the rudder surface on a single support at
force a EOUIPMENT REOUIRED TO P~RFORM CHECK
known distance from the center line of the hinge. BA LANCING BY COUN;TER BALANCING
b. Counterbalancing The application of a known
force or measured distance from the hinge line
weight at a a. A stand with knife edge supports as illustrated in
to counter the unbalance moment of the rudder assembly. Figure 3-3. The knife edges must be in the same Ilorizuntal
plane.
CHECK BALANCE BY FORCE MEASUREMENT b. A paper cupor similar light wei~it container.

c. Approximately 2poundsofleadshot.
The equipment required to perform the check balanceby d. A certified beam balance weighing device
force measurement is as follows: calibrated in units of.Ol pound or less.
e. A straight edge, ruler, and spirit level.
a. A stand with knife edge supports as illustrated in
Figure 3-3. The knife edges should be in the same

horizontal plane.
b. A certified beam balance calibrated in units of .01 BALANCING PROCEDURE COUNTER BALANCING
Ib. or less. The balance should have a flat weighing platform METHOD
and its capacity should equal tare plus 2.0 Ibs. minimum.
c. A support spindle similar to the illustration and
levelling blocks, as required. (Blocks spindle tare). a. Locate the chord line by placing a straight edge at
d. Astraightedge,rule andspiritlevel. the lower closure rib of the rudder so that one end is
aligned with the center of the torque tube while the other
BALANCING PROCEDURE FORCE MEASUREMENT end is centered on the trailing edge. Mark the chord line
METHOD with a suitable marker, such as a grease pencil, then remove
the straight edge.
Locate the chord line by placing a straight edge at the b. Fit the correct size bolts in the hinge brackets and
inboard end of the rudder so that one end is aligned with mount the rudder on the knife edge supports. Ascertain
the center of the torque tube and the other end is centered that the rudder is free to rotate about the hinge line.

C4 3-2E
 c. To determine if weight should be added or 3. M=WxD
removed, suspend paper cup from a point near the center
a 4. following is a typical example of a
The
of the rudder trailing edge if the balance is nose-down or balancing calculation: Assume the rudder was slightly
near the center of the horn leading edge if the balance is underbalance (tail-heavy) and the paper cup was suspended
tail-down. Use a short length of small diameter string from the horn leading edge. If the rudder balances with the
secured to the surface with a small piece of masking tape as chord line level at "W .65 pound" and "D 11,.5 inches".
illustrated in Figure 3-3. The cup must be free to hang then
vertically.
d. Add small quantities of lead shot to the cup until
the rudder balances with the chord line level. Check this by M .65 x 12.5
holding a spirit level aligned with the marked chord line.
e.The distance "D" must be perpendicular to the M 8.1 inch-pounds. In this instance, "M" is
hinge line. Measure "D" from the hinge line to the within the required static balance range and is
suspension point of the cup. therefore acceptable.
f. Remove the cup, contents, and string, then weigh
them.
h. The complete rudder assembly, painted or
~unpainted, including the control arm must not be tail-heavy
NOTE over a maximum of 8.4 inch-pounds. If the static balance
does not comply, remove tile weight in the rudder horn and
Since any weighing error is magnified by the add or remove solder to bring the rudder balance within
distance "D", weighing is most important and required limits.
must be done carefully on scales that are

certified for accuracy.

NOTE

g. Calculate the static balance as follows: Coat the weight with a corrosion preventative
i. The weight of the cup and contents is material such as zinc chromate primer to
designated by "W". insulate the dissimilar metals. Replace the
2. The over or underbalance moment is weight in the rudder horn and recheck the
designated by "M". rudder balance.

3-2F C4
 MASKING TAPE

C__ (PLACE NEAR RUDDER HINGE LINE)

CONTAINER

B, DETAIL C

CON7AINER
B

KNIFE EDGE

-.1 _
\I

CONTAINER

JIG MUST BE HORIZONTALLY LEVEL \II J\G MUST BE HORIZONTALLY LEVEL

ACTUAL FORCE MEASUREMENT STATIC OVERBALANCE (NOSE HEAVY)

VIEW B-B

o~l

CONTAINER

VIEW A-A

JIG MUST BE HORIZONTALLY LEVEL

STATIC UNDERBALANCE (TAll HEAVY)
3&1 53-6~

Figure 3-3. Baiancing the Rudder

ss
04
CONTROL SURFACES c. Install the attaching nut at the inboa;.: elevator
hinge point and torque to 50-70 inch-pounds.
AILERON REMOVAL d. ~onnect the elevator push-pull tubes at the elevator
torque tube fittings.
a. Support the aileron and remove the two attaching e. Connect the tail light wires and install the tail cone.

screws from the top and bottom of each hinge bracket. Install the access doors.
b. Pull the aileron straight away from the wing to avoid
damage to the attaching areas. RIGGING THE ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
c. Remove the screws attaching the bonding cables to
the aileron. Adjust the elevator down stop and push rods so that
a.

14 to 16degrees of travel are available from the neutral to the

DOWN position. Maintain at least 118 inch distance between
AILERON INSTALLATION the aft edge of the bellcrank and the aft bulkhead (FS.
257.606).
a. Attach the bonding cables to the aileron, b. Rig the cables to the tension shown on the rigging
b. Align the aileron with the hinge brackets. Be certain diagram, adjusting the cables so the control column has a 1116
to install the aileron
to 118 inch cushion when in the full forward position.
hinge brackets between the upper aileron
skin and the lower reinforcing structure to which the nut plate c. Adjust the up stop to obtain 24 to 26 degrees UP
is attached. travel from the neutral position and tighten locknuts.

c. Install the upper and lower hinge bracket screws, d. Employing a hand force gage on the control wheel,
d. Pull the aileron in a direction straight away from the adjust the elevator down springs as follows: on Model 33
aircraft, 23 maximum pounds breakout force at 150 DOWN
wing to assure that the hinge bracket ispositioned properly. If
elevator, 17 to 19 pounds force through NEUTRAL elevator,
any movement of the aileron is noted, recheck the positioning
of all and 10 to 15 pounds force as 250 UP elevator is reached; on all
hinge brackets.
Connect the aileron tab push rod. Model A33, 833, C33, C33A, 833, E33A, E33C, F33, 033 and
a.
F33A (serials prior to CE-316) F33C, 1 7 plus 1 minus 0 pounds
forcethrough NEUTRAL elevator and 16.5 plus O, minus 1
RIGGING THE AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM pound for~e as 250 full UP (.06 inch off of full up stop) elevator
is reached; on Model F33A aircraft serials CE-316 and after, 17

Rig procedures outlined in

the aileron in accordance with the plus 1,minus 1 pound force as 250 full UP (.06 inch off of full up
the Model 35 Shop Manual with the following exceptions: with stop) elevator is reached. The gage readings at NEUTRAL
the bungee springs connected, rig the aileron system to a elevator and 250 (.06 inch off of full up stop) elevator must be
cable tension of 40 it 5 pounds. taken while the control wheel is in motion. Adjust each spring
by transferring the upper end to a spring attaching hole provid-
Effective serial CD-976 and after, an optional Stability Aug- ing increased or decreased tension as applicable. The eleva-
mentation System is offered. Aircraft equipped with this sys- tor system should have sufficient freedom to allow free return

tem will not have the aileron control trimmer installed. Refer to of the elevator from full UP to full DOWN.

Figure 3-5A in Model 35 Shop Manual for Stability Augmenta-

tionSystem.

NOTE
ELEVATOR REMOVAL

After rigging the elevator and the elevator trim tab

a. Detach the tail cone, disconnect the tail navigation
control system, check for correct movement of the
light and remove the tail cone.
control surfaces with respect to the movement of
b. Remove the tail section access doors on the left
the controls. When the elevator trim tab control
hand side of the aft fuselage.
wheel is moved toward the NOSE DOWN posi-
c. Disconnect the elevator push-pull tubes from the
tion, the elevator trim tab should move UP
elevator torque tube fittings.
d. Disconnect the elevator trim tab actuator rod at the
actuator
e. Remove the hinge bolts. Disconnect the elevator
bonding cables and remove the elevator. RIGGING THE ELEVATOR TRIM TAB

INSTALLATION OF ELEVATOR a. Place cabin control indicator in the neutral position.

b. Rig cables to the tension shown on therigging
a. Connect the elevator bonding cables and position diagram.
the elevator on the stabilizer, then install the hinge bolts and c. Place elevator in neutral position and adjust the trim
nuts. Tighten and safety, tab push rod to bring the tab into the neutral position.
b. Connect the elevator trim tab actuator rod to the d. Adjust stops on cables to allow proper travel. Refer
actuator, to Elevator Rigging Diagram for proper tab travel.

3-4 C15
 NOTE a. Position the elevator trim tab actuator in the horizon-
tal stabilizer and install the attaching hardware.
After rigging the elevator and the elevator trim tab b. Position the chain and cable assembly on the actua-
control system, check for correct movement of the
tor sprocket so that the ends of the chain are equidislant within
control surfaces with respect to the movement of
f .20 inch at the sprocket centerline.
the controls. When the elevator trim tab control
c. Install the elevator as outlined in Section 3 of
wheel is moved toward the NOSE DOWN posi- this Shop Manual under the heading INSTALLATION OF
tion, the elevator trim tab should move UF!
ELEVATOR.
d. Connect the elevator trim tab cables to the turn-
buckles in the aft fuselage.
ELEVATOR TRIM TAB ACTUATOR REMOVAL Remove material used to protect the cables.
e.

f. Rig the elevator trim tab control system as outlined

a. Remove the access panel near the trailing edge of
in Section 3 of this Shop Manual under the heading RIGGING
the horizontal stabilizer to gain access to the elevator trim tab
THE ELEVATOR TRIM TAB.
actuator.
b. Detach the tail cone, disconnect the tail navigation
light wire and remove the tail cone. NOTE
c. Remove the access panel on the left hand side of
the fuselage just forward of the horizontal stabilizer.
After rigging the elevator and elevator trim tab
d. Remove the access panel near the leading edge of
control system, check for correct movement of the
the horizontal stabilizer to gain access to the elevator trim tab
control surfaces with respect to the movement of
actuator sprocket. the controls. When the elevator trim tab control
e. Remove the elevator as outlined in Section 3 of this
wheel is moved toward the NOSE DOWN posi-
Shop Manual under the heading ELEVATOR REMOVAL. tion, the elevator trim tab should move UF!
f. Disconnect the elevator trim tab cables at the turn-
buckles in the aft fuselage. Secure the forward elevator trim
tab cables to prevent them from unwinding at the universal.

g. Install the access panel, located near the leading

CAUTION the horizontal stabilizer.
edge of
h. Install the access panel, located near the trailing
Do not damage the cables. Use a material such as
edge of the horizontal stabilizer.
phenolic to protect the cables, i. Install the access panel on the left hand side of the

fuselage, just forward of the horizontal stabilizer.

g. Remove the chain and cable assembly from the
j´• Connect the tail navigation light wire and install the
elevator trim tab actuator sprocket.
tail cone.
h. Remove the hardware attaching the elevator trim
tab actuator to the horizontal stabilizer. Remove the actuator
from the airplane.
ELECTRIC TRIM TAB ACTUATOR REMOVAL

NOTE
a. Remove the access door on the fuselage just below
the leading edge of the L.H. stabilizer.
If the actuator is to be reinstalled, identify with a
b. Disconnect the actuator wire harness at the discon-
tag to proper movement of the elevator
ensure
nect splices.
tabs upon reinstallation of the actuators.
c. Disconnect the actuator cable at the turnbuckle.
Tape the cable to the actuator to prevent unwinding of the
ELEVATOR TRIM TAB ACTUATOR INSTALLATION cable.
d. Remove the three bolts securing the actuator to the
bracket. The actuator may now be removed from the aircraft.
WARNING

To ensure proper movement of the trim tabs, ELECTRIC TRIM TAB ACTUATOR INSTALLATION
make sure that the RH actuator is installed on the
right hand horizontal stabilizer and that the LH Installation procedure is the reverse of the removal procedure.
actuator is installed on the left hand horizontal Tab rigging and cable tension are identical to the manually
stabilizer. operated tab.

C15 3-4A
 NEW TAB CABLE INSTALLATION ELECTRIC TRIM TAB ACTUATOR BRUSH WEAR LIMITS

Note the position of the old cable in relation to the cable drum 14 VOLT SYSTEM (CE-1 thru CE-nl except CE-748; CJ-1
and forward end cable fittings. Install the new cable in the I~ __~_

same positions. Replace the brushes at intervals of 2000 operating hours.

28 VOLT SYSTEM (08-748, 08-772 and after; CJ-149 and I
~after)
MAGNETIC CLUTCH REMOVAL
Replace the brushes at intervals of 2000 operating hours.
(See Figure 3-3A)
MAGNETIC CLUTCH TORQUE TEST(14 volt system)
a. Remove the lid from the clutch housing.
b. Loosen the setscrew in the clutch rotor and arma- Thefollowing procedure should be performed any time the
ture hubs. magnetic clutch is replaced.
c. Remove the motor from the clutch housing.
d. Slide the cable drum and shaft assembly from the a. Use a 14 vdc power source and connect the red
clutch housing, electrical lead of the magnetic clutch to ground and the white
e. Remove the clutch from the clutch housing. electrical lead to the power source. Using a torque wrench.
check that the clutch holds with 30 inch-pounds of torque
applied at the actuator shaft.
MAGNETIC CLUTCH INSTALLATION b. If the static torque of the clutch is less than 30
inch-pounds, burn in the clutch as follows:
Installation procedure is the reverse of the removal proce-
dure. No lubrication is required. Tighten the clutch armature i. Find a metal plate of sufficient thickness for
setscrew until there is no visible end play in the cable drum rigidity and large enough to fit in a vise with the actuator
shaft. Slide the clutch rotor on the motor shaft to obtain .010 assembly attached. Anchor the plate in a vise and drill 3
to .015 clearance between the friction surfaces of the clutch holes in the plate to match the actuator mounting holes. Bolt
before tightening the setscrew. Stake both setscrews, the actuator to the plate.
2. Locate a blade type screwdriver or similar
tool that will fit the shaft on which the cable drum is
NOTE mounted.
3. Remove the handle from the screwdriver or

With no visible end play in the cable drum shaft, fabricate a similar tool so that a low speed (approximately
the cletch faces must not make contact while the 450 rpm) M inch drill motor may be attached to the screw-

clutch is de-energized or damage to the clutch driver or similar tool.

willresult. 4. Secure the screwdriver in the ’h inch drill
motor.

5. Remove the access plate from the clutch

housing and blow the housing and clutch clean.
6. Using a regulated power source set at 7 to 8
CLUTCH HOUSING--1 I I I (I volts de, connect the red electrical lead of the clutch to

CLUTCHi
Roron ground the white electrical
alligator clips.
lead to the power source with

SETSCREWS a HC~irrl II .olo to .015

7. With the screwdriver in the slot in the drum
C LUTC H AE~ H CLUTCH shaft turn the drill motor on and run for 15 seconds. Turn the
ASSEMDLY
I II tjl drill off and unclip the leads to the clutch.
I I C~
cool for minute be-
SETSCREW 7h 8. Allow the clutch to one

fore reattaching the lead for another fifteen second interval.

CADLE DRUM SHAFT----~-H It Il Repeat the foregoing sequence until the clutch will hold 30
inch-pounds of torque as indicated in step "a" then blow the
clutch and housing clean with compressed air. Install access

plate on the clutch housing.

I

LE RETAINING PIN

CA UTION
eo´•aso~
LE DRUM
Exceeding the fifteen second burn-in periods
clutch.
Figure 3-3A. Electric Trim Tab Actuator may overheat and damage the magnetic

3-48 clS
MAGNETIC CLUTCH TORQUE TEST (28 volt system) CAUTION
CE-772 and after CJ-149 and after)
(CE-748,
Ekceeding the 15 second burn-in periods may
The following check should be performed any time the mag- overheat and damage the magnetic clutch.
netic clutch is replaced.

a. Using a 28 vdc power source, connect the red lead

RUDDER REMOVAL
of themagnetic clutch to ground and the white lead to the
power source. Using a torque wrench, check that the clutch
holds with 30 inch-pounds of torque applied at the actuator a. Detach the tail cone, disconnect the tail
shaft. navigation light wire and remove the tail cone.

b.If the static torque of the clutch is less than 30 b. Remove the tail section access doors on the left
hand side of the aft fuselage.
inch-pounds, burn the clutch as follows:
c. Remove the four attach bolts from the rudder bell
Find metal of sufficient thickness for c’a"k.
i. a plate
d. Disconnect the rudder hinges and rudder bond
rigidity and large enough to fit in a vise with the actuator
cable.
assembly attached. Anchor the plate in a vise and drill 3
holes in the plate to match the actuator mounting holes. Bolt e. Remove the rudder.
the actuator to the plate.
2. Locate a blade type screwdriver or similar
tool that will fit the shaft on which the cable drum is
RUDDER INSTALLATION
mounted.
3. Remove the handle from the screwdriver or
a. Place the rudder in position.
fabricate a similar tool so that a low speed (approximately b. Connect the rudder hinges and bonding cable.
450 rpm) ’/4 inch drill inotor may be at(gched to the screw-
c. Install the rudder bell crank attach bolts (torque to

driver or similar tool. 50 to 70 inch-pounds).

d. Install the access doors.
4. Secure the screwdriver in the M inch drill
motor.
e. Connect the navigation light wires.
1. Install the tail cone.
5. Remove the access plate from the clutch

housing and blow the housing and clutch clean with clean
dry air.
6. Using a regulated power source set at 14 to 16 RIGGING THE RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM
vdc, connect the red electrical lead of the clutch to ground
and the white lead to the power source with alligator clips. a. Place rudder pedals in the aft position.
7. With the screwdriver in the slot in the drum b. Install rig pin in the holes provided in the pilot’s
shaft turn the drill motor on and run for 15 seconds. Turn the rudder pedals.
drill off and unclip the leads to the clutch, c. Rig cables to the tension shown on the Rudder
8. approximately one
Let the clutch cool for Rigging Diagram. (Bellcrank is in zero position.)
minute before reattaching the lead for another 15 second d. Adjust rudder travel at the rudder bellcrank stops.
interval. Repeat the foregoing sequence until the clutch will Refer to Rudder Rigging Diagram for rudder travel.
hold with 30 inch-pounds of torque as indicated in step "a", a. Adjust rudder pedal travel at the rudder pedal stops.
then blow the clutch and housing clean with clean dry com- f. Make sure that rudder movement corresponds to
pressed air. Install the access plate on the clutch housing. the movement of the rudder pedals.

C15 3-4C
 CABLES CABLE TENSION+ SURFACE TF~AVEL

+5 LBS AT 25" ~t 10 UP
25 LBS
_5 590F 15"-~ 10 DOWN

ELEVATOR I +5 LBS AT ",UP" ELEVATOR

25 LBS
-5 59"F CABLE CE-316
+5 LBS AT "DbWN" ELEVATOR AND AFTER
20 LBS
-5 590F CABLE ~1

R:
1~00 ~10 UP
+5 LBS AT 210 ~t 10 DOWN
ELEVATOR TAB 1 15 LBS
10"~ 1" UP CE-1 AND AFTER
-0 590F
27" 110 DOWN CD-1255 AND AFTER

tRIG CABLE TO LOWEST PERMISSIBLE TENSION

WHEN TAE BEECHCRAFT NEW-MATIC FLIGHT
CONTROL SYSTEM IS INSTALLED. ’i\ O

F.S. 257.606

SERIALS CD-66 AND AFTER

:d/
ELEVATOR DOWN
21 I
ELEVATOR DOWN

ELEVATOR UP
I ~A

PULLEYS ADDED
CE-316 AND AFTER
I
I SERIALS CD-66 AND AFTER
1J
a

ELEVATOR UP
Model A33 and after

~S´• /Y
Model 33
I
I
e

ELEVATOR DOWN

ELEVATOR UP
(iJ3 irJ27
TAB NOSE DOWN

TAB NOSE UP
Figure 3´•38. Elevator Control System

3-5
Cs
 TEMPERA~URE CABLE TEIJSION GRAPH

50

40
CABLES I CABLETENSION´• I SURFACE TRAVEL I SERIAL
O

ALL AIRPLANES WITHOUT

so

E
i\ud~ Cob\e-~ ~Zli RUDDER 25 LBS t5 LBS AT
59"F
25" 1" LEFT AND RIGHT
KIT 33-4002-1 OR

Z 20´• 6~ n\ I I I I KIT 33-4002-3

O
CJ-I THRU CJ-148
la´• I´• lrrr
to WITH KIT 33-4002-1

20" 00 --10 RIGHT OR 33-40(32-3

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 ´•Ric CABLE TO LOWEST PERMISSIBLE TENSION WHEN

THE BEECHCRAFT NEW -MATIC FLIGHT CONTROL
Temperatvre-OF
SYSTEM IS INSTALLED.

SERLALS CD-66 AND AFTER

PULLEYS ADDED r
CE-316 AND AFTER ~t/
1
I

/I
I
LEFT RUDDER CABLE
1 I i-~

I )L
´•G~
B 1.~ I

I
RIGHT RUDDER CABLE

STOPS

~s
/1
RUDDER PEDAL STOPS

Figure 3-4. Redder Control System

3-6
C13
 The graphs specify the correct maximum and minimum cable tensionpermissible for the
following
flight systems when rigged at temperatures varying from OOF to 1100F. The horizontal scale
control
on the graph designates the temperature in degrees Fahrenheit at which the control cables may be rigged,

and the vertical scale designates the correct tension inpounds for eachtemperature reading. Cable
tensions are based on 590F Ambient Air Temperature.

TEMPERATURE CABLE TE~JSION GRAPH

50

tt 11! Ti-.7
40
i I i

B
~i ii

io

o 10 20 90 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110

TEMPERATURE OF rwol´•~o

TEMPERATURE CABLE TEPBION GRAPH

50

c~i
40
tt
t-´•i
tt-t
ff: j
i´•´•-l´•i~ i-+i

P
5 90
;-~i
a i-1" fi t´•

g ~b;BI?E_
f ~ti*-t-l´•-´•

ftl~t i tl t

to
:t :Iltryt i: ’ii´•
it

O 10 20 90 40 50 SO 70 80 90 100 110

TEMPERATURE OF rwm~

Elgure 3-5. Effect of Temperature upon Cable Tension

Issued: November, 1970 3-6A

33-590011-1C’10

TEMPERATURE CABLE TENSION GRAPH

CE-BIB AND AFTER

!-L-. L_fl-_._~ _(´•1 Ii -._ ~)_

i-f i
h-rS-----T ?.-rt--- -I--t
i
---.f
f--

~rci
-1---ct~’ -´•;-*t---c~--e--j-ce--´• t- ----i----t--´•-----~-t
c--C-------
C- i

~iiLi 1---- ct-- i- c.~

t--´• -I
t
--i----- ´•--i cl t´•-
i
40
c~-C-- -c-
I~-C-..
~1 rr: ~::_
itTi~+ "c-ej~---t---t I-.--fl---´•.. ---i-
i-C----t*--- i i-I C--i- --r i t I.-.- -.-)-~I-CT. .i

iii--ii
Y. CCC--- T-)-C-
.´•i:::::::::i
tg 30
i
cl~J-, --cl
----i--,7-
i,- ii
~_
-i´•´•
´•-´•--m-L´•´•´•´•-

,------´•t-- ´•--i--´•-´•--´•-’
-´•--t .;.---e "OP" -t-- ~----I -´•--t----C--l´• i

X
´•-L-~ ´•i-
I-i.-.i----i--L-r--C
--´•t--´•-´•-t--tr-_i -c?~-.---´•

,~--L*i
s! cl-i.
LI::!--:~ ChBLE
I---.

F ;ue.. t´•~´•
~--?--..i.-.-.
c~.-. -1--
-e----?----~i i
elf --´•i ´•1 1´•
i
C--rC7-~ -’-..-c- .I~lrcf -_´• i..
´•´•´•´•-t- -i

I--~´•(f´•´•ii-
lr Il-~tltCt
--r´•i
:_I :If I:~
---cl ´•t-´• ´•´•´•i
----i
i-
10
ih i--tre!- r´•~,.´•´•.
tl
t ’i~’^- t
.,cL -i;
1-´• -I-f-ti
iI= ~c´•(-´•-´• I ´•;)´•´•i~,-´•´•-
114 Cct- Ctf+~t
l(i
i --t´• iiiC-C---+ ~-.I-
i-e
c. i i
I´•´•,.-.
fttf
’C’
"-Ctf---c
i r;
´•´•e

I- 111:’
i iit
’u-~t´•--yriry´•fuil i-ii-i ,/.l!ct *u iJI
cl
i.--

lO 20 30 40 50 80 70 80 90 100 110

TEMPERATURE OF

INTEPITIONALLY LEFT BLANK

CAB~ Tawrcw wupn
AND AFTER

50
I-C;crct*-- tfir)*tfCtliTt+C1-t-l-t I
1 I TI
´•11 i

rct
U

-c-t-i -I--+
i-
;i;i
’CT

-*1j i
’i’
i

i
t ´•1 ;1- J- ji-
-t i iS- tci tt I~I
ri ,ii +s, I*-t, ´•-t-´•
40
-´•I ´•´•f´•i~--
--ii c-~--´•´•´• i;i

.ii
c^- ~t
~t- t1,

g´•´•
c~-

fe

i
rl
:r-r

LCCI

Z ´•h i---
8 _....

’1
1-

L- u-;
to
i -u--

,ii
i
.Fl. ::(i~L TT;lil:l´•.l .´•i´•

10
(~--ce
~---t--
--i

e--r

rc-~., ---t----+--Y--t---
il it-H-t~ ~-s)--+---t--t---
ci cccu-c~ i- -_eCL-4

0
10 20 50 40 50 00 70 80 90 ICM 110

TEMPERATURE- OF ~wa´•)

Figure 3-5A, Mfect of Temperature upon Ca~le Tension

3-6B Issued: November, 1910

r
 ::II

TEMPERATURE CABLE TEPsION GRAPH

60

t
c-

40

E ´•ilrfct--t´•-´•-t-

i
I:ri I
F

to

r ,tt----!ii-I
;ti

lo z.o so 40 50 80 70 80 90 100 110

TEMPERATURE OF zuot´•

Figure 3-5B. Effect of Temperature upon Cable Tension

Issued: November, 1970 3-7

 G G
33, A33, 833 and C33 Standard [nstal~atiDn H H

B33 and C33 Fuel Lines for 40 Gallon Fuel Cell 9 :jilkcehC
Valve
B33 and C33 Tank Vents for 25 Gallon Fuel Cell ´•iZ i:´•: Sij
D i‘ f-Y‘D
it i.i~
33 and A33 Standard Tank Vents i.i.j B

~A I ~A
33 and A33 Auxiliary Tank Installation ´•P. Effect:ive on Airplane iii~ Effective on Airplane
Serials (3D-640 and after Serials CD-388 through CD-639

Awciliary
Fuel Tank ´•i~
H

F,
Check
Valve

To Fuel
3’~’’’-1´•. ‘D
C
Pressure

‘k~I
._. )3
E
RH Main Gage i:.::
~YM iii A
Fuel Cell
Effective Airplane
15 Serials prior to CI3-388

FLUSH VENT
r CD-888 AFTER

A Engine Pump Fuel Supply

B Engine Pump Fuel Return
F C LH Main Fuel Cell Return
D LK Main Fuel Cell Supply
914il Auxiliary I E LH Auxiliary Supply
Tank

B
i:1
~i:l::´•:´•:´•:´•´•
-.r Fuel Tank F RH Auxiliary Tank Supply
G RH Main Fuel Cell Supply
H RH Main Fuel Cell Return
Check
Valve LH Main i
Fuel Cell
To Throttle
Valve
WS 79. 515
TO FUEL MJECTOR DISTRIBUTOR for 25 Gal Fuel
VALVE CD-814 AFTER WS 115. 687
Cell Installation
for 40 Gal Fuel
Cell Lnstallation

Figure 3-6. Fuel System (CD-1 through CD- 1254)

Issued: Auh´•us~, 1971

3-8
 BEECHCRAFT
DEBONAIR/BONANZA 33 SERIES
SHOP MANUAL

FUEL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE d. Position the fuel cell in place

and press the Velcro pile and hook
CAUTION together pressing outward in the area of
the Velcro tape.
Any time the fuel system is
drained or a cell
fuel is Inspect the flapper valve for free
e.

replaced, air may enter the sys- movement under its own weight. If the
tem. If the possibility that air flapper valve binds, work up and down by
has entered the system does exist, hand until it works freely.
start and operate the engine on
the ground until all air is NOTE
removed from the system. Operate
the engine for several minutes on Before closing the zipper,
each tank until proper engine inspect the fuel cell for any
operation is assured. Refer to the foreign material.
applicable Pi7 ot’ s Operating
Handbook and Airplane Flight Man- f.Close the zipper and refer to FUEL
ual before starting and operating CELL INSTALLATION for further
the engine, instructions for installing the fuel cell.

INSTALLATION OF VELCRO TAPE WITH NOTE

REPLACEMENT OF FUEL CELLS (PRIOR
TO CD-1235 AND CE-290) Installation of Kit No. 35-9009 S
is required on a first time basis
Airplanes that have had or will have only for each fuel cell. Repeat
existing replaced with spare
fuel cells installations of the kit are

fuel cells P/N 35-380135-1, 35-38013~-2, unnecessary when new fuel cells
35-380135-3, and 35-380135-4 should are installed.
install Kit No. 35-9009 S in the fuel cell
75ner top, bottom, root rib and spar as INSPECTION OF MAIN FUEL CELL
described below and in Service FLAPPER VALVE
Instructions No. 0365-281. Serials
CD-1235 and after and CE-290 and after are On ai rplanes that are equipped wi th
delivered from the factory with the baffled main fuel cells, the flapper
equivalent of Kit No 35-9009 S installed. valves (metal or phenolic) should be

a. Remove the fuel cell as described

I under FUEL CELL REMOVAL. ACCESSPPCNINt
NOTE I VELCRP TAPE

Airplanes that have had any of the

above fuel cells previously
installed do not require complete
removal of the fuel cell. Access
covers and inboard fi ttl ngs
should be removed and the inboard ill 5
-I
end of the fuel cell pulled back I: ii
far enough to allow installation ii

of the Velcro tape.

,~i, LCADING
EDGE HIPL CELL
b. Lightly sand the surface that the
Velcro tape will be bonded to as shown in 11.5"
s.7´•´•
Figure 3-6A and clean the sanded surface 1~.91-1

with naphtha.

c. Activate the velcro by dipping it

into methyl ethyl ketone and press the InstalIation of Velcro Tape.
Velcro tape in place as shown in Figure Figure 3-6A
3-6A.

C16 _
3-8A
 BEECHCRAFT
DEBONAIR/BONANZA 33 SERIES
SHOP MANUAL

inspected periodically (Beech Aircraft

recommends that the inspection be accom-
plished at each annual inspection) for
freedom of operation and proper seating.

The inspection may be accomplished as

follows:

a. Drain all fuel from the airplane.

b. Remove the rectangular access
plat just e: 1.75
fuselage on the upper skin of each wing
leading edge.

c. Cut the safety wire and remove the

attaching bolts from the fuel cell access
plate.
E’1
I 1L-
,C

NOTE
Fuel Vent
Clean the area around the access Figure 3-68
plate before removing the plate.
be inspected after installation to deter-
d. Remove the fuel
cell access plate mine that the assembly did not receive
and open the zipper in the baffle. damage during installation that could
cause it to bind and/or not seat properly.
e. Locate the flapper valve in the
lower outboard section of the baffle and g. If the flapper valve is phenolic
determine if the flapper valve is metal it should be inspected and reworked, iP
or phenolic. necessary, as described below.

f. If the flapper valve is metal, it I. Move the flapper valve eie-

should be inspectedand repaired, if nec- ment through its full travel. There should
essary, as described below. be no binding and the element should seat
securely against the valve plate.
i. Move the flapper element of
the valve through its full travel. There 2. If the
flapper element binds
should be no Binding and the element and/or does not properly, the upper
seat
should seat securely against the valve rear side of the flapper element may be
plate. binding against the valve plate.
2. If the flapper element binds 3. The flapper valve element may
and/or does not seat properly, the flapper be relieved from binding by filing a small
element arm can be straightened by placing radius on the upper rear side of the ele-
a screwdriver between the arm and the ment.
element and pressing the element toward
the closed position. NOTE

3. If after straightening the A shop towel saturated with light

a rm the flapper el ement still bi nds oil may be placed directly below
and/or does not seat properly, the flapper the flapper valve to absorb the
element should be removed and replaced phenolic dust during rework.
with a new flapper element assembly. The
flapper elementassembly may be replaced 4. After determining that the
by removing the two attaching bolts from flapper valve is functioning properly,
the upper part of the flapper valve. The thoroughly wipe the area in the vicinity
same attaching parts should be used to of the flapper valve with an oil saturated
install the new flapper element assembly. shop towel.
The new flapper element assembly should

3-88 016
 BEECHCRAFT
DEBONAIR/BONANZA 33 SERIES
SHOP MANUAL

h. Clean the gasket contact area on d. Disconnect the transmitter wir-

the fuel cell and fuel cell access plate. ing.

i. Close-the zipper in the baffle. e. Cut the safety wire and remove the
transmitter support screws.
i. Install a new gasket, and secure
the fuel cell access plate in place. NOTE

k. Tighten the fuel cell access plate Clean the area around the trans-
attaching bolts to a torque of 45 to 50 mitter before removing the trans-
inch-pounds and safety wire. mitter.

Reinstall the rectangular access f. Remove the transmitter and gasket

plate on the wing leading edge skin, from the fuel cell.

INSPECTION OF THE FUEL CELL VENT g. Inspect the fuel cell for wrinkles
LINES or other obstructions that might impede
transmitter float travel.
a. On the 33 and A33, and on the 833,
C33, and E33 equipped with 25-gallon (22 h. Set the new gasket and transmitter
usable)fuel cells, plug the tank in position and ensure that the float is
gfallon
iller neck opening of the siphon unrestricted through its full travel from
line and open the tank filler neck. Blow stop to stop. The float arm may be bent,
through the end of the vent line and check if necessary to provide clearance.
for air coming into the tank through the
extended vent line. i. Install the transmitter support
screws, torque to 25 inch-pounds and
b. The end of the fuel tank vent line safety.
should extend 1-3/4 inches below the lower
surface of the wing skin and have a grad- j. Connect transmitter wiring, Turn
ual curve forward 10 degrees from verti- the power on and check the fuel gage for
cal. The end of the vent is scarfed at a empty reading.
450 angle, facing forward. This ensures
a positive vent pressure. Any configura- NOTE
tion other than described herein may cre-
ate a negative vent pressure, thus pulling If the gage does not read empty,
the air, or air and fuel from the tank, reinspect all tran smi tters to
ensure the float arm is on the
c. On ai rplanes equipped with the down stop and the float clears the
flush vent system, block the flush vent bottom of the fuel cell. Check all
and blow into the vent adjacent to the wiring for faulty connections.
flush vent. Open the tank filler cap and
listen for air blowing into the tank. To k. Fill the tanks and check the fuel
check for obstructionsin the syphon break gage for full reading.
and for proper operation of the check
valve in the vent line outboard of the FUEL CELL REMOVAL
fuel tank, blow air into the syphon break
vent on the underside of the wing, out- a. Drain and purge the fuel cells.
board of the main fuel tank, then check
that air comes out of the vent and the b. the
Remove outboard fuel cell
flush vent. access and fuel
plate quantity sensor.
(The outboard fuel quantity sensor is
FUEL TRANSMITTER REPLACEMENT installed only in the 80-gallon fuel sys-
tem).
a. Turn off electrical power.
c. Remove the inboard access cover
b. Drain and purge the fuel cells. and fuel quantity sensor.

c. Remove the access door on the

upper wing at station 98.854.

C16 _’ 3-8C
 BEECHCRAFT
DEBONAIR/BONANZA 33 SERIES
SHOP MANUAL

d. Disconnect all fuel and vent is necessary to exercise certain

plumbing, procedures the time of the
at
installation. The specific prec-
e. Unsnap the fuel cell and remove autions other than the general
it through the outboard fuel cell access care in handling are as follows:
hole.
1. Insert the flow tube into the
CAUTION fitting until 3/8 inch or more of the tube
extends through the fitting.
Tape the edge of the access hole
to prevent damage to the fuel 2: Locate the hose clamp on the
cell. fabric-reinforced area of the nipple; it
should clear the end of the fitting by 1/4
FUEL CELL INSTALLATION inch.

CAUTION 3. Torque the hose clamps as

indicated in Chart 1. They should be drawn
Care should be taken when replac- up in one operation; if retightening is
ing fuel cells to ensure that the necessary, release the clamp completely
correct type fuel cell is used as and wait at least 15 minutes before
a replacement. All 33 series air- retightening.
planes except C3-149 and after use
baffled fuel cells. CJ-149 and 4. Use no sealing paste or gasket
after incorporates a fuel cell compounds.
with a non-collapsible fuel cell
reservoir in place of a baffled c. Apply a thin film of Simonize wax
fuel cell. To avoid damage to the to metal flow tubes as a lubricant. No
fuel cells, the fuel cellcavities other lubricant should be used.
MUST be clean of any debris before
installing a replacement cell. Fuel Cell Nipple Clamp Torques

a. Return the fuel cell through the Inside diameter tin Inch-pounds
outboard fuel cell access hole and snap inches) of nipple of torque
it into place. Outside diameter tin) for fuel
inches) of tube cell nipple
CAUTION clamps

Before closing the zipper, .25 thru .62 12 to 16

inspect the fuel cell for any .75 thru 1.00 15 to 20
foreign material. If the cell is 1.50 25 to 30
not thoroughly clean, it should 2.00 313 to 35
be cleaned with lint-free cloth
a 3.00 35 to 40
moistened in water,alcohol or
kerosene. No other solvent should
be used to clean the fuel cell. CAUTION

Close the zipper in the fuel cell

b. If replacement Goodyear fuel
dam. Reinstall the filler adapter, flow cells have clear/yellow nipples,
line, quantity sensors, drain and access torque the fuel cell nipple clamps
covers that were previously removed. Use to 25 ~5 inch-pounds.
new Gaskets.
FUEL QUANTITY INDICATOR CALI-
CAUTION BRATION (CE-409 AND AFTER, CJ-~2
AND AFTER)
The molded nipple fittings used
on the fuel cell are lightweight EMPTY POSITION
fittin9s developed for ease of
installation incertain locations a. Make ce rtai n the fuel cell is
in the airplane. To get the best empty.
service from this type fitting it

3-8D C16
 BEECHCRAFT
DEBONAIR/BONANZA 33 SERIES
SHOP MANUAL

b. Remove the access cover from over b. Adjust the engine idle speed to
the transmitter, the specified RPM with the throttle plate
adj usti ng sc rew, clockwise to increase,
c. Disconnect the electrical wiring. counterclockwise to decrease air.

d. Remove the fuel quantity trans- c. Turn fuel pump relief valve
the
mitter. adjustment the centerline of the pump,
on
to obtain the pump pressure limits speci-
e. Bend the arm as required to get a fled for idle‘RPM, clockwise to increase
correct reading on the indicator. pressure, counterclockwise to decrease
pressure.
f. Install the transmitter.
d. Maintaining idle pump pressure
g. Connect the electrical wiring. and idle RPM, obtain the correct idle
mi xture with the adjustment provided at
h. Install the access cover. the metering unit. Optimum idle mixture
exists if, upon leaning with the mixture
FULL POSITION control, an increase of 25 to 50 RPM is
experienced.
lareshie’ld from over
the instrument pane NOTE

b. Locate the two pri nted ci rcui t The preceding steps have provided
boards located on the back of the instru- the correct idle pump pressure,
ment panel just to the left of center. correct fuel flow and correct
metering cam to throttle plate
Locate the calibration screw in
c. orientation.
the back of each printed circuit board
NOTE
NOTE
Do not adjust idle mixture without
Calibration should be done only first determining that idle pump
with a bus voltage of 14.25 +.25 pressure is correct.
or 28.25 +.25 as applicable to the

airplane system. e. Advance to full throttle and max-

imum rated engine RPM to check pump pres-
d. Calibrate the fuel quantity indi- sure and nozzle (metered) pressures or
cater as follows: flows.

1. Ensure that the fuel tank that NOTE

corresponds to the fuel quantity indicator
being calibrated is full. Nozzle pressure or flow values may
be monitored by either the gage
2. Turn the calibration screw in in the airplane or an auxiliary
back of the corresponding circuit board pressure gage teed into the fuel
unti 1 the needle on the fuel uantity manifold valve pressure port.
indicator points to the "F" mark. (fullQ
Criteria for full throttle full rich
e. Reinstall the glareshield. adjustment of the fuel system should be
specified nozzle pressure of flow values.
ENGINE FUEL PUMP ADJUSTMENT Unmetered pump pressures at full throttle
are included for reference only and may
a. Tee into either the fuel pump be used for troubleshooting the metering
outlet fitting or metering unit inlet unit portion of the fuel system.
fitting (whichever is more accessible)
with an appropriate pressure and f. To obtain specified values of
extended fuel line to observe fu9 pump nozzle pressure or fuel flow at full
gage should be vented throttle and rated RPM, turn the variable
to atmospherepressures. SThis adj usti ng screw (located on the
side of the pump) clockwise to increase

016 _’ 3-88
 BEECHCRAFT
DEBONAIR/BONANZA 33 SERIES
SHOP MANUAL

FUEL FLOW CHART

All top end values are shown for rated RPM and manifold pressure.

Unmetered Metered
or or

Pump Nozzle
RPM Pressure Pressure Fuel Flow Fuel Flow
Engine Propeller (psi) (psi) Lbs./Hr. Gal./Hr.

IO-470-J,K and N 600 9-11 2.0-2.5

2600 25-27 15.5-16.5 123-130 21-22
10-520-6 and BA 600 9-11 2.0-2.5
2700 28-31 15.5-16.5 136-144 23-24

pressure and counterclockwise to decrease RESERVOIR INSTALLATION

pressure.
Install the reservoir after the fuel cell
NOTE is in the wing and before the access plate
is installed. Installation may be accom-
If at static run-up, rated RPM pi i shed as follows:
cannot be achieved at full throt-
tle, adj ust nozzle pressure or a. Tape the reservoir flapper valve
flow slightly below limits, mak- shut before installing the reservoir.
ing certain specified values are
achieved when rated RPM is b. Compress the reservoir (squeeze
achieved during takeoff roll. by hand) into a small circumference and
pass it through the fuel access ring into
NOTE the fuel cell.

The procedure for adjusting fuel c. Release the reservoir allowing it

systems without variable orifice to assume its original shape.
pumps (early 10-470 engines) is
the same as above. However, all d. Insert the connector assembly
pressure values must be obtained into the reservoir while tilting both the
with adjustment of the fuel pump reservoir and connector assembly upward.
relief valve only.
CAUTION
RESERVOIR REMOVAL
Careshould be exercised to avoid
a. Remove the access panels from the cross threading the connector
wing as required to gain access to the into the reservoir. Al so avoid
reservoir. bending or distorting the fuel
strainer which is attached to the
b. Remove the tape from the flapper end of the connector, for it may
valve. become entangled in the foam
inside of the reservoir.
c. Remove the nipple clamp.
e. Thread the connector assembly
d.
Remove the connector assembly by into the reservoir until it will advance
unscrewing it from the reservoir. no further with threads freely engaged.

e. Compress the reservoir (squeeze f. Tighten the nipple clamp.

by hand) into a small circumference and
remove St through the fuel access ring in g. Connect the fuel line to the con-
the wing surface. nector assembly.

3-8F C16
 BEECHCRAFT
DEBONAIR/BONANZA 33 SERIES
SHOP MANUAL

DETAIL A FUEL CELL

CJ-40 ond olt´•r (40 PAL.)
FLOW
GAGE
FUEL
MANIFOLD

METERING
SUPPLY CONTROL
UNIT
RETURN
RESERVOIR
VENT ASSY
FUSELAGE
DRAIN FUEL LINE
INJECTION
PUMP
7117 RESERVOIR a
CONNECTOR ASSr
SEAL
FOR EASIER INS~AL-
DRAIN
*USABLE 22 GAL. LATION AS SHOWN

(37 GAL. OPT.)

’1 ii CHECKVALVE IN PHANTOM

CLAMP
CONNECTOR
ASSY.

HIGH PRESS.

I
~b70;r!
I
C

I PUMP 4

L
LIIIIIII~I)
ill´•´•l,
L L H FUEL TANK r
R H FUEL TANK
1I0*L.[~OOIL.OC1.1 A II A 15 GAL. 1 40 OAL. OPT.
InrCT~IYILVr
FUEL
~C FWO (STRAINER
VENT
OUANTITY O DRAIN O c.DR*INJ O DRAIN O FUEL OUANTITI
TRANSMITTER VENT
STRAINER STRAINER TRANSMITTER
CHECK CHECK
VALVE LOW PRESS.BOOST I
SEAL VALVE
FLUSHVENT Jllllllf DRAIN
PUMP pll(ll~.
VE~T VENT
iELUSHVENI

Fuel System, CJ-1 and after

Figure 3-6C
h. Remove the tape from the flapper FUEL CELL LEAK CHECK
valve and check the valve for free play
and good sealing. Check the lower surface of the
a.

wing for evidence of fuel seepage, par-

i. Check to make sure the reservoir ticularly around vents and drains.
is positioned properly on the bottom of
the fuel cell. b. If there
of seepage, is evidence
the the lower plates
j. Close all access openings used for
remove access
and inspect the area between the fuel eel
on
winq
installing the reservoir. and the wing skin for fuel seepage.

NOTE c. Check the fuel cell nipples to

determine if material can be scraped off
The parts of the nonbaffled fuel with a fingernail.
cells and the baffled fuel cells
are not to be interchanged. When d. If the fuel cell has been
installing a new fuel cell, use repaired, drain and purge the cell.
only those items pertaining to
that particular cell being e. Inspect the condition of the patch
ins tailed. The fuel probe and using a mirror and flashlight.
strainer for the nonbaffled cell
with reservoir, for example, is NOTE
considerably longer than the one
for the baffled cell and may dam- If fuel seepage is noted and the
age the cell if installed in the fuel cells appear hard and brit-
baffled cell. tie, if small cracks are apparent
around vents, drain outlets or

C16 _
3-8C
 BEECHCRAFT
DEBONAIR/BONANZA 33 SERIES
SHOP MANUAL

interconnect nipples or if mate- material which in turn could cause

rial can be
scraped off the nip- fuel seepage.
ples with a fingernail, the fuel
cell should be replaced. Fuel f. If
seepage from a fuel cell is
cells having repairs that show confirmed, the age and general condition
ev i de nce of bl i sters or loose o the cell should be con s i de red Fuel
edges should also be replaced. cells that are pliable and are not hard-
ened and have nipples that material cannot
CAUTION be scraped off with a fingernail may be
considered repairable.
Bladder type fuel cells on air-
planes which have been in service NOTE
for extended periods may have
become hard and brittle. These Goodyear ETC-39 construction type
fuel cells should be checked very fuel cells removed from the air-
carefully. The inspection at this plane for any reason MUST BE
time could cause cracks in the REPLACED and MUST NOT BE REPAIRED
or REINSTALLED in the airplane.

C?6 __
3-8H
~30

FUEL
MANIFOLD
n

e METERING *USABLE
SUPPLY CONTROL
22 GAL. (37 GAL. OPT.)
w I I I IUNIT
´•j 1 IIII´•II RETURN
FUEL
’TI FLOW
VENT
GAGE
DRAIN INJECTION
Y PUMP

3 SEAL
O DRAIN

h)
Ln
VI
t ,B CHECK
VALVE

Il
P
I,
n, rs ’rs

~L´•
\´•o‘ollll -r111 1 ´•o,
’r´•
AUX.
o
m PUMP o
s

1. ~1111111111111111111)11111(11111111113 C
111111111~
II I I;-
n
L H FUEL TANK R H FUEL TANK

;tP 25 GAL. 1 40 GAL. OPT.

SELECTOR VALVE
25 GAL 1 40 GAL. OPT.
(D

FWD TRAINER 3 DRAIN)

oaalNO ODRIIN ""’"IXI..
VtNT .Il~i..´•" STRAINER
VtNT
STRAINER CHECK
CHECK
VALVE
VALVE
SEAL
I(IIIIL 511111.~
FLUSH VENT DRAIN
SFLUSH VENT
VENT VENT

1360311

W
cb
 5
I
8
I
2s) i Y
8
23

22i (109
20
1~0

i. Fresh Air Intake (Engine Baffle)

2. Fresh Air Intake (Nose)
3. Mixer Valve (Cold position) i o, "rY13
4. Overboard Vent
5. HeatedAir IY 14
6. Heater Muffler
7.Fresh Air (R. H. Wing Root)
8.R.H. Forward Outlet
9. Defroster Control
10. Cabin Heat Control i
11. Aft Outlet (R. H. Front Seat)

I~
I
12. Aft Cabin Outlet
13. Fixed Exhaust (Below Baggage Door)
14. Overhead Fresh Air Outlet (Optional)
15. Fresh Air Intake (Serials CE-26 thru CE-248,
ii II
CJ-l thru CJ-13)
II

$i
16. Fixed Exhaust (Fuselage Bottom)
I
17. Fresh Air Intake (Serials CE-1 thru CE-25)
18. Overhead Fresh Air Shutoff Control (Serials CE-26 I
thru CE-248, CJ-l thru CJ-13)
19. Overhead Adjustable Exhaust (Serials CE-26 thru I
CE-248, CJ-l thru CJ-13) I
20. Individual Overhead Fresh AirOutlets
21. Overhead Fresh Air Scoop and Diffuser I
Valve Control (Serials CE-1 thru CE-25)
22. Aft Cabin Heat Control jl
23. Vent Shutoff Control
_---------!
Fresh Air (L. H. Wing

26.24. retsorfeD)tooR
25. L.H. Forward Outlet jj 33-4171

27. Overhead Fresh Air Shutoff Valve (Serials CE-26

thru CE-248, CJ-l thru CJ-13)

Figure 3-8. Heat and.Vent System (Serials CE-1 through CE-248; CJ-l through CJ113)

3-10 Issued: November, 1970

 ~9 0, s

6
3/
24~ 1

21

20 (9

i ~O

19

1. Fresh Air Intake (Engine Baffle)

I---------’’~
r

2. Fresh Air Intake (Nose) II

3. Mixer Valve (Cold Position)
4. Overboard Vent
5. Heatedqlr I
6. HeaterMuffler
7. Fresh Air (R.H. Wing Root)
8. R.H. Forward Outlet
Il mmmmn

9. Defroster Control
10. Cabin Heat Control
11. Aft Outlet (R. H. Front Seat) I
12. Aft Cabin Outlet
13.
14.
15.
Fixed Exhaust (Rear
Overhead Fresh Air
Fresh Air Intake
ofHatshelf)
Outlet (Optional)
I

ii II
I

a/
16. Fixed Exhaust (L. H. Side of Fuselage)
17. Overhead Fresh Air Shutoff Control
18. Overhead Adjustable Exhaust
19. Individual Overhead Fresh Air Outlets
I
20. Aft Cabin Heat Control I
21. Vent Shutoff Control I
22. Fresh Air (L. H. Wing Root) i
j
II
23. L.H. Forward Outlet
24. Defroster
25. Overhead Fresh Air Shutoff Valve

Figure 3-8A. Heat and Vent System (Serials CE-249 through CE-289; CJ-14 through CJ-25)

Issued: November, 1970 3-10A

 1~ (4)(2). (5

3
6

24

Isl

*ICD-1256 and after) (17

19

1. Fresh Air Intake (Engine Baffle)

´•j C___L---L--C
2. Fresh Air Intake (Nose)
3. Mixer Valve (Cold Position) II
4. Overboard Vent
5. Heated Air O
6. Heater Muffler
7. Fresh Air (R. H. Wing Root)

6’i
8. R.H. Forward Outlet
g, Defroster Control
10. Cabin Heat Control
11. Aft Outlet(R. H. Front Seat) I
12.
13.
Aft Cabin Outlet
Fixed Exhaust (Rear Of Hatshelf) I I
14. Overhead Fresh Air Outlet (Optional)
15. Fresh Air Intake I
16. Fixed Exhaust (L. H. Side of Fuselage) i
17. Overhead Fresh Air Shutoff Control I I I I
~:;i: 18. Overhead Adjustable Exhaust 15
19, Individual Overhead Fresh Air Outlets
20, Aft Cabin Heat Control
I
21. Vent Shutoff Control
22. Fresh Air (L. H. WingRoot) j
23.
24.
25.
L.H. Forward Outlet
Defroster
Overhead Fresh Air Shutoff Valve
i!
Y:~:
Removed at CJ-129 and after

Figure 3-88, Heat and Vent System (Serial CE-290 thru CE-315; CJ-28 and after; CD-1255 and after)

3´•10B 08
 1~ (4)(2). ~5
C 7’1\
I
24

i\
\I‘

4Yi--c 8

20 o
1(CE-SSOanda~ter) OI 19

-1
i. Fresh Air Intake (Engine BaMe)
2. Fresh Air Intake (Nose)
3. Mixer Valve (Cold Position)
II
4. Overboard Vent
O
6.5. HeatedAirHeater Muffler
7. Fresh Air (R. H. Wing Root)
8. R.H. Forward Outlet mmmnn

dlI dII
9. Defroster Control I
10. Cabin Heat Control
I
11. Aft Outlet (R. H. Front Seat)
12. Aft Cabin Outlet
13. Fixed Exhaust (Rear of Hatshelf)
14. Overhead Fresh Air Outlet (Optional) i I I

I
15. Fresh Air Intake I
16. Fixed Exhaust (L. H. Side of Fuselage) I
17. Overhead Fresh Air Shutoff Control i I
18. Overhead Adjustable Exhaust ~15
19. Individual Overhead Fresh Air Outlets
20. Aft Cabin Heat Control
I
21. Vent Shutoff Control
22. Fresh Air (L. H. Wing Root)
23.
24.
25.
L.H. Forward Outlet
Defroster
Overhead Fresh Air Shutoff Valve
ji I

Removed at CE-679 andafter

334(74*

Figure 3-8C. Heat and Vent System (Serial CE-316 and after)

C8 3-’106
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM A light independent of the air conditioner circuit is actuated

(CE-602 and after) by the condenser air scoop door, through the left landing
gear (nose gear on the 28 volt airplanes) uplock position
The optional air conditioning system is a recirculating 12.000 :switch normally closed contacts (closed with the landing
gear extended) which will indicate door open condition
BTU cooling system. The system is controlled by a switch a

on the fuel control panel and 2 pressure sensing switches, while the gear is extended.
The circuit breaker, and switch which control the system are
located on the fuel control panel (console) and placarded The highpressure sensing switch (mounted on the right
A/C CIR BKR or AIR COND OFF H1 LO respectively. forward face of the front spar carry through) monitors the
the ex-
pressure of the refrigerant from the compressor to
At CE-748, CE-772 and after the circuit breaker was moved pansion valve. The pressure switch will
normally closed high
to the right hand subpanel, actuate, causing open circuit to the compressor clutch
an

coil when the pressure in the line reaches 390 10 psi, which

The air conditioner is wired through the right landing gear disables the compressor. The high pressure switch automati-
uplock position switch, the left landing gear safety switch, cally resets to the normally closed position when the refri-
and the normally closed full throttle switch. With the air gerant falls to a safe pressure. There is also a high pressure
the fir-
conditioner operating on the ground the control circuit is poppet relief valve, located on the forward side of
wired through the left landing gear safety switch, which fully ewall, which will relieve the system if the pressure reaches

450 psi, and will reseat again at 400 psi.

opens the condenser air scoop door located under the air-
plane. With the gear extended and the throttle fully opened.
action of the full throttle switch will remove power from the The low pressure switch, (mounted below the entrance door
forward of the spar) normally open (acluated closed when
compressor clutch coil, and drive the condenser air scoop
door closed. When the airplane is airborne and the landing the system is charged with refrigerant) senses system pres-

retracted, power is transmitted from the normally sure. The switch closes, actuating the compressor clutch
gear is
open contacts of the full throttle switch (actuated closed
coil, when the line pressure exceeds.s to 8 psi. The low
when the throttle is fully open) through the right landing gear pressure switch will prevent damage to the compressor
should oil and/or refrigerant loss
uplock position switch (actuated closed when the gear is up occur.

and locked) through the normally open contacts of the door

flight position limit switch (actuated closed when the gear is The condenser air scoop door under the airplane automati-

up and locked) through the normally open contacts of the cally opens when the air conditioner is turned on. On the
door flight position limit switch (actuated closed when the ground the door opens to approximately 3 inches. In flight
condenser is retracted) the condenser air scoop actuator.
to the door opens to approximately 3/4 1/4 O inch. The air

The actuator then operates to extend the condenser to the scoop door actuator limit switches are preset with no adjust-

flight position. The limit switch, which is located at the aft ment required.
end of the door, is no longer actuated at this position and
The belt-driven compressor, which is coupled with a mag
power is then transferred to the compressor clutch coil,
permitting operation of the compressor. netic clutch, compresses the refrigerant to a high pressure.
high temperature gas. This gas passes through the condenser
The entire air conditioner system is protected by a 30 amp where cooling air removes heat from the gas, condensing it

circuit breaker. The compressor and condenser air scoop to a liquid state. The liquid then passes through the expan-

sion valve where it is metered into the evaporator at rate of

door have the added protection of a 10 amp fuse, located on a

the forward side of the firewall in front of the copilot. This 55psi, which allows most of the liquid to return to a gas. The
allows the evaporator fan to be operated after the compres- heat required for evaporation is absorbed from cabin air

sor has been removed from the system by a blown fuse. passing over the evaporator coils. After passing through the
evaporator, the refrigerant returns to the compressor at a
reduced pressure.
On CE-602 through CE-7;1 except CE-748 the entire air
conditioner system is protected by a 30 amp circuit breaker.
The compressor and condenser air scoop door have the MAINTENANC~ OFAIR CONDITIONER
added protection 10 amp fuse. On CE-748, CE-772 and
of a

after the entire system is protected by a 10 amp circuit Servicing the air conditioning system consists of periodically
breaker. The compressor and condenser air scoop door are checking the refrigerant level, checking compressor oil level
protected by two separate T amp fuses. The fuses are located and changing the system air filter. Recharge the system

on the forward side of the firewall in front of the copilot. whenever the refrigerant level is low, air has entered the
This allows the evaporator fan to be operated after the system or components carrying refrigerant are replaced. Re-
compressor has been removed from the system by a blown frigerant leaks may be detected by inspection with flameless
fuse. leak detector.

C9
3-10D
PRECAUTIONARY SERVICE MEASURE contaminant may cause leaky valves or wear in the compres-
sor. Moisture may not only freeze into ice at expansion
Before any service is attempted requires opening of
which valve, but can also cause the formation of hydrochloric or

refrigeration plumbing or units, the person doing the work hydrofluoric acids in the system.
should be thoroughly familiar with instructions on servicing
the system. He should follow very carefully these instruc- All precautions should be taken to prevent damage to fittings
tions when performing the tasks that will maintain this sys- or connections. Even minute damage to a connection could
tem in a proper functioning order. cause it to leak. Any fittings getting grease or dirt on them
should be wiped clean witha cloth dampened with alcohol.

The major reasons for these measures are for safety and to Do not use chlorinated solvents such as trichloroethylene for
prevent dirt and moisture from entering the system. Dirt

C9 3-10E
 A
is

12

18

Is

17

i. Compressor
2. High Pressure Line
3. High Pressure Pellet Valve
4. High Pressure Sense Switch
5. Condenser
6. Receiver Dryer and Sight Glass
7. High Pressure Service Valve
8. Expansion Valve
9. Evaporator
lO. Low Pressure Service Valve
11. Low Pressure Limit Switch
12. Low Pressure Line
13. Louvers Air Duct
I
14. Air Duct
15. Fan
16. Fan Motor
17. Condenser Actuator
18. Compressor Clutch and Pulley

J~80S18

Figure 3´•8D. Air Condit(oning System (CEb02 and atter)

3´•10F C9
cleaning agent, for they are contaminants. If dirt, grease or COMPRESSOR EEL T TENSION ADJUSTMENT
moisture gets inside lines and cannot be removed, the lines
will have to be replaced. Use a small amount of clean 500 After 3h to 48 hours operating time, a new belt will stretch to

viscosity refrigeration oil (Texaco Capella E or equivalent) its normal operating length. The belt tension should be
on all line joints and dip the O-ring in this oil before assembl- checked at this time and adjusted (by tightening the adjusc-
ing the joint. This will help in making a leak-proof joint. ment bolt on the idler
pulley bracket) so that a belt tension
gage, placed at a point midway between the idler pulley and
the compressor will register a belt tension of 70 pounds or
WARNING with a 0.13 inch deflection with 6.38 pounds load. After
adjusting the belt tension, be sure the belt has ample clear-
A face shield should be worn when servicing the ance on all sides.
lines: refrigerant, coming in contact with the

eyes, can cause the loss of sight.

COMPRESSOR EEL TREMOVAL

CAUTION a. Open the engine cowling to gain access to the

compressor belt.
Insufficient torque, when tightening tubing con- b. Loosen the adjustment bolt on the idler pulle>
nections. can result in loose joints and excessive bracket to remove tension on the compressor belt.
torque can result in deformed joint parts. Either c. Remove the compressor bell.
condition can result in refrigerant leakage.

When connecting aluminum fittings in the refrigerant sys- COMPRESSOR EEL T INSTALLA TION
fittings to 18 21 foot-pounds and all
tem, torque all 5/8-inch
IR-inch fittings to Ii 13 foot-pounds. a. Install the compressor belt over the compressor
pulley, idler pulley and drive pulley.
NOTE b. Tighten the adjustment bolt on the idler pulle)
bracket to increase tension
the compressor belt as stated
on

The receiver-dryer is the last assembly to be in COMPRESSOR BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENT.

connected. This is necessary to ensure max- c. Close the engine cowling.
imum moisture protection of the refrigeration
system.
CONDENSER REMOVAL
For charging the air conditioner or checking the oil see

Section 1. a. The condenser is located beneath the airplane nft

of the main spar carry through.
b. Remove the beacon light.
AIR CONDITIONING FUNCTIONAL TEST c. Remove the fairing aft of the condenser.
d. Disconnect the hoses at the condenser and cap the
With the engine running at 1000 rpm and the system on, 4 openings.
observe the sight glass, if refrigerant appears milky or bub- e. Remove actuator bolts.
bles appear charge the system as noted in CHARGING THE f. Remove the attach bolts.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM in Section 2. Check the g. Remove the condenser.
system for leaks using a flameless leak detector.

CONDENSER INSTALLA TION

SYSTEM LEAK DETECTION
Place the condenser in position.
A reduction of system cooling ability or the presence of b. Secure condenser by the attaching bolts.
bubbles in the refrigerant, may indicate a partial loss of c. Install the actuator bolt.
refrigerant. Check for bubbles in the sight glass located d. Connect the hoses to the condenser.
under the copilot seat. The sight glass should be checked e. Install the fairing.
during operation at maximum available ambient and cabin f. Install the beacon light.
temperatures. Streams of bubbles past the glass or foam in
the glass indicates an inadequate refrigerant quantity. If a
loss of refrigerant is suspected; an inspection of the system CONDENSER CONTROL RIGGING
plumbing should be carried out to locate the source of the
leak. Large leaks may be located by the appearance of oily The condenser is controlled by the electrical circuitry that

spots where oil has been carried out by escaping refriger- controls the airscoop Check condenser for proper
actuator.
ant. Small leaks, which are much more difficult to locate, operation. If condenser fails to operate, check for open
may be detected by detergent bubbles, or an electronic circuit between the PRESS AIR COOL switch and control
detector, actuator.

CQ 510G
 PRESSURE
´•a GAGE
REFRIGERANT
SUPPLY
VALVE W CHARGING CYLINDER

ELECTRIC SIGHT
CLUTCH GAGE
SUCTION

ENGINE-DRIVEN
COMPRESSOR
O(SCHARGEII ’-L1-I VALVE

t LOW
PRESSURE
GAGE
HIGH II II PRESSURE
PRESSURE II II SWITCH
SWITCH

OIL-AIR
SEPARATOR
SUCTION
ERVICE VALVE I JGAGE VALVE VALVE
(SUCTIO)J)VNDE
COPILO_T’SSEAI I VALVE I VACUUM
PUMP

SERVICE VALVE
(HICH PRESSURE
UNDER COPILOf’S DISCHARGE
AGE
SEAT

t RECflYER
O DRYER b
SIGHT GLASS
EXPANSION UNDER COPILOT’S
VALVE SEAT

EXPANSION
VALVE
I t
IN OUT

CONDENSER

IN OUT

EVAPORATOR
L~h CLAMPED ON
OUTSIDE OF
PLUMBING
Jsaola

Figure 3-8E. Air Conditioning System Schematic

3-10H C9
COMPRESSOR REMOVAL VENTILA TION BLOWER INSTALLA TION

a. Open the right engine cowling.

b. Remove electrical leads from compressor clutch a. Position the blower assembly on the evaporator.
terminals. b. Bolt the assembly to the evaporator.
c. Connect the electrical leads to the motor.

d. Install the spar cover.

WARNING e. Install the pilot and copilot seats.

The air conditioning system is a high pressure

system. When disconnecting a line. loosen the
fittings just enough to bleed off pressure slowly. EVAPORA TOR REMOVAL
then disconnect the fitting.
a. Remove the pilot and copilot sears.

b. Remove the filter cover and filter.

c. Disconnect refrigerant lines at the compressor. c. Remove the cover assembly from over the ducts.
Cap refrigerant lines and compressor fittings. d. Disconnect the drain tubes and remove the tape
Remove compressor belt as noted in COMPRES-
d. between the evaporator and duct.
SOR BELT REMOVAL in this Section. e. Remove the spar cover.
e. Remove the compressor mounting bolts and nuts f. Remove the ducts.
and remove compressor. g. Loosen the refrigerant inlet line connection ju\t
enough to allow all pressure to bleed off.
h. Remove the electrical leads from the motor.

COMPRESSOR INSTALLATION i. Remove the refrigerant lines and cap the four
openings.
a. Position compressor on the mounting bracket and j. Remove the bolts attaching the evaporator to the
install the attaching bolts and nuts. floor. and remove the evaporator.
b. Install compressor belt as noted in COMPRES-
SOR BELT INSTALLATION in this Section.
c. Adjust belt tension as noted in COMPRESSOR
BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENT in this Section. EVAPORA TOR INSTALLA TION
d. Remove caps from lines and compressor and ins-
tall lines to the fittings on the compressor. a. Position the evaporator in the airplane and install
e. Install the electrical leads to the magnetic clutch. the bolts attaching it to the floor.
f. Service the system with oil as noted in CHECK- b. Attach the refrigerant lines.
1NG COMPRESSOR OIL LEVEL in Section 2. c. Attach the electrical connections to the motor.
g. Charge the system with refrigerant ~s noted in d.
Install the ducts. tape (No. 27 Minnesota Mining
CHARGING THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM in Sec- and Manufacturing Co.) the duct to the evaporator. and
tion 7. connect the drain tubes.
h. Close the engine cowling. e. Install the spar cover.
f. Install the filter and filter cover.

g. Install the cover over the ducts.

VENTILA TION BLOWER REMOVAL h. Install the pilot and copilot seats.

a. Remove the pilot and copilot seats.

b. Remove the spar cover. EVAPORA TOR FIL TER REPLACEMENT
c. Disconnect the electrical leads from the motor.
d. Remove the bolts which attach the blower to the The evaporator filter should be replaced on condition. To

evaporator and remove the blower. gainaccess to the filter remove the screws in the filter cover.

Cg 3-101
 TROUBLESHOOTING
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

TROUBLE PROBABLECAUSE REMARKS

i. Insufficient cooling. a. Blower not functioning. Repair.

b. Obstructed to disconnected b. Remove obstruction or

air duct.

c. Compressor clutch or belt c. Repair or adjust.

slipping.

d. Evaporator filter clogged. d. Replace.

e. Refrigerant level low. e. Leak-test and recharge.

f. Expansion valve malfunction. I. Replace.

No cooling. a. Blown fuse. loose connection. a. Check conneclion\, fu~c.

continuit)

b. Blower not functioning. b. Repair.

c. Leak in system. c. Leak-test and recharge.

d. Compressor valves d. Repair or replace.

inoperative.

3. Excessive vibration of a. Overcharged. a. Correct refrigerant charge.

unit.
b. Air in system. b. Purge and recharge system.

c. Mount or compressor bolts c. Tighten.

loose.

d. Drive pulley loose. d. Tighten.

4. Noisy unit. a. Compressor oil level low. a. Add oil.

b. Defective belt. b. Replace.

c. Low refrigerant Level. c. Add refrigerant.

d. Fan hitting shroud. .d. Align and tighten shroud.

e. Defective compressor. e. Replace.

5. Hissing in evaporator a. Low charge. a. Add refrigerant.

module.

h. Chatter or knock in a. Defective expansion valve. a. Replace.

evaporator module.

7. Belt slipping. a. Loose belt. a. Adjust.

b. Overcharged. b. Correct refrigerant level.

c. Air in system. c. Evacuate and recharge.

3-105 C9
 TROUBLESHOOTING
AIR CONDIT1ONING SYSTEM
(ContCnued)

TROUBLE PROBABLE CAUSE REMARKS

8. Excessive belt wear, a. Pulleys not in line. a. Align pulleys.

b. Belt too tight, b. Adjust or replace.

c. Pulley groove wrong size, c. Replace.

d. Belt width wrong. d. Replace.

9. Broken belt. a. Check all causes.above a. Correct or replace.

BRAKES is within 1/32 inch from the landing gear torque flange. When
the thickness of the ring is .432 inch or less, replace the ring

BLEEDING BRAKES disc,

NOTE

Pressure bleeding is the

only procedure recom- Airplane serials through CD-1271, CE-173 through
CD-1106
CE-300 and CJ-I and after are equipped with multi-disf
mended. Electrical and gravity bleeding are ac-
brakes. Brake wear is determined by measuring the distance
ceptable alternatives only when pressure bleed-
Item the flat surface of the brake housing near the piston to
ing is impossible.
the back of the pressure plate. The brake should be over-
hauled when the distance is .350 inch or more. Replace the

a. Remove back plate, pressure plate, and bleeder ’Otafi"B disc when their thickness is .104 inch or less. Re-
cap.
place the stationary disc when worn to a thickness of .100
until bleeder is inch or less. Replace the piston if the diameter is worn to
b. Rotate brake cylinder screw
.990 inch orless. Replace the pressure plate’if worn to .150
straight up.
half inch ot less.
c. Loosen bleeder screw approximately one turn

and bleed brakes according to standard shop practices.

Airplane serials CD-1272 and after and CE-301 and after, are

NOTE equipped with single disc brakes. The brake lining should be
replaced before the metal back plate is exposed through the
abrasive surface, This can be checked visually without dis-
To avoid spilling brake fluid during bleeding, a
piece of plastic tubing may be pressed over the assembling the brake. The minimum allowable thickness for
bleeder screw,
the abrasive surface is 3/32 inch above the rivet. The brake
disc should be replaced when it’s thickness measures .330
inch.

d. Wipe brake fluid off brake cylinder.

e. Reassemble.
TIRES

DETEFIMINING Bf;lAKE LINING WEAR

REPLACEMENT OF SIDEWALL INFLA TION VAL VE
The brake lining wear is indicated by the thickness of the (Prior to CD-635)
linings. On Model 33, A33 and B33 airplanes prior to serial
The U. S. Royal tubeless tire sidewall inflating valve used on
CD-640 except CD-625, CD-632, CD-637 and CD-638 that
the Model 33 airplanes can be replaced without removing the
use the Cleveland brake installation, when a lining has worn

to a thickness of 3/32 inch, it should be replaced. The brake tire from the airplane. This short cut has been achieved by
dise should be replaced when worn to a thickness of .227 providing a I/Cinch diameter hole in the clip end of later U.
S´• Royal inflating needle containers. through which the
;i,~h or lessairplane serials prior to CD-388. and on
on
valve can be forced into the tire by means of a standard tire
airplane serials CD-388 through CD-639 except CD-625, CD-
632, CD-637 and CD-638 the brake disc should be replaced gage.

when worn to a thickness of .345 inch or less.

Replacement by this quicker method is
of the sidewall valve

CD-632, CD-637, CD-638 described in the following procedural steps. If the new type
Airplane serials CD-625,
CD-640 through CD-1105, CE-1 through CE-172 are equip-
U´• S´• Royal inflating needle container is not available, the
with a ring disc type brake assembly. Replace the linings
older type can be reworked by dressing down the tapered
ped
end to obtain a hole of I/Cinch diameter.
on this type of brake when the bottom of the brake housing

C17 3-10K
 a Set the parking braker. inrlilll an airplane iaek, inflating needle body againrl the valve to mrure propel
;Ind deflate the lire realing
b paise the \idewall inflating valve head. grarp it L lnfl;se ihe tire in the ulunl manner;lnd remove the
with pliers.and pull the v;dve out of the lire lack
c Check the replacement valve by lubricating the

inflating needle on the pad in the container and inserting the

needle completely through the center of the valve F1EPUICEMEN~ OF SIDEWALL IIVFLA TION VAL VE
J Remove the lubrication pad from the inflating nee- (CD-635 m~u CDB13)
die container and insert the replacement valve in the larger
end of the container thead of valve out) Align the valve slot The ridewall inflating v;dve for the Nylun.luhelr´•~ lire u\ed
with the contiliner clip to facilitate positioning the valve in with the (ioodyear brake inntallalion requirr~.l replacemem
the tire with the valve slot pointing toward the center of the procedure different from that used for the lire\ covered in
wheel: thir arrangement provider maximum valve service the preceding paragraph
life
e Uling a tire gage incorporating a plunger with a ;I Alter lubricating the end of the tnllaling needle hi
square or triangular lip, preferably rquare. work the valve pressing it against the glyrrrinc-nlur.lcd pad in the case.
down to the 114-inch diameter hole in the clip end of the lubricate the guide hole of the blue-colored valve *tth the
container. needle
I. Lubricate the edge of the valve orifice in the tire b. lXflate the tire b) in,erting the lubricated end of
with a small ilmounl of cold patch rubber cement ih inflating needle into the guide hole of the valve wllh;l
g. position the container end itnJ valve ill the lire rotary motion. taking care not to lures the needle If the
valve orifice, place a handkerchtef or cloth over the head of needle doer not enter eslily~ relubricate il;lnd the guide hole
the lire gage to protect the hand. and apply ruflicient pre- of the valve
\sure on the gage to force the valve stem out of the container c Alter removing the valve core from the inllating
into the tire ISee illullralionl The round of the valve rhoul- needle to insure complete deflation of the lire remove the

der being forced into the tire should be clearly audible. tire from the wheel
d (ul ofl the inside shoulder of the defeclive ~iJc-
wall valve utlh;l p.tir of pinccr~ or \lde-cuttmg pliers

CAUTION

Uuring ihir oper;lliun, use r´•xlrenlu c;lre to avoid

ditmagtng either the lire liner or the .tdeuall

rubber under the he;ld of the as rn)

I~T g damage of the rubber in eilher of these areas

m;l) impsir or destro! the retention

properties of the lire

Working from the uul\iJe of the lire. r.ltse the blue

h Citrefully work the container free of the valve c;ln he pulled out of the lire with;l
v;llve head until the v;llve
head p;lir II( pliers
i Check to see that the valve slot is pointing toward

the center of the wheel for maximum valve service life. f Pl;cc;l *mall;mluunt ulculd patch rubber cement

i L.ubrtcale the inflating needle with the lubrtcalion into the valve hole on the tlreand on the thtckcr plrl of the

pad and insert the needle into the valve. press and roll the tapered purttun of the replacement valve

C(O J-1(
 g. After wiping the cement from that part of the RIGGING THE LANDING GEAR
replacement valve projecting inside the tire, grasp the

tapered end of the replacement valve between thumb and Rigging the Bonanza 33 landing gear is the same as described

forefinger and, slowly rotating the valve to spread the rubber in the BEECHCRAFT Bonanza 35 Shop Manual. However.
cement between the body of the valve and the valve hole in at serials CD-1255 and after ilnd CE-3~ and ;~fter. the

the sidewall of the tire, exert a strong steady pull until the mechanical nose gear position wils deleted.
head of the valve is seated in the recess provided for it on the

outside of the tire.

NOTE
h. side-cutting pliers,
Using pincers or cut off the

tapered extension of the replacement valve at a point just Battery voltage is not sufficient to properly
below the shoulder on the inside of the tire. When the taped cycle the landing gear during rigging. On serials
extension of the replacement valve has been cut off, the CE-74X. CE-772 and after and CJ- 149 itnd after.
molded hole is visible at the center of the valve. a 28.25 .25 volt auxiliary power unit capable
of maintaining the initial setting within volt

i. Inflate the tire in the usual manner and mount it on during the extension and retraction cycles is
the wheel. recommended. On earlier serials use an

auxiliary supply capable

power of m;lintaining
14.25 .25 volts during the extension and
retraction cycles.
LANDING GEAR

EMERGENCY SPEED REDUCTION NOTE

In an emergency, the landing gear may be used to create If the airplane is not equipped with an external
additional dn~g. Should disorientation occur under power receptacle, a jumper cable can be used to
instrument conditions, the lowering of the landing gear will connect the external power suppl) to the

reduce the tendency for excessive speed build-up. This battery. Care should be taken to match

procedure would also be appropriate for a non-instrument pol;~rities.

rated pilot who unavoidably encounters instrument
conditions or in other emergencies such as severe

turbulence. CAUTION

Excessive oper;ltion of the landing gear motor

NOTE without proper cooling may cause damage to the
motor. Allow a short period of time for cooling

In event of emergency gear extension at speeds after each extension and retraction cycle.
above normal extension speeds, inspect gear
retract rods, and gear doors for damage or

distortion before the next flight.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Although similar in design to the landing pear used on older

LUBRICATION OF LANDING GEAR UPLOCK Bonanzas, the main landing year installed on all Bonanza 33
ROLLERS airplanes and the nose landing gear strut installed on I
serials CD-37 I and after do internal stop. This
not contain an

The uplock roller bearings should be lubricated with modification affects the maintenance and servicing of the
M1L-G-23827 grease, every 100 hours or any time that, while gear and necessitates the servicing precaution which

cleaning the wheel well, the bearings are subject to follows.

degreasing with solvent under pressure. The uplock bearing
is now lubricated by means of a grease fitting installed in the The torque knees provide the extension stop for the lower

uplock bearing bolt. shock absorber cylinder assembly. Do not attempt to

remove the torque knees, the torque knee pins, or the bolt

connecting the torque knees, when the airplane has been

NOTE placed on jacks, without first deflating the shock absorber
assembly. When they are disconnected the cylinder is free to
The grease fitting on the drag leg, directly above slide out of the upper barrel assembly. It is permissible to
the uplock roller bearing, does not supply remove and replace, or perform other maintenance to the

lubrication for the uplock roller bearing. torque knee assembly when the weight

3-12 C10
of the aircraft rests on the struts. If the landing gear is
removed from the airplane, the strut must be deflated
INSTALLING THE LANDING GEAR MOTOR
before the torque knees, torque knee pins, or the
connecting bolt may be disconnected or removed.
NOTE

The gearbox on the motor should be packed

NOTE with approximately I ounce of grease MIL-G-
813$-2 before the motor is installed on the ac-

Gear will not fit in gear well if torque knee is not tuator.
correctly reassembled.

a. Position the motor on the actuator. and install the

Do not attempt interchange the upper and lower torque
to
attaching bolts.
knees when replacing or reinstalling the knees. The cam, b. Safety the attaching bolts.
which holds the lower shock cylinder in the upper shock
c. Connect the electrical wiring at the landing gear
absorber, is cast to the lower torque knee. When the torque
dynamic brake relay.
knees are correctly installed, and the strut is fully extended, d. Connect the heater duct. and install the access
the cam should contact the bevel on the lower shock
plate.
absorber, stopping its downward travel. Install the cabin front seats.
e.

NOTE LANDING GEAR SAFEN SYSTEM (OPTIONALI

The welded steel truss, formerly used to secure The optional landing gear safety system funclion~ through
the main landing gear to the wing structure on solenoid in the landing gear position switch in
the action of a
airplanes prior to serial CD624, was replaced conjunction with a three-position safety system switch. a
by a lighter, aluminum forging with bolted relay and diode mounted on the front spar. two pressure
extrusions. The bushings installed at the attach
switches mounted on the inboard side of the left main land-
points of the to this time
landing gear prior ing gear wheel well, and a microswitch located adjacent to
required provisions for lubrication. The grease
the existing throttle position warning switch in the engine
fittings provided to facilitate this lubrication
compartment.
have been removed from the present landing
gear, since it is equipped with prelubricated Each pressure switch is connected into the pitot and static
Dress-in bushings that do not require such system. The pressure switch in the gear-up circuit is ac-
servicing. Other than this, all additional tuated by the pressure differential that exists between the
modifications made to standardize the landing and static systems and will close with increasing pre-
pitot
gear were of a nature that necessitated no
ssure at approximately 90 mph. The pressure switch in the

change in maintenance and servicing gear-down circuit will close with decreasing pressure at I’O
procedures. mph. When the landing gear position switch is in the UP
position and an air-speed of 90 mph has been attained, the
pressure switch in the gear-up circuit closes and actuates a

REMOVING THE LANDING GEAR MOTOR relay mounted on the front spar. thus completing the circuit
and retracting the landing gear. A diode locks the relay in the
a. Remove the cabin front seat bottom(s). closed position until the retraction cycle is completed. For
b. Remove the access plate over the motor and dis- the preceding to occur, however, the microswitch in the
connect the heater duct from the outlet. engine compartment must also be in the open position. This
c. Disconnect the electrical wiring at the landing gear microswitch is actuated by the throttle control when the
dynamic brake relay, throttle is advanced sufficiently ~or the manifold pressure
d. Remove the three landing gear motor attaching gage to register approximately IX inches Hg.
bolts and remove the landing gear motor. Conversely, if the throttle is retarded beyond

C9
1
3-12A
the position corresponding to approximately 18 inches system fail to function properly, the followinF checks
Hg of manifold pressure, the microswitch will close. and adjustments may be accomplished:
If at the same time the microswitch closes the air-
speed has dropped below 120 mph, the resultant
pressure differential between the pitot and static CHECK OF SYSTEM WITH SAFETY SWITCH IN
systems will actuate the pressure switch in the gear- TEST POSITION
down circuit. With both the microswitch and pressure
switch closed, the current flow through the solenoid
will cause the landing gear position switch to drop 1. Place the throttle in the closed or retarded posi-
into the DOWN position, thus completing the gear- tion.
down circuit.
2. Place the battery master switch Oh’. The landing
If the landing gear position switch is placed in the UP gear circuit breaker may be either In or OUT.
position while the landing gear safety system is in
the ON position, the landing gears will retract only 3. Place the landing gear safety system switch in
when the following conditions are mutually fulfilled. the momentary full up (TEST) position. Noise or
movement of the solenoid in the landing gear position
1. The airplane must have attained an airspeed of switch indicates that the automatic landing gear ex-
at least 90 mph, tension part of the system functioning properly.
is
The on-off switch returns normally to the ON posi-
2. The throttle setting must have been advanced tion unless the pilot intentionally places the switch in
sufficiently to have produced a manifold pressure of the OFF position.
approximately 18 inches Hg.

NOTE MICROSWITCH ADJUSTMENT

The throttle switch is set at the factory to The microswitch cannot be accurately adjusted on the
close when an appro~dmate manifold pres- ground. Before the microswitch is adjusted, it must
sure produced at about 3000 feet of al-
is be ascertained that the throttle warning horn switch
titude. The approltimate manifold reading is properly set (see this section for proper setting of
for aircraft serials prior to CD-925 was the throttle warning horn switch). The microswitch
20 inches Hg and 18 inches Hg on aircraft
serials thereafter. Airplane serials with
may then be adjusted as follows:
I
the throttle switch set at the factory at 20 i. With the airplane in flight, mark the throttle con-

inches Hg may change to 18 inches Hg trol at the control panel when the manifold pressure
setting. Flight Manual Supplement P/N gage registers approximately 18 inches Hg.
35-364170-5, dated June 8, 1965 or later
should be incorporated in the airplane if 2. With the airplane on the ground, move the throttle
the manifold pressure is changed to 18 until the mark on the control is aligned with the con-
inches Hg. trol panel just as it was when the mark was made
while the airplane was in flight.
By the same token, the landing gear automatically
extends under the following conditions: 3. Adjust the microswitch until the cam clicks the
switch closed with the throttle in the position indica-
1. The airspeed must have dropped below 120 mph, ted in the preceding step.

2. The throttle setting must have been retarded

enough for manifold pressure to have dropped below PRESSURE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT
approximately 18 inches Hg.

The safety system switch is a three position switch, The pressure switches are preset and will not nor-

with normally ON or OFF positions. The switch also mally require adjustment. Because of the built-in
contains a momentary or test position for checking tolerance of these switches, they should not be
that the system is functioning properly. When re- tampered with unless radically out of adjustment,
leased from the test position, the switch returns to that is unless the switch in question fails to actuate
the ON position. at an airspeed within 2 mph above or below the setting
recommended for it. Even then the system plumbing
and electrical wiring should be checked to ascertain
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENT that the source of trouble is not something other than
improper adjustment of the pressure switches.

No maintenance is required for the landing gear Place the aircraft

1. on jacks.
safety system, other than replacing defective units
or checking the electrical wiring for condition, se-

curity of attachment, and tightness of electrical con- 2. With the master switch ON, the landing gear cir-
nections. The switches are preset and adjustment cult breaker ON, and the landing gear warnin~ circuit
will not normally be required; however, should the OFF, advance the throttle to its maximum position.

3-13
 3. Place the landing gear safety position switch in the THRO TTL E WA RNING HORN A DJUSTMENT
ON position.
a. With the aircraft in flight, place the propeller
4. Place the landing gear position switch in the UP control in low pitch and slowly pull the throttle control out
position. until 12 to 14 inches of manifold pressure is indicated.

Clamp a section of soft rubber tubing over the

5. b. hlarktheposition of the throttlecontrol.

pitot head inlet, making certain that the connection is

airtight. c. After the aircraft has landed and with the engine
shut-down, position the throttle control at the mark made

6. Crimp the end of the

tubing and roll it up until the in step b.

airspeed indicator registers 90 mph. The landing gear will

start retracting immediately if the pressure switch is d. Adjust the micro-switch at this position until the

properly adjusted, cam "clicks" the switch closed.

e. Secure the switch in this position.

CAUTION
TESTING OF LANDING G~A R LIMITSWITCHES
To avoid
rupturing the diaphragm of the
airspeed indicator, the rubber tubing must be It is of the utmost importance that the landing gear limit
rolled SLOWLY. and brake limit switches operate in the correct sequence to

prevent malfunction of the switches and possible damage to

the component parts of the landing gear electrical circuit
and to the wiring itself.
7. If the landing gear failed to retract in the preceding
step, turn the master switch OFF and adjust the pressure Use the following procedure for the testing of the switches.
switch (upper switch of the two installed in the left main Switches are preset as to sequence of actuating. SpecialTool
wheel well) as follows: 35-590063 (Box Assembly, Landing Gear Circuit Tester)
may be used to set the switches. The tester incorporates
a. Secure the rolled up tubing so that it will hold three lights, six lead connections, placard and batteries. The
the airspeed indicator reading at 90 mph, six lead connections connect to the wiring on the landing
gear limit switches as follows:
b. Connect a continuity tester across the contacts
of the pressure switch, then turn the adjustment screw until 1. Down limit switch: Connect red wire on the left
the switch closes at 90 mph on the airspeed indicator, side of the tester to the normally closed connection marked
on the switch. Connect the red wire on the right side of the
t3. Turn the master switch ON and roll up the rubber tester to the common connection on the down limit switch.

tubing until the airspeed indicator registers 130 mph, then This is a normally closed switch and the light will be on.

secure the tubing so that the airspeed indicator will hold When the switch is actuated the light will go out.
that reading.
2. Warning horn switch: Connect black wire on the
9. Retard the throttle. left side of tester to the common connection on switch and
black wire on right side of tester to the
normally open side
bleed off of the switch. This is open switch and the light
normally
10.Slowly pressure until the airspeed a

indicator registers 120 mpl´•1. The landing gear will extend will be off. When the switch is actuated the light will come
immediately if the pressure switch is properly adjusted. on.

3. Down brake switch: Connect white wire the left

ii. Should the landing gear fail to extend, turn the on

master switch OFF and adjust the pressure switch (lower side of tester to the normally closed connection on the
switch of the two installed in the left main gear wheel well) switch and connect the white wire on the right side of the
asfollows: tester to the common connection on the down brake
switch. This is a normally closed switch and the light will be
a. Secure the rolled tubing so that it will hold the on´• When the switch is actuated the light will go off.
airspeed indicator reading at 120 mph.
4.The down switches actuate in the following
b. Connect a continuity tester across the contacts sequence: limit switch, warning switch and brake switch.
of the pressure switch, then turn the adjustment screw until
the switch closes at the 120 mph reading on the airspeed 5. Up limit switch: Connect the red wire on the left
indicator, side of tester to the normally open connection of the
switch and connect the red wire on the right side of the
12. Turn the master switch ON and check the landing tester to the common connection of the up limit switch.

gear safety system through the complete cycle of operation. This isa normally open switch and the light will be off.

When the switch is actuated the light will go on.

3-14 Cp
 BEECHCRAFT
DEBONAIR/BONANZA 33 SERIES
SHOP MANUAL

6. Up-brake switch: Connect the PRESSURE SYSTEM (AIRPLANE SERIALS

white wire on the left side of the tester CD-1119 AND AFTER, CE-180 AND
to the normally closed connection of the AFTER, CJ-1 AND AFTER)
switch and connect the white wire on the
right side of the tester to the common The pressure system provides the air
connection of the up-brake switch. This required for operation of the autopilot
is a normally open switch and the light and instruments. Air pressure from an

will be off. When the switch is actuated, externally filtered engine-driven dry air
the light will come on. pump is regulated by a pressure relief
regulator valve mounted at the RH side of
7. The up- swi tche s actuate in the engine compartment aft of the rear
the following sequence: limit switch and engine baffle. The air is then routed
then the brake switch. through an inline system filter and an
adj ustabl e orifice ton serials prior to
8. Refer to adjustment of limit CE-485 and CJ-52) to the instrument panel.
switches in the Model 35 Shop Manual if If an autopi lot is installed, air is
the switches are found to be out of plumbed off the pressure system prior to
adjustment. the adjustable orifice.

LANDING GEAR POSITION LIGHT NOTE

ADJUSTMENT
If pressure pump has
the failed
The landing gear position lights on the or operationof the instruments
instrument panel are operated by the up indicates a fluctuation of the
indicator switches and down indicator system pressure or a decrease in
switches on each gear. the system pressure, check for
excessive pressure, a partial
Before making the following adjustments, restriction in the lines, a filter
place the airplane on jacks. partially obstructed, or pressure
loss resulting from loose con-
Main Gear: With the gear down and locked, nections. These conditions may be
adjust the down switch (located on the checked by: (1) removing the
forward side of the main gear V-brace) so inline filter from the system and
that the overtravel of the switch plunger checking it for obstructions by
is .050 inch after the switch is actuated comparing the resistance to flow
to the ON position. With the gear in the with a filter.
new Use a dry, low
full up position, adjust the up switch pressure air source (max. of 10
(located inboard of the forward side of psi) for this test. If air flow
the main gear V-brace) so that the over- resistance in the filter removed
travel of the switch plunger is .050 inch from the airplane exceeds that of
after the switch is actuated to the ON the new filter by more than 1.0
position. psi, replace the filter. (2) Check
all connections for tightness.
Nose Gear: With the gear in the down and (3) Check the lines for bends,
locked position, adjust the down switch kinks and excessive carbon. With
(located on the right side of the wheel the di screpancy repai red, or

well) so that the overtravel of the switch whenever any components are
plunger is .050 inch after the switch is replaced in the pressure system,
actuated to the ON position. With the gear adJust the pressure system as
in the full up position, adjust the follows:
switch (located on the right side of
wheel well) so that overtravel of the
snitch plunger is .050 inch after the CAUTION
swi tch is actuated to the ON position.
Check the instrument panel to be sure the Never use a pressure pump which
indicator lights correspond to the gear has been dropped or mishandled.
position. Never jam or force the pump onto
the engine mounting pad.
Recheck the switch adjustment and remove
the airplane from the jacks.

016 3-14A
 *--REMOVED AT SERIAL CE-485
ARROW INDICATES
AND AFTER CJ-52 AND AFTER
DIRECTION OF AIR
FLOW VENT LINE

-ovEReonRo

r II/I
I’

GYRO PRESSURE INDICATOR

DIRECTION GYRO
ADJUSTABLE
ORIFICE ’n’ GYRO HORIZON

FILTER

TEST GAGE
REGULATOR -------1 I r~l TEST
GAGE

AUTOPILOT MASTER
TURN
VALVE
COORDINATOR
FILTER
36603´•9

Figure 3-8F. Pressure System Schematic

FILTER CARTRIDGE
(FOR REPLACEMENT ORDER P/N 09-14-1)
COVER

SPACER58-910021-~
MOUNT

NAS43003-24

AN315-3R NUT

NUT

r´•I
I
AN936A1
LOCK WASHER
FILTER BASE
AN970-3 WASHER

AN960PD1716 WASHER FILTER RETAINER

NUT AND WASHER
STD´•lsO´•le

Figure 3-8C. 1JZ-1 Intake Air Filter

3-148 Os
 BEECHCRAFT
DEBONAIR/BONANZA 33 SERIES
SHOP MANUAL

PRESSURE SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT of the orifice, the pressure regulator

should be replaced.
a. Install a test gage (0-10 psi) at
the "out" side of the pressure regulator. NOTE
If the airplane is equipped with a
BEECHCRAFT autopilot, an additional test Airplane serials CE-485 and after
gage (0-10 psi) should be installed in the and C3-52 and after, do not have
turn coordinator supply line. (See Figure the adjustable orifice. Pressure
3-8F.) system adjustment for those air-
planes will be the same as noted
b. On airplanes without an in steps "a" through "b"
autopilot, the pressure regulator should
be adjusted to obtain a reading of 4.5 psi
on the test gage at the pressure regulator e. Remove the test gages from the
with the engine operating at 2300 rpm. On airplane.
airplanes equipped with an autopilot, the
pressure regulator should be adjusted to
obtain a reading of 5.0 +.O -.5 psi on the NOTE
test gage in the turn coordinator supply
line with the engine operating at 2300 rpm When the airplane is equipped with
and the autopilot ON. Normally, a pressure four air-driven gyros and an air
of 6.5 psi on the test gage at the pres- driven autopilot, it is necessary
sure regulator is sufficient to obtain the to have a higher capacity dry air
5.0 +.O -.5 psi reading at the turn coor- pump in order to safely operate
dinator. Rotating the adjust screw on the the gyros and/or the autopilot
pressure regulator clockwise increases system.
pressure and counterclockwise decreases
pressure.
PRESSURE SYSTEM FILTERS

CAUTION
The pressure system has an air filter
Under no circumstances should the located between the gyro instruments and
reading at the pressure regulator pressure regulator. This filter should be
exceed 7.0 psi. removed and replaced every 500 hours or
sooner if conditions warrant. An addi-
tional air filter is provided at the
c. Locate the orifice
adjustable ambient air inlet, located on the engine
(prior to CE-485 and CJ-52)
the LH side
on baffle. This filter should be removed
of the airplane forward of the instrument every 100 hours and cleaned with solvent
panel near the system filter and loosen and blown dry with air pressure. The fil-
the check nut. Rotate the orifice body ter should be replaced every 500 hours or
(prior to CE-485 and CJ-52) to obtain a sooner if conditions warrant.

reading of 5.0 +.O -.5 in Hg. on the gyro

pressure indicator with the engine oper- On airplane serials CE-452 and after and
ating at 2300 rpm. Tighten the checknut. CJ-40 and after, and those prior airplanes
Check the gyro pressure indicator with the that have complied with Service
engine operating at 1500 rpm. The pressure Instructions No. 0~581-194, will have the
should remain in the green are at this new 152-1 filter installed (see Figure
speed. 3-86) This filter should be replaced
annually or every 300 to 500 hours service
d. After adjusting the orifice (pri- time, depending upon operating condi-
or to CE-485 and CJ-52~ check the pressure tions. The filter element must not be
on the test gages with the engineoperat- subjected to solvents and must be replaced
ing at 2300 rpm. If the pressure on these if this occurs. Al way s re i n sta 7 1 the
gages has been affected by the adjustment filter cover with the opening facing down.

C16 3-14C~
 BEECHCRAFT
DEBONAIR/BONANZA 33 SERIES
SHOP MANUAL

GYRO INSTRUMENT AIR FILTERS MAGNETO POINT GAP IN INCHES

Bendix S6RN-201 and S6RN-205

REPLACING INSTRUMENT AIR FILTERS main breaker 0.018 +0.006
retard breaker (S6RN-201
only) 0.018 +0.006
The replacement of the air filter in gyro Bendix S6RN-1201 and S6RN-1205
instruments is not considered disassem- main breaker 0.016 a0.003
bly, and usually may be accomplished retard breaker (S6RN-1201
without removing the instrument from the only) 0.016 +0.006
airplane. The frequency of cleaning or Slick 662 and 680 No point gap
replacing air filters will depend upon ~s specified for
service conditions; however, they should the Slick magnetos
be replaced approximately every 100 hours but the points should
of operation. It should be borne in mind, be ready to break
when operating in localities where there open with the timing
is an excessive amount of sand or dust in pin in place and the
the air, that the filter should be timing marks aligned
inspected and, if necessary, replaced at (when viewed through
more frequent intervals. Under extremely the side vent holes)
dusty conditions, it may be necessary to Bendix S6RN-1225 0.016 10.003
inspect the filter daily. A clogged filter
reduces air flow and slows up the rotor, On the Bendi x series magnetos, the
causing a loss of gyroscopic inertia and internal timing and point adjustment
improper gyro indication. should be made at the time of assembly or
overhaul. (Bendix timing Kit No. 11-8150-1
To replace the filter assembly on the is available for internal timing of the
instrument, remove the air filter body- magneto.)
cover by taking out the four fillister-
head machine sc rews Lift out the snap NOTE
ring which holds the filter in place,
remove the filter, and replace it with a For adjustment of contact opening
new one. Replace the air filter body-cover and internal timing of Bendix
and gasket, securing them with the screws, magnetos, refer to Bendix for
If the air filter body-cover is not used, applicable manuals. Magneto con-
the filter may be removed by lifting the tact assemblies should be checked
snap ring past the four protective lugs. after the first 25 and 50 hours
operation and each 50 hours
thereafter.
IGNITION
PREPAIRING THE MAGNETO FOR INSTAL-
LATION ON THE ENGINE
INSTALLATION AND TIMING OF
MAGNETOS BENDIX MAGNETOS

On Bendix magnetos, turn the magneto drive

It is assumed that the magnetos have been in the direction opposite to normal rota-
properly internally timed and points, tion (this keeps the impulse couplers from
adjusted per the applicable Bendix or engaging) until the respective timing mark
Slick vendor publication. To adjust the (v5 ewed through the inspection hole) on
magneto points, other than that specified the distributor gear is aligned with the
in the applicable vendor publication man- divided casting line of the magneto hous-
ual, wi15 alter the magneto "Eap I and
I
ing. Now the magneto is ready to install
cause a weak spark. This interna timing on the engine and to fire number 1 cylin-
and point adjustment should not be made der.
on the airplane. For inspection purposes
the point gap may be checked when the cam
follower is resting on the high point of
the cam lobe. The magneto point gap should
be as follows:

3-14D C16
 BEECHCRAFT
DEBONAIR/BONkNZA 33 SERIES
SHOP MANUAL

SLICK MAGNETOS a. To locate the compression stroke

of number 1 cyl i nder, remove the lower
On Slick magnetos, turn the magneto drive spark plugs from each cylinder except
in the direction opposite to normal rota- number 1 cy linder. Remove the top plug
tion (this keeps the.impulse couplers from from number 1 cylinder.
engaging until the timing marks are
aligned viewed through the inspection b. place the thumb of one hand over
hole), and the timing pin is in place the number 1 cylinder spark plug hole and
through the frame and rotor shaft. Now the rotate the crankshaft in the direction of
magneto is ready to install on the engine normal rotation until the compression
and fire number 1 cylinder. stroke is indicated by positive pressure
inside the cylinder, lifting the thumb off
TIMING THE MAGNETO TO THE ENGINE the spark plug hole.

The engines should be timed as indicated c. After locating the compression

by the following: stroke of number 1 cylinder, locate the
advanced firing position of number 1 cyl-
Continental Engine degrees ETC inder by use of a timing disc and pointer
or the factory installed timing marks on
10-470-3 22 +0 -2 the engine.
IO-470-K 22 +0 -2
~0-470-N 20 +0 -2 NOTE
IO-520-B, IO-520-BA, IO-520-BB 22 +0 -2
On 10-470 series engines, the
The Continental 10-470 series engines and external timing marks are located
10-520 series engines have factory on a bracket attached to the
installed timing marks. Even thoughthese starter adapter, with a timing
engines are equipped with timing marks, a mark on the alternator drive
positive top dead center (TDC) locator and pulley as the reference point.
timing disc may be used to time the
magneto to the engine, or to check the NOTE
accuracy of the engine timing marks.
ON 10-520 series engines, the
WARN ING timing marks are located on the
alternator drive gear. Remove the
The magneto is grounded through plug in front of number 6 cylinder
the ignition switch; therefore, to observe the TDC and advance
any time the switch (primary) wire time marks.
is disconnected from the magneto,
the magneto is in a switch ON or In all cases, it must be defi n i tely
HOT condition. Before turning the determined that the number 1 cylinder is
propeller by hand, disconnect all at the correct firing position on the
spark plug leads to prevent acci- compression stroke, after the crankshaft
dental firing of the engine. is turned in its normal direction of
rotation.
CAUTION
d. If a universal timing disc and
The internal automatic grounding pointer is to be used, install the TDC
devices used on the original locator in the top spark plug hole of
Scintilla S series magnetos have number 1 cylinder.
proven unreliable in service and
do Slowly rotate the engine in the
currentnot
have this be safe,
e.

treat all magnetos as hot whenever piston lightly touches the locator.
the ground lead is disconnected.
To ground the magneto, connect a f. In stall the timing disc on the
wire to the swi tch lead at the propeller spinner and rotate the ti mi ng
filter capacitor and ground the disc until 00 (TC) is located under the
wire to the engine case. pointer.

016 _
3-)4E
 BEECHCRAFT
DEBONAIR/BONANZA 33 SERIES
SHOP MANUAL

g. Rotate the engine in the opposite i. Remove the TDC locator from the
direction to normal rotation until number spark plug hole.
1 piston lightly touches the locator.
j. Rotate the engine in the normal
h. Note the reading on the timing direction of rotation to the compression
disc. Now rotate the disc toward 00 (TC~ stroke of number 1 cylinder and until the
until 1/2 of the reading noted is shown. pointer arrives at the number of degrees
noted last in step "h" (1/2 of the first
noted reading in step "h").

3-14F C16
 k. Rotate the timing disc until the pointer is NOTE

positioned at 00 (TDC).
On Slick series magnetos check the distributor
i. engine opposite the normal direction of
Rotate the le~ld spring to make sure it is located in the
rotation to approximately 5" beyond the specified timing for center of the distributor shaft hole in the
the engine being timed. distributor bearing plate. Before removing the
timing pin and reinst;ll)ing the distributor block
m. Rotate the engine in the normal direction to the housing on the magneto frame assembly, apply a
specified before top center (BTC) firing position (this is to drop of SAE 20 lubricating oil to the oilittl
remove gear backlash). Further movement of the engine bearings.
should not be necessary until the magnetos are installed.

o. Install timing lights on the magnetos.

NOTE p. engine still positioned to fire number I

With the
cylinder specified ETC rotate the right mallnrro in the
at the

Without turning the magneto coupling, hold the direction necessary to cause the points to just break open;l~
magneto in the position it will occupy when indicated by the timing light.
installed on the engine and check alignment of
magneto drive coupling slot, and magneto q. Secure the right magneto.
impulse coupling lugs. If not aligned, pull engine
gear out of mesh (but not out of the oil seal) and r. Repeat steps "p" and "q" on the left magneto.
turn to alignment. Push geilr back into mesh.
s. Recheck the magneto setling to confirm the i ()i

2" has not been exceeded.

n. Place new gaskets on magneto flanges and install
the magnetos carefully so drive coupling lugs mate with slots t. Turn the engine crankshaft a few degree\ in the
of drive bushings. Install holding washers, lockwashers and opposite direction to brine it back vg;tin
normal relation and
nuts, but tighten only enough to permit turning the magnetos until the advance timing mark is under the pointer on timing
for final timing, without looseness. disc. At this point both timing lights should indicate, at the
same time, that the magneto points opened.

NOTE u. If the timing lights dorespond not at the same

time, loosen the that is either

early or late and
The magnetos were prepared for installation, to repeat the process outlined in step "p".
fire number 1 cylinder, in PREPARING THE
MAGNETO FOR INSTALLATION ON THE v. Remove the timing lights reinstall the
ENGINE in this section, electrical leads to the magnetos.

C10 3-15
PROPELLER
Low Pitch 11.2" t 0.3" at 30 inch station.
PROPELLER AND GOVERNOR ADJUSTMENT High Pitch............................... 30.8" at 30 inch station.

Static RPM ..........................................................2600

Hartzeil to Serial CD-372 except

propellers (Airplanes prior HIGH RPM SETTINGS
CD-251, CD-306, CD-315 and including CD-386 and CD-
387). Improper static rpm settings may be due to many factors: the
engine, ignition, tachometers. and fuel system should be
Low Pitch 11 ~.25 degrees at 33 inch station. checked before the governor settings are changed. If
High Pitch. 26 r .50 degrees at 33 inch station, governor or propeller adjustment is required. refer to the
applicable supplementary publication.
Flottorp Propellers (Airplane Serial CD-372 through CD-661,
except CD386 and CD-387, including CD-251, CD-306
and CD-315). SUCTION RELIEF VALVE (VACUUM)

Low Pitch 11.7 -e .2 degrees at 33 inch station. The suction relief valve may be adjusted as follows:
Each blade within .2 degrees of the other.
High Pitch...........30 degrees minimum at 33 inch station, a. Start the engine and adjust the throttle to

approximately 2.000 rpm.

b. Adjust the suction relief valve until the suction
NOTE gage reads 5.5 inches Hg. on airplanes prior to CD-826, turn
the adjusting screw clockwise to increase suction and
McCauley propellers do not need to be installed counterclockwise airplane serials CD-826
to decrease it. On
in any particular position relative to crankshaft through CD-1118 and CE-I through CE-179. turn the
position. adjusting screw counterclockwise to increase or clockwise
to decrease the suction setting,

McCauley Propeller (Airplane Serial CD-662 and after),

Approved as spares on aircraft prior to CD-662 that are NOTE
equipped with 1O-470-K engines.
Refer to the Maintenance Instructions
Low Pitch 12 c
.3, degrees at 30 inch station. (Publication Number 130409) for the proper
Each blade within .2 degrees of the other. suction settings when the BEECHCRAFT New-
High Pitch..................... 39.5 degrees at 30 inch station. Matic Flight Control System is installed.

McCauley Propeller for 1O-520B, IO-StO;BA and IO-520-BB

engines.
STATIC AIR AND PTTOT SYSTEM
Low Pitch 13.3" at the 30 inch station.
High Pitch. 29.2" at 30 inch station. STATIC AIR SYSTEM

Hartzell propeller optional 3-blade for 1O-520-B, 1O-520-BA to safety

Proper functioning of the static air system is vital
and IO-520-BB engines. Install propeller with one blade of flight, particularly flight, so the correct
on instrument
pointing down when number one cylinder is on top dead maintenance of this system, while relatively simple, is a
center. Torque AN8 installation bolts to 65 t 5 foot pounds. procedure which should be followed religiously.

3-16 C12
 CD-l fHROUGH CD-1013

STATIC LINE

ALflMETERJ~
FUEL FLOW INDICATOR
AIRSPEED INDICATOR

CD-1014 AND AFTER,

STATIC LINE CE-I AND AFTER
DRAIN

I PITOT LINE

RATE OF CLIMB INDICATOR

OPTIONAL EMERGENCY STATIC AIR SOURCE I PITOT MAST AND HEAD

CD-899 AND AFTER

Fi.gure 3-9. Pitot and Static System

3-17
The amount of attention required by the static system will hose, Federal Specification ZZ-TS3I, Grade B.
depend largely on operating conditions. Extremes of humidi-
ty or precipitation, or dry, dusty conditions, should be sig-
nals for increased emphasis on static system checks, since NOTE
both are favorable to accumulations of foreign matter in the
ports and lines. On airplanes serial CD-1256 and after and CE-
347 and after, the aluminum static lines are re-

CLEARING STATIC LINES placed by Poly-flo tubing. On serial CD-I’S~

and after and CE-350 and after, the rubber hoses
Blow LOW pressure air through the lines from the discon- that connect the static air line to the instrument
nected line at the airspeed indicator to the static ports. Cover plumbing are replaced by Poly-flo tubing.
each static port separately when blowing to ensure that each
line is clear. Instrument error could result if even one port is
clogged with dirt or foreign matter. PITOT SYSTEM

A functional test of the pitot system can be made by using an

CAUTION observer in the cabin to watch the airspeed indicator while

air pressure is built up artificially by using a section of soft
Never blow air through the line toward the in- rubber tubing as follows:
strument panel; to do so will seriously damage
the instruments. Before blowing back through a. Clamp the rubber tubing over the pilot head inlet, mak-
the line from the instrument panel, be sure that ing certain that the connection is airtight,
the instrument lines have been disconnected, so b. Crimp the end of the tubing and slowly roll it up until
there is no possibility of air pressure reaching an the airspeed indicator registers approximately 100 miles per
instrument. hour.

Drain the static air line by opening the access door on the CAUTION
side panel in the rear baggage compartment (prior toCD- 1014),
and removing the section of rubber hose. On later model To avoid rupturing the diaphragm of the air-
aircraft, (CD-1014 and after, CE-I and after), the rear bag- speed indicator, roll up the rubber tubing slowly.
gage compartment bulkhead must be removed to gain access
to the cap drain. The cap may be removed with an 11/16"
wrench to allow the drainage of any water accumulation. c. Secure the rolled up tubing so that it will hold the
Disconnect the line at the
airspeed indicator and blow this airspeed indicator reading.
line clear. On airplanes equipped with the optional emergen- d~ If there is no decline in the reading after several
cy static air source, be sure that the valve is closed to
minutes, there is no leak in the pitot system.
prevent air being blown into the cabin; this operation may be indicator is
e. If a decline in the reading of the airspeed
done at the time of the 100 hour inspection of the airplane.
observed, check the pitot system plumbing for leaky hoses
and loose connections.

NOTE

CA UTION
Wax or polish applied to the static air buttons
can cause wrong instrument readings. The static
Release the air pressure slowly by unrolling the
air buttons should be cleaned periodically with a
rubber tubing; a sudden release of the air pres-
cleansing solution to ensure that no film exists
on the static air buttons, sure may damage the airspeed indicator.

After the system is checked for leaks, the hose sections

Check the rubber hoses connecting the static air line to the
should be visually inspected for signs of deterioration. There
instrument plumbing and the rubber hose (prior to CD-1014)
are two sections of hose in the pitot system: one
hose at the
or tygon tubing (CD-1014 and after) which forms the static
accessible by removing the inspection door adja-
air line drain, accessible
through the inspection opening in pitot mast,
cent to the mast; and the other hose behind the floating
the left side pane) of the
baggage compartment (prior to
CD-1014), or removal of the rear baggage compartment bulk-
instrument panel which connects the pitot line to the air-
head (CD-1014 and after and CE-1 and after). Hoses with speed indicator, accessible through the access door in the
left side of the firewall. Replace defective hose only with
outer surfaces checkedor cracked, particularly at the bends
hose meeting the specifications described for the static
or connecting points, or which have become hard, should be
replaced. Replace defective hose only with Buna-S rubber System.

3-18 1 C9
ALTERNATORS the battery before connecting the charger to the batrer)´•. Use
a voltmeter to check battery terminal polarity.
SERI/CING THE 70 AMP ALTERNATOR (14 Veft 4. Do not leave the master switch on when the air-
system) plane parked for extended periods. By turning the switch
is
off, you will prevent needless battery drain. The alternator
A 70-ampere, 12-volt, gear-driven alternator is standard switch must be turned OFF when the engine is not running.
equipment on the C33A. The alternator is designed to main- 5. If electrical accessory equipment is to be used for
tain the full 70-ampere output at 1700 rpm, and supply 20 an exceptionally long time when the engine is not running.

amperes at engine idle speed, connect a ground power unit.

6. If at higher engine speeds the charge indicator
A fully transistorized electronic voltage regulator automati- shows a constant discharge, check the alternator (output
cally adjusts alternator output to the required electrical load, control) circuit breakers. If the button is out, push it in to
including battery recharging. Charge or discharge of the reset. If the circuit breaker button pops out again, have the

battery is indicated by the ammeter in the engine gage clus- electrical system inspected and repaired.
ter. A zero reading, which is normal for cruising flight, 7. Never operate the alternator on open circuit with
indicates that the battery is fully charged and that alternator the rotor (field) coil energized, for the resultant voltages ma)
output has been adjusted by the voltage regulator to balance burn the rotor coil or damage the diodes.
the load of the electrical equipment in use. 8. Never use a 1 15 volt test lamp to check the diodes.
for they are not rated to withstand such high voltages.
The alternator field circuit breaker is located on the right 9. Use only a rosin core solder for electrical connec-

hand lower subpanel and the alternator output circuit br- tions; never an acid core solder which has a tendency to

eaker is installed on the left side of the nose wheel well corrode.
cover.

AL TERNA TOR ~B voll system)

A press-to-test overvoltage warning light on the instrument (CE-748, CE-772 and alter) (CJ- 149 and after)
panel will come on, should the alternator be disconnected
from the airplane bus by the overvoltage relay. If an over- On serials CE-748. CE-77? and after and CJ-149 and after a

voltage condition occurs, reset the overvoltage relay by tur- 28 volt 50 amp alternator is used as standard equipment
ning the alternator OFF. If the overvoltage condition persis- although a 100 amp alternator may be installed optionally.
ts after the alternator is turned back ON, have the electrical
system inspected and repaired. The precaution for servicing The alternator output is controlled by a transisterized volt-
the 60 ampere alternator should also be observed for the age regulator/overvoltage relay. Current to excite the alter-
maintenance of the 70 ampere alternator. Complete service nator field is normally derived from the airplane bus
through
information will be found in the manual, listed under the a 10 amp switch/circuit breaker and the voltage re-
vendor publications list in this manual. gulator/overvoltage relay. The alternator is designed to have
a small amount of residual magnetism. In the event the

battery is discharged to the extent that it will not excite the

SERI/ICING THE 60 AMP AL TERNA TOR alternator field, the residualmagnetism is strong enough to
(14 volt system) excite the alternator field if all load is removed from the
airplane electrical system until the bus is brought up to
The 60 ampere alternators are installed as optional equip- proper voltage. When attempting to start the alternator with-
ment on airplanes, serials CD-910 through CD-1254 and as out battery current, turn off all electrical load and operate
standard equipment on airplanes, serials CD-1255 and after. the engine at near cruise speed. In the event of alternator
The alternator will supply all of the normal electrical power failure the alternator sensor will illuminate an annunciator
requirements, even under such adverse conditions as waiting light.
for flight clearance with most of the accessory equipment in
use. After the engine is started, the ammeter will indicate AL TERNA TOR REMOVAL (CE- I and after) (CJ- I and
half or more on the charge side until the alternator has after)
replaced the energy drawn from the battery during starting.
The following precautions should always be observed to a. Access to the alternator is gained through the right
avoid damaging the alternator and wiring. hand cowl door and through the forward opening of the
cowl
i. Be sure the battery master switch and alternator
switch are turned OFF whenrepairs are being made to the CAUTION
alternator voltage regulator.
or

2. If the ground service receptacle or booster bat- The output terminal of the alternator is con-
teries are used, the cables must be connected correctly: nected directly to the master battery relay.
positive to positive and negative to negative. Diodes will be Make sure the battery switch is in the "OFF"
destroyed by reverse polarity connections. position before removing the wires at the alter-
3. If the airplane battery is ever removed or charged, nator or serious damage to the wiring harness
be sure that the charger is correctly connected and that the and alternator may result from accidental groun-
battery is intalled properly. Disconnect the ground cable at ding of the output stud.

C9 3-18A
 Disconnect the electrical SU’e clearance when the alternator is installed in the engine.
b. wiring harness from the
alternator.
c. Remove the attaching bolts. Remove the alter-
nator.
NOTE
AL TERNA TOR INSTALLA TION (28 system) volt
(08-748 CE-772 and after) (CJ- 149 and after) The cotter pin must be installed and then trim-
med. The portion bent toward the alternator
a. Install a new gasket on the alternator flange. housing must NOT touch the thrust washer
when bent over the nut. The portion bent away
from the alternator housing must NOT reach
CAUTION beyond the threads on the end of the shaft.

Do not force the alternator into position or dam- Once thepreceding steps are completed, refer to
age to the drive gears could result.
alternator or ALTERNATOR INSTALLATION ($8 volt s~s-
Care must be taken to assure that the alternator tem and after) for installation of the alternator

pilot enters the crankcase pilot bore squarely. on the engine.

b. on the mounting pad.

Position the alternator
c. attaching nuts and was~iers bringing to a
Install the VOL TAGE ~EOULA TOR ADJUSTMENTS (28 volt system)
snug condition. Torque the nuts to 150 to 180 inch-pounds in (CE-748, CE-772 and after) 1CJ- 149 and aner)
diagonally opposite pairs.
d. Connect the electrical wiring to the alternator. The output of the alternator is regulated by a full!
transistorized voltage regulator located on the right side aft
of the firewall. The voltage regulator is adjusted to 28.50
CAUTION .25 vdc and willautomatically adjust the alternator output to
the required electrical load, including battery recharging.
Never turn the battery switch "ON" until all The voltage regulator is connected to the airplane bus
wiring harness connections have been made and through a 10 ampere switch/circuit breaker.
properly tightened or serious damage to the wir-
ing harness and alternator may result from acci-
dental grounding. NOTE

The voltage regulator is set and sealed at the

f. Start the engine and check for oil seepage and factory. Breaking the seal prior to the warranty
proper operation. limitations voids the warranty. Once the
warranty limitations have been reached and it
PFIEPARA flON FOR NEWAL TERNA TOFI INSTALLA T1ON should become necessary to adjust the voltage
(28 vo/t system) (CE-748, CE-772 and after) (CJ- 149 end regulator, adjustments may be made in the
after) following manner.

The new alternator will be received without the drive gear

and coupling. The drive gear and coupling from the old CAUTION
alternator will need to be installed on the new alternator. The
drive and coupling may be cnanged by following the proce- Observe engine operating limitations.
dures as follows.

a. Remove the shipping spacer and washer (if instal- a. Bring the voltage regulator and alternator up to
led) from the 100 ampere alternator. operating temperature by operating the engine at 1800 rpm
b. Install the woodruff key (if not already intailed), with approximately SOf~ load for a minimum of Is minutes.
coupling assembly and thrust washer. Ensure the bearing b. Connect a precision voltmeter to the circuli
surface (copper color) of the thrust washer is installed to- breaker bus.
ward the alternator, c. Operate the engine at cruise rpm (1500 rpm) with
c. Install the nut and tighten to a torque of 400 inch- the alternator "ON", and the electrical load reduced to a
pounds. If the slots of the castellated nut do not align with minimum.
the cotter pin hole in the shaft, the nut should be tightened d. Check the bus voltage. The voltage reading should
further, but not to exceed 500 inch-pounds. Do not back off be 28.50 .25 vdc. If the voltage reading is not as noted,
the nut to align holes, adjustments should be made as follows:
d. Install an IM324665-302 cotter pin carefully to en- e. Remove the plastic plug labeled "REG" from the

3-188 1=9
Icover of the regulator and adjust the regulator by turning put out of
adjustment and the entire system subjected to
the potentiometer clockwise to increase the voltage and abnormal voltages. Prior to making the adjustment, turn off
counterclockwise to decrease the voltage. Make any all unnecessary electrical and avionics equipment and open
adjustments in small increments and allow 2 or 3 minutes all circuit breakers not necessary for the test.
operation time for the system to stabilize between
adjustments, a. Connect p precision voltmeter to the circuit
breaker bus.

NOTE CAUTION

Final voltage check can best be made during Observe engine operating limitations.

flight or immediately after flight.

b. Operate the engine at cruise rpm (2500 rpm).

f. For final check and adjustment, the engine should c. Monitor the voltmeter to determine the
voltage at
beoperated at cruise rpm (2500 rpm) with the alternator which the overvoltage relay trips and remove the alternator
"ON" and carrying approximately 50% load. from the line. Slowly adjust the voltage regulator to increase
the bus voltage. The overvoltage relay must trip at 32.0 t I
OVERVOL TAGE RELA Y volts.
d. overvoltage relay trips below the 31.0 volts
If the
The electrical system airplanes CE-290 and after, and
on
requirements fails to trip when the bus reaches 33.0 volts
or

CJ-26 and after is protected by an overvoltage relay that measured on a precision voltmeter. the overvoltage relay
disconnects the alternator from the electrical bus whenever must be adjusted. Remove the plastic plug marked O. V. and
overvoltage condition during flight. The pilot is clockwise increase
an occurs turn the adjustable potentiomeler to

warned of this condition by the illumination of the ALT- and coun(erclockwise decrease the trip voltage.
voltage to
OUT light located on the instrument panel. The voltage
regulator establishes a holding circuit from the battery bus
that keeps the overvoltage relay energized. To reset the NOTE
relay and attempt to return the alternator to service requires
isolating the relay from the power source. If an overvoltage To allow the overvoltage relay to reset all power
condition occurs in flight the following procedure may be must be momentarily removed from the unit.
used:

i. Momentarily move the BATTERY switch (some e. adjustment.

Recheck the
models may be placarded BAT-ALT switch) to the OFF .75 volts.
f. Readjust the voltage regulator to 28.5
position. This allows the overvoltage relay to de-energize This adjustment should be checked with the engine running
and the alternator voltage again will return to the bus, at cruise rpm (2500 rpm) and the alternator on and stabilized
2. If the overvoltage condition does not recur, continue to noted in VOLTAGE REGULATOR ADJUSTMENTS.
use the alternator, g. Replace the plastic plugs over the adjustable
3. Should the overvoltage condition persist and the potentiometers.
voltage relay again disconnects the alternator, turn the
ALTERNATOR switch to the OFF position and minimize STARTER
electrical current consumption.

STARTER REMOVAL (00520 engine) fCE-I and af-

OVE~VOL TAGE RELA Y ALhIUSTMENTS (28 volt system) terl (CJ- 1 and after)
(CE-748, CE-712 and after) (CJ- 149 and after)
a. Access to the starter may be gained through the

right hand cowl door.

b. Disconnect the electrical wiring from the starter.
CAUTION c. Remove the two hex nuts and washers from the
mounting studs, and remove the starter.
This adjustment should only be performed in the
airplane in cases of most extreme necessity, STARTER INSTALLA TION engine! (CE- I and
because an error following the procedures
in
after) (CJ-I and after)
could result in damage to the airplane electrical
equipment, a. Install a new "0" ring on the flange of the starter.

b. Position the starter on the mounting pad.

c. Install the attaching nuts and torque the nuts to
If it is necessary to adjust the overvoltage relay and it is not 200-220 inch-pounds.
feasible to make the adjustments on the bench, it may be d. Connect the electrical wiring to the starter.
made on the airplane. To make this adjustment the alternator e. Start the engine check for oil seepage at the
to
is used as a power source, and the voltage regulator must be mounting flange and check for proper operation.

Cg 3-~BC
 installation. Saturate the felt oiling pad in the commut;llor
STARTER OVERHAUL
end head with SAE 20 oil. Allow excess oil to drain out
before installing end head on motor. Put a light film of
Refer toapplicable Vendor Publications for complete tests
Lubriplate #777 on the drive end of the armature shaft
and maintenance procedures.
before and after installing the drive end head.

STARTER LUBRICA TION (0-520 engine) CAUTION

DELCO-REMY (00-1 thru CE-T71, except 08-748) (CJ-l Do not clean the starter in any tank
degreasing
thru CJ-148) or dissolving solvents. Avoid excessive
grease
lubrication.

When the motor is disassembled for any reason, lubricate as

follows
STARTER BRUSH REPLACEMENT (0-520 engine)

a. Oil wicks, if present, should be resaturated.

DELCO-REMV (08-1 thru CE-’I;I1, axcapt 00-748) (CJ-1
b. Bushings and the armature shaft should be coated with
thru CJ-148)
a small amount of Delco-Remy Lubricant No. 1960954.
c. The drive assembly should be wiped clean.
if the brushes are excessively worn when compared to a new

brush, they should be replaced. Make sure the brush holder\

are clean and that the brushes are not binding in the holders.
CAUTION
The full brush surface should ride on the commutator to give
Do not clean in any degreasing tank with grease
or proper performance. Check by hand to ensure that the
brush springs are giving firm contact between the brush and
dissolvingsolvents; this will dissolve the lub
ricant in the clutch mechanism. the commutator. If the springs are discolored or distorted.
they should be replaced.

PRESTOLTTE (08-1 and attar) (03-1 and ´•t~

d. The roll type overrunning clutch requires no

lubrication.
Brushes must be replaced when they have worn down to;l
e. Avoid excessive lubrication.
length of 1/4" or less. Refer to Prestolite service bulletin
ASM-I for brush replacement procedure. There should he a
PRESTOLITE (08-1 and attar) (CJ-1 and attar) spring tension of 32 to 40 ounces with new brushes. Measure
with a spring scale hooked under the spring at the brush. Pull
on a line opposite the line of force exerted by the spring and
Soak new absorbent bronze bearings in SAE 20 oil before
take the reading just as the spring le;tves the brush.

3-180 09
 ELECTRICAL UTILIZATION LOAD CHART (28-Volt System)

Airplane serials CE-748, CE-772 and after; CJ-149 and after

The following specifies the electrical load for each piece equipment, either standard or optional, available on the airplane.
of
Based on this information, the total electrical load for the airplane may be determined. Intermittent items should not be figured
into the total figure since the short duration of their usage will not significantly airer the standard load.

The electrical load has been divided into 4 catagories as follows:

a. Continuous load (standard equipment)
b. Continuousload (optional equipment)
c. Intermittent load (standard equipment)
d. Intermittent load (optional equipment)

Under no condition shall the total continuous electrical load be more than 80% of the total alternator capacity. Total continuous
load consists of loads listed as continuous and the avionics receiving loads. Transmit loads are intermittent loads.

NOTE

The loads listed continuous loads are for equipment which will be operated for periods
as

of 15 minutes orlonger. However, the intermittent loads and the avionics transmitting loads
should beconsidered for determining possible overloading during shorter periods of time.
i.e., takeoff and landing.

CONTINUOUS LOAD (1BVolt System Standard Equipment)

EQUIPMENT NUMBER PER AMPS

AIRPLANE EACH TOTAL

Indicator, Flap Position and P C Board 1 .06

Indicator, Fuel and P C Board 2 .02 .04

Inverter, Electroluminescent 1 .50 .50

Instrument, Engine I .32 .32

Heater, Pitot 4.60 4.60

Potentiometer, Light Dim 4 .03

Relay, Annunciator Dim 1 .04 .04

Relay’, Master Battery 1 .50 .50

Sensor, Alternator Out .04 .04

Turn Coordinator 1 .40 .40

Voltage Regulator 1 3.00 3.00

Clock, Panel 1 .01 .01

LIGHTING

3rd and 41h Reading Light Z .30 .60

Cabin Light 2 .17 .34

Elevator Tab 1 .04 .04

C9 3-1BE
CONTINUOUS LOAD (28 Volt Syetem Stenderd Equipmont Continued)

NUMBER PER AMPS

EQUIPMENT
AIRPLANE EACH TOTAL

Flap Position 1 .04 .04

Glareshield Flood 12 .17 2.04

Tail Position 1 1.02

Wing Tip Nav Light 2 .93 1.86

OAT 1 .04 .04

Fuel Select .04 .08

1 .04 .04
Compass

Air Conditioning
1 .86 .86 (1,
Actuator, Condenser Door
Clutch 1 1.70 1.70
Compressor
1 13.50 13.50 (2)
Condenser

1 .20 .20
Clock, Digital

Electrothermal Prop Anti-Ice

1 10.00 lo.oo
(2 Blade)
1 15.00 15.00
(3 Blade)

1 .01 .01
Ammeter

1 .10 .10
Timer

1 5.00 5.00
Power Supply, Strobe

LIGHTING

.30
5th and 6th Seat Reading

Power Supply, Strobe 1 .00 5.00

Clock, Control Wheel 8-Day 1 .04 .04

Instrument, Post Light (Single) 26 .04 1.04

Instrument, Post Light (Dual) 37 .04 1.48

Instrument, Wedge Light (Sing1e) 14 .024 .34

Instrument, Wedge Light (Dual) 16 .024 .38

Map 1 .30 .30

Rotating Beacon, Lower 1 3.22 3.22

Rotating Beacon, Upper 1 3.22 3.22

Tail Nav/Strobe 1 1.02

(I) Intermittent Operation

(2) Unit operates in gear down position only

3-18F Co
INTERMITTENT LOADS (2&Voll System Standard Equipment)

EQUIPMENT NUMBER AMPS

AIRPLANE EACH TOTAL

Cigarette Lighter 2 6.00

Flap Motor I 11.00 I 1.00

Flasher, Gear Warning 1 .04 .04

Horn, Gear Warning 1 .20 .20

Horn, Stall Warning 1 .20 .20

Landing Gear Motor 1 40.00 40.0013)

Pump, Auxiliary Fuel 1 3.00 ~.00

Pump, Auxiliary Fuel 1 3.00 3.00 14,

Relay, Dynamic Brake 1 1.75 1.25

Relay, Starter 1 3.30 3.30

Starter, Engine 1 100.00 100.00

Relay, Landing Gear Latch I .OH .08

LIGHTING

Alternator Out 1 .04 .04

Courtesy Light 2 .17 .34

Door Ajar 1 .04 .04

Landing Gear Indicator 4 .04 .16

Landing Light I 8.93 8.93

Condenser Door Open 1 .04 .04

INTERMITTENT LOADS (28 Volt Syetem Optional Equipment)

Actuator, Elevator Trim .85 .85

Resistor, Trim Shunt .38 .38

LIGHTING

Taxi Light 1 8.93 8.93

(3) Peak current after initial start-up load

(4) Used only when dual auxiliary fuel pumps are required

C9 3-tBO
STANDBY GENERATOR SYSTEM serial CE-613 and after, CJ-105 and after the standby
generator overvoltage relay was moved to the structure
A standby generator system is provided to power essential forward of the control column, close to the center line of

equipment in the event of loss of electrical power on the the airplane. On serials prior to CE-674 the overvoltage
main system, relay will actuate at 15.7 .I volts. On serial CE-h74 and
after the overvoltage relay will actuate at 16.0 .3 volts

The standby generator system is an independent electrical and remove standby generator from service should the.
the

system incorporated into the main system in such a manner standby voltage regulator fail. The overvoltage relay will
to furnish power only to essential engine instruments, turn reset when the input voltage is removed. When the

coordinator and navigation and communication system. A overvoltage relay is actuated it bypasses the ON-OFf:
diode in the circuit from the battery to the standby switch to lock the relay in the actuated position until the

generator system prevents the generator from furnishing engine is shutdown, at which time the regulator will reset.
any power to the battery, but allows
the battery (if Generator and battery fuses are on the upper forward side
serviceable) to supply power to the essential equipment in of the firewall and the bus and circuit breakers are on the
the event of inadequate output or failure of the standby forward side of the cabin. The power relays are located
two

generator. on the upper right aft side of the firewall. Maintenance of

the system is limited to isolating a defective component and
replacing it in accordance with accepted electrical
NOTE maintenance practices. Refer to the troubleshooting guide
for probable trouble and corrective action.
The circuits from the battery to the standby
generator system and the battery to the stall
warning system are always alive, even though 28 I/OLT SYSTEM
the battery switch may be in the OFF position.
On airplane serial CE-834 and after, and CJ-149 and after a

28 voltstandby generator is offered as optional equipment.

The standby generator system should only be used when It is mounted aft of the right magneto on the engine

there is a loss of electrical power on the main electrical accessory case. Cooling air for the generator is picked up
system. As soon loss of electrical power is evident,
as a from the engine baffle on the left side of the engine.
turn the alternator/generator and battery switches OFF.
(This is to prevent possible damage to the main system if a The switch and voltmeter are located on the right side of
short exists therein, and to battery power for lowering
save the instrument panel. The switch is placarded OFF ON
the flaps and gear if the problem is determined to be only a GENITEST. The voltage regulator/overvol~age relay is
faulty alternatorlgenerator). After turning the swithces mounted aft of the firewall and controls the generator
OFF, turn the standby generator switch ON. output to a standby bus bar.

The standby generator is self exciting and requires no

14 VOLT SYSTEM external electrical power for it to function, although it does
require at least 1950 engine rpm to function adequately.
The standby generator (optional on CD-1290 and after, CJ- This standby system will supply sufficient power to operate
31 through CJ-148, CE-347 through CE-747) requires an essential instruments such as turn coordinator, fuel

engine rpm of at least 1700 to function adequately. With the quantity, oil and cylinder temperature, Comm-l and Comm-
engine running at 1700 rpm, place the standby generator 2, transponder, audio amplifier, panel voltmeter,
switch momentarily to the TEST position. The GEN TEST glareshield light, and standby panel light. The generator will
and BAT TEST lights will illuminate, indicating that the produce a continuous 6.5 amps at 28 volts or for
battery and generator are both supplying power, intermittent (1 minute on 2 minutes off) operation Ii amps
at 24 volts with a minimum engine speed of 1950 rpm.

The standby generator is located on the accessory drive pad

of theengine. The ON-OFF-TEST switch and the GEN The standby generator system is controlled and protected
TEST and BAT TEST lights are located above the NAV by its own voltage regulator/overvoltage relay. The
COMM XFER switch on the instrument panel. The regulator will control the voltage at 28.50 .50 volts. The
terminal board, zener diode and number one transistor overvoltage relay will remove the standby generator from
(which controls the conductance of the number two the circuit should the voltage reach 32.0 0.1 volts.

transistor) is located on a bracket attached to the rear of the Although the overvoltage relay is set to trip and remove the
ON-OFF-TEST switch. The number two transistor is generator from the circuit at 32.0 0.1 volts it is not
located in the engine compartment on the lower left side, sensitive to small voltage spikes of short duration. Should a
transient voltage spike cause the overvoltage relay to trip
On serials prior and CJ-105 the overvoltage relay
to CE-613 removing the generator from the system. it may be reset in
and rheostat are on the lower aft side of the firewall in the flight by moving the switch momentarily to the
vicinity of the landing gear warning horn and flasher. At GEN/RESET position.

3-18H C11
FLAP SYSTEM

NOTE CAUTION

In event of emergency flap extension at speeds Excessiveoperation of the flap motor without
above the normal extension speeds inspect cooling may cause damage to the motor.
proper
flaps for damage or distortion before next Allow a short period of time for cooling after
flight. each extension and retraction cycle.

FLAP POSITION INDICATOR AND ADJUSTMENT The flap limit switches are mounted on a bracket and
installed on the outboard side of the inboard flap track in the
On Model C33 airplanes serials CD-1044 and after and on left wing panel. The limit switches control the travel of the
Model C33A airplanes serials CE-60, CE-77 and after a flap flaps by breaking the circuit to the nap motor at the exrrrme
position indicator is installed in place of the flap position limits of travel. They are accessible by lowering the flap~.
indicator lights. An adjustable flap position indicator
transmitter is installed on the flap actuator in the left wing
just forward of the rear spar to transmit flap travel gage TWO-POSITION FLAPS
readings.
To adjust the flap to up position, loosen the screws of the
a. Adjust the flap travel limit switches, controlled switch assembly so that the assembly can pivot on the
by left flap, to provide the col´•rect up and down travel of forward elongated hole. Adjust the switch as necessary to
the flaps. (Refer to FLAP LIMIT SWITCH stop the flaps in up position. Actuate the flap switch to the

ADJUSTMENT.) down position and measure the degrees of travel. (Proper

b. Run the flaps full down and check the flap degree of travel is 30" 0" 2".) Adjustment of the down
position indicator for 1003~e flaps. If down flaps are not position of the flaps is made on the downlimit switch.
indicated, loosen the transmitter attachment bolts and
adjust transmitter fore and aft or rotate slightly until the
reading is correct, then tighten the transmitter attaching ~HREE-POSITION FLAPS
bolts. and alYe~ CE-816 and after)
(CJ-150

c. Run the flaps up and check the indicator for up On the three-position flaps, flap travel is adjusted by
the

flaps reading. moving the limit switches. The left flap is rigged first and
then the fight flap is synchronized with it. Rig as follows:

FLAP LIMIT SWITCH ADJUSTMENT

NOTE

NOTE Rig the flaps under a simulated flight load to

reduce overtravel to a minimum after the limit

Battery voltage is not sufficient to properly switches have been adjusted.
cycle the flaps during rigging. On serials CE-
7411, CE-772 and after and CJ-149 and after, a

28.25 .25 volt auxiliary power unit capable of a. Adjust the uplimit switch so the flap will stop at

maintaining the initial setting within .25 volt the up position.

during the extension and retraction cycles is
recommended. On earlier serials use an b. Adjust the 14" limit (inboard) switch in its
auxiliary power supply capable maintaining of mounting slot until the flaps stop at 140 to 14.50 when the
14.25 -t
.25 volts during the extension and flaps are actuated from the up to the approach position (15"
retraction cycles, range). Adjust the 16" limit (outboard) switch in its
mounting slot until the flaps stop at 15.5" to 160 when the
flaps are actuated from the down to the approach position.

c. Adjust the downlimit switch in its mounting slot

until it actuates at 280 to 30" of flap travel.

NOTE
d. Remove the bolt attaching the right actuator to the

If the airplane is not equipped with an external right flap.

power receptacle, a jumper cable can be used to
connect the external power supply to the bat- e. Turn the jackscrew on the right actuator in or out

tery. Care should be taken to match polarities. to align the right flap with the left.

C11 3-i81
 f. Install bolt connecting the actuator to the flap. NOTE

After the flap is completely rigged, adjust the

rubber bumper (flaps down) installed on flap
the
NOTE and aileron dividing rib. Turn the adjusting
screw in or out, as required, to take out play or

Flap jack screws must not bottom in the up stop vibration when the flap is in the up position.
and/or down position and flap rollers must not A distinct change in the sound of the flap motor
bottom in tracks at full up and/or down position, near the completion of the flap up travel may

indicate an excessive outward adjustment of the

bumper
CAUTION
g. Operate the flaps through full travel to ensure that
If the flapsremoved for any reason, place
are the flaps contact the limit switches before they contact the
the main power switch in the OFF position, rubber bumper.

3-18J C11
 FLAP SETTING
CD-1 THROUGH CE-1304 FLAP ACTUATOR
CE-1 THROUGH CE-815
CJ-1 THROUGH CJ-149
FULL DOWN 30" 0" 2"

CJ-150 AND AFTER

FLAP SHAFT
CE-816 AND AFTER AND HOUSINQ~,
APPROACH 15"
a
FULL DOWN 30" 0" 2"

FLAP ACTUATOR MOTOR

FLAP SHAFT AND HOUSING LIMIT SWITCHES

FLAP ACTVATOR
FLAP SYSTEM

ACTUATOR
rFLAP F

o A
;a P
TRANSMITTER

INDICATOR INDICATOR
CD-1044 THROUGH CD-1304 CJ-150 AND AFTER
CE-60, CE-n THROUGH CE-B1B CE-816 AND AFTER
TO ADJUST, LOOSEN MOUNTING
CJ-1 THROUGH 01-149
BOLTS AND MOVE FORE AND AFT
OR ROTATE SLIGHTLY.
FLAP TRANSMITTER AND INDICATOR

APPROACH POSITION

i~--ai-a, DOWNLIMIT SWITCH

SWITCHES

UPLIMIT SWITCHES

SWITCH

CD-1044 THROUGH CD-1304 CE-815 AND

CE-60, CE-77 THROUGH CE-815 CJ-150 AND AFTER
CJ-I THROUGH CJ-149 FLAP LIMIT SWITCHES
36-(61-(4

Figure 3-9A. Flap System

C10 3-19
 TROUBLE SHOOTING

60 AMPERE ALTERNAtOR

TROUBLE INDICATION PROBABLE CAUSE

BATTERY DISCHARGED 1. Loose drive belt.

2. Charging circuit resistance.

3. Voltage limiter malfunction or low setting.

4. Accessory load too high for alternator rating,
5. Corroded or loose battery cable connector
clamps.
6. Metal chips in field relay core gap.

BATTERY OVERCHARGED 1. Voltage limiter set too high for aircraft opera-
ting conditions.
2. Voltage limiter coil open, 14.0 or 0. 04 ohm
resistor open, broken coil lead wire or solder
connection in regulator.

3. Voltage limiter upper contacts stuck closed.

4. Ground wire loose or broken between regulator

and alternator.

5. Shorted cell in battery causing other cells to

use water excessively.

VOLTAGE LIMITER CONTACTS BURNED 1. Shorted or grounded field coil or circuit.

2. Brushed pig-tail wires touching each other at

times.

NOISY ALTERNATOR I. Defective bearing.

2. Shorted rectifier (magnetic noise).
3. L~ose, worn, or frayed drive belts.

4. Bentfan.

5. Loose rear housing or improperly installed

stater.

6. Loose pulley not seated against bearing.

7. Loose mounting bolts.
AMMETER POINTER OR LIGHTS FLICKER 1. Dirty or oxidized regulator contacts.

2. Loose connections in charging system or damaged

wiring harness.
3. Worn bushes. Check brushes every 2000 hours
and replace if necessary.
BURNED CONNECTOR WIRE IN REGULATOR 1. Field terminal on alternator accidentally ground-
ed.
(Connects between the field relay frame and
upper contact bracket on the voltage limiter) 2. Rotor coil shorted to ground or has a "flyfng
short" to ground.

3. Brush retracting wire not removed from alter-

nator.

3-20
STROBE LIGHT b. If the converter won’t start when voltage is first
applied, a small current "kick" is noted and then no
current is drawn; look for a poor solder joint in the
BVLLOCK UNIT ;starting circuit, R2 1. 3K and R1 82 ohms. The cnn-
verter may be started by applying about 2 volts to
The system consists of a solid state power supply the junction of R1 and R2.
unit, a circuit breaker switch on the instrument
panel, a shielded power cable and a single, ventral- c. Low output voltage, but converter operates
or no
mounted xenon gas light. System operation is based otherwise. Using an ohmmeter, look for a shorted
on the capacitance discharge principle. A DC conver- diode in the bridge circuit. In extreme cases, the
ter steps up the aircraft battery voltage to approxi- transformer could have a shorted winding. As a check,
mately 400 volts to charge the capacitor. The trigger disconnect a lead from the transformer secondary. ii
circuit consists of a unijunction oscillator and a the current remains the same, the transformer
silicon controlled rectifier which applies a pulse of should be replaced.
negative voltage to the trigger transformer in the
lamp. The trigger transformer produces an ioniza- d. Low output voltage can be the result of a faultv
tion voltage of approximately 4000 volts to ignite the capacitor C2. Check by removing the positive lead
xenon gas in the lamp. As the lamp ignites, the en- from the capacitor.
ergy stored in the capacitor is discharged through
the lamp to produce a peak light intensity of over a e. Low voltage coupled with very slow voltage txlifd-
million candle power. When the capacitor voltage up can be traced to a faulty transistor 2N305j. Al~
drops below 50 volts, the lamp will go out and the ohmmeter check will indicate which transistor has
capacitor begins recharging for the next cycle, failed. Select replacement transistors havinF a col-
System operational cy~le will repeat, until the strobe lector to emitter resistance of 100 ohms minimum.
light is turned off, at a flash rate of 45 flashes per
minute. TRIGGER CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING

TROUBLE ANALYSIS a. Using ahigh impedance voltmeter, check for

180 volts DC at the junction of R8, R9 and C5. If
Whenever trouble occurs, check all primary power there is no voltage, check C5 and SCR T1145A2.
lines, external circuit elements, fuses and wiring
for a malfunction before troubleshooting the strobe b. If there is voltage at the junction, it should
light system. System electrical failure may be periodically drop to around 30 volts as the SCR trifi-
traced to any of three general areas: power unit, gers. If the SCR does not trigger, measure the voi-
lamp assembly or wiring. A quick method of isolating tage across R7 (100 ohms). This voltage will be be-
the trouble source is to remove the lens of the xenon low .5 volts. If the voltage is indicated, place an
lamp and test the lamp to see if it
lamp. Inspect the oscilloscope across R7 and look for
a positive going
is broken or loose in its socket. If the lamp is intact, pulse of around 4 volts repetition rate of 40 to
at the
use a DC voltmeter to check for approximately 350 55 times per minute. If the pulse is recorded on the
volts at the top of the lamp with the system turned on,
scope, then the SCR is not triggering and should be
The rate that the voltage peaks should be between 40 replaced.
and 55 times per minute. If no voltage is present, the
fault is probably located in the power unit, c. When no voltage is observed across R7, check
for battery voltage at R5 and R6. If voltage is pres-
TROUBLESHOOTING POWER UNIT ent, then the trouble is in the unijunction.

Disassemble the power unit by removing the screws d. If normal voltage is observed across R7, check
securing the end plates to the power unit. Remove the capacitor C4 for shorts and leakage.
the endplate which has the power plug and slide the
bottom heat sink forward until it can be separated. e. If unijunction &3 is to be replaced, it may be
The large capacitor may be attached to the rear end necessary to readjust the flash rate. This can be
plate by thermal epoxy for efficient heat transfer done by changing R5 or by charging the value of
and care should be taken to avoid breaking this bond. C4, In many cases, the value is recorded on the com-
The upper heat sink (with transistors mounted on it) ponent board, and it necessary to order the
is only
can be slid forward, exposing the component board exact value from the manufacturer (see the Vendor
and capacitor bracket. Remove the nuts securing the Publication List).
board to the metal bracket and the component board
NOTE
will be completely accessible.
In some instances, power supply units which
CONVERTER TROUBLESHOOTING have been stored or not operated on the air-
craft for a considerable period of time, may
a. If the fuse keeps blowing, check transistor 2N3055 not operate instantly when the system is turn-
for a possible short. It will be necessary to remove ed on. Before determining that the power unit
the emitter wire, and unsolder the base wire before is inoperative, leave the system on for a
an ohmmeter check can be made. Many times only period of at least 30 minutes. If the power unit
one transistor will fail. Failure of Capacitor C1 will does not operate in this span of time, refer to
also cause the fuse to blow. TROUBLESHOOTING POWER UNIT.

Issued: November, 1970 3-20A

33-590011-1C*10

L1 5A 113
T1
ol _21~3055123 2 RUS
VOLT*O~
C6
.06 pt
a
.~,CR1
CRI

02, 32( 18 +350V

’.3Kq ‘J1I~ CR3

ER4
39
1.5
Rissn I ~II I 24 6150!1
C2
7 TRIO
loon
300LL1 04 23
CS
CRS 1.5
23 3.10 71145*2 MEOn.25pf

4 GND

71543 OR( 36 C3
RS
2511671 i 330R Iopr
1.5 MEO n

o( 03

c4
37
IP1T T
100 n

OIILICTED TO *D1UST R*tE 35-603-1

Figure 3-10. Bullock Power Supply Schematic (Internal)

3-20B Issued: November, 1970

GRIMES STROBE LIGHT SYSTEM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF TAIL STROBE
LIGHT
The system consists of a solid state power supply unit, a
circuit breaker switch on the instrument panel, and 3 xenon a. Remove the tail cone and light cover to gain access
gas lights mounted in the tail and each wing tip. The function to the strobe light assembly.
of the Grimes Strobe Light system is essentially the same as
the strobe light system described earlier in this section. Use
that system description for a more detailed explanation of CAUTION
the method by which the Grimes system operates. The Gr-
imes System does not incorporate a timing circuit, since all To avoid damage to the strobe light system or
the lights flash at the same time at a rate of 60 flashes per possible physical injury from electrical shock,
minute, observe the precautions outlined under STR-
OBE LIGHT WIRING before removing or in-
POWER SUPPL Y REMOVAL AND INSTALLA nON stalling the strobe light assembly.

To gain the power supply unit, remove the fioor´•

access to

board on the RH side of the baggage compartment. The b. Remove the two retaining screws that secure the

entire unit may be removed by disconnecting the electrical light assembly in place and disconnect the light from the

wiring to the power supply and removing the screws anchor- airplane electrical system.
ing the module to the support structure. To reinstall the c. Remove the 2 screws on the side of the light as-

power supply unit, reverse the foregoing procedures, sembly to free the retainer and lens.

d. Rotate the lamp until free if it is to be replaced.

e. If the flash tube is to replaced, remove the
be 4
CAUTION
screws on the backside of the light subassembly and pull it

apart from the light assembly.

Observe theprecautions noted in the following
f. Remove the 2 screws on the bottom of the subas-
procedure removing and installing the
when
sembly and remove the flash tube.
power supply.
g. Reverse the preceding steps to reinstall the strobe
light assembly.
STROBE LIGHT WIRING

An incorrect of the wires at either the power input

hook-up
or between the strobelight assemblies and the power supply
unit will cause a reversal of polarity that results in serious
REMOVAL AND /NSTALLA ;T/ON OF W/NG STROBE
LIGHTS (Model G33)
component damage and failure. Care must be taken to en-
sure that the red wire is connected to postive power and the
black wire to ground. Make sure that the connectors are

properly assembled and that red, white, and black wires

(white/red, white/black, and white/yellow wires on the 28- CAUTION
volt system) are connected to pins "A", "B", and "C" of
the connector respectively. The shields for the wing and tail To avoid damage to the strobe light system or
light cables should be grounded to the airplanestrllcture at possible physical injury from electrical shock,
the power supply, observe the precautions outlined under
STROBE LIGHT WIRING in this section be-
foreremoving or installing the strobe light as-

WARNING sembly.

Although a bleed-off resistor is incorporated in

the power supply circuit, high voltage is in-
volved in the circuit between the power supply
a. Remove the 3 screws securing the strobe light in
and light assemblies. For this reason, turn the
place.
control switch for the strobe
lights OFF and wait
b. Lift out the light assembly and disconnect the
for at least 10 minutes toelapse before discon-
electrical wiring.
necting the cables at the power supply or light
c. Remove the light assembly. Remove the lens and
assemblies and before handling or disassembling
replace the flash tube or lamp as required.
either of these units in any way. Failure to ob-
serve these precautions may result in physical d. Reverse the preceding steps to reinstall the light
injury from electrical shock. assembly.

C9 3-20C
 a. Remove the transparent shield over the wing tip
REMOVAL AND INSTALLA TION OF WING STROBE
LIGHTS (MODEL F33A) lights.
b. Remove the two screws securing the lens and light
to the mounting bracket.
CAUTION c. Remove the lens, and lift the strobe light out to

disconnect the electrical wiring.

To avoid damage to the strobe light system pr d. Reverse the preceding steps to reinstall the light
possible physical injury from electrical shock. assembly.
observe the precautions outlined under
STROBE LIGHT WIRING in this section be-
foreremoving or installing the strobe light as-

sembly.

STROBE LIGHTLAMP REPLACEMENT BULB NUMBER

GUIDE

G33, F33A Tail Strobe Light Lamp (Grimes) 633

G33, F33A Tail Strobe Light Flash Tube (Grimes) 3 1-2440- 1

I F33A, F33C Tail Strobe Light

Flash Tube (Grimes) (28 volt) 30-0815- 1

F33A Wing Strobe Light Flash Tube (Grimes) 3 1- 1840-1

G33 Wing Light Lamp (Grimes)

Strobe A7512-12

G33 Wing Strobe Light Flash Tube (Grimes) 31-2059-1

F33A, F33C Wing Strobe Light

Flash Tube (Grimes) (28 volt) 30- 1467-1

3-20D C9
 STANDBY GENERATOR TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

~ROUBLE PROBABLE CA USE REMA RKS

NOTE

The number two transistor and other components mounted to the rear of the
ON-OFF-TEST switch will be referred to as the voltage regulator.

ENGINE NOT RUNNING

i. Battery switch OFF. a. Open circuit between a. Locate and repair

ON-OFF-TEST switch to battery and BAT TEST open circuit.
TEST BAT TEST light light.
will not illuminate.

b. Fuses between battery b. Check for and

and ON-OFF-TEST switch correct cause of
blown, blown fuse.
Replace fuse.

c. Faulty diode between c. Replace diode.

battery and ON-OFF-TEST
switch.

d. Defective BAT TEST d. Replace lamp.

lamp.

e. Defective ON-OFF-TEST e. Replace switch.

switch.

2. With STBY switch to ON a. Defective power relay. a. Replace relay.

and PWR XFER switch to
NAV COM 1 COMM 1,NAV i,
Audio Amplifier, Turn Co-
ordinator and Engine In-
struments are inoperative.

3. With STBY switch to ON a. PWR XFER switch de- a. Replace switch

and PWR XFER switch to fective or wired in- or rewire as

NAV COMM 2, NAV 2 and correctly. necessary.

COMM 2 are inoperative.

ENGINE RUNNING

4. With STBY switch to a. Loose connections. a. Secure connections.

TEST, engine at ]200 RPM
GEN TEST light will not b. Defective GEN TEST b. Replace lamp.
illuminate, lamp.

c. Blown standby c. Check for and

generator fuse, correct cause

of blown fuse.
Replace fuse.

d. Defective overvoltage d. Replace relay.

relay.

C2 3-20 E
 STANDBY GENERATOR TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (Cont’d)

TROUBL E PROBA BLE CA USE REIL~A RKS

ENGINE RUNNING

4. With STBY switch to e. Defective voltage reg- e. Replace faulty

TEST, engine at 1200 RPM ulator. component of
GEN TEST light will not voltage regulator.
illuminate. (Cont’ d)
f. Defective standby f. Replace standby
generator. generator.

g. Defective ON-OFF- g. Replace switch.

TEST switch.

5. With the STBY switch to a. Faulty overvoltage a. Replace relay.

TEST, engine at 1200 RPM, relay.
GEN TEST light illuminates
dimmly, but will not get b. Rheostat out of b. Bench set rheo-
brighter as engine RPM is adjustment, stat or replace.
increased.
c. Faulty generator, c. Replace generator.

d. Faulty voltage reg- d. Replace faulty

ulator. component of
regulator

6. With the STBY switch to a. Faulty overvoltage a. Replace relay.

TEST, engine at 1200 RPM, relay.
GEN TEST light will illum-
inate dimly, but goes b. Rheostat out of b. Bench set rheo-
out as engine RPM increases adj ustment. stat.

c. Defective voltage c. Replace faulty

regulator. component of
regulator.

d. Defective generator. d. Replace generator.

3-20F C2
BEECHCRAFT NEW-MATIC AUTOPILOT pressure (or vacuum) valve which puts terce into the
aileron or rudder to return the aircraft to straight
(Figure 3-10)
flight. Turns or beam following is made by rotating
a valve sleeve by a torquing movement proportional
The BEECHCRAFT New-matic autopilots operate on
Electronic circuitry to the voltage imposed upon it. This unit also
an electro-pneumatic concept.
beam detection, magnetic supplies anoutput voltage proportional to the turning
is used for navigational
rate that is used for dip compensation and nose up
heading direction and turns. Pneumatic servos are
used for the flight controlactuators. The systems are
signal during turns. The pitch control system does
not use a gyro for reference, but uses the airspeed,
completely non-tumbling. Yaw, roll and turn detection
rate of airspeed change and inertial signals to
is made by a (EVT turn coordinator
tilted gyro
control the elevator through the pitch servos. An
electrical vacuumtorquing combination) mounted in
altitude hold sensing unit works in conjunction with
the instrument panel. A dampened miniature aircraft
deviation the pitch control to sustain a given altitude.
serves as the instrument indicating arm. Any
from straight flight causes the rate gyro to move a

D I I a
a
w u
8
r 5

o~ _1
o

u~
"-1 w-

"P
g, ~c ´•I
>e
iru

I’ -Ic
riu

sl~
-15

LI
0 9
r e w

z IjC o Z

~e
’8jI]
c z
r tYo L~
w
w
W
M
I-
c
aio ;1 U
u C B t
oc n
Cr 6 B
w c

a
I~i b~ 3
Z
4 0~ o""
4
I

o 111
d
u
t: 5´•
dW
PI I
I
-Ic w
w
o
c sb f
t; c
o9u
c
,m

o u, o
~E
Z c:
c e;
w 08 c
1

t4
nE

Figure 3-10. BEECHCRAFT New-Matic B-S Autopilot System

3-21
Issued: May, 1970
 U] C.
O 3 3- C. 3 ea
r
m
to
a
3 c´•
~mm
c

(b
colcla~ rs~(D(D m A
a
mqm "I
Clpl~p, (D w
01 a a. a A
r c--
C,
K W C~ a d n,
1
3:
a’~ o-,
a o

CI rt
(D

MC´•~d OW
-3
(3 \.OR.1L~ 09 a a 51f 7
a r
fU~
a
P~ C3
AILERON SERVO

Bo,g z

OFFHM;CAP
CONTROL VALVE

4 IRK O
a
3 B
J 02:

Ii
LOC
AILERON SERVOG fl~
cD
a
a
aI
r´•
Ct
o
i.
09
C1
as
rr

~bJ
r
n
O
a
8
1
"r
r´•
ti n, a
r rn 309
BRIT~AM 8-5 a B re 7
c. COMPUTER rr ijO V,
a ’4
POWER SUPPLY ALT. HOLD
O
(D21
MAGNETIC DETECTOR
?slg,~ a

r ~"p
n, a --I
DIP COMPENSATION ~D
w X 5’ a3~0t?n, a n,
C’

mos C O~ a n
RUDDER SERVOS
a R a c

o
AIRCRAFT
GYRO DETECTS a 8 o
1 5
ROLL a YAW =r
m a a c-
c´•S C

,,,~,e
re
n o
a
m
a ImcDoqci~
r’3
O
C~ ~C
fi~. a
RUDDER SERVO 1 O
a 9
3: 1
CONTROL VALVE a ’D R
c~
I
c~ a o

n,p, (Dr´• r
a
ct
O
AIRCRAFT MASTER SW
W --I
r O a
(D

PILOT DISPLAY
S 1

’t
2 POSITION AUTOPILOT
CO ’3
MASTER PNEUMATIC 3 a ´•t =I m m 3 pr
o t:
5330 r´•

PITCH CONTROL"s
0" o
a O(DcCZ(D 5i~C S 33
1

m
tr
5 3 C.‘
omc~am
I~
O
3 a
[n
cE;j cD 1
m
o
C1
AIR SPEED
PRF.SSIRE: q m(D O
cr
to
a a

a m~
8 ELEVA,OR SERYOS ct.
a
C’
01 LO a
r cI
a O~oB1
a
m
r
ATTITUDE
ra

B~a
31m
(D
3p
(O
pl
OP C~ C*~6
O C pi
g
HOLDToR
C: on,
5’ E W ~,o 1 n,
a
’3 EL.LY SERYO
r’’ O 1
a C’

X5 I 3
Cr,NTI(OI
)B s
,f~. ""re" S (19
O
F3. 7
e
AIRCIUFT STATIC LISE
,o~:Y
OEJC3V1 1BEJ
n5 SYSTE bl IIL.CCK I)U\(IHA~
F;
e
a31
c (p -J V)o
ccm
lr
rt
a
OI
O
t;P 1~:
m~,OVXO" 3
3~0?a´•´•
LOa(DC rrYc~
~5 ~o.´•1
’O mT, I
C´•´•
W atn c"’
’17
1\3
r
W Ic
N
N

eEo (~a o.D. EOLY-~Lb)

AILEeON
´•LILL
--PCD

(PKHTTLleY) I
ro*uwr
PlfOT ro´•Klp 5EeVO
uD
PPE55UeE
~o rwr E- rawr
r ~O 41PCC*FT (N05E DOWhl)
r CONTeOLLEe
CLEAP
9~ r AMPLIFIEP

ILTITUMco~uscr --Mb~ pccaPIZnK)N

(WINCI~MEP PIN)
vEuow(Sbo.o. POLY-FLO) II leuorxe ~pvo
HOLD ImYDP PIN 20
w
I m
VDC MALE POLPPIZC\TIOM (PIGCIT TUFhN)
usur COUIPOC
r
r
AN(WINCWESTEP 1l RY)
11 r20677-1 HARNESS id hb
m II Il(no.aVI II ~u’oA
M II 1IPocu-F;oll( Ilrte% ~´•t,*´’
m uU
a ~K,

3: cUlaYwK
a sau) wum

I II
pU II I1IPLTCW~LT (AMPHEIOL
7PIN) I WWEP
r SENSOP No
.WPPLY
’-3
ILTHOLDVhL~E
u\un.(crrr~P BL*O(

_W~I(*IPYI L"’.CI II Ila

MAGNETIC
UEIIOINB
_rr
nuv(Shaora~g
r ~BU()
5EN50P
P1 -iwlmo wej
i; .(~Bl.nx
m
B MbSTEPV~CM.

voc 4 ~IfBii
I P
PCCY-FLO)
es
´•6" (F1~614a28) 256-P ~qr ~s eEDLICEP
W ´•so

FILTEP II ~ypW U)NT40L

m (Ylan
a.o. R)LY-FLO) VP~LVE
i; HALE BLLLCK
PUDCEe 5EP~O
TUeN COOPDINP~M4
(*IPCP~f QIIlKIUD)
PIN (L~FT TUPF~
,g BLuE(3~ aD. R3LY-FLD)
14 ’Rw) wwclo)
1 INVEF~TEP
PITCH
ALTITUDE TOP se~o
AUPCLFIEP
GB3UND
j I (NO5EUP)

256-PYIH 264-P~a TEE

a
P~E55UIZE ~CAIPJ PEDLICEe Ilml~PoN SEIELO
INRIT EXHWS~ ~cPEEN(YkaD.PClv-FLo)
(LEFT TUPN)
Ob aa WLY-F

S
o
 NS HESU1ISPHERE SWITCW
TP-q (ORANGE) SUJSOR COMPUSSRTION
S F_NSOR COM PENSRTI ON
tOC CAIN
TP-3 (YELLDW)

301
Nnv CEN~ERING r-k

G
HDG GRADIWT II
1 VOR GRIN
(IF ADJUSTED, RECHECK Il I’I
AD3UST) ‘C~
jl
:1:~;::
FhCTORY
AD3USTS

II ~I
r-
90

I
I
MAN CENTERING

Q QUADRATUKE ADJUST
(ser AT 450)

Figure 3-12. BEECHCRAFT New-Matic B-5 and B-7 Heading Lock/Navigation Coupler System Adjustment Points

Issued: May, 1970 3-23

33-590011-1C*8 AUTOPILOT TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

NOTE

Thisprocedure applies to the BEECHCRAFT New-matic autopilots. Manuals noted in

theSupplementary Publications list and the appropriate test sets as listed in those
manuals will aid further in troubleshooting procedures.

INDICATION PROBABLE CAUSE REMARKS

ROLL AXIS

i. Insufficient or excessive a. Leak in aircraft pressure a. Check all lines and fittings
pressure indicated on aircraft system. for breaks, looseness, kinks,
system gage. etc.
b. Regulator valve improperly b. Adjust as outlined in Section 3.
adjusted.

c. Adjustable orifice or c. Adjust as outlined in Section 3.

regulator improperly adjusted.

d. Faulty pressure pump. d. Replace pump.

e. Ambient air filter clogged. e. Clean or replace.

f. Clogged system filter. f. Check as outlined in Section 3

and replace if necessary.

2. Aircraft hunts or recovers a. Regulator valve improperly a. Adjust as outlined in

slowly from turn in one direction. adjusted. Section 3.

b. Loose aircraft primary cables b. Check security of attachment,

or excessive friction in aileron binding, etc. and adjust as
and/or rudder cables, pulleys, outlined in Section 3.
bell cranks or loose servo
cables.

c. Leak in servo or servo lines. c. Check for leaks.

d. Obstruction in servo lines, d. Check for foreign matter.

e. Faulty turn coordinator gyro. e. Replace turn coordinator.

3. Autopilot sluggish, a. Low system pressure setting, a. Check system filters and
adjust as outlined in Section 3.

4. Aircraftturns continuously a. Aircraft out of trim or a. Trim aircraft or check

on basic stabilization. improperly rigged. controls for proper rig as

(Controller "OFF") outlined in Section 3.

b. Loose primary cables pr b. Check security of attach-

excessive friction in ment, binding, etc and
cables and system. Loose adjust as outlined in Section 3.
servo cable.

c. Defective turn coordinator c. Replace turn coordinator

gyro. gyro.

d. Leak in servo or servo line. d. Check for servo or line leaks.

5. Aircraft rate of turn a. Improper regulator adjustment. a. Adjust regulator as outlined in

too fast or too slow. Section 3.

b. Turn coordinator faulty. b. Replace turn coordinator.

6. Continuous control wheel a. Turn coordinator faulty, a. Replace turn coordinator.

oscillation in smooth air.

3-24 Issued: May, 1970

 AUTOPILOT TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (Continued)
INDICATION PROBABLE CAUSE REMARKS

6. Continuous control wheel b. Improper gyro speed or b. Adjust system pressure as

oscillation in smooth air. (Contd) excessive pressure in system. outlined in Section 3.

7. No turns or turns in one a. Faulty turn coordinator. a. Replace turn coordinator.

direction only, in response to
turn control or on all models b. Faulty controller/amplifier. b. Replace controller/amplifier.
of navigation coupler operation.

8. Aircraft rolls in one direction a. Servos improperly phased. a. Plumb as noted on Figure 3-11.
only either left or right.
b. Turn coordinator not plumbed b. Plumb as noted on Figure 3-11.
properly.

9, Aircraft turns in the wrong a. Nav input signal reversed, a. Reverse connectors to VOR.
direction in "CAP" and "TRR’
modes.

10. No aircraft response from a. Faulty turn coordinator gyro. a. Replace turn coordinator.

navigation coupler in any mode,

ground check shows electrical. b. Obstruction in pressure lines. b. Check for foreign matter.

11. Aircraft fails to turn to and a. Faulty magnetic heading sensor. a. Replace magnetic heading
hold magnetic headings. sensor.

b. Faulty heading selector b. Replace controller/amplifier.

resolver.

c. Faulty controller /amplifier. c. Replace controller/amplifier.

12. Magnetic headings consistently a. Heading sensor misaligned in a. Check for proper installation.
high or low. aircraft.

b. Heading azimuth dial shifted b. Tighten screw and recalibrate.

on shaft.

c. Improper adjustment or c. Calibrate for the magnetic

controller /amplifier. cardinal points,

13. Cardinal headings inaccurate, a. Controller/amplifier im- a. Calibrate for the magnetic
properly adjusted. cardinal points.

b. Leak in servo system. b. Check for leaks.

c. Low primary pressure. c. Adjust system as outlined in

Section 3.

14. Cardinal headings accurate a. Faulty heading sensor. a. Replace the heading sensor.

but intermediate headings inaccurate.

b. Faulty controller/amplifier. b. Replace controller/amplifier

15. Insufficient or no control a. Faulty controller/amplifier. a. Replace controller/amplifier

in "CAP" and "TRIC’ modes.
b. Faulty omni converter. b. Replace omni converter.

c. Insufficient signal from omni. c. Repair or replace omni

indicator.

d. "NAV SENS" improperly d. Readjust.

adjusted.

16. Localizer approach is either a. Loc gain is set high or low, a. Adjust localizer gain
sluggish or too sensitive.

Issued: May, 1970 3-25

33-590011-1C*8 AUTOPILOT TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (Continued)
INDICATION PROBABLE CAUSE REMARKS

17. No electrical output left or a. No A+ input or improperly a. Check A+ and ground,

orright on controllerl grounded.
amplifier test jacks.
b. Defective controller/ b. Replace controller/amplifier
amplifier or power supply. or power supply.

18. Output only one way on a. Defective controller/amplifier. a. Replace controller/amplifier

controller/amplifier test jacks.

19. No output on HDG mode on a. Defective controller/ a. Replace controller/amplifier;

controller/amplifier test jacks. amplifier, or harness, or orharness, or heading sensor.
heading sensor.

20. Heading output on two a. Defective sensor; or harness; a. Replace heading sensor, or

reciprocalheadings, but not on or faulty controller/amplifier. check harness. Replace

the other two, controller/amplifier.

21. "0" output when in CAP, TRK, a. Defective nav switching console; a. Check nav input leads. Replace
or APP mode, with nav signal. or no nav information; or controller/amplifier.
defective controller/amplifier.

22. Output voltage in CAP mode a. Wrong nav input signals. a. Check wiring.
decays to "0" voltage.
b. Defective switching console b. Repair or replace console.
(if installed).

c. Dirty input signal ~C volts). c. Check indicators.

23. Voltage output in MAN, CAP, a. Polarization pins reversed a. Reverse pins. (See Figure 3-11)
TRK, and APP mode, but none in on heading sensor plug.
HDG mode.

24. Nav indicator needle deflects a. One of the components is a. Check for shorts.
left or right when controllerl shorted to ground.
amplifier or radio is turned on.

25. Low or high intercept angle. a. Incorrect setting on controllerl a. Adjust intercept angle.
amplifier.

b. Low or high voltage output b. Check nav indicators to

on nav indicators. manufacturer’s specs.
PITCH AXIS

i. Pitch channel will a. Defective pitch/altitude a. Check on Test Set TS-108 or

not center up electrically. sensor or amplifier. replace one at a time.

2. Altitude channel will not a. Defective pitch/altitude sensor a. Check on Test Set TS-108
center up electrically. or amplifier. or replace one at a time.

3. Altitude hold solenoid valve a. Pressure switch on servo a. Check for faulty switch and
will not actuate. control valve out of circuit. replace if necessary.

b. Defective solenoid valve, b. Replace solenoid valve.

c. Defective altitude switch c. Check continuity (see Figure

on controller/amplifier. 3-11).

4. Servo control valve will a. Improper pressure adjustment. a. Adjust as outlined in Section 3.
not center.
b. Sticky valve. b. Replace valve.

5. Output voltage is inadequate. a. Pitch/altitude amplifier sensor a. See Figure 3-11, run continuity
or harness shorted or check and check for shorts.
improperly wired.

3-26 Issued: May, 1970

 AUTOPILOT TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (Continued)
INDICATION PROBABLE CAUSE REMARKS

PITCH AXIS (Continued)

6. Pressure switch will not a. Defective pressure switch a. Replace pressure switch.
make contact when pressure is on. or not set at proper pressure.

7. Output voltage one way only a. Servo control valve shorted to a. Replace valve.
on pitch and altitude channels. ground.

8. System will not maintain a. Servo control valve not a. Disconnect electrical power.
trimmed configuration even pneumatically centered. Center valve pneumatically
through centered electrically, by use of differential gage to

i 0. 4 in. Hg.

b. Leak in servos or improperly b. Check for leaks and rig.

rigged.

c. Leak in pitch/altitude sensor, c. Replace sensor,

9. System will not respond to a. Primary pressure not set a. Adjust as outlined in Section 3.
airspeed changes, properly.

b. Pitot pressure inadequate. b. Check pitot plumbing.

c. Decay rate improperly c. Adjust as required.

adjusted.

10. System will not respond a. Defective pitch/altitude a. Replace pitch/altitude amplifier.
to up-command adjustment, amplifier.

b. No EVT potentiometer output. b. Replace turn coordinator.

11. System will not respond a. Pitch/altitude amplifier a. Adjust as required.

to altitude gain adjustment. limiter improperly set.

12. Aircraft has long term a. Decay rate improperly adjusted. a. Adjust as required.
oscillation a~ut pitch axis with
altitude hold OFF. b. Pitch altitude gain improperly b. Adjust as required.
adjusted.

c. Friction in elevator or servo c. Check for friction and

system, correct.

13. Aircraft has short term a. Decay rate too tight. a. Adjust as required.
oscillation about pitch axis.
b. Pitch gain too high, b. Adjust as required.

c. Primary pressure too high, c. Readjust as outlined in Section 3.

14. Aircraft oscillates with a. Altitude gain too high, a. Adjust as required.
altitude hold ON.
b. Decay rate improperly adjusted. b. Adjust as required.

15. Aircraft does not return to a. Altitude hold solenoid inoperative. a. Replace solenoid.
altitude when displaced.
b. Leak in altitude system. b. Check for leaks.

c. Altitude limiter inproperly c. Adjust as required.

adjusted.

16. Aircraft descends or a. Servo control valve not phased a. Apply positive 6. O volts (max)
ascends continually when system correctly, to blue lead and verify nose

engaged, up response.

Issued: May, 1970 3-27

 SECTION

NIAJOR
DISASSEIVIBLY
 C

SECTION

Major Disassembly
 DEBONAIR/BONANZA 33 SERIES
SHOP MANUAL

SECTION 4
RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS

REVISION DATE DATE REASON PAGE

NUMBER INSERTED REMOVED REMOVED NUMBER
4-1 Dec 11/92 Nov 15/93 Temporary 4-16
Revision
4-2
4-2 Nov 15/93 4-16

NOTE: Insert this Record of Temporary Revisions after the Section 4 divider tab.

Page 1
Nov 15/93
 SEATS a. Remove the two bolts at the lower aft portion of
the seat bottom that secure the seat bottom and seat belt to
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FRONT SEAT the seat attach brackets.
b. Remove the seat back by removing the extrusion
a. Remove seat rear stops. at the forward top side of the hatshelf. Reinstall the
b. With seat adjustment handle pulled up, move seat extrusion on the hatshelf.
to the. rear: disengage the seat channels from the tracks. c. Installation may be accomplished by reversing the
c. Remove the seat. above procedure.
d. Reinstall the front seat by reversing the above
removal procedure.
FIFTH AND SIXTH SEAT STOWAGE
(CE-316 and aner)

I REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF THIRD AND

FOURTH PLACE SEAT(CD-l thru CD-813)
NOTE
a. Unsnap the tear spar cover beneath the rear seat

back. At serial CE-674 and after, the sixth seat is not

b. Disconnect and remove the seat belts. installed.
c. Unsnap and remove all seat cushions.
d. Remove the cotter pins from the top rear seat tube
and pull the tube out through the baggage door opening. a. Pull forward on the lower portion of the seat back
e. Remove the cotter pins from the lower tube. until the seat back is in horizontal position. By lifting up on
a

f. Slide the tube to the left until it will clear the the forward side of the seat bottom, rotate the seat bottom to
bracket on the right side, then lift the right end up until it can a vertical position and position the seat bottom legs parallel
be removed out through the cabin door opening, with the seat bottom.

g. Remove the tube and the sling. b. Lower the seat back into a vertical position and
h. Reinstall the rear seat by reversing the above snap the retaining strap into position.
removal procedure.

THIRD AND FOURTH SEAT REMOVAL SEA T BACK ADJUSTMENT

(CD-B14and after, CE-1 and after, CJ-I and after) (CD-388 and after, CE-1 and after, CJ-l and alter)

a. Remove the seat track stops.

b. Engage the fore-and-aft adjustment lever and slide A lever located on the inboard side of each se~l oper3te~
the seat off the tracks. the seat back adjustment. The seat back may he ncijusred
up or down by rotating this lever to actuate either Cam
rock, or Roton lock, actuators, which will allow seat back
THIRD AND FOURTH SEAT INSTALLATION movement. If Roton locks are the type of lock, the

(CD-814and after, CE-1 and after, CJ-I and after) back adjustment lever may be adjusted in either direction
to move the seat back in either direction. If cam locks are

a. Align the seat with the three seal tracks and slide the type of seat back lock used, the adjustment lever must
the seat into position. be moved aft to move the seat back down. With cam locks
the seat back may be raised without engaging the
NOTE adjustment lever. The pilot’s seat uses cam adjuster~ onl!;.

The fore-and-aft adjustment lever will need to

be engaged before the seat will slide into WINGS
position.
The all metal wing group consists of the front and rear spars.
leading edge, wing tips, flaps, ailerons, and fuel tanks. The
b. Install the seat track stops, wing tips, flaps,’and ailerons are readily removable. The
forward wing attaching point is located at FS 83.00 while the
rear wing attaching point is located at FS 1 18.00 on all Model

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FIFTH AND 33 series airplanes. An optional remote compass is located in
SIXTH SEATS the left wing tip on all serials.

(CE-316 and after)

NOTE WING TIP REMOVAL

-I At serial CE´•674 and after the sixth seat is not

installed, wing.
a. Remove the screws attaching the wing tip to the

C12 4-1
 b. Disconnect the electrical leads to the navigation WARNING
light.
c. Disconnect the remote compass at the left wing The bushing installed in the upper forward wing
tip (if installed). spar(CD-1286 thru CD-1304 and CE-3n thru
CE-400 except CE-394 and CE-395) and in the
lower forward wing spar (CE-3TI and after and
WING TIP INSTALLATION CC-1286 and after) should not be removed and
must be in place prior to the installation of the

a. Connect the remote compass at the left wine tip wing attach bolts.
(if installed).
b. Connect the electrical leads to the navigation
light. s. Remove the mounting bolts, washers and nuts

c. Place the wing tip in position and secure it to the from the wing attach tittings.
wing with screws.

NOTE
REMOVING THE WING
Discard the soft aluminum washers used

a. Remove the front seats, between the upper wing attach fittings. Install

b. Remove the carpetand cover from the rear spar new washers when installing the wing.
carrythrough structure.

c. Drain fuel cells.

d. wing mounting bolt access plates
Remove the t. Disconnect the cold air ducts at the wing leading
from the top and bottom of the wing. edge.
Place the airplane on jacks and raise until the u, Remove the wing by pulling it straight away from
e.

wheels are clear. A three point jack should be used because the fuselage.
of the unbalanced condition of the airplane after the wing is
removed.
INSTALLING THE WING
f. Open the brake cylinder bleed ports and pump all
fluid from the system. Disconnect andcap hydraulic lines at
the wing root. a. Using a nonmetallic brush and naptha or methyl
ethyl ketone (1 or 2, Chart t), clean all wing attach fittings
g. Operate the landing gear circuit breaker until the
inboard landing gear doors are fully open. and hardware (bolts, washers, and nuts). inspect the wing

h. Disconnect the inboard door actuator rod from fittings. bolts, washers and nuts as instructed under
attach

the control horn. WING BOLT, NUT, AND FITT(NG INSPECTION.

i. Disconnect the landing gear uplock cable at the
inboard connection in the wheel well.
Disconnect the landing gear actuator rod from the WARNING
j.
V-brace in the wheel well.
k. Disconnect and cap and fuel lines. The lines can Wing bolts and nuts that have reached their life

be disconnected between the wing root rib and fuselage. limit (10 years after the initial inspection), must

i. Disconnect and cap the pitot line at the left wing not be reused.

root in the wheel well.

m, Disconnect andlabel electrical wiring in the wheel
wells, b. Coat the fitting bolt bores and bearing faces,
Disconnect and label aileron cables at the bolts, washers, and nuts with MIL-C-16173 Grade II
n.

turnbuckles under the third and fourth seats, corrosion preventive compound 15, Chart 2).
o. Disconnect the flap drive shaft from the motor.

p. Cradle wing.
Place a wing stand under the wing not being WARNING
q.
removed and place a stand under the tail.
r. Outline the position of the wing on the fuselage The bushing installed in the upper forward wing
reinstallation. fitting (CD-1286 thru CD-1304 and CE-3n thru
as a guide to
CE-400 except CE-394 and CE-395) and in the
lower forward wing fitting (CE3TI and after.
CAUTION CD-1286 and after) must be in place prior to

installation of the wing bolts.

There should no bolt binding during

be
removal. Should binding occur, adjust the wing
Move the wing into position, align the wing
position until the bolt disengages freely. Do not c.

fittings with the carry through fittings, install soft

screw or drive a bolt in or out of the fittings.
new

4-2 C14
 MS20002C10 WASHER (POSITION WITH COUNTER-
SINK TOWARD BOLT HEAD CD-l THRU CD´•1285
MS20002-10 WASHER (CD-I THRU CD-1285,
CE-1 THRU CE-376, CJ-1 THRU CJ-30)
CE-1 THRU CE-376, CJ-1 THRU CJ-30)
MS20002C12 WASHER (POSITION WITH
MS20002-12 WASHER (CD-1286 THRU CD´•1304. CD-la86 THRU CD-1304.
TOWARD BOLT HEAD
CE-377 THRU CE-400 EXCEPT CE-394 AND
CE-377 THRU CE-400 EXCEPT CE-394. AND CE-395)
CE-395)
95-110021 WASHER (POSITION WITH COUNTER-
+95-110025-1 WASHER (POSITION WITH RADIUS CE-394, CE-395.
SINK TOWARD BOLT HEAD
TOWARD BOLT HEAD (CE´•394. CE´•395. CE-401 CE-401 AND AFTER, CJ-31 AND AFTER)
AND AFTER, CJ-31 AND AFTER)

000-110100 BUSHING (CD-1286 THRU

CD-1304, CE-377 THRU CE-400_
EXCEPT CE-394 AND CE-395)

INTERNAL WRENCHING
NUT (SEE CHART 3 FOR II I r II I SEE CHART 3 FDR BOLT
NUT PART NUMBER AhlD II i I II IPART NUMBER AND
AIRPLANE SERIALS) AIRPLANE SERIALS
A
PORT I I I IRM 1 FUSELAGE FITTING

WING FITTING
*+MS20002-10 WASHER (CD-I THRU CD-1285, CE-1
THRU CE-375, CJ-1 THRU CJ-30) L105090A032-12J WASHER (CD-1 THRU CD-12BS.
CE-1 THRU CE-376, CJ-1 THRU CJ-301
+*+:MS20002-12 WASHER (CD-1286 THRU
CD-1304, CE-3n AND AFTER: CJ-31 AND 1105090A032-12K (CD-1286 AND AFTER. CE-3f7
AFTER) AND AFTER, CJ-31 AND AFTER)
WFT 80LT TORQUE: 1180 TO 1300 INCH-POUNDS (PRIOR TO CD-1305. CE-401 AND CJ-31)2480
TO 2600 INCH-POUNDS (CO-1305 AND AFTER, CE-401 AND AFTER AND CJ-31 AND AFTER).
COAT THE BOLT, WASHERS, NUT, WING FITTING BOLT BORES, AND EXPOSED BOLT THREADS
WITH MIL-C-16173, GRADE II CORROSION PREVENTIVE COMPOUND.
CHECK WASHER FOR A SMOOTH CONTINUOUS OUTER RADIUS.

+~ONE OR TWO MS20002-10 WASHERS MAY BE USED IF REQUIRED TO PROVIDE PROPER BOLT
GRIP ADJUSTMENT.

ONE OR TWO MS 20002-12 WASHERS MAY BE USED BETWEEN THE NUT AND THE MS 20002-
12 OR THE 95-110025-1 WASHER TO PROVIDE BOLT GRIP ADJUSTMENT.

EXTERNAL WRENCHING
NUT (SEE CHART 3 FOR
NUT PART NUMBER AND
AIRPLANE SERIALS)

31

O O
o
DETAIL A
33-3l-16

Figure 4-1. Upper Fomard Wing Bolt Instelle#lon

4-3
014
 MS20002-10 WASHER
(CD-l THRU CD-1304.
CE-I THRU CE-934.
CJ-1 THRU CJ-155)

+95-1 10 025-7 WASHER

POSITION WITH RADIUS
TOWARDS WING FITTING 105090A032-10J WASHER

(CE-935 AND AFTER. *35-105111-3 WASHER

CJ-156 AND AFTER) ITION WITH COUNTERSINK
TOWARDS 80LT HEAD~

12NB108 NUT

NAS150-3SM
BOLT
DRAIN HOLE

WING FITTING

++MS20002-10 WASHER

WET BOLT TORQUE: 1180 TO 1300 INCH-POUNDS. COAT THE COMPLETE BOLT. NUT.
WASHERS.WING FITTING BOLT BORES. AND EXPOSED BOLT THREADS WITH MIL-C-16173.
GRADE 2 CORROSION PREVENTIVE COMPOUND.

+CHECK WASHER FOR A SMOOTH CONTINUOUS OUTER RADIUS.

++ONE OR TWO MS20002-10 WASHERS MAY BE USED AS REQUIRED BETWEEN THE NUT AND
THE MS20002-10 OR THE 95-110025´•7 WASHER TO PROVIDE A PROPER BOLT GRIP
ADJUSTMENT.

ol, o

33-3~´•13

flgnra 4-1A. Up(ar Aft Wing Bolt Installation

4-4 Ct4
 O

O O

88126 NUT (8XTERNAL WRENCHING)

(USED CE-928 AND AFTER 01-158 AND AFTER)

DETAIL A

WING
FITTING 1 000-110094
(CD-ln56 AND AFTER,
08-377 AND AFTER,
01-31 AND AFTER)

35-105011 WASHER
(POSlflON WITH COUNTERSINK
TOWARD BOLT HEAD)

lLP 128126 NUT

(INTERNAL WRENCHING)
131790-2 BOLT

4 MS 20002-12 1 LMS 20002;12 WASHER

WASHER

LZP WET BOLT TOROUE: 2480 TO 2600 INCH-POUNDS. COAT THE COMPLETE BOLT.
NUT, WASHER, WING FITTING BOLT BORES, AND EXPOSED THREADS WITH MIL-
C-16173 GRADE 2 CORROSION PREVENTIVE COMPOUND.

*ONE OR TWO MS 20002-12 WASHERS MAY BE USED UNDER THE NUT

TO PROVIDE BOLT GRIP ADJUSTMENT.

33´•3(´•(4

Flgu~ 61B. Lov~r FomRTd WIRE Bait

C17 4-5
 o I, o

35-105111-3 WASHER (POSITION

+*MS20002-10 WASHER, rWITH COUNTERSINK TOWARDS
BOLT HEAD)

12NB108 NUT

*95-110025-7 WASHER NAS150-35/Mi

(POSITION WITH RADIUS BOLT
TOWARDS WING FITTING.
CE-935 AND AFTER
CJ-156 AND AFTER)

MS20002-10 WASHER
(CD-l THRU CD-1304, CE-1 THRU
CE-934, CJ-1 THRU CJ-155)

WET BOLT TORQUE:1180 TO 1300 INCH´•POVNDS. COAT THE COMPLETE BOLT. NUT.
WASHERS, WING FITTING BOLT BORES, AND EXPOSED BOLT THREADS WITH MIL-C-16173.
GRADE 2 CORROSION PREVENTIVE COMPOUND.

+CHECK WASHER FOR A SMOOTH CONTINUOUS OUTER RADIUS.

+´•e ONE OR TLVO MS20002-10 WASHERS MAY BE USED AS REQUIRED BETWEEN THE NUT AND
THE MS20002-10 OR 95-110025-7 WASHER TO PROVIDE PROPER BOLT GRIP ADJUSTMENT.

?3´•31´•15

Figun, 4-!C. Lon~ Att Wing Bell Inatailation

4-6 014
aluminum washers between the upper fittings, and insert forward, upper aft, lower forward, and lower aft. When a
the bolts. torque wrench adapter is used, the length of the adapter
must be added to the length of the torque wrench and the
proper wet torque value computed as detailed in Figure 4-
CAUTION 1D.

Each bolt must be inserted by hand without

binding. If a bolt cannot be easily inserted, CAUTION
reposition the wing until the bolt moves freely
Prior to torquing the lower aft nut, a slight gap
through the fittings. Do not screw or drive a
bolt into the fittings. Bolts and nuts must be may be evident between the fittings. This gap
oriented as shown in the applicable illustration should not exceed a width of .060 inch. No gap
for each location (Figure 4-1, 4-1A, 4-1B, or 4- should exist after the nut is torqued. Torque the

IC). wing attach bolts at the nut end; do not rotate

the bolt in the bolt bore.

d. Start the nuts on the upper forward and aft bolts.

Rotate wing trailing edge until alignment with the
the g. Coat the bolt threads that protrude through the
outline on the fuselage is realized. After rotation is nut with MIL-C-16173 Grade II corrosion preventive
established, verify that t~L.lower forward bolt is not compound.
binding in the bolt bore. If bolt binding is encountered, h. Connect the flap drive shaft to the flap motor.

i. Connect the aileron cables at the tutnbuckles.

adjust the wing position until the bolt moves freely.
e. Tighten the upper forward and aft nuts. j. Connect the electrical wiring in the wheel well.
k. Connect the pitot line in the wheel well (LH
only).
CAUTION I. Connect the fuel lines.
m. Connect the landing gear actuator rod.

When torquing the wing nuts assure that the n. Connect the landing gear uplock cable.
wrenches do not on the wing
bottom out o. Connect the inboard door actuator rod.
Connect the hydraulic brake lines and bleed the
fittings. Such an occurrance could cause false p.
torque readings and damage to the fittings. brakes.
After torquing the upper forward wing attach q. Reconnect the cold air duct at the leading edge.
nut, remove the holding force from the wing r. inspection after the wing
At the first scheduled

cradle and torque the remaining three nuts. has been installed, check the attaching bolts for correct
torque. Check the drain pens in the upper wing attach
f. Torque the nuts in the following order: upper fittings to assure that they are not obstructed.

TOT*LLENtTn ~---f
L---l.

bD1)~

COMPUTING TORQUE Example: D reading

Desired
L Length of torque wrench
A Adapter length
T =Torque
When a torque wrench and adapter is used, compensation

must be made for the extra leverage gained, New indicator

readings must be calculated before the wrench is used. To D

figure the desired lower readings which will actually give L -33 inches
the torques specified, use the following formula: A =11 inches
T 55.000 inch-pounds

Original wrench length x specified torque Desired 33 xS,000 165.000 3.750 inch-pounds
II w
length of wrench -e adapter reading 33 c

Torque Wrench and Adapter

figure 4-iD
C14 4-6A
 ILB)

900

TORQUE
(IN. CB)

601]2

An acceptable method of checking the torque, if a torque result in overtorquing of the bolt.
wrench is not available, is to attach a spring scale to a

conventional flex or "T" handle inserted in an adapter. When a torque wrench adapter is used, the length of the
Force should be applied in~direction perpendicular to an adapter must be added to the length of the flex or "T"
imaginary line extending from the center of the bolt through handle wrench and a value calculated for that particular
the spring scale attaching point. combination. The following is a typical example in finding a
desired value.
To calculate the force in pounds (scale reading) required to
obtain the specific torque, divide the torque in inch-pounds Effective length of flex or "T"
by the distance in inches between the center of the bolt and handle wrench 12 inches
the scale attaching point. For example, if the specified Length of adapter ...........3 inches
torque is 5,000 inch-pounds and the distance is 25 inches, a Total length................................................... 15 inches
pull of 200 pounds must be applied. Unless torque values Desired torque on bolt .......’,000 inch-pounds
are specified as wet (lubricated), bolts to be torqued must
be clean and free of all iubricants; otherwise loss of normal 2.000 inch-pounds
friction allowed for establishing the torque values may IS inches~- 133.3 pounds (scale reading)

Computing Torqu~ with Spring Seek

Figure 4-16

REMOVAL OF LEADING EDGE AND MAIN SPAR INSTALLATION OF LEADING EDGE AND MAIN
SPAR
The wing must´• be removed from the airplane before the
leading edge or main spar can be removed. Before assembling the spar to the wing sections it
a.

is advisable to drive a hinge pin through the hinge sections

To remove the main spar disconnect the landing gear, to remove any foreign matter. burrs or

b. hinge pin coated liberally with

Use a new

MIL-M-7866B molybdenum disulfide powder.

NOTE c. Position the spar on the leading edge and align the
hinge section.
Support the landing gear to avoid damaging the
aft spar gear connection or remove the gear at

both connections. CAUTION

Do not attempt to spin the hinge pin in with a

a. Support wing on a suitable cradle.

the drill motor.

b. Remove wing tip, fuel cell, and other

the
equipment as required by the work being done.
c. Remove the screws around the spar caps at the d. Using an E-2 rivet gun (or a gun of equivalent
root and root tip ribs, size), drive the hinge pin in until the point is completely
d. hinge pins. (Vise Grip pliers may be
Pull the steel through the hinge but not against the wing attachment
used to clamp on the pin and, using the pliers as both fitting. The pin must be supported during the driving
fulcrum and lever, to pull.) Remove the pins from the wing. operation with telescoping tubes of Repair Kit 35-588. ~i
5/64 10 inch steel rod and a flush rivet set with a 3/32 inch
Do not attempt to spin the pins out with a drill motor: the x

hole suitable for driving pin. the Start the pointed end
heating and expansion of the pin will cause it to seize in the are

pin with the longest

hinge and break. of the pin in the hinge and support the
C14
4-68
tubes, the larger against the hinge, then commence driving between the fittings after the last nut is torqued. Torque
the pin. Replace the telescoping tubes as necessary until the each nut to the wet torque value specified in the
pin is completely driven. The hinge pins should extend 4.9 appropriate illustration (Figure 4-1, 4-IA, 4-1B, and 4-IC).
inches beyond the end of the spar. If necessary, trim them Coat the threads that protrude through the nut with ~1L-C-
to obtain this length. Bend the end of the hinge pins ~O 16173 Grade II corrosion preventive compound (5, Chart 2).
degrees and secure.

NOTE
NOTE
After torquing the upper forward wing attach
imperative that the larger tube be held
It is nut, remove the holding force from the wing
firmly against the hinge throughout the driving cradle prior to torquing the remaining three
procedure in order to prevent the pin from nuts.

kinking in the intervening space.

d. wing and tail stands, remove the

Remove the
e. Install the main wing section in the same manner airplane from the
jack, and test the airplane.
as the leading edge. e. At the first scheduled inspection after the wing
has been adjusted, check the wing bolts for proper torque.
Check the drain ports in the upper wing attach fittings to
NOTE assure that they are unobstructed.

If necessary, place a phenolic block against the

spar and vibrate the spar with another rivet WING DOLT NUT, AND FI~ING INSPECTION
gun.

NOTE
f. Replace the in the spar and root tip ribs.
screws

g. Install all components which had been removed. Read the entire section before removing any
wing bolts for inspection.

AD~USTING THE WINGS

WARNING
After wing has been reinstalled or repaired, flight tests
a

may show the wing to be chronically heavy or light. This An initial recurring wing bolt and nut
and
condition may be corrected by rotating the wing to lower inspection replacement schedule must be
and
the trailing edge of a heavy wing or raise the trailing edge of instituted on all Modei 33 Series airplanes, five
a light wing or by a combination of adjusting both wings. years old or older lsee Chart I). Wing bolts and
The aluminum washers between the upper wing fittings nuts that are removed in compliance with the
must be replaced each time the position of the wing is schedule shown in Chart I or because of
changed. If both wings have been removed, install the right condition, must be rendered unserviceable.
wing with the trailing edge at the highest point of the
adjustment travel and the left wing 1/16 inch down from the
highest point of travel. The total adjustment on each wing
is approximately 1/8 inch. The following steps should be CAUTION
implemented when adjusting the wings:
There should be no wing bolt binding during
a. Using a grease pencil outline the
position of the removal or installation of the bolts. Do not

wing on thefuselage. screw or drive a fittings.

bolt into or out of the

b. Place the airplane on a three point jack and raise If wing bolt binding is encountered, place the
until the wheels are clear. Place a suitable cradle under the airplane on a three point jack and raise until the
wing being adjusted and a wing stand under the unaffected wheels are clear. Place a wing stand under each

wing. A tail stand will also be required to assure stability. wing and a tail stand under the aft fuselage.
c. Loosen the nuts on the lower wing attach bolts Defuel the wing, loosen the remaining three
and remove the nuts and bolts from the upper wing attach nuts and rotate the wing until the bolt moves

fittings. Coat the bearing faces and bolt bores of the freely through the fittings. Replace the soft
fittings, the complete bolt, washers, and nut with MIL-C- aluminum washers between the upper wing
16173 Grade II corrosion preventive compound (5, Chart 2). attach fittings and retorque the nuts as
Install new soft aluminum washers between the upper wing instructed under INSTALLING THE WING.
attach fittings and replace the bolts and nuts. Raise or If bolt binding is not encountered and the wing
lower the trailing edge as required and retorque the wing has not shifted, replacement of the soft

attach nuts in the following order: upper forward, upper aluminum washers between the upper fittings is

aft, lower forward, and lower aft. There should be no gap not required.

C14 4-6C
 5 YEARS 5 YEARS 5 YEARS 5 YEARS
A

NEW I INITIAL SECOND FIRST REPLACEMENT REPEAT INSPECTION

AIRPLANE INSPECTION INSPECTION INTERVAL AND REPLACEMENT CYCLE

5 YEARS 5 YEARS 5 YEARS

SECOND FIRST REPLACEMENT REPEAT INSPECTION

AIRPLANES
1 INSPECTION INTERVAL AND REPLACEMENT CYCLE
5 YEARS OLD
OR OLDER
INITIAL
INSPECTION

NOTE NOTE

for airplanes five At each replacement interval, all wing attach

The first wing bolt inspection
older must. be performed at the hardware (bolts. washers, and nuts) must be
years old or

first scheduled inspection following the issue replaced.

date of revision C14.

Wing Bolt And Nut Inepectlon And Replacement Cycle

Chart 1

NOTE c. Using a nonmetallic brush throughly clean the

bolt, washers, and nut with naptha or methyl ethyl ketone
Beech AircraftCorporation supplies wing (1 or 2. Chart 2).
attach hardware that has been given an
additional magnetic particle inspection since CAUTION
manufacture. components may be
These
identified by the green dye on the head of the Assure that the 95-110025-1 (shown in Figure J-
bolt and on some portion of the nut. I) and the 95-110025-7 (shown in Figure J-1A
and 4-1C) washers have a full complete radius
a. removing any wing bolt, draw an outline
Before with no sharp edges that could damage the
of the wing position on the fuselage with a grease pencil. If fittitles´•
wing bolt binding is encountered and the wing must be
shifted, the outline will be helpful in returning the wing to
its original position. d. If the bolts and nuts do not exceed the life limit
shown in Chart i, visually inspect each bolt and nut with a
WARNING magnifying glass: inspect for
I0-power or stronger
corrosion, cracks, and mechanical damage. The cadmium
Use only the components specified in the
plating may display areas that appear rubbed. discolored, or
applicable illustrations, DO NOT INSTALL polished, These areas usually are the result of prevailing
THE BLACK PM H-20 NUTS, these nuts and of significance. A bolt
installation procedures are no
have been dry film lubricated with molybdenum because of cadmium plating
should not be rejected
disulfide. When MIL-C-16173 Grade II deterioration; however, any component that is cracked,
corrosion preventive compound is added to corroded or has mechanical damage must be replaced.
these nuts, the additional lubrication may cause the magnetic particle inspection process
e. Using
improper preload in the bolt when torqued, described in this chapter, check each bolt for
circumferential crack indications and each nut for

b. Starting at the lower wing attach point on each longitudinal crack indications. If the bolts and nuts prove to

side, remove, inspect and retorque one bolt and nut set at a damage (corrosion, cracks, and mechanical
be free of all
time until the complete set of eight bolts and nuts have damage), they may be reused after demagnetization and
been inspected, cleaning.

4-60 C14
 f. Clean the spat fitting bolt bores with naptha or out on the wing attach fittings. This could result
methyl ethyl ketone (1 or 2, Chart 2). Do not strip the in damage to the fittings and erroneous torque
epoxy paint from this area. Inspect the surface condition of readings.
each fitting; focus special attention on the washer seat and
bolt bore area. If scoring, corrosion pitting or washer
impressions are discovered in this area, contact the
Commercial Service Department of Beech Aircraft i. Torque the nut to the wet torque value shown in
Corporation. If the fitting is satisfactory, coat the bolt bore the appropriate illustration (Figure 4-1, 4-IA, 4´•1B, or 4-
and bearing faces of the fitting with Alodine 1200, 1200S or 1C). When a torque wrench adapter is used, the length of
1201 (3, Chart 2). Allow the coating to remain on the the adapter must be added to the length of the torque
surface for approximately five minutes. When the time has wrench and the proper torque value computed as detailed in
elapsed, wash the coated areas with water and blow dry ~do Figure 4-113 and 4-IE.
not wipe dry). Paint the treated areas with zinc chromate j. Coat the exposed threads that protrude through
primer (4, Chart I) and allow to dry, the nut with MIL-C-16173 Grade II corrosion preventive
g. Coat the bearing faces and bolt bores of the compound Chart 2).
fittings, the complete bolt, washers, and nut with MIL-C- k. Check that the decal shown in Figure 4-1F is
16173 Grade II corrosion preventive compound (5, Chart i). affixed to the appropriate locations on the airplane.
h. Install the bolt, washers and nut into the fittings, i. Check the drain ports in the upper wing attach
fittings to ensure that they ate open and free to drain.
CAUTION m. At the first scheduled inspection after the wing
bolts have been inspected or replaced, check for correct
Do not allow the wing bolt wrenches to bottom torque readings.

CHART 2

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION PRODUCT VENDOR

Naptha TT-N-95

Methyl Ethyl TT-M-261

Ketone

Coating Alodine Amchem Products Inc.,

1200, Spring Garden St.
1200S, Ambler Pennsylvania
1201 19002

Primer, Zinc MIL-P-8585

Chromate

Corrosion MIL-C-16173 Braycote Bray Oil Co.,

Preventive 1925 Manianna St.
Compound Los Angeles, Calf.
90032

Petrotech Penreco
1-4 P.O. Box 671,
Butler, Pa 16001

C14 4-6E
 CHART 3

WING BOLT WRENCHES AND

POSITION BOLT PART NO. WRENCH PART NO. NUT PART NO. NUT TORQUE
ADAPTER

LOWER
NAS152-46/M/

FORWARD
(CD´•1 thru GO-765) TS1222-3 1128126 tS1171´•2
1 thru CO-1304,
-1 thru 08-927,
1 thru CJ-155)

MS2001 2-28/M/ 1 TS1222-5 IEB1 26

or I or I(CE-928 and after, TK1817-922-2
131790-3 (9116 inch Alien /CJ-156 and after)
CD-1285, Wrench
-1 thru CE-376,
1 thru 01-30)

2-31/M/
or

31790-2
1286 and after,
-377 and after,
and after)

150-38/Mi TS1 222-5 128108 fSt 171-1

ARD ICD-l thru CD-1285, or ICD-1 thru CO-1304, or

-1 thN CE-376, 9/16 inch Alien DE-1 thru CE400 90-590013

1 thru CJ-30) Wrench Bxceot 08-394 and
-395
150-38/M/ 1 CJ-1 tt~ru CJ-30)
or

0-23 TS1222-6 (for

1286 thru CD-1304, MS20010-23 only
-377 thru 08-400 1/2 inch hex)
08-394 and
-395)

52-3nM/ lT51222-3 t2NB126 TIS1171-2

or 1(5/8 inch hex) a~D-1305 and after,
31790-1 trsl 222-5 ~E-394, CE-395, CE-401
1305 and after, 1(9/16 inch hex) tt~ru 08-927,
-394, CE-395, 08-401 I aJ-31 thru CJ-155
after, 1 B8126 (CE´•928 and T~18f 7-922-2
and after) I ~fter, CJ-156 8 aftel!

AFT WAS1 50-33/M/ TTS1 222-5 gB108 ~1171-1

Or I 1 01
6 inch Alien 1 50-590013

AFT F1AS~ 50-351Ml lTSI 222-5 reel 08 T61171-1

or I I Or

6 inch Alien 1 50-590013

4-6F C14
 Bolts:
Inspection of a bolt is accomplished by longitudinal
NOTICE
magnetization in a multiturn Low-fill factor coil (i.e. the
inner diameter of the coil greatly exceeds the bolt
WING BOLTS ARE LUBRICATED I diameter). For proper magnetization the bolt is positioned
SEE MAINTENANCE MANUAL close to the coil inside wall with the bolt length
FOR CORRECT TOROUE VALUES
perpendicular to the winding direction. The magnetic
particle suspension is flowed on the bolt and the
WHEN THE CORROSION PREVENTIVE COMPOUND HAS appropriate current is applied to achieve adequate field
BEEN APPLIED TO THE WING BOLTS, AFFIX THE ABOVE strength. Using the described procedure, laboratory testing
DECAL TO THE FOLLOWING LOCATIONS: has indicated that the ampere turn values listed in Chart j
1. On the side of the fuselage immediately above the RH
forward and aft wing bolt covers.
provide for optimum detection of discontinuities
perpendicular to the bolt axis.
2. On the wing immediately forward of the LH forward and aft
wing bolt covers.
3. On the wing immediately forward of the lower forward wing
bolt covers on both sides. CHART 4
4. On the wing immediately aft of the lower ah wing bolt covers
MAGNETIC-PARTICLE INSPECTION
on both sides.
(STEEL BOLTS)
Lubricated Bolt Identification Placard Location
Figure 4-1F TOTAL BOLT LENGTH
BOL T INCLUDING HEAD TO AMPERE
MAGNETIC-PARTICLE INSPECTION DIAME7ER NEAREST 1/4 INCH TURNS’

Magnetic-Particle Inspection is alocating

method for 5/8 INCH 21/2 INCH 7900
surface and subsurface discontinuities in ferromagnetic 5/8 INCH 2 3/4 INCH 7100
materials (i.e. materials capable of being magnetized); 5/8 INCH 3 INCH 6600

consequently, nonferromagnetic materials (such as 3/4 INCH 3 INCH 7900

aluminum alloys, magnesium alloys, copper alloys, lead, 3/4 INCH 3 1/4 INCH 7400
titanium alloys, nickle base alloys and many stainless steel 3/4 INCH 3 1/2 INCH 6700

alloys) cannot be inspected by this method. Magnetic- 3/4 INCH 33/4 INCH 6300
Particle inspection is based upon the principle that any 7/8 INCH 31/2 INCH 7900
discontinuities lying a in generally
direction transverse to 718 INCH 3 3/4 INCH 7400

the direction of the magnetic field of the part magnetized n8 INCH 4 INCH 6900
for the test will cause a leakage field to be formed at and 7/8 INCH 5 INCH 5500

above the surface of the part. The presence of the leakage 1 INCH 5 INCH 6300
field denoting the discontinuity is detected by the use of
finely dividedferromagnetic particles over the surface of ’Amperage requirement is the ampere turns value divided
the part. Some of the particles are mageticaily gathered and by the number of turns on the coil. For example: A I-inch
held by the leakage field to form an outline indicating the diameter x 5-inch long bolt tested on a 5-turn coil would

location, size, shape and extent of the discontinuity. In require 6300 5, or 1260 amps.

general, magnetic particle inspection utilizes a variety of

types of equipment for magnetization as well as several
Nuts: Inspection of a nut is accomplished by circular
methods for application of ferromagnetic particles to the magnetization on a central conductor (usually a copper rod)
test pan. Additionally, the ferromagnetic particles are
the approximate size of the nut inside diameter. For proper
available in a selection of colors (including fluorescent) and magnetization, the central conductor bar is inserted through
the nut and the bar is positioned between the heads of the
particle shapes. Magnetic particle inspections required by
the "wet wet horizontal equipment. The magnetic particle
this manual can best be accomplished utilizing
continuous method" on the standard wet horizontal type suspension is flowed on the nut and the appropriate current
is applied through the central conductor to achieve
equipment with either visible or fluorescent magnetic
particles suspended in a petroleum base vehicle (normally adequate field strength. Using the described procedure.
kerosene). magnetic panicle indications are best
Since laboratory testing has indicated that the amperage values
obtained when discontinuity lies in a direction
the listed in Chart 5 provide for optimum detection of

transverse to the magnetic field. the following procedures

discontinuities parallel to the nut axis.

are recommended for optimum detection of discontinuities

in both bolts and nuts. CHART 5

MAGNmC-PARLlCLE INSPECTION
WARNING (STEEL NtlTS)

improper operation of the particle inspection. CENTRAL

because of faulty equipment or untrained NUT SIZE CONDUCTOR SIZE AMPERAGE

operators, can jeopardize the airworthiness of

the parts being inspected. Minute electrical are 5/8 INCH 1/2 INCH 500 AMPS

burns caused during inspection by improper 3/4 INCH 5/8 INCH 600 AMPS

operation of the test equipment can result in 7/8 INCH 3/4 INCH 700 AMPS
eventual failure of the pan. 1 INCH 7/8 INCH 800 AMPS

C14 46G
 THIS ILLUSTRATION REPRESENTS A
TYPICAL SECTION OF THE SPAR CAP
AREAS TO BE INSPECTED FOR
INDICATORS OF POSSIBLE CORROSION
BOX SECTION SKIN THE INDICATORS ARE ALL SHOWN IN ONE
AREA AND ARE EXAGGERATED FOR CLARITY
ANY ONE OR ANY COMBINATION OF THE
O INDICATORS ARE CAUSE FOR FURTHER
SPAR CAP INVESTIGATION.
O

RAISED AREAS
CRACKS -L o

o
2’
O

O
~o o
o
O Y, o
o
~e
o
o

LEADING ~e o
EDGE SKIN
o

THIS RIVET PATTERN WILL VARY

PAINT BLISTER/ ON DIFFERENT MODELS

Visual Spar‘Csp inspection

Figure 4-~G

After magnetic particle inspection, the parts must be NOTE

carefully demagnetized and cleaned of the ferromagnetic
particles. Examine parts for any possible evidence of Special emphasis should be placed on airplanes
electric are burn that may have occurred during the that have been operated or stored for extended
inspection, periods (5 years’or longer) where geographical
locations or atmospheric conditions are highly
conducive to corrosion.
OUTBOARD WING MA/N SPAR CAP INSP~CTION

The outboard wing main spar cap must be inspected Inspection of the upper and tower spar cap should be
annually for corrosion. accomplished in the following manner:

a. Examine the forward and aft sides of the spar cap

WARNING where it meetsthe skin. If a whitish, salt-like, nonmetalic
substance is noted in these areas, a thorough inspection
All areas of the spar cap from the wing attach should be performed to determine if corrosion has
fitting to the outboard end of the spar cap must occurred. Wax or paint trapped between the edge of the
be inspected. skin and the exposed section of the spar cap should not be
misinterpreted as corrosion.
b. Wash all exposed areas of the upper and tower
Beechcraft Kit No. 35-4008-13 provides the
parts and spar cap.
information necessary to install a new 000-110011-1 LH c. Visually inspect all exposed areas of the upper
spar and a new 000-110011-2 RH spar on the 35-33 thru G33 and lower spar caps for irregularities, such as paint blisters,
series Bonanzas. The kit does not contain the spars which raised or uneven areas, and cracks. The exposed areas of
must be ordered separately. Parts for installing new spars the spar cap are extruded flat and irregularities could be an
on the E33 and F33 series Bonanzas may be ordered from indication of corrosion. Investigate all Irregularities to
the appropriate parts catalog. determine if any damage has occurred.

4-6H C14
 NOTE c. Remove the bolts attaching the rudder to the
rudder bell crank.
Uneven or raised areas on the spar caps may be d. Remove the bolts in the front and rear spars at

detected by sliding the fingers over the surface, the fuselage fittings.
by moving a straight edge over the surface or e. Pull the stabilizer straight up from the fuselage.
by sighting down the length of the spar cap f. Reinstall the stabilizer by reversing the above
surface. removal procedure.

If unusual conditions are encountered that cannot be WHEELS

resolved locally, contact Beech Aircraft Corporation for
evaluation and determination of corrective action that may (Refer to Service Instructions No. 0?1’,-200, Landing Gear,

be required. Modification of Goodyear Wheels for Use With Tube Type

Tires or Rim inflated Tubeless Tires.)

STABILIZERS
NOTE
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF HORIZONTAL
STABILIZER Do not exceed 500 wheel miles between
repacking intervals.
a. Remove the tail cone, the access plate over the
elevator tab actuator sprocket and the access doors on the
left side of the fuselage. DISASSEMBL Y OF MAIN AND NOSE WHEEL
b. Place the elevator tab in neutral position and
mark the chain and the sprocket to aid in reinstallation, (Prior to CD-640 except CD-62S. CD-63’,, CD-637, and CD-
Disconnect the elevator tab cables from the tab actuator. 638.)
c. Disconnect the elevator push rods.
d. Remove the bolts attaching the elevators to the a. Remove back plate from brake assembly on main
bracket that is mounted over the stabilizer rear spar. wheel. Remove guard assembly from nose landing wheel.
e. Remove the remaining attaching bolts in the rear b. Remove outer dust shield and hub cap on main
spar, the bolts in the front spar and
attaching remove the wheel.
bracket. Remove the stabilizer. c. Remove cotter pin and unscrew axle nut.
d. Remove spacer and wheel from axle.

CAUTION
CAUTION
The nuts for the rear spar attaching bolts must
be placed on the forward side of the spar to Make sure tire is fully deflated before
avoid contact with the elevator center hinge disassembling wheel.
assembly. Bolt pressure on the center hinge
assembly imposes stresses which can induce
structural failure of the hinge. e. Deflate tire and break bead away from wheel
flange.

f. Reinstall the stabilizer by reversing the above

removal procedure. NOTE

Avoid damaging wheel when breaking beads. A

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF VEF~TICAL scratched, gouged, or damaged wheel may
STABILIZER cause an air leak.

a. Remove the tail cone and the access doors on the

left side of the fuselage, f. Remove locknuts and washers from through
b. Disconnect antenna mast wiring, bolts.

C14
 g. Separate wheel halves, removing the rubber NOTE
O ring and tire.
h. On main wheel remove inner dust shield, grease The bearing cups are shrunk fit into the wheel
seal felt, grease seal ring, bearing cone and brake disc. On halves and should not be removed when the
nose wheel remove snap rings from both wheel halves, wheel is disassembled unless replacement of
releasing the grease seal rings, grease seal felts, and the cups is necessary. Before removal and
bearing cones. installation of the cup is attempted, the wheel
half must be heated for a period of 30 minutes
either in an oven at temperatures not to

NOTE exceed 149"C (300"F) or in boiling water.

The bearing cups are a press fit in the wheel

halves and should not be removed unless
replacement is necessary. To remove, heat the REASSEMBLY OF MAIN AND NOSE WHEEL
wheel half in boiling water for 15 minutes and (Prior Ib CD-640 except CD-625, CD-632, CD-637,
press the bearing cup out on an arbor press, and CD-638.)
Press in the new cup while the wheel is still
hot, a. Main Wheel: position the through-bolts into the
brake disc and set into the inner wheel half, using the
bolts to guide the disc, Make sure the disc is bottomed in
the wheel half. Nose Wheel; position the through-bolts and
DISASSEMBLY OF MAIN AND NOSE WHEEL their washers into the bolt holes of one wheel half.
b. Set disc and/of wheel flat on the table exposing
(CD-625, CD-632, CD-637, CD-638, CD-640 and after and the three bolt ends and the O- ring groove. Place the tire
CE-I and after.) around the wheel half, Inspect the O-ring groove on both
wheel halves to assure a clean and smooth surface. Dirt or

a. Remove the guard assembly from the nose chips under the ring will cause an air leak. Wipe the
O
landing
b.
wheel.
Remove the outer dust shield and hub cap from
O-ring with clean bearing grease, Aero Shell 5 (Shell Oil
Co., Houston Texas) and center in the O-ring groove. I
the main wheel, Place the other wheel half over it, using the bolt ends as a

c. After removing the retaining cotter pin, unscrew guide. Apply a light downward force to the outer wheel
the axle nut, half; if the wheel halves do not bottom solidly together the
d. Remove the spacer and wheel from the axle. O-ring is not positioned properly. Assemble the washers
and nuts on the bolts and torque all nuts to 90 inch-
pounds.
CA UTION

Make sure the tire is fully deflated before NOTE

disassembling the wheel.
Uneven or improper torque may cause bolt
failure and ultimate wheel failure.
e. After the tire has been deflated and the wheel
removed, break the bead of the tire away from the flange
of the wheel. NOTE

Saturate felt seals in 10 W 30 oil and press out

NOTE excess oil. Coat the sides and circumference

of the felt seals with the same grease used on

Take all precautions

necessary to avoid the wheel bearings.
damaging the wheel while breaking the beads
of the tire free from the wheel nange, since a
scratched, gouged, or damaged wheel may c. Pack bearing cones with clean bearing grease.
cause an air leak. Install bearing cone, grease seal ring, grease seal felt, and
snap ring on nose wheel or inner dust shield on dise side
of main wheel.
f. Remove the locknuts and washers from the bolts d. Place wheel on axle. Main Wheel: insert
securing the two wheel halves together. remaining bearing cone on axle and into wheel. Assemble

g. Separate the wheel halves and the ring disc, spacer, axle nut and cotter pin. Install hub cap and dust

removing the rubber ring tif installed) and the tire.

O- shield. Nose Wheel: assemble axle nut and cotter pin,
The nose wheel is disassembled in the same manner e. On main wheels, put back plates on brakes.
except chat it does not contain a ring disc. f. Rotate wheels to check installation.

4-8 C12
 REASSEMBL Y OF MAIN AND NOSE WHEEL NOTE
(co-szs, CD-632: CD-637j~ OD-628 CD-640 rhn,
CD-1251, CE-1 thru CE-300, CJ-1 thN CJ-30) Rotate the wheel while adjusting the axle nut

to insure the proper seating. Maintain free

a. Using a lint-free cloth dampened with denatured movement of the wheel with no side motion.
alcohol, wipe the wheel flange bead seat and wheel mating
surfaces to any foreign matter.
remove

b. lubricating the O-ring seal with Aero Shell

After k. Place the nose wheel in position on the axle;
5 (Shell Oil Co., Houston Texas) bearing grease or its install the axle nut then rotate the wheel while torquing
equivalent, install it in the brake-side wheel half, the nut to ISO to 200 inch-pounds,
i. Back off the axle nut to "0" inch-pounds.
m. While rotatingthe wheel, torque the nut to 30
NOTE inch-pounds and install the cotter pin. If the nut is not at a

I only.Al reference to the O-ring is for tubeless tires

locking position tighten

MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY REMOVAL

to the next position.

(CE-301 and after, CD-1258 thn/ CD-1304, CJ-31

c. Position the ring disc subassembly on the brake- and after, and earlier airplanes with Kit No. 35-8004
side wheel half, and insert the retaining bolts through the inStaIIad)
wheel half.
d. After wiping the tire beads clean with a cloth, a. Place the airplane on a jack.
carefully position the tire on the brake half of the wheel. b. Remove the four bolts which secure the back
e. Using the retaining bolts as a guide while taking brake plate and inner linings.
care to avoid rotating or damaging the O-ring seal in the c. Remove the cotter pin, wheel retaining nut,

brake-side wheel half, cautiously join the wheel halves washer. and bushing (spacer).
together. d. Remove the wheel from the axle.the inner
f. assembly together with the three
Lock the wheel bushing (spacer) may remain on the axle,
retaining washers and self-locking nuts,
g. Tighten the self-locking nuts of the main wheel
evenly tin rotation) until a torque of 140 inch-pounds is
reached. The nuts on the retaining bolts of the nose wheel MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
must be tightened to a torque of 83 inch-pounds. (CE-301 and after, CD-1258 Ihru CD-1304, CJ-31
and after, and earlier airplanes with Kit No. 35-8004

CAUTION
a. Clean and repack the wheel bearings. Replace
The uneven application of torque to the nuts any damaged or worn parts.
may cause bolt failure or air leaks.
i. Clean the wheel bearings and seals with
PD680 solvent.
h. After sparingly but thoroughly lubricating the

I hearing cones and cups with Aero Shell 5 grease (Shell Oil
Company. Houston, Texas), carefully install the bearings NOTE
in the cups.
i. Place the main wheel in position on the axle and Be sure the components are dry.
adjust the bearing.
Pack the wheel bearings with Aero Shell
No. s
grease: Shell Oil Company, One Shell Plaza. P.O.
CAUTION Box 1463 Houston. Texas or alternate ere:isr
MIL-G-8132,7. lThese greases are not compiltible;Jo not

When installing the wheel, carefully guide the mix them.)

ring disc into position between the brake 3. Soak the felt ~eals in l(lW70 oil. Pres4

linings to avoid possible damage to the linings. excess oil from the seals and coat the sides anci
This means that the brake piston must be circumference with the same grease used ~,n the ~5´•hrel
forced far enough back into the recess of the bearings.
brake housing for the piston lining to clear the
ring disc during this operation. b. Install the bearing, washer, felt seals, washer,
and snap-ring side of the
on one wheel and repeat the
procedure on the other side of the wheel.

j. Assemble the spacer, axle nut, and cotter pin in c. install the spacer on the axle tif it was

place on the axle. removed).

012 4-9
 d. Install the wheel on the axle. NOTE
e. Install the bushing (spacer) and optional washer.
f. Install the axle nut and torque to 15 to 20 foot- Heating the wheel halves in boiling water for
pounds while rotating the wheel. (This will seat the wheel 15 minutes will aid in pressing the outer
bearings.) bearing race (cup) from the wheel. While the
g. Back the axle nut off to "O" torque and wheel is still hot, press a new race (cup) into

retighten finger tight to remove end play in the bearings. .the wheel.
Using a wrench tighten nut to the next cotter pin position
and install the cotter pin.
h. Install the four bolts which secure the back
brake plate and inner linings. NOTE
i. Remove the airplane from the jack.
Be certain the wheels are clean and dry before
preceding further.
NOSE WHEEL ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
(CE-301 and after, CD-1258 thru CD-1304, CJ-31
and after) d. Press or tap the old bearing race (cup) from the
wheel halves, and press a new race (cup) into place.
a. Place the airplane on a jack.
b. Remove the cotter pin, axle nut, washer,
(optional) and bushing (spacer). NOTE
c. Remove the wheel from the airplane.
The bearing race (cup) should be chilled in dry
ice for fifteen minutes prior to installation.
NOSE WHEEL DISASSEMBL Y AND ASSEMBLY
(CE-301 and after, CD-1258 thru CD-1304, CJ-31
and after) e. Assemble the wheel halves together. Torque
wheel nuts as indicated on the wheel name plate.
a. Remove the snap ring, washer, felt seal, washer f. Clean the bearings and other components in
and bearing on the right side of the wheel. PD680 solvent.
g. Replace any worn or damaged parts.
h. Pack the
bearings with .4ero Shell No. grease
IShell Oil Company. One Shell Plaza. P.O. Box 14C~3
Houston, Texas). or alternate grease MIL-G-81322. too

NOTE not mix these greases: they are not compatible.)

i. Place a light film of grease on the bearing outer
Keep the right side components separate from race (cone).
the left ones. This will make it possible to
reinstall each bearing into the bearing race it
has worn to mate with. NOTE

Soak the felt seals in 10W30 oil. Press our the

excess oil and coat the sides and
circumferance with wheel bearing grease.
NOTE

The outer bearing race of each wheel should not j. Working on the right side of the wheel, install
be removed unless it is to be replaced. the bearing. washer, felt seal. washer and snap ring.
k. Repeat step "j" on the left side of the wheel.

b. Repeat step "a" on the left side of the wheel.

NOSE W~EEL ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
(CE-301 and after CD-1258 Ihru CD-1304, ~-31
and after)
NOTE
a. Place the wheel on the airplane.
Skip steps "c" through "e" unless the b. Install the bushing (spacer) and washer
bearings outer race needs replacement. (optional).
c. Apply bearing grease to the axle and bearing
surface of washer and nut.

c. Remove the wheel bolts, this will allow the d. While rotating the wheel, torque the nut to 150
wheel to be separated into two halves. _to 7,00 inch-pounds. (This will seat the bearings.)

4-10 C12
 e. Back off the nut to "0" torque. not normally removed unless replacement is
f. While rotating the wheel torque the axle nut to necessary.
30 inch-pounds.
g. Install the cotter pin. If thelocking positions do
not align, tighten nut to the next locking position, f. Remove O-ring from piston.

BRAKES NOTE

DISASSEMBLY OF CLEVELAND BRAKES It is not necessary to remove back plate or

(Prior to CD-640 except CD-625, CD-632, CD-637, pressure plate linings unless relining is
and CD-638.) necessary.

NOTE
NOTE
Brake disc minimum thickness is .227. When
the lining has worn to a thickness of 3/32 inch If the anchor bolts are nicked or gouged they
it should be replaced. Further use will result in should be sanded smooth to prevent binding
the rivets scoring the brake disc. with the pressure plate and torque plate.

NOTE NOTE

It is not necessary to remove wheel to Anchor bolts generally are not replaced at

disassemble the brake. each overhaul. If their removal is desired, they

may be pressed out after removing the nuts

and washers.
a. plate by removing two bolts.
Remove the back
b. cylinder back out of torque plate
Slide the brake
and slide the pressure plate off the anchor plate.
c. Disconnect hydraulic brake line from brake DISASSEMBLY OF BEECH BRAKES

I fitting and drain brake fluid from brake cylinder. Cap the (CD-625, CD-632, CD-637 CD-638, CD-640 through

plate to hold it while disconnecting the brake lines.)

NOTE
NOTE
When the bottom of the brake housing is
Avoid getting brake fluid or other oil on the within 1/32 inch of the
landing gear torque
brake linings. flange. lining replacement is indicated.

The maximum wear limit on the anvillining is

5/32 inch measured from the rubbing surface
NOTE to the back of the lining center.

,4 scored brake cylinder should be replaced, h The maximum wear limit on the piston lining
scored cylinder will leak or cause rapid O-ring subassembly is 15/16 inch measured from the

wear, rubbing surface to the bottom of the metal

support at the center.

d. Blow out piston with air hose through port in

tube fitting. a. Remove the wheel from the airplane as directed
e. Remove bleeder cap and bleeder screw from in the instructions previously outlined in this section.
bleeder seat. b. Disconnect and cap the hydraulic brake line
from the brake fitting and drain the brake fluid from the
brake cylinder. while taking the precautions necessary to
NOTE avoid getting brake fluid or other oil on the brake linings.
c. Remove the bolts securing the brake and torque
To avoid aluminum thread wear with resulting arm spacer to the torque flange of the landing gear.
leaks, the tube fitting and the bleeder seat are d. Remove the hinge bolt, washer, and
_

4-11
012
securing the torque arm to the brake assembly. NOTE
e. Remove the nuts and washers from the two bolts
securing the back plate subassembly, lining guide, and If the anchor bolts are nicked or gouged they
spacer to the brake housing, and separate the back plate should be sanded smooth to prevent binding
and spacer from the housing while removing the piston with the pressure plate and torque plate.
lining and carrier.
f. Remove the attaching screw to separate the
piston lining from the carrier. f, Assemble pressure plate and slide cylinder onto

g. Release the anvil lining from the anvil by torque plate.

removing the retaining screw, g. Assemble back plate.
h.Remove the flat head screw, washer, and nut

that anchor the lining guide to the brake housing.

i. Remove the piston from the housing and the 0- REASSEMBL Y OF BEECH BRAKES
ring seal from the piston. (CD-625, CD-632, CD~37, CD~38, CD-640 through
CP1105, CE-I through CE-172,)

NOTE
NOTE
It is recommended the O-ring seal be
that
replaced at each overhaul; however, if the seal When the bottom of the brake housing is within
is to be reinstalled upon reassembly of the 1/32 inch of the landing gear torque flange,
wheel, its position with relation to its seat lining replacement is indicated.
should be carefully indicated on a clean sheet
of paper. The seal should then be carefully The maximum wear limit on the anvil lining is
removed and placed on the paper as indicated 5/32 inch measured from the rubbing surface to

by the markings so that it can be reinstalled as the back of the lining center.
nearly as possible in its original position.
The maximum wear limit on the piston lining

subassembly is 15/16 inch measured from the

j. Remove the bleed screw and washer from the rubbing surface to the bottom of the metal
brake housing. support at the center.

REASSEMBLY OF CLEVELAND BRAKES a. Apply a thin coat of MIL-H-5606 hydraulic fluid

(Prior to CD-640 8XC6Pt CD-625, CD-632, CD-637 to the cylinder wall of the housing and to the contacting
and CD-638) surfaces of the piston.
b. Lubricate the piston O-ring seal with MIt-H-5606
hydraulic fluid prior to installing it on the piston.
NOTE c. When installing the piston in the brake housing,
position it
that the wider surface adjacent to the O-ring
so

Brake disc minimum thickness is .227. When groove will be toward the lining.
the lining has worn to a thickness of 3/32 inch it d, Align the lining guide with the brake housing and
should be replaced. Further use will result in secure it in place with the retaining screw, washer, and nut.

the rivets scoring the brake disc. e. Anchor the anvil lining to the anvil with the
retaining screw.

f. Anchor the piston lining to the carrier with the

a. Install bleeder screw in bleeder seat, attaching screw.

b. Wet O-ring in brake fluid and install on piston. g. With the spacer
properly aligned with the brake
housing piston lining and carrier held in position on
and the
the spacer and guide.insert the two attaching bolts through
NOTE the brake housing, guide, spacer. and back plate.
h. With a washer in place under each bolt head and
A scored brake cylinder should be replaced. A nut, apply a torque of 160-190 inch-pounds to the nuts,
scored cylinder will leak or cause rapid O-ring locking in place the bolts that secure the brake housing and
wear. back plate together.
i. Insert the bleeder screw through the washer and
into the housing.
c. Wet piston with brake fluid and press into j. After lubricating the hinge bolt sleeve with
cylinder. MIL-G-81322 grease (or its equivalentl, secure Ihe torque I
d. Connect brake lines to tube fittings and bleed arm to the brake housing with the sleeve, washer, and hinge

brakes. bolt. Torque the hinge bolt to 50 inch-pounds dry torque

e. Assemble bleeder cap, and secure with safety wire.

4-12 012
 k. aligning the torque arm spacer and torque
After BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER REMOVAL AND
arm of the brakeassembly on the backside of the landing jNSfALLA nON
gear torque flange, secure the brake assembly in place with

the four attaching bolts, washers, and nuts. a. Close the parking brake valve by pulling the
i. Connect the hydraulic line to the elbow on the parking brake control.
brake housing, and bleed the brake. The back fill method of b. Unsnap the floor mat and remove the floor board
pressure filling from the brake bleeder screw is section below the brake pedals.
recommended. c. Disconnect the two brake hydraulic lines at.each
m. Install the wheel on the landing gear axle as master cylinder and mark each line to ensure correct
described in the instructions previously outlined in this installation.
section. d. Remove the master
cylinder attaching bolts and
nuts and remove the master
cylinder.
e. If a new master cylinder is to be installed. note
CAUTION the position of the 45-degree elbow fittings.
f. Reinstall the master cylinder by reversing the
When installing the wheel, carefully guide the removal procedure.
ring disc into position between the brake linings g. Replenish with hydraulic fluid (MIL-H6S06) and
to avoid possible damage to the linings. This bleed the brakes.
means that the brake piston must be forced far
enough back into the recess of the brake
housing for the piston lining to clear the ring BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER OVERHAUL
disc during this operation.
PARAIUOUNT

n. Apply the brake several times to seat the parts. DISASSEMBL Y

o. Release the brake and check to be sure that the

wheel rotates freely, a. Remove the snap ring (3) and pull the assembled
piston from the housing (18).
b. Remove the clevis (1), nut (2) and cotter pin (II)
DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY OF BEECH from rod (16); this will allow the removal of rctai’ning
BRAKES washer (4), rod wiper (5), guide bushing (6) and O-rings (7
(CD-1106 through CD-1271, CE-173 through CE-300, 8) from the piston rod.
cJ-1 through CJ-30) c. Remove the piston (10) and O-ring (9) from the
piston rod and remove the spring washer (15).
For disassembiy and reassembly of brakes on the above d. Remove cotter pin (12) from the valve stop (14)

airplanes, refer to BEECHCRAFT Supplementary and remove the valve stop from the piston rod.
Publications Manual 98-33283B or subsequent, e. The valve assembly and spring will fall free of the
housing with the piston assembly removed.
f. Clean all parts with solvent (PD68O).
DISASSEMBL Y AND REASSEMBL Y OF g. Check all parts for cracks, corrosion, distortion
CLEVELAND BRAKES and wear.

(CD-1212 end after CE-301 and after CJ-31 and

after) ASSEMBLY

For disassembly and reassembly of brakes on the above a. Lubricate all parts with hydraulic fluid
airplanes, refer to BEECHCRAFT Supplementary (MIL-HS606).
Publications Manual 98-35012 or subsequent.

NOTE
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER LINKAGE
ADlUSTMENT Use new O-rings when assembling the master
cylinder.
The proper linkage arrangement will adjust the brake pedals
to a straight upright position. This is considered the best
adjustment since it will prevent the pedals from hitting the b. Install the valve assembly (13) and spring (17)
firewall in their extreme forward position. Linkage into the housing.
adjustment is obtained by removing the cievis from the c. Install the valve stop (14) and cotter pin (II) to

rudder pedal and turning the clevis on or off the piston rod the piston rod (16).
as required. After both pistons are adjusted to the same d. Install spring washer (15), O-ring (9) and piston
length, tighten the jam nuts. (10) to the piston rod.

C12 4-13
 i

1?
a
Is

(e)------7

~----´•I

PARAMOUNT GERDES

PARAMOUNT
GERDES
1. Clevis
2. Nut 19. Clevis
3. Snap Ring 20. Lock Nut
4. Retaining Washer 21. Shaft
5. Rod Wiper 22. Snap Ring
6. Guide Bushing 23. "O"Ring
7. "O"Ring 24. Cap End andBearing
8. "O"Ring 25. "O"Ring
9. "O"Ring 26. Snap Ring
10. Piston 27. Collar
11. CotterPin 28. Spacer
12. Cotter Pin (Modified) 29. "O"Ring
13. Valve Assembly 30. "O"Ring
14. Valve Stop 31. Piston

15. Spring Washer 32. Spring

16. Piston Rod 33. Snap Ring
17. Spring 34. Spring
18. Housing 35. Housing

Figure 4-2. Brake Master Cylinders

4-14 C12
 e. Install O-rings (7 8), guide bushing (6), rod PROPELLER GOVERNOR
wiper (5), retaining washer (4), cotter pin (11), nut (2) and
clevis (I)on the piston rod. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF PROPELLER
f. Install the assembled piston assembly into the GOVERNOR ASSEMBL Y
housing and install the snap ring (3).
The governor is mounted on the engine pad with four
GERDES studs and self-locking nuts. Remove the governor as

follows:
DISASSEMBL Y
a. Disconnect the control rod at the governor
a. Remove the snap ring (22) from the clevis end of control lever.
housing (35) and pull the assembled piston assembly from b. Remove the lour mounting nuts and pull the
thehousing, governor from the studs.
b. Remove the clevis (19), lock nut (20) and cap, end
and bearing (24) from the shaft (21).
c. Remove O-rings (23 25) from the cap, end and NOTE
bearing.
d. Remove snap ring (26), thrust collar (27) and A tool may be made locally to facilitate the
spacer 128) from shaft, removal of the governor. A 6 or 8 inch wrench
e. Remove O-ring (29) from the shaft. with a M inch box and open end may be used.
f. Remove snap ring (33) and spring (32) from the At approximately I~ inches from the open
shaft. end, heat and bend the wrench 90". The wall
Remove piston (31) from the shaft. of the box end may ´•have to be ground down to
h. Remove "O" ring (30) from the piston, fit.
i. Remove spring (34) from the housing.
j. Clean all parts with solvent (PD 680).
k. Check all parts for cracks, corrosion, distortion c. Cover the governor base and engine pad to

and wear. protect them.

d. Install the governor by reversing the above
procedure.

ASSEMBL Y NOTE

a. Lubricate all parts with hydraulic fluid Torque the mounting bolts per Teledyne
(M1L-H-5606). Continental Motors Torque Chart 530321.

WINDOWS
NOTE
WINDOW SURFACE REFINISHING
Use new "0" rings when assembling the
master cylinder. Acrylic windows may be refinished if they have minor
scratches. Windows with crazing as a result of chemical
damage can not be repaired.

b. Install spring (34) into the housing (35). WINDSHIELD REMOVAL (ONE OR TWO PIECEI
c.. Install "O" ring (30) on the piston (31~.
d. Install piston on shaft (21). a. Remove the giareshield and outside air
e. install spring (32) and snap ring (33) on shaft. temperature gage (if installed in this area).
f. Install "0" ring (29) on shaft at cievis end, b. Remove the attaching screws from the defroster

g. Install spacer (18). thrust collar (7,7) and snap duct and move the duct to clear the lower row of rivets on

ring (9,6) on shaft. the windshield.

h. Install "0" ring (25) to cap end and bearing c. Remove the screws and spacer from the
(9-4). glareshield angles.
i, Install cap end and bearing (?4). lock nut (10) d. Remove the trim strips from around the inside of
and clevis (19) to shaft. the windshield.
j. Install assembled piston assembly into housing, e. To facilitate reinstallation. mark the location of
k. Install snap ring ~22) to housing. the trim strip clips.

012 4-15
 aeechcraft
DEBONAIR/BONANZA 33 SERIES
SHOP MANUAL

TEMPORARY REVISION NO. 4-2

Manual Affected: Debonair/Bonanza 33 Series Shop Manual (33-590011-IC).
Filing Instructions: Insert adjacent to page 4-16.

Reason: Revise procedures for flap drive cable connection.

FLAP DRIVE CABLE CONNECTION

Connect the LH and RH flap drive cables to the flap drive motor as follows, using the illustration for component
locations:

a; Install the outboard nut and washer as far as it will go on the threaded portion of the flap cable.
b. Insert the retainer through the mount support and onto the motor shaft as far as it will go. Align the retainer
keyway with the key slot in the flap motor drive shaft and tighten one set screw temporarily.
c. While inserting the flap cable through the mount support, install the inboard washer and nut. Install the cable
through the retainer and into the motor drive shaft until the keyway is just past the key slot in the retainer.
d. Loosen the set screw that was tightened in Step b. Ensure that the retainer is still installed on the motor shaft
as far as it will go and rotate the retainer 90".

e. Keep inboard pressure on the retainer and tighten both retainer set screws.

f. Secure the flap mounting support by tightening the nuts. Tighten the inbcard nut to ensure
drive cable to the
that there is sufficient clearance between the outboard edge of the retainer and the cable housing to allow the
retainer to rotate without coming into contact with the cable housing. If the threaded part of the cable ho~;sing is
not long enough to install the two nuts and washers, using a die, add 5/8-24 UNEF threads until .88 inch thread
length is reached. Tighten the outboard nut against the mounting support.

MODEL 60 AIRPLANES ARE EQUIPPED

WITI-1 A SPRING Ii\] TI-IIS LOCATION.
ENSURE THAT THE SPRING IS INSTALLED, FORWAAC

1_
RETAINER [50-361131)

MOUNTING
SUPPORT
CUT~OARO

FLAP
MOTOR SET SCREW

SET SCREW RETALNER

OUTBOARD
KEYWAY
SET fit NUT
SCREW 1~1 OUTBOARD
WASHER

KEY SLOT IN PNBOARD LNBOAKD

MOTOR SHAFT NUT WAS~-1ER

ENSURE THAT THERE IS SUFFTCTENT CLEAR-

ANCE BETWEEN THE OUTBOARD EDGE OF THE
RETAINER AND THE CABLE tlOUSING TO ALLOW
THE RETAINER TO ROTATE WITHOUT COMING INBOARO END VIEW OF OUTDOARD END VIEW OF
INTO CONTACT WITH THE HOUSING. RETAINER (50-3611311 RETAINER (50-361131)
C93010~B0116 C

Section 4
Page 1 of 1

Temporary Revision No. 4-2 Nov 15/93

 f. Drill out the rivets from around the windshield. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FRONT SEAT. I
Remove the windshield. b. Remove the access cover.
g.
c. Detach the clamp supporting the electrical wiring
from the right hand flap shaft housing.
NOTE d. Disconnect the flap shafts from the motor.
e. Disconnect the flap motor electrical wiring
Because the window is sealed, considerable (except the ground wire) at the quick disconnect.
effort may be required to break the windshield f. Remove the nap motor attaching bolts and the
loose from the canopy section. ground wire secured to one of the bolts and remove the
flap motor.

WINDSHIELD INSTALLATION (ONE OR TWO

PIECE) FLAP MOTOR INSTALLA TION
(CD-l and after, CE-1 thru CE-682 and CJ-I thru
a. Remove any sealer around the canopy with ~J- 128)
toluol. Touch-up scratches or bare metal with zinc
chromate primer.
b. Trim the tooling tabs from the windshield, place
the windshield in position and mark the areas where NOTE
material must be removed from the windshield to obtain a

proper fit. When a 35-380109 motor is used to replace the

c. Remove the windshield and trim off excess motor originally installed on serials CD-I thru
material as determined in step "b". CD-1199 and CE-I thru CE-248, the larger size
d. Place the windshield in position and cleco in of the new motor makes it necessary to
place using the pilot holes provided. enlarge the flap motor access hole (located
e. Back drill the windshield frame using the under the front seat) by .75 inch on the aft
existing holes in the canopy section as a guide, edge to provide clearance. (See illustration.)
f. Remove the windshield, burr all holes and apply The existing cover plate over the access hole
Presstite #576 sealer to the windshield frame where it may be retained to cover the enlarged hole.
makes contact with the canopy section.

g. Place the windshield in position and cleco in

place.
h. Using AN470AD4 rivets, secure the windshield a. Place the flap motor in position and secure with

to the canopy section, the flap motor attaching bolts. Ensure that the ground wire
is attached to one of the bolts.
b. Connect the flap motor electrical wiring at the
NOTE quick disconnect.
c. Connect the flap shafts to the nap motor.
When riveting the windshield in place, install d. Attach theclamp that supports the electrical
the trim strip clips in the same locations as wiring to the right hand flap shaft housing.
marked in step "e" of the "Windshield e. Install the access cover.

indicated in
Removal" procedure, f. Install the front seat assemblies
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FRONT SEAT.
as

1
Secure the glareshield angles in place with
attaching screws, and spacers.
nuts

j. Position the defroster duct and secure in place. FLAP MOTOR REMOVAL
k. Install the trim strips. (CE-683 and after and CJ-129 and after)
i. Install the glareshieid and outside air
Remove the front assemblies, indicated
temperature gage (if removed). a, seat as

m. Clean the paint as necessary,

inSEAT.REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF
I
b. Remove the spar cover.

FLAP MOTOR c. Detach the clamp supporting the electrical wiring

from the right hand shaft
housing.
flap
FLAP MOTOR REMOVAL d. Disconnect the flap shafts from the flap motor.
(CD-l and after, CE-1 ~hru CE-682 and CJ-I thru e. Disconnect the flap motor electrical wiring at the
CJ-128) quick disconnect.
f. Remove the flap motor attaching bolts and

a. Remove the front _seat assemblies as indicated in remove the flap motor.

NOTE: Please see the

TEMPORARY
4-16 REVISION C12

~that revises this page.

 EDGE OF
OLD (VTOUT i

0.75

REMOVE NUTPLATE

AIRCRAFT

VIEW LOOKING DOWN

Figure 4-2A, Flap Motor Access Hole Modification

(When Making Initial Installation of 35-380109 Flap Motor,
CD-1 Thru CD-1199 and CE-1 Thru CE-248)

FLAP MOTOR INSTALLATION FLAP TRACK WEAR LIMITS

(CE-683 and after and CJ-129 and after)
The allowable track wear on the bearing surfaces is .032
inch, resulting in a maximum flap track slot dimension of
CAUTION .785 inch. The allowable wear into the track side surface is
.050 inch. Track wear within the
preceding limitations may be
The flap motor used airplane serials CE-683
on dressed smooth with emery cloth to prevent roller
light
and after and CJ-129 and after, is NOT binding. MIL-M-7866B (Molykote 2) mixed with naphtha may
interchangeable with the flap motor used on be brushed on the flap tracks during servicing of the
priorserials. In the event of flap motorfailure or it airplane.
is determined that major overhaul is required for
the flap motor to operate properly, the flap motor
should be replaced. No attempt should be made
to overhaul the motor in the field. ELEVATOR TRIM TAB

a. flap motor in position and secure with the

Place the ELEVATOR TRIM TAB ACTUATOR DISASSEMBLY
flap motor attaching bolts. (CE-1 thru CE-616, CE-743 and after, CJ-1 thru
b. Connect the flap motor electrical wiring at the CJ-I10, CJ-142 thru CJ-148, except airplanes which
quick disconnect, incorporate kit 33-4002-1 or kit 33-4002-3)
c. Connect the flap shafts to the flap motor. (Figure 4-3)
d. Attach the clamp that supports the electrical wiring
to the right hand flap shaft housing.
e. Install the access covet.
f. Install the front seat assemblies as indicated in a. Remove the snap ring (1) from the actuator
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FRONT SEAT. housing and pull the nut assembly (2) out of the housing.
b. Remove the actuator screw (4) from the nut
assembly.
INSTALLATION OF FLAP TRACK ROLLERS

Install the flap track rollers (four rollers per flap and two CAUTION
rollers per track) in the flap track brackets with the flanges
facing each other. Use only the wide flanged rollers in the aft Do not damage rod end when drilling out
location, rivets.

C13 4-17
 13

2 4

1 5 12

9t 10 3

11

55´•7336
8 7 1 b
NOTE

1. Snap Ring
At serial CE-743 and after, and CJ-142 and 2. Nut Assembly a. Bushing
after, item 5 is a shoulder pin with a nut and 3. Bearing 9. Check Nut
washer. At the same effectivity, item 11 is
serial 4. Actuator Screw 10. Adjusting Bushing
made of aluminum; earlier housings were 5. Rivet or Shoulder Pin 11. Housing
manufactured of magnesium. 6. Actuator Rod End 12. Rivet
7. Bearing 13. O-Ring

Figure 4-3. Elevator Tab Actuator

(CE-1 Thru CE-616, CJ-1 Thru CJ-110;
CE-743 and after, CJ-142 and atter)

c. Drill out rivets (5) and (1 2); on CE-743 and afteror e. Install screw (4) into nut (2).
CJ-142 and after, remove the nut, washer and shoulder
pin, before drilling out rivet (12). Remove actuator rod end WARNING
(6) from the screw. The bearing (7) and the bushing (8) can
now be removed from the screw. The trim tab actuator to be installed on the left
d. Remove check nut (9) and screw out the end hand horizontal stabilizer must have threads on

adjusting bushing (10) with appropriate spanner wrench. its actuator screw (4) that rotate clockwise when
e. Remove the bearing (3) from housing (11). screwed into the nut assembly (2). The trim tab
actuator to be installed on the right hand horizon-
Clean all parts in PD680 solvent and inspect for cracks, tar stabilizer must have threads on the actuator
corrosion, and distortion. Replace bushings and any parts screw (4) that rotate counterclockwise when

showing evidence of deterioration. Lubricate all parts with screwed into the nut assembly (2).
Mll-G-23827 grease prior to assembly.

ELEVATOR TRIM TAB ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY f. Install nut assembly (2) into housing (11); secure

with snap ring (1).

(CE-1 thru CE-616, CE-743 and after, CJ-1 thru CJ-110,
CJ-142 thru CJ-148, except airplanes which g. Install a new O-ring (13) in the adjusting bushing
incorporate kit 33-4002-1 or kit 33-4002-3) (10).
h. Screw
adjusting bushing (10) into housing (11)
(Figure 4-3)
until the endplay has been removed from the nut assembly,
and tighten the check nut (9). An end play of 0.003 inch is
a. Install bearing (3) into housing (11).
and check nut(9).(Do permissible. A maximum of 15 inch-pounds may be required
b. Install adjusting bushing (10)
to overcome internal friction.
not tighten.)
c. bushing (8), bearing (7) and snap ring (1) an
Install
actuator screw (4). ELEVATOR TRIM TAB ACTUATOR DISASSEMBLY
d. Install actuator rod end (6) on actuator screw (4) (CE-617 thru CE-742, CJ-II1 thru CJ-141, except
and secure with rivets (5) and (12), or ton serials CE-743 and airplanes which incorporate kit 33-4002-1 or kit
after, and CJ-142 and after) secure with nut, washer, and 33-40023)
shoulder pin (5), and rivet (12). -(Figure 4-;1)

a. Remove the retainer ring (2) from the housing (5)

NOTE and pull the nut assembly (6) out of the housing.
b. Remove the actuator screw (4) from the nut
Lubricate all parts with MlL-G-23827 grease assembly (6).
priorto assembly. c. Drill out rivet (12).

4-18 C15
 v 1. Actuator Rod End
4
2. Retainer Ring

B
3
3. Collar
4. Actuator Screw
5. Housing
6. Nut Assembly
4
7. Bushing
8. Check Nut
9. Shoulder Pin
10. Nut
ii. Washer
12. Rivet

Figure 4-4, Elevator Tab Actuator

(CE-617 Thru CE-742, CJ-111 Thru CJ-141)

d. Remove nut (10), washer (Il)and shoulder pin (9). NOTE

Remove the actuator rod end (1). The collar (3) can now be
removed. Lubricate all parts with lubricating grease
e. Remove check nut (8) and screw out bushing (7) MIL-G-23827 prior to assembly.
with the appropriate spanner wrench.

Clean all parts with PD680 solvent and replace parts that are e. Install actuator screw (4) into nut (6).
cracked, corroded and distorted. Lubricate all parts with
lubricating grease Mll-G-23827 prior to assembly.
WARNING

ELEVATOR TRIM TAB ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY The trim tab actuator to be installed on the left
(CE-617 thru CE-742, CJ-111 thru CJ-141, except hand horizontal stabilizer must have threads on
airplanes which incorporate kit 33-4002-1 or kif its actuator screw (4) that rotate clockwise when
33-4002-3) screwed into the nut assembly (6). The trim tab
(Figure 4-4) actuator to be installed on the right hand horizon-
tal stabilizer must have threads on the actuator
screw (4) that rotate counterclockwise when
a. Place collar (3) and retainer ring (2) on actuator
screwed into the nut assembly (6).
screw (4).
b. Install actuator rod end
(1) on actuator screw (4)
careful to f. Install nut assembly (6) into housing (5), and secure
being align the holes.
Install shoulder pin (9) washer (11) and nut (10). With retainerring (2).
c.

d. Install rivet (12), P/N MS2061333110 g. Install bushing (7) and secure with nut (8).

4-19
C15
 112
1! g

3 4

10

1. Nut 7. Nut Assembly

2. Washer 8. Housing
3. Shoulder Pin 9. Bearing T \--1
4. Snap Ring 10. O-Ring
5. Bushing 11. Adjusting Bushing
F33C-164-6
6. Actuator Screw 12. Check Nut

Figure 4-4A Elevator Tab Actuator

NOTE showing evidence of deterioration. Lubricate all parts with

MIL-G-23827 grease prior to assembly.

When assembling the actuator, screw the
threaded bushing (7) into the assembly (5) until
end play of the nut assembly (6) has been a. Install bearing (9) into housing (8).
removed then lock in place by tightening the b. Install O-ring ~10) into adjusting bushing (11).
check nut (8). The nut assembly (6) must be free c. Install adjusting bushing (11) and check nut (1 2).
to rotate and provide smooth operation through (00 not tighten.)
its full travel with a maximum end play of 0.0015 d. Install bushing (5) and snap ring (4) on actuator
inch. screw (8).
e. Install shoulder pin (3), washer (2) and nut (1) on

ELEVATOR TRIM TAB ACTUATOR DISASSEMBLY

acfuafor screw (6).
Model E33C, F33C (CJ- 1 through CJ- 148 which incor-
porate kit 33-4002-7 or kit 33-4002-3)
NOTE
(Figure 4-4A)
Remove the snap ring Lubricate all parts except O-ring with
a. (4) from the actuator
housing andpull the nut assembly (7) out of the housing. MIL-G-23827 grease prior to assembly.
b. Remove the actuator screw (6) from the nut Lubricate the O-ring with MIL-S-8660.

assembly.
c. Remove nut (1), washer (2) and shoulder pin (3).
The bushing (5) can now be removed from the screw.
f. Install screw (6) into nut (7).
d. Remove check nut
(12) and screw out the end
adjusting bushing (11) with appropriate spanner wrench.
WARNING
e. Remove O-ring (10).
f. Remove the bearing (9) from housing (8).
The trim tab actuator to be installed on the left
hand horizontal stabilizer must have threads on
Clean all parts in PD680 solvent and inspect for cracks,
its actuator screw (6) that rotate clockwise when
corrosion, and distortion, Replace bushings and any parts
screwed into the nut assembly (7). The trim tab
showing evidenceof deterioration, Lubricate all parts with
actuator to be installed on the right hand horiron-
MIL-G-23827 grease prior to assembly.
tal stabilizer must have threads on the actuator
screw (6) that rotate counterclockwise when
ELEVATOR TRIM TAB ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY Model
screwed into the nut assembly (7).
E33C, F33C (CJ- 1 through CJ- 148 which incorporate
kit 33-4002-1 or kit 33-4002-3)
(Figure 4-4A)

Clean all parts in PD680 solvent and inspect for cracks, g. Install nut assembly (7) into housing (8), secure

corrosion, a’nd distortion. Replace bushings and any parts with snap ring (4).

4-20 C15
 9 12
10 678
13

\r .8 IN
i-i
r:’

.25 IN

TAP 5/8-11 1 O 1.2111;

i ___~
TYP
2.9 IN

b I i I
TAB
I t
tAAj
3/ /1,15~
14 1

t’
1.30 IN

ITEM QUANT. DESCRIPTION

NO.
1 2 3/4 x 1 x 6 aluminum or equiv. I f r r
2 2 1 x 1 3/8 x 1 314 aluminum or equiv,
3 1 1/2 x 7 1/2 x 10 aluminum or equiv, .65116
4 1 C81Q Indicator"
5 1 3/4 x 2 1/2 x 14 aluminum or equiv. r t
8 1 1/4 Dia. x 2 corrosion res. stl.
7 1 1/4 Dia. x 1 corrosion res. stl. II I II 1 1.6’ IN

8 1 1/4-28 nut
9 1 3/8 x 5 x 10 rubber .31 IN

10 1 3/8 x 2 x 10 rubber
11 1 114 x 2 x 10 corrosion res, stl.
12 2 1/2 13 3 VLIER Torque screw

_I
x x

13 2 KN813 Keensert or tap 112 13

14 2 1/8 x 1 x 3/4 rubber
SECTION A A

R.I. THIS GROOVE TO BE A SNUG FIT

"P/N of Federal Products Corp., Providence, TO THE SCREW BRACKET ON
THE DIAL INDICATOR

Figure 4-5, Fabricating Check Fixture for Tab Deflection

C15 i´•j. 4-21

 i. Release half the load until a 1.S-pound upward
h. adjusting bushing (11) into housing (8)
Screw
until the end play has been removed from the nut assembly, load is obtained. Record the dial reading as "D".
and tighten the check nut (12). An end play of 0.003 inch is j. Enter the recorded values on a copy of Chart 6
and proceed as follows:
permissible.

i. Multiply "B" by 2 and record as "2B".

ELECTRIC ELEVATOR TRIM TAB SYSTEM 2. Subtract "A" from "2B" and record as

"X".

For the electric trim tab system see ELECTRIC TRIM TAB 3. Multiply "D" by 2 and record as "2D".
SYSTEM in Section 3. 4. Subtract "C" from "2D" and record as

i:
CHECKING ELEVATOR TAB FREEPLAY
(Figure 4-5)

Visually inspect the elevator tabs for any damage, security

of hinge attach points, and for tightness of the actuating CHART 6
systems. Inconsistencies should be remedied prior to ELEVATOR TAB FREE PLAY LIMITS
checking the free play of the tabs. This check should be
performed at least once a year to ensure that the trim tab
free play falls within the prescribed limits. 1.5 POUND SPOUND
READING READING
A check fixture(P/N 45-135030-91810 or the equivalent as
shown in Figure 4-5), a dial indicator, and a spring scale for B
applying accurate loading to the tabs, are required for 28 A X
making the inspection for free play of the tabs.

20 -C =Y
a. Securely lock the control surfaces prevent to

movement of the elevators. Set the elevator tabs in the

X +Y =E
neutral position.
b. Affix the dial indicator check fixture so that the
dial indicator point is positioned; on the outboard edge of 0.05 inch
(6 maximum)
the tab, 3.30 inches aft of the hinge line as measured along
the top of the tab.
c. Apply a small masking tape (for paint
piece of
NOTE
protection) 4.50 hinge line and along
inches aft of the tab
the centerline of the tab actuator. This will be the point of
The results of "X" and "Y" can be negative
pressure against the tab by the push-pull scale,
numbers.
d. Apply another piece of masking tape in the
corresponding position on the bottom surface of the tab for
the same purpose.
5. Add "X" and "Y" and record as "E".
e. Zero the dial indicator at no load initially. Do not

reset during the checking procedure, elevator

k. Repeat steps b through j on the opposite
f.With the push-pull scale at the point of the
tab.
masking tape, apply a full 3-pound downward load. Record i. If deflection of the tab is within the allowable
the dial reading as "A".
limits, the tab and its linkage are in good condition.
g. Release half the load until a 1.5-pound downward
m. If the free play is excessive, disconnect the trim
load is obtained. Record the dial reading as "B".
tab actuator rod and visually inspect the bolts and bushing
h. Apply a full 3-pound upward load at the masking for indications of excessive wear. Replace excessively
tape cn the bottom surface. Record the dial reading
as
worn parts.
"C".

C15
4-22
 SECTION

NIAJ O R
NIAINTENANCE AND
OVERHAUL
 IF~
SECTION 5

MajorMaintenance
and Overhaul
 MAIN AND NOSE WHEEL OVERHAUL d. Inspect the brake linings for wear. When the linin:
of a Cleveland brake has worn to a thickness of 3/;~ of ar

(Refer Service Instructions No. 0212-200, Landing Gear,

to inch, replaced since further use would result ii
it should be

I Modification of Goodyear Wheels for Use With Tube Type

Tires or Rim Inflated Tubeless Tires.)
the rivets scoring the disc. On Goodyear brakes the
maximum wear limit permissible on the piston lining i:
15/16 of an inch, when measured from the rubbing surfaci

a. Clean all metal parts in naphtha or equivalent and to the bottom of the metal support at center. The linine o~

dry. Goodyear brakes must also be replaced whenevel´• tile

bottom of the brake housing is within 1/3 of an i~lcll ot
b. Clean all felts in naphtha or equivalent and dry the landing gear torque flange.
thoroughly.
e. Inspect brake cylinder bore for scorine..4
c. are generally replaced at each overhaul.
"O" rings brake cylinder will leak and cause rapid "O’‘ ring wear.
If their reuse is necessary, they should be wiped clean with
f. If anchor bolts nicked or goueed the)´• should
a clean oiled rag and inspected for damage. are

be sanded smooth to prevent binding with the pressure

d.Inspect wheel halves for cracks. Cracked wheels plate and torque plate.
should be replaced. Nicks, gouges, and slightly corroded
areas should be sanded out. Where the protective coating g. Inspect the brake housing for evidence of wear or
has been removed, the area should be cleaned thoroughly damage. Any small nicks or corrosion should be polished
and repainted with zinc chromate primer and aluminum out with fine sandpaper and repainted with two coats oi

lacquer. zinc chromate primer followed by two coats of aluminum

lacquer.
e. On the main wheels, the brake discs should be
h. Inspect the cylinder walls and the contacting
replaced if scoring is present. Small nicks and scratches
should be sanded smooth. surfaces of the piston for damage. Small scratches and nic~ks
can he removed by polishing the damaged area with fine

f. Bearing cups and cones should be inspected sandpaper (400 grit).

carefully for damage and discoloration. Bearing cones

should be repacked with clean bearing grease before

installation in the wheel.
RELINING CLEVELAND BRAKES lPrior to
Goodyear wheel assembly is installed on the
If the CD-640 except CD-625, CD-632, CD-637, and
g.
aircraft, inspect the ring disc for signs of distortion and for CD-638.)
security of attachment by its component parts. Inspect the
thickness from the outside diameter to the inside diameter a. Place back plate on table with lining down flat.

between the lining surfaces. When this thickness measures

the ring disc. b. Punch out rolled rivet.

.432 inch or less, replace

c. Remove linings from pressure plate using same

procedure used on back plate.

BRAKES
d. Place anvil of rivet setting kit, Part No.R56l.in
O VERHA UL OF BRA KES vise.

Position lining back plate and place rivet in

a.Clean all parts except brake linings and the "0" e. on

center hole.
ring in naphtha and dry thoroughly.

f. Make sure rivet is in linings and place rivet head

NOTE against anvil.

Place rivet setting punch against rivet and hold

Thorough cleaning is important. Dirt and chips g.
back plate down firmly against anvil.
are the largest single cause of malfunction in

hydraulic systems.
h. Set rivets by hammering punch until lining is
firmly against back plate.
b. Brake linings can be wiped clean with a clean
oil-free cloth. i. Realign lining on back plate and set remaining
rivets.

c. "O" rings are generally replaced at each overhaul.

If their reuse is necessary they should be wiped clean with a j. Set rivets on pressure plate using same procedure as

used on back plate.

clean oiled rag and inspected for damage.

5-1
Cp
RELINING BEECH BRAKES (CD-~35, Cii~-632, CA UTION
CD-637, CD-638, CD-640 through CD-1105, and
CE- I through CE- 172) When installing the wheel, carefully guide the
ring disc of the main wheel into position
between the brake linings to avoid damaging
a. Remove the wheel assembly, the linings. The piston lining must be in the
b. Cut the safety wire and remove the hinge bolt, complete released position during this
washer, and sleeve from the brake housing and torque arm, operation.
c. Remove the brake assembly from the torque arm.
d. Remove the anvil lining by unscrewing the m. Apply the brake several times to seat the parts.
attaching brass screw. then with the brake released, check the wheel for free
e. Remove the
piston lining by lifting it straight up rotation.
from the brake housing.
f. Remove the self-locking screw and pry out the
piston lining. RELINING BEECH BRAKES (CD-1106 through
g. Blow out the piston lining recess to remove any CD-1271, CE-173 through CE-300 and CJ-1
loose foreign matter. through CJ-301
h. Attach the new piston lining with the self-locking
screw. For relining brakes on the above aircraft refer to
i. Secure the new anvil lining to the anvil backplate BEECHCRAFT Supplementary Publications Manual, P/N
with the attaching brass screw. 98-33281B or subsequent.
j.Secure the torque arm to the brake housing with
the hinge bolt, sleeve, and washer. Tighten the hinge bolt
until approximately five pounds of force is required to REL INING CL E VELAND BRA KES (CD- 1273 and
pivot the brake
assembly. after, CE-301 and after, CJ-31 and after) I
k. Secure the hinge bolt with safety wire.
i. Pack the wheel bearings and install the wheel For relining brakes on the above aircraft refer to

Safety and axle nut when the wheel rotates freely without BEECHCRAFT Supplementary Publications Manual, P/N
side motion. 98-35012 or subsequent.

5-2
Cg
 SECTION

ELECTRICAL VVIRING
DIRAGRAIVIS
 SECTION 6

Electrical Wiring Diagrams

 SECTION VI

ELECtRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS

The purpose of these diagrams is to show the electrical

components, wiring, and connections of the aircraft in a man-
ner that makes the operation of each circuit easily under-

standable. The circuits are help understand their

arranged to
operation and do not indicate the actual
physical locations of
the components. Each wire is identified by the numberit bears
in the aircraft. The individual components of each circuit are
indexed and identified in the list of components with each
circuit or diagram.

With the exception of the Models 833, C33, and 833, the
circuits shown individually. A General Wiring Diagram has
are

been introduced for the Models 833, C33, and 833. This
diagram provides the technician with single foldout on which
most of the electrical circuits are shown. The page adjacent to
the General Diagram contains a keyed index of the individual
circuit components. For optional circuits, or circuits with later
serial effectivities, refer to the Index of Wiring Diagrams for the
applicable Model, and the BEECHCRAFT Bonanza Wiring
Diagram Manual, P/N 35-590102-7.

The wiring diagrams for those airplane serials CD-1 through

CD-1304, CE-1 through CE-612 and CJ-1 through CJ-104
are contained within Section 6 of this Shop Manual.

Refer to the BEECHCRAFT Bonanza Wiring Diagram Man-

ual, P/N 35-590102-7 for the wiring diagrams pertaining to
the Bonanza Model F33A airplane serials CE-613 thru CE-
771, except CE-748, and Model F33C airplane serials CJ-
105 thru CJ-148. Refer to the BEECHCRAFT Bonanza Wir-
ing Diagram Manual P/N 35-590102-9 for F33A airplane
serials CE-748, CE-772 and after and F33C airplane serials
CJ-149 and after.

C9 6´•1
33-590011-1C"7
INDEX OF WIRING DIAGRAMS

Models 33 and A33

BIN

Battery and Starter 6-5 IgnitionSwitch 6-5 Navigation Lights .6-11

Beacon, Optional Dual Indicator, Nose Landing Light 6-9
Rotating 6-6 Cylinder Head Temperature 6-9
Boost Pump, CWeldon)’ 6-6 FlapContIol andPosition 6-7
Fuel Quantity......6-8 O
Oil Temperature..... 6-8
C Stall Warning......6-7
TurnandBank...... 6-6 OilTemperature Indicator ..6-8
Optional Dual Rotating
Cigarette Lighter 6-9 Beacon 6-6
Control, Landing Gear 6-4
Cylinder Head Temperature L
Indicator........ 6-9 P

Landing Gear Control 6-4

F Lighter,Cigarette ......6-9 Pitot, Heated (Optional)... 6-9
Lights,
Cabin .........6-10
Flap Control and Position Compass .6-10 S
Indicator........ 6-7 InstrumentFlood.... .6´•10
Fuel Quantity Indicator 6-8 Landing Gear Visual Stall Warning Indicator 6-7
Indicator .6-10 Starter, Battery and 6-5 ef:
Navigation .6-11
G Nose Landing 6-9
Tab Position Indicator 6-10 T

Generator 6-5 Turn and Bank Indicator 6-6

M
H W

Heated Pitot (Optional) 6-9 Miscellaneous Lighting .6-10 (Weldon)BoostPump. 6-6

6-2 Issued: December, 1969

 33-590011-1(="7
INDEX OF WIRING DIAGRAMS

Models B33, C33, and E33

General Wiring Diagram

6-12

Constant Copilot .6-21 Indicator, Lights,

Flap Control and Position .6-14 Optional Instrument 6-19
Instrument Lights Strobe .6-16
E Standard .......6-17
Optional .......6-19

Elevator Trim .6-15

External Power cd,;i,a,h .6-14 L
Strobe Lig]lt .6-16

Landing Gear T
With Safety System .6-22

Flap Control and Lights,

PositionIndicator .....6-14 Instrument...... .6-17 Trim,Elevator..... .6-15

Issued: Dece;nber, 1969 6-2A

33-590011-1Cn7
INDEX OF WIRING DIAGRAMS

Models C33A, E33A, and E33C

A F N

Alternator .6-39 Fuel Quantity, Wing Tip 6-27 Navigation Lights .6-33
Auxiliary Fuel Pump .6-25 Fuel Solenoid Valve, Wing Tip 6-27

B H

Oil Temperature Indicator .6-25

Battery and Starter .6-23 Heat,Pitot .6-33
Beacon, Rotating .6-28 High and Low
Boost Pumps, Fuel Pressure Fuel Boost Pumps .6-47 P
High and Low Pressure .6-47

PitotHeat........ .6-33
C Power, Externa1......6-24
Propeller Deice .6-46
Indicator,
CigaretteLighters .6-28 Cylinder HeadTemperature 6-25
Constant Copilot .6-49 Flap Control and Position .6-34 R
Cylinder Head Temperature Fuel Quantity .6-26
Indicator .6-25 Landing Gear Position .6-36
Oil Temperature .6-25 Radio Protection .6-24j
Stall Warning .6-33 Rotating Beacon .6-28
D Turn and Bank .6-26
instrument Lights (Opti,,s .6-32
Interior Lights .6-29 S
Deice,Propeller .......6-46

StallWarning Indicator ...6-33

E L Starter, Battery and .6-23
Strobe Light .6-38

Elevator Trim .6-45 Landing Gear Control

ExternalPower .6-24 and Position Indicator T
WithoutSafetySystem ...6-36
With Safety System .6-37
F Landing Light .6-28 Trim,Elevator .6-45
Lighters,Cigarette .6-28 Turn and Bank Indicator .6-26
Lights,
Flap Control Fuel Boost .6-48
and Position Indicator 6-34 Instrument (Optibnal) .6-32 W
Fuel Boost Light .6-48 Interior .6-29
Fuel Boost Pumps Landing .6-28
High and Low Pressure .6-47 Navigation .6-33 Warning Indicator, Stall .6-33
Fuel Pump, Auxiliary .6-25 Rotating Beacon .6-28 Wing Tip Fuel Quantity .6-27
Fuel Quantity Indicator .6-26 Strobe .6-38 Wing Tip Fuel Solenoid Valve .6-27

6-28 Issued: December, 1P69

 I~yl i,

ea Y 0
/7
I ND EX O F W IR ING D IAG RAMS

IrB It 5 bQ Pu~ s,

Models F33, G33, F33A, and F33C

po LL) eY"

A G N

Ge"erator... .6-66 NavigationLights ......6-56

AirConditioner.. ..,14-83
Alternator........ .6-67 H

B Heat, Pitot ........6-54 O

and External Power 6-5 OF Oil Pressure Indicator 6-70C

Battery
Beacon, Rotating..... .6-71 Oil Temperature Indicator 6-70B
BoostLight, Fuel .6-80
.6´•58 .6-52 P
BoostPump,Fuel Ignition, Starter and
Indicator,
C .6-70 Pitot Heat .6-54
Cylinder HeadTemperature
Exhaust GasTemperature 6-70C Position Indicator, Flap .6-61
Cabin and Map Lights 6-7212 .6´•61 Position Indicator, Landing Gear 6-64
Flap Position
.6-53 Power Distribution .6-50
Cigarette Lighters FuelFlow 6-70F
Constant Copilot .6-78 .6-64 Propeller Deice .6-69
Landing Gear Position
.6-81 Pump, Fuel Boost .6-58
Courtesy Light ManifoldPressure 6-70D
Cylinder Head Oil Pressure 6-70C
TemperatureIndicator ...6-70 Oil Temperature 6-70B
Tachometer...... 6-70F O
D L Quantity, Fue1......6-56A
Deice,Propeller .......6-69
Distribution, Power .6-50 Landing and Taxi Lights .6-55
Gear and R
Landing
E Throttle Warning .6-65
Rotating Beacon ......6-71
LandingGearPosition Indicator 6-64
Electroluminous Panel Lights .6-76 Landing Gear
Elevator Trim .6-77 .6-62 S
WithoutSafetySystem
Engine Instrument Post With Safety System 6-62B
6-74A StallWarning .6-54
Lights Lighters, Cigarette .6-53
Engine Instrument Wedge~Ligh;s 6-74 Lights, Standby Generator ...6-82
Engine Instrument (With Cabin and Map .6-72 Starter and Ignition .6-52
Vertical Instruments) .´•6-74B .6-81 Strobe Lights 6-78B
Courtesy
ExhaustGasTemperature 6-701 Engine Instrument Post 6-74A
External Power, Battery and 6-50C Engine InstrumentWedge ..6-74
Engine Instrument (With T
F Vertical Instruments) 6-74B
Electroluminous Panel .6-76 Tachometer 6-70G
FlapMotor .6-60 FlightInstrumentPost .6-75 Taxi Lights, Landing and .6-55
Flap Position Indicator .6-61 Flight Instrument Wedge 6-74(3 Temperature, Exhaust Gas 6-70G
Flight Instrument Post Lights .6-75 Fuel Boost .6-80 Temperature Indicator,
Flight Instrument Wedge Lights 6-74C FuelSelector 6-68B Cylinder Head .6-70
Flood Lights, Instrument 6-72B InstrumentFlood 6-72B Temperature Indicator, Oil 6-70B
Fuel Boost Light .6-80 Throttle Warning, Landing
Landing and Taxi .6-55
Fuel Boost Pump .6-58 Gear and .6´•65
Navigation .6-56
Fuel Quantity 6-56A Optional Internally Trim, Elevator.......6-77
Fuel Selector Light 6-68B LitInstruments 6-74B Turn Coordinator .6-55
Strobe 6-78B
G Taxi and Landing .6-55
W
Gas Temperature, Exhaust .6-71 M
Gear, Landing Warning, Landing Gear
WithoutSafetySystem .6-62 Manifold Pressure Indicator 6-70E andThrottle .6´•65
With Safety System 6-62B Motor,Flap .6-60 Warning,Stall .6´•54

C6 6-3
 TO BORN- W-4 --<~14-18 ---J tG10-10 -~--------G6-10

I5-18
1

G4-10i
W1-18

G6-10

7 11 g

´•:´•.´•:-:cl-lo 1

G3B-10

I I I r-c;a

G5A;I G3A-10

IN4-1
G2-10 12

iiC 1~
N23-10

I
i.
2.
Bus Bar
Landing Gear Warning Horn Circuit Breaker
3. Landing Gear Motor Circuit Breaker
4. FuselageWing Break
5. Landing Gear Safety Switch
7.
8.
9.
10.
L1.
Disconnect Splice
Up
Up
Brake Switch
Limit Switch
Down Brake Switch
Down Limit Switch
L F6-18
3-10G9-10
7

TO GREEN INDICATOR LIGHT

6. Landing Gear Reversing Switch 12. Landing Gear Motor

F5-18 TO RED INDICATOR LIGHT

LANDING GEAR CONTROL

Models 33 and A33

Isrued: December. 1969

6-4
 OFF

1 I J1-1
L ´•R
52-1
BOTH

Right Magneto
BOTH
N10-16
i. IgnitionSwitch

Rt´• OFF
1 2. Right Magneto
3. Left Magneto 3 2

L Left Magneto

IGNITION SWITCH
Models 33 and A33

::’:6;: Gcl-PZ-8
JUMPER----´•r~tPI-8---C-´•B ~II P3-18 -~C-e-Ps-18
,I
f I~ 4
3

4. Generator Switch
i. Bus Bar
35A (Std) 5. Generator
2. Circuit Breaker
50A (Optional) 35A- (Std) G F
3. Voltage Regulator 35A (Std) 50A- (Optional)
50A (Optional) 5

GENERATOR
Models 33 and A33

P6-18--~ tP7-18
P17-2

:3 4
Ps-z~f7 I P16-2

L~P12-8----"-’-53
I

1. Bus Bar
2. Starter Switch

r:´•:´•:;g
3. Relay

´•:zi;:;´•:´•:
P10
-";0- Pll-8
4. Battery
5. Master Switch
6. Starter
7. Ammeter

BATTERY AND STARTER

Models 33 and A33

Issued: December, 1969 6-5

33-590011-10"7

15A Serial CD-388 and after

10A
15A
(Single
Installation)~PTiOrb
(Dual Installation)
Gerial CD-S88

P14-18 P15-18L46-18
2 Off 3 I

P15A-18--------t L46-18
I
1. Bus Bar
NOTE: Do not reverse the power
2. Circuit Breaker
and ground terminals as shown on the
3. Rotating Beacon Switch lower beacon circuit when a Whelan
4. Upper Beacon l~ht dual beacon is installed.
5. Lower Beacon Light

OPTIONAL DUAL ROTATING BEACON

5A
OFFI

OIA
ON
F A
L-------
N31

1 4
i. BusBar 3. Switch
2. Circuit Breaker 4. Booster Pump
N32

(WELD~N! BOOST PUMP

Models 33 and A33

I
i. Bus Bar 3. Indicator
2. Circuit Breaker

TURN AND BANK INDICATOR

Models 33 and A33

6-6 Issued: December, 1969

 UPeC2_12 <f C19-la
C1-12 OFF
3 ~F--C3-12 if C10-12
D(X;YN 4

C6-12 -<fC22-12 -<fC25-12

F8-18 4 4

r,,,.,,
C7-12 -<f C23-12 ~fC24-12
F3-18
~7 4 4

i. Bus Bar 8. Flap Up Indicator (Green)

10 2. Flap Circuit Breaker 9. Flap Down Indicator (Red)
F2A-18 F2-18
3. Flap Position Switch 10. Flap Position Indicator and
4. Disconnect Splice Position Light Circuit
I I 5. Down Limit Switch Breaker
6. FlapMotor
11 7. Up Limit Switch

FLAP CONTROL AND POSITION INDICATOR

Model 33
NOTE
See Model A33 Navigation Light Circuit for Flap Indicator
Circuit and Landing Gear Indicator Circuit

W?-LB W8-L8 --~--WS3-LB

3 ’X( 4

5
1 N51-18
i. Bus Bar 4. FuselageWing Break _L
2. StallWarning Indicator Circuit Breaker: 5. Wring StallDetector Unit
3. StallWarning Indicator Light

STALL WARNING INDICATOR

Models 33 and A33

Issued: December,,l969 6-7

33-599911-10"7

&1-la 2-18
2
3

Q8-l8

’O;-´•~Y, 10
tQ10-ls~I=
5

7
L

L,,,,,,, -------I

i. Manual Circuit Breakers Bus Bar 7. Main Fuel Cell Transmitter Unit (Left)
2. Fuel Quantity Indicator Circuit Breaker 8. Main Fuel Cell Transmitter Unit (Right)
3. Main Fuel Cell Quantity Indicator 9. Auxiliary FuelCell Quantity Indicator
4. Main Fuel Cell Quantity Indicator 10. Auxiliary FuelCell Quantity Indicator
Selector Switch (Left-Right) Selector Switch (Left-Right)
6. RightWing Break Connector II. Auxiliary Fuel Cell Transmitter Unit (Left)
6. Left Wing Break Connector 12. Auxiliary Fuel Cell Transmitter Unit (Right)

FUEL QUANTITY INDICATOR

Models 33 and A33

E1-183 E2-18

1. Bus Bar
3. Oil Temperature Indicator
4. En~Jne Oil Temperature Resistance Bulb
2. Oil Temperature Indicator Circuit Breaker

O1L TEMPERATURE INDICATOR

Models 33 and A33

a-8 Issued: December 1969

 5A

E3-18 E4-18
I
’v;

i. Bus Bar 3. Cylinder Head Temperature Indicator

2. Circuit Breaker 4. Cylinder Head Transmitter

CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE INDICATOR CIRCUIT (OPTIONAL)

Models 33 and A33

liOA

H1
3
Ha--<t D4N31 I
OFF
4

NOTE: All items of this circuit are

1 optional except wire H2.
i. Bus Bar 3. Switch
2. Circuit Breaker 4. Disconnect Splice 5. Heated Pitot

HEATED PITOT CIRCUIT (OPTIONAL)

Models 33 and A33

LWA1

i. Bus Bar
1
2. Cigarette Lighter

CIGARETTE LIGHTER

Models 33 and A33

20A

L1-14 L2-14 N1-14

3
i
1. Bus Bar 3. Landing Light Switch
2. Circuit Breaker 4. Nose Landing Light
NOSE LANDING LIGHT
Models 33 and A33

6-9
Issued: December, 1969
33-590011-1C17

5A
r----1

I
L5A-18
10 n
2
OFF
L8-18
4
L6-18
1

I‘
L21-18
50nL8D-18 L8A-18

1. Bus Bar
11 Ltd-is L8C-18 T’
Lll-18
2. Circuit Breaker
3. Disconnect Splice
4. Rheostat
5. Tab Position Indicator Light 1 3
6. Resistor
7. Instrument Flood Lights C
8. Landing Gear Visual
9. CompassLight N7-18Q
10. Cabin Lights
Switch
MISCELLANEOUS LIGHTING
Model 33

iiiiiiiiiiiii~ 5A
r----~
L5A-18
ion
2
L5-18 tOF_F_ _I L8;18
3 L6-18 4
1
I
r
L21-18
i:50nL8D-18 L8A-18

L10-18 L86-18
1. Bus Bar
Lll-18
2. Circuit Breaker
3. Disconnect Splice
4. Rheostat
5. Tab Position Indicator Light /1\ ’1‘3
6. Resistor
7. Instrument Flood Light
8. Landing Gear Visual Indicator
9. Compass Light Q
10. Cabin Light N7-18
11. Switch (e c C R C C

10 ~s ~7
~t-N81-18
N62-18

MISCELLANEOUS LIGHTING
Model A33

6-10 Issued: December. 1969

 L4-18 --<t- L7-18 -<f L8-18

h 2

L3-18
L4B-18 ---<t L19-18 -<t

d
N54-18

L4A-18 L7-18 -<f L8-18

i. Bus Bar 5. RH Navigation Light (Green)

2. Flap Position Indicator Circuit Breaker 6. Rear Fuselage Navigation Light
3. Navigation Light Switch (Clear)
4. Disconnect Splice 7. LH Navigation Light (Red)

NAVIGATION LIGHT
Model 33

5A
4
L22-18 3 L4-18 ---<f--L7-18 --(t- L8-18

L19-18 --<t-
8 LaO-tS18
L4A-18 L7-18 --<t- L8-18

F2E-18--~--OVt---F3-18---jTO FLAP UP LIMIT SWITCH

F2D-18 ---------~I- F4-18 -<t F6-18 -j TO FLAP DOWN LIMIT SWITCH

F2G-18 6 F5-18-----~TO L.G. UP LIMIT SWITCH

F2F-18 6 F6-18-----jTO L.G. DOWN LIMIT SWITCH

1. Bus Bar 7. LH Navigation Light (Red)

2. Circuit Breaker 8. Resistor
3. Navigation Light Switch 9. Flap Up Indicator (Green)
4. Disconnect
Splice 10. Flap Down Indicator (Red)
5. RH Navigation Light (Green) 11. LG Up Indicator (Red)
6. Rear Fuselage Navigation Light (Clear) 12. LG Down Indicator (Green)

NAVIGATION LIGHT
Model A33

Issued: 6-11
December, 1969
 33-590011-1C17

i. Bus Bar 31. Tail Navigation Light 63. Instrument Flood

Light
32. LeftWing Navigation Light 64. Engine Instrument Lights
2. Cigarette Lighter Circuit
Breaker 10 Amp 33. Right Wing Navigation Light 65. Compass Light
3. Cigarette Lighter 34. Landing Gear and
Flap Indicator 66. Compass Light Resistor 50
4. Rotating Beacon Circuit Circuit Breaker 5 Amp Ohms
Breaker 15 Amp 35. L.G. Up Indicator Light 67. L.G. Visual Indicator Light
5. Upper Rotating Beacon Light 36. L. G. Down Brake Limit Switch 68. Trim Tab Indicator Light
6. Capacitor (not on all Beacons) 37. L.G. Up Limit Switch 69. Oil Temperature Indicator
7. Lower Rotating Beacon Light 38. L.G. Down Indicator Light 70. Oil Temperature Transmitter
8. Heated Pitot Circuit Breaker 39. L. G. Down Limit Switch 71. Alternator CircuitBreaker-’lO
10 Amp 40. L.G. Up Brake Limit Switch Amp
9. HeatedPitot 41. Landing Gear Motor 72. Alternator
10. Quantity Indicator, Cyl-
Fuel 42´• L. G. Safety Limit Switch 73. Voltage Regulator 60 Amp
inder Head Temperature, 43. L.G. Warning Horn 74. Alternator Switch
and Aux. Fuel Pump Circuit 44. Flap Down Indicator Light 75. Alternator Circuit Breaker
Breaker 5 Amp 45. Flap Down Limit Switch 1D Amp
ii. FuelLevelIndicator, R. H. 46. FlapMotor 76. Generator Circuit Breaker
12. Fuel Level Indicator, L. H. 47. Flap Up Indicator Light 70Amp
13. Fuel Level Transmitter, 48. Flap Up Limit Switch 77. Voltage Regulator 50 Amp
L. H. Inboard 49. Turn and Bank Circuit 78. Generator Switch
14. FuelLevel Transmitter, Breaker 5 Amp 79. Generator
L. H. Outboard 50. Turn and Bank Indicator 80, Ammeter
15. Fuel Level Transmitter 51. Flap Power Circuit 81. BatteryRelay
RH. Outboard Breaker 10 Amp 82. Battery Switch
16. Fuel Level Transmitter, 52. Flap Control Switch 83. Starter-Ignition Circuit
R H. Inboard 53. Landing Gear Warning Circuit Breaker 10 Amp
17. Fuel Level Indicator, RH. Breaker 5 Amp 84. Ignition Switch
18. Fuel LevelIndicator, L. H. 54. L. G. Warning Limit Switch 85. Starter Relay
19. Fuel Level Transmitter, L. H. 55. Throttle Warning Limit Switch 86. Battery
20. Fuel LevelTransmitter, R.H. 56. Landing Gear Switch 87. Starter Motor
21. Aux. Fuel Pump Switch 57. Landing Gear Power Circuit 88. Magneto R.H.
22. Aux. Fuel Pump Breaker 20 Amp 89. Magneto L. H
23. Cyl. Head Temp. Indicator 58. OilTemperature, Trim Tab In- 90. Notused
24. Cyl. Head Temp. Transmitter dicator, Landing Gear Visual 91. Notused
25. Landing Light Circuit Breaker Indicator, and Lighting Systems 92. Not used
20 Amp Circuit Breaker 5 Amp 93. Fuel Select Placard Light
26. LandingLight 59. Light Dimming Rheostat 94. Radio Solenoid
27. Stall Warning Circuit Breaker 60. Cabin Light Switch 95. SubpanelLights
28. Stall Warning Horn 61. CabinLight 96. L.G. Warning Horn Flasher
29. Stall Warning Detector 62. Light Dimming Rheostat 97, Terminal Board and Bus
30. Navigation Lights Circuit 98. External Power Receptacle
Breaker 5 Amp (Optional)

GENERAL WIRING DIAGRAM (INDEX)

Models B33, C33, and E33

6´•12 Issued: December, 1969

 --^-I.F: il-´•--

::1:- .il n :1

BEkC3N
FUEL LEVEL
hUXILI~P\I FVEL
STacL
uVb.PhllNG
CLAP
IMl>tClirO(r_
A LG. WCSUI(JC A Co~K
rrHPceATUe~
taTWIL GEMELATOFC 5TaeT
ICMITIOU
5(Y\
Clcan+rrr (oPTloNni) pUIIIP LALJDING LIG*fS FL*PPOWE2 Lc; S)WEE L.G\nsva~luOlcnToe
PIT3T CYLI~UX_P. utlhD LIGHT TPIMrLrj 60 R RBDIO
bahK FL000
P90rt(TIO~
LEVEL.)
C9rl~JaL
C4BIY
rrJGlut I+)’jTP~MEUT LlCLFn
erEa>Tn~

6A w~ tOb, SA 5n w~n 5A
2 4´• 1 8 149C--, 25c/ 27 34 std 53d 58 PZ9n6 83

Kp~2nG
aEPL*CES
71 PllA4
CIAI1 Pd~6
L3Sn18 FlmB ’IOA
BLAcK 57 7
L15~,4 F4418 ESAI%

~sb
i rl k i´•r;
wlnl~

i´• LZ~h14 I LCII~FI ~ZII\Z

C16AIB

75i). II
r-----
I 9

LW1-l

LZLAIOU

I
W-18

ej
21
j
EsaIB

LRP~IS
TIVS
44 cn?rb 48

45
i; r------------
r-----
--I~
r----1
rJ

iT
CD-TK) i -B
C19nlOIJ
nrus lL978 GI I Ld
Qulg
17 RI

iu
I I RJnle JsAle*
I
Lun~u I I ur-la rJtale
47
~r
c
~n*r
ii 51 54116

I
_i P
B

j
L_
TRansMlTrERS WITH GISPI~B L -JGRD
TUREE -CERNIINALs W344~8 19
84

06nIg
r (34D18t uro- ,4
nn\g
bilAlO
JS B\8N+
L1-\s

"4CI I
(3~Cg 05Als NOTE
I
7~18 J5~18N+
16 13
RScD JSllbN
I 43 42
YIRINCI EFFECTIVE

1ii
NO 4 TERM V~OLTTA-16 t0-388 IND bFTER
12 ~P
S \O
IS A COVER wlBIBI 5-/6

T
88AIS 07A 18 AIR 0~8 9 EFCEtTIVL
SCPEW I LIAIB
4G*18 q7Alg

I
I
O(’UB 07A1B

I Uqd- A
t0-)88

I
r
aNo IFTER
I
CIICVa~
40 cal~-lo I Ptruu pllU)R tO

d3~B P
_L L
RH´• t ´•9, I>ZC~L*1010i
PS

P742
c~tog

iw-ls 936- ~s wvcs 1

I I I
6´•2910

Q9Agii
I I I I ~lOblg
´•8~-w´• ->tl A18 37
PIDZ
98

‘TRAn51111TTERS
WIM FOUR
100 IbA

13 16 1Q 20
o-´•´• wzBle56
39 1
81
PlclB Yzcs
TERnlllALS

3f~B 039-18 (STAIJDARD) S Gtlt(O

FIM~8
c ZCIB

4~- w3 -IS2Q
FltZ-\8

la14 1513BIL
11 41
r5~ P41U84

k
Q6A~ OQDI~ LUAL~J
czOalou 62
U?UB
´•I 95A~
I 04AIS
(DPTIONAL~
I L,I atB-j zzA
iI~
RnRO C\Gc~TrS
CPEF)
j LZP´•I~
;LsAIa

~4ce
a
URIB

82P wnr
Iwlw
I

16
NO-QiC~RM
PR(OR Tg CD-6L6

T 23~18
GLcA 18N 35
24~4\8c
ly41~ 1--86; 1I 65 P~yU
pztn~s
88

~oAs or
31s n OOveR \NIAIS
II
~j1318
IL4Am*I I

i
sCREw

4 d
I
87 wspw
98A18 09Alg 60 ’I I
18 17 89
cr:la LZb~%
WARN~NCI
W33-18

14
Q4cle
~NDC. CLAR
T PZ

29 GISAIB 0 0 C e
61 ~61

I
Q5A1662TAIS
Q6A18
W32A18
---~II
LF-7-7/
p 61i ~6Q r

171i I. H 25 GnL. 96’ V

L__t I~pco 603
40 ~AL. SrSTEM SYSTEM
VV32618I~ 43 (;zsAIRN

B i
-L
20 ~STANDARD) LY;,\-Ie LLBBI(I
(OPTIONAL) LH A I
RH

w
EFFECTIVE CD-710 j AFTfR
UCZ-LI
B9~ 94

i CO-b26 CAFTER CD-710 I C~FTCR I EFFECTIVE CD-710 ZAFfE~R

SEE INDEX OF WIRING DIAGRAMS FOR

j LATER I~FFECTMTIES AND OqTIONAL CIRCUITS

GENERAL WIRING DIAGRAM
Models B33, CS9, and E33
luued: Decsmber. 1969 613
 P24B2 I

P25B20P24A2(PI
P25A20 Control

i. Terminal Board and Bus

2. External Power Relay
3. Diode
4. External Power Receptacle

EXTERNAL POWER (OPnONAL)

Model C33 and E33 (CPlOm thru CD1304)

10P;
1A12----0

DN vP

~p \~-----C4A12 ---~-----C10-12 ---O

CC6-12-- ~- C5A1
(P

PI
I
0-C7-1"~
C3A12
3,
GREEN
C25-14
I I WHITE
C161gZO L---C2A12---~---C13-12 C24-14

L~-.... 1 ,Itl
BLACK
N24-14

f
sy;C1?B20 C17A20 --t-O 3

1. Bus C18B20 ---~----C18A20 2 C1116Plll

2. Circuit Breaker 41
3. Flap Control Switch
4. UpLimitSwitch C19A20N
5.
6.
Down Linhit Switch
FlapMotor
-L CD-1200 AND AFTER
7. Flap Position Transmitter
8. Flap Position Indicator

FLAP CONTROL AND POSITION INDICATOR

Model C33 and E33 (CD-1044 thru CD-1304)
C7
6-14
 r-------~

BLACK

YELLOW

D
O 10A ~----C20A1 BLUE

I TO IGNITION
K1A18
BOOSTER

BROWN

’"Le~c
P
C22A18

REI?

CD-1202 AND AFTER C2iA18

MTR
P

13BLACK

i. Pitch Trim and Ignition

Boost Circuit Breaker
2. Control Column Coil Cord
9. Control Switch
4. Trim Actuator Assembly
5. Shunting Resistor
6. Speed Adjust

ELEVATOR TRIM (OPTIONAL)

Model E33 (00-1119 thru 00-1304)
6-15
C7
 L37A14

pi TT~

c JL~4C-- BLACK

B WHITE -f-------~ B

A RED -t-------~ A

i. Strobe Light Circuit Breaker

2. PowerSupply
3. Strobe Light

LSTROBE LIGHT HOSKINS (OPTIOWAL)

IModel E33 (CD1199 thru CD-1304)

Il(jA L76A20 --~cl 2

L76B20

L79A20N 7( 4
L79B20N

ZD a
WKITE

BLACK~ RED

1. Strohe Light Cirouit Brei~er

g
2. Power Supply
3. Strohe Light

STROBE LIGHT-BULLOCK(OPTIONAL)
Model E33 (CD-1227 thru CD-1304)
a-is C7
 P
L3A18 LSB1S L4A18N
TO INTERIOR LIGHTS
CIRCUIT BREAKER I
L1B20
;CI_~O L33A20N~1 I
?J
L1A18

L30A20 L30B20

L2A20

IP

L14A20 L13A20 L2B2 L2C20 L2D20

r-,II;-1

-L21A2P0N1- L21C20N
I,, L,,,

L21B20N

L16A20N ~L

L6A20

L5A20 L34-18

NOTE: VENDOR FURNISHED WIRES ARE NOT CODED.

1. Instrument Light Rheostat

2. Fuel Panel Placard Light
3. Outside Air Temperature Light
4. Landing Gear Visual Indicator Light
5. Trim Tab Indicator Light
6. Switch
7. Compass Light
8. Engine Instrument Cluster Lights
9. Glareshield Instrument Lights

INSTRUMENT LIGHTS
Model E33 (CD-1119 thru CD-1202)
Issued: December. 1969 6-17
 10A

E1A18 TO OIL TE MPERATURE

LBA18--1 TO CABIN LIGHTS

IP I L10A18--) TO AVIONICS LIGHTS
L1A18
L1B20
L30A20 -f- L30B20

L3A20
~hh?tL13A20 L14A20
L33A20N 7 L2A20
L3B20
L21A20N
L4A20N
r

4 3 z I
p

L4A20N
L3B20

II~
0-- L21A20N

IqV_
L2A20 L16A18N

L6A18

IL~B20Lsi" L34-18

ILzczo

I_V-:
L21~0N
I i" LB~N
JLiD20
i. Oil Temp Radio Inst and Cabin Lights Circuit Breaker
2. Dim Control Rheostat
3. Compass and OAT Light Switch
4. OAT Light
5. Fuel Selct Light
6. Engine Instrument Lights
7. Trim Tab Light
8. Landing Gear Visual Indicator Light
9. Glareshield Connector
10. Glareshield Lights
11. Compass Light

INSTRUMENT LIGHTS
Model E33 (CD-1203 thru CD-1304)
6-18 C7
1:::´•

LllD18 ------t------L11C18 --------t------L11B18

LIOA~8 L1A18---------1
LllA18 lc~-----

c 1 I c 1 I c 1 I c 1 I c 1 I c I c 1 I c I~ I c
i,,,,, El

L29A18 I I L8A18 E1A18

rL2D18 L2C18

SUCTION OMNII Oh~NI. II

MANIFOLD
PRESSURE
FUEL
PRESSURE
TACHOMETER
m
L13A18

II TO OIL
I
m

TO CABIN R I, I R
L12E18 L12D18 --------I~-- L12C28 -------t----Lr2B18 I I I LIGHTS TEhlPERATLT´•´•I
L
L28A18
INSTRUMENT FLOOD LIGHTS ’7’
L13B18 NGO-18
LsAla
I_
c c c c I c c c c c c I I I I m
r r I r
L14A18
XLTIi~IETER RATE OF CLIMB DIRECTION TURN AND BAh7K ADF
R I. I R I R

L
ENGINE INSTRU~IENT LIGHTS

rL3A18
L12F18 --´•t----L12G18
L.6~18S

L28~B18 L341-18 -L
L3B18
L6A18
L13C18

HORIZON
c c

AIR SPEED
c

CLOCK
c c

L9A18N
-L
L4A18N
~L
4 1. Oil
Cabin
Temperature, Instrument,
Lights Circuit Breaker
and

2. Radio and Instrument Lights

Dim Control
3. Instrument Flood Lights Dim Contl-ol
L13C18
4. Instrument Lights
5. Panel Edge lights
L13M18 --t--L13D18 L13E18~L13F18 LL3Gi8 14

L13N18 -r- L13J18

--r-
L13H18
6.
7.
8.
Fuel Panel Light
Compass Light
Compajs Light Re;istor
L13L18 L13K18 NOTE: UNCODED WIRES ARE

Pi
D 9. Trim Tah Indicator Lidlt

4
FURNISHED WITH LIGHTS
10. LG Visual Indicator Li~!lt
11. Instrument Flood Lights
c c 12. Engine Il~itrument Cluster Lights
13. Dim Re;islor

INSTRUMENT LIGHTS (OPTIONAL)

Model 833 (CD-388 thruCk590)
6-19
irrued: D-cembsr, 1963
 LllD18 ------~------LllB18

I-
L10A18
,Illpls g

C I c I C I I C I I C I C C 1 I C I. I C
L12H18 L,,,,, El

LsAie E1A18
LzDla -C- L2C18

SUCTION OMNII OMNI II

MANIFOLD
PRESSURE
FUEL
PRESSURE
TACHOMETER

L12A18
L13B18

L14B18
II TO OCL
1
m

TO CABIN R I R
L12E18 --3--- L12D18 -------1~----- L12C18 ---t-- L12B18 L28A18 I LIGHTS TEMPERATURE

r
L28B18
I
INSTRUMENT FLOOD LIGHTS ’f’
N60-18
a L13A18
I_
c I I C 1 I c’ 1 I C I I C I I C I I C I I c I I C I I
cO m
r-- I

L14A18
ALTIMETER RATE OF CLIMB DIRECTION TURN AND BANK ADF
S R R R

L5A18 L
L12F18 ---t-----L12G18

L34-18
T rL3A18
ENGINE INSTRU~ENT LIGHTS

L.6A18N
-L
L3B18
L6A18
L13C18

;C; Q
13

c I c 1 I C I C I c

1. Oil Temperature, instrument, and

L9A18N L4A18N
Cabin Lights Circuit Breaker
HORIZON AIR SPEED CLOCK -L I
2. Radio and Instrument Lights
Dim Control
3. Instrument Flood Lights Dim Control
L13C18
4. Instrument Lights
5. PanelEdge lights
L13M18 ------t---L13D18 L13E18------t----L13F18 L13G18

L13N18
-r L13J18 L13H18
T II
6.

8.
Fuel PanelLight
Compass Light
Compass Light Resistor
L13L18 L13K18 NOTE: UNCODED WIRES ARE

i~fi
9. Trim Tab Indicator Light

~fitX´•
FURNISHED WITH LIGHTS
10. LG Visual Indicator Light
11. Instrument Flood Lights
C 12. Engine Instrument Cluster Lights

INSTRUMENT LIGHTS (OKTIONAL)

Model B33, C33, and E33 (CD-591 and alter)

6-20 Issued: December. 1969

 f’
8(5A

C40A20

C411A20 I~
P-
C41820
0´• C42A20~

OFF
1
BLACK WHITE

oio;1
OFF

i. Avionics Bus
2. Constant Copilot Solenoid Valve
3. Constant Copilot Switch
4. Constant Copilot Wheel Switch
5. Constant Copilot Autopilot Circuit Breaker

CONSTANT COPILOT (OPTIONAL)

Model E33 (CPlliS
thru CD-1304)
6-21
C7
 ~ii ´•´•´•1; ´•;!1 i:. i.

Tb
G1A10

1~1
NOTE: CIRCUIT SHOWN WITH AIRCRAFT ON

5A)e THE GROUND AND THROTTLE OFF

G21A18 G23A18
G15B18 NC

ga3 1
20*

G555-10
m~
C16A18 I I
DWN
NO
F122-18
C;22A18z1c3 G24A18

1- NO G399-10

G26A18N G25A18N
TO
G2A10 THROTTLE -L -L
WARNING NC 1. Landing Gear Circuit Breaker
F100-18 2. Throttleamd Landing Gear Warn Circuit Breaker

TNCO
C15A18 3. Landing Gear Control Switch
G49-10
4. Landing Gear Down Limit Switch
5.Landing Gear Up Brake Switch
i 6.Landing Gear Down Brake Switch
DWN
NO 7. Landing Gear Safety Switch
GND
W13B18 O 8. Landing Gear Up Limit Switch

G48-10
P: Ilil 9. Landing Gear Motor
10. 90 MPH Pressure Switch
11. Landing Gear Safety System Switch i,

up 12. Landing Gear Safety Relay

ALR GlOA12 -e c~losl2 -eczs8-12
UP 13. Throttle Control Switch
Gl’lA12
G4B12 14. 120 MPH Pressure Switch
r

i
I
15. Diode

LRED DWN
16. Bus
17. Landing Gear Down Indicator
18. Landing Gear Up Indicator
GllB12 19. Landing Gear and Flap Indicator
I I G6A10 I
WHITE BLACK Lights Circuit Breaker
I VP
G31~B10
m
G12AIO I LATCHING SOLENOID

G8A10 G333-10
110
G8B10

G3 A10
G8B10
1.
t~ 1
90 MPH

2
G13A10 rG31AIO G32A10
G’IA1ON
G15B18
5
,I
Lt 6
m
ON
1 G31C;8 I
G33A10

;10 O,FF
t~L;
,Es, oFF
G14A~8 G3 5A18 G34A18N
G29AIS
I m s -1

:9 G30A18N
G33B18

i~_J L~ ON 120 MPH

DWN

LANDING GEAR WITH SAFETY SYSTEM (OIYTIONAL)

Model C33 and E33
(CD826, CD855, CD856, CD895 and after)
Issued: December, 1969
6-22
~SEE PAGE 6-24 FOR NOT USED CE-181,182,269,
CE-102 thru CE-612 276 AND AFTER
CJ-25 THRU CJ-104

J3A18J4A18 SW

SW
J2A18 RADIO
K2A18 SOLENOID
r~ (RE Fl
IL LR R S B YI r
J1A18 K2B18
27A18
I\,B/I, I--’-

BAT GRD) IhJ

K3A18N
ra r,,,,,,, _L T_C
OI O--H--)---K1A18
K4A2
10A

J5B18N

I 55A18N
MOTOR
fl
~--P1AZ
K5AaN

P7A2--K) OCP1DB _L
O L--P1B6
P24B2
P16A2N

I P1C18

II
m
Plijl
c~- P3A18N ~II
P6A6 -r
A Or I V-----d-P4A18Na
i. Bus Bar
2. Circuit Breaker 8. Starter’Motor
3. Ibmition Switch 9. Battery
4. Magneto L. H. 10, External Power Receptacle (Optional)
5. Magneto R. H. 11. Ammeter
6. Vibrator 12. Battery Relay
7. Starter f7.elay 13. Battery Switch
14. Terminal Board and Bus

BATTERY AND STARTER

C33A, E33A, and E33C
Models

6-23
07
 P24B2--g P

P25B20

P25A20 Control

P24A2

i. Terminal Board and Bus

2. External Power Polarity Relay
3. Diode
4. External Power Receptacle
rP16A2N

EXTERNAL POWER (OPTIONAL)

Models C33A and E33A
~CE-102 thru CE-612)

I
P25A8
P26A8-EOI~S
P24A1BN-I II RADIO BUS

I. Bus Bar
P27A18j STARTER RELAY (REF)
2. RadioSolenoid

RADIO PROTECTION
Models C33A, E33A, and E33C
6-24 1
C7
 19

E1A18´•,´•,,~H
I I

OIL
TEMP

I. Bus Bar 3. Oil Temperature Indicator

2. Circuit Breaker 4. Oil Temperature Transmitter

OIL TEMPERATURE INDICATOR

Models C33A, E33A, and E33C

10A

IEl

Q1A18 ----(T O------ &2A18

i. Bus Bar 3. Auxiliary Fuel Pump Switch

2. Circuit Breaker 4. Auxiliary Fuel Pump

5A
AUXILIARY FUEL PUMP

d I ‘d Models C33A, E33A, and E33C

PI

E3A18E4A18

I. Bus Bar 3. Cylinder Head Temp. Indicator

2. Circuit Breaker 4. Cyl. Head Temp. Transmitter

CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE INDICATOR

ModelsC33A, E33A, and E33C

Issued: December,l969 6-25

 5A

ol 6----F1AlaF-2A18N

1
i. Bus Bar

2. Circuit Breaker

3. Indicator
C33A´•369´•242

TURN AND BANK INDICATOR

Models C33A, E33A, and E33C

40 GALLON (OPTIONAL) 5A 25 GALLON (STANDARD)

Q4A18 Q4B18

std

Q6A18
Q4C18
Q4sis

&4D18
b~PI ~--44A18

&4D18
1~7´•
&4C18

Q8A18
RHAis
’NBD

&7A18
LH2
Q5A18

1
m
Q6A18

I~
4 nll I
RH
OUTED LH

C33A-369´•243A

i. Bus Bar 7. Fuel LevelTransmitter, R.H. Outboard

2. Circuit Breaker 8. Fuel LevelTransmitter, R.H. Inboard
3. Fuel Level Indicator R.H. 9. Fuel LevelIndicator, R.H.
4. Fuel LevelIndicator, L,H. lO. FuelZevelIndicator, L.H.
5. FuelI~evel Transmitter, L.H, Inboard 11. Fuel Level Transmitter, L.H.
6. Fuel LevelTransmitter, L.H. Outboard 12. Fuel Level Transmitter, R.H.

FUEL QUANTITY INDICATOR

Models C33A, E33A, and E33C

6-26 C1
 LEFT
I TIP
20GA

OlsA O----OOGA--------+Q O+-----20GA

O--- 20GA
RIGHT
#8 BRASS TERM
TDP

#10 COPPER TERM

Ic~urloNI

GROUND TRANSMITTER WIRE TO AIR-

CRAFT STRUCTURE WHENEVER TIP
TANKS ARE REMOVED TO PREVENT
INDICATOR DAMAGE.

i. Circuit Breaker
2. Auxili.ary FuelQuantity Indicator
3. Indicator Select Switch
4. Tip Tank Fuel Quantity Transmitter

WING TIP FUEL QUANTITY (OPTIONAL)

Models C33A and E33A

O----- 20GA

20GA

1. Aircraft Bus
2. Fuse
3. Switch
4. Solenoid Valve (N.C.)

WING TIP FUEL SOLENOID (OPTIONAL)

Models C33A, E33A, and E33C

Issued: December, 1969 6-27

33-590011´•1C"7

‘iPI ´•´•-----~ilIEl
H1A18--------~------

1. Bus Bar 3. Cigarette Lighter

2. Circuit Breaker

CIGARETTE LIGHTERS
Models C33A, E33A, and E33C

L25B14
15A‘

L27A14N--) Il

L26A14N~ I I

1. Bus Bar 3. Upper Beacon Light

2. Circuit Breake9 4. Lower Beacon Light

ROTATING BEACON (OPTIONAL)

Models C33A, E33A, and E33C

02b’A~------------L28A12 I

L28B12

1. Bus Bar 3. Landing Light

L29A12N
2. Circuit Breaker

LANDING LIGHT
Models C33A, E33A, and E33C

6-28 Issued: December, 1969

 I~;tL1OA18-- - - - - - I
TO RADIO LIGHTS

-10A E1A18-----------I TO OIL TEMPERATURE

L8A18 L8B18 ---f--- L21-18

L1A18

Ei
L30A18 L30B18

L2A18

L2B18 L

N61-18

L14A18 L13p18 L2C18 L2Di8 18

I~ N60-18

L6A18 r I-\ I I

L15A1’8

J
L16A18N

L5A18
I- r
NOTE: VENDOR FURNISHED WIRES
I L34.-18 P ARE NOT CODED

L3A18

I L-’"CI
L9A18N

L3B18_L L4A18N

i. Instrument Light Rheostat

2. Fuel Panel Placard Light
3. CabinLights
4. Landing Gear Visual Indicator Light
5. Trim Tab Indicator Light
6. Compass Light Resistor
7. Compass Light
8. Engine Instrument Cluster Lights
9. Glareshield Instrument Lights
10. Interior Lights Circuit Breaker

INTERIOR LIGHTS
Model C33A

Issued: 6-29
December; 1969
33-590011-1C"7

8,
TO ~NTERIOR LIGHTS
CIRCUIT BREAKER
1
L3A18
L3B1S~,,,,,,1
L33A20N
CL
L1B20

L1A18

L30AZO ------C- L30820

L2A20

PI (P

L13A20--~ )--L2B20 L2C20 -------C´•

L2D20~66,;-7
L14A20
r-

-P1 tL21C20N
I,,

L21B20N

L_ _
_(F L21A20N
L16A20N ~L

I’ 1- 7
L5A20

NOTE: VENDOR FURNISHED WIRES ARE NOT CODED.

1. Instrument Light Rhedstat

2. Fuel Panel Placard Light
3. Outside AirTemperature Light
4. Landing Gear Visual Indicator Light
5. Trim Tab Indicator Light
6. Switch
Compass Light
7.
8. Engine Instrument Cluster Lights
9. Glareshield Instrument Lights

INTERIOR LIGHTS
Models E33A (CE180 thru CE250)
6-30
E33C (CJ1 thru CJ13) Issued: December, 1969
 10A

P I
L1A18
tC E1A18

L8A18

L10A18-)
TO OIL TE hIPERATURE

TO CABIN LIGHTS

TO AVIONICS LIGHTS

L1B20
fg L30A20 L30U20

L13A20

L3A20 L14A20
L33A20N r L2A20
L3B20
L21A20N
-L
L4A20N
r

2 1
4 3
10

L4A20N
L3B20

0~-- L21A20N

m
192
L2A20 --J L16A18N

L6A18 L5A18 -L

IL2B20

O~i ILzczo
L34-18

1
L21B20N
’-0--
L9A18N

ILqD20 1~ Oil Temp.Radio Inst,and Cabin Lights Circuit Rreaker

2. Dim Control Rheostat
3. Compass and OAT Light Switch
4. OAT Light
5. Fuel Selct Light
6. Engine Instrument Lights
7. Trim Tab Light
8. Landing Gear Visual
Indicator Light
9. Glareshield Connector
10. Glareshield Lights
11. Compass Light

INTERIOR LIGHTS
Model E33A (CD-251 thru CD-1304)
Model E33C /CJ-14 thru CJ-104) 6-31
07
~::´•:i4 LllD18 -------t-------L11C18 --´•----1~------LllB18

L10A18 L1A18
L11A18 r

C 1 I C I I C I I C I I C I I C 1 I C 1 I C 1. I c
L8A18 E1A18

SUCTION OMNII OMNI II

MANIFOLD
PRESSURE
FUEL
PRESSURE
TACHOMETER
I I- L2A20

L12E18 L~2D18 ------R------- L12C18 ~L12B18 ------R-- t;12A18 LllE18

TO CABIN
LIGHTS

---e- L13B18L13Als----~
TO OIL
TEMPERATURE
I,
TO
INTERIOR
L1(A1B --i LIGHTS

L30B18

C 1 I C 1 I C 1 I C 1 I C I I C I I C I I c I c
Q
ALTIMETER RATE OF CLIMB DIRECTION TURN AND BANK ADF

L12F18 ´•--t-----L12G18

L30A18

NOTE: UNCODED WIRES ARE FURNISHED WITH LIGHTS

IP

C c I I C I C i C

L30B18

j
HORIZON AIR SPEED CLOCK

L30C1B L30C18 L30A18

L30R18 L30S18 L30D18 L30E18 ~L30F18

r T T -T i. Oil Temperature,Instrument, and
L30P18 L30Nr8 L30M18 L30L18 L3 0K18 L30J18 L30H18 Cabin
L30G18 Lights Circuit Breaker

B (ch Q G´• cix (’x

2. Radio and Instrument Lights

tiX d
Dim Control
3. instrument Flood Lights Dim Control
4. Instrument Lights
5. Panel Edge lights

INSTRUMENT LIGHTS (OPTIONAL)

Models C33A, E33A, and E33C

6´•32 Issued: December. 1969

~´•590011-1C17

10A

C7-12 CjA12
d I 0--- CIA12
UP Ijl
~t-- C10-12 --O
´•´•e~I
C4A12
C3A12

C2A12 C13-12 C25-14

F6-18 F3-18

C24-14

I~IOTOR JIPI
C9A18 CllA18

14A18N N24-14

o (Ir\A 3~C15A18PJrll
C12A18

i. BusBar 5. Flap Down Indicator Light (Amberj

2. Flap Circuit Breaker 6. FlapMotor
3. Position Indicator Light 7. Flap Control Switch
Circuit Breaker 8. Flap Up Limit Switch
4. Flap Up Indicator Light (Green) 9. Flap Down Limit Switch

FLAP CONTROL AND POSITION INDICATOR

Model C33A (CE1 thru CE70, except CE60)
6-34 Issued: December. 1969
 d I b- F4A18 --<t- D4-18
10A

1. Bus Bar
2. Circuit Breaker
3. HeatedPitot

PITOT HEAT (OPTIONAL)

Models C33A, E33A, and E33C

L19A18--~--- L7-18

L18A18---~-- L7-18

O L17A18 L17B18 --(t~----L20-18

5A
C""""’~ 7 El
N45-18
LSSA1B~
I
1. Bus Bar
2. Circuit Breaker
3. Subpanel Lights
4. Right Wing Navigation Light (Green)
5. Left Wing Navigation Light (Red)
LIIIIIIIIII~J 6. TailNavigation Light (Clear)

NAVIGATION LIGHTS
Models C33A, E33A, and E33C

W32A18 -~f W32B18

O
´•I
I. Bus Bar
2. Circuit Breaker
3. Stall Warning Detector
4. Stall Warning Horn

STALL WARNING INDICATOR

Models C33A, E33A, and E33C

6-33
Issued: Decembel5 1969
 C6-12

C1A12 EJ ,IP C7-12 C5A12

10A \L
DN UP
P ~-C4A12 010-12-0 Y
I C3A12
L~CZA12 C13-12
´•1 C25-14
*cREEN
y
C24-14
*WHITE
*CE249 AND AFTER
C18A20
MOTOR IP
j
C 16B20 ,1
N24-14
*BLACK
C17B20 -(t C17A20 --~O 3 1( )El
1_
C18B20~tC18A20--t-02

C19ABON

i. BusBar 6. FlapMotor
2 Flap Circuit Breaker 7 Flap Position Transmitter
3 Flap Control Switch 8 Flap Position indicator
4 Flap Up Limit Switch "PC" Board
5 FlapDown LimitSwitch 9 Flap PositionIndicator

:FLAP CONTROL AND POSITION INDICATOR

:Model C33A (CE-60 and CE-71 thru CE-612)
C7 Model E33A, E33C 6-35
33-590011-1C*7

G21A18

G23A18
20A

lateG2A10 R

G15A18 G26A18N
G
O
5A~
G16A18~-W355-18"Pm rCG13B18
G13-18 G6A10 G8A10
G24A18

kl i
Cv 1 G22A18
G12A12 G3A10

t
W344-18
8

ii mdL 4k
G48-10 G555-1
G~7A18 Gll-10 G411-10 G333-10 Fla0-18

re
G18A18
W14-18g G1OB10 G49-10
F122-18

G277-10

W14B18
G399-10 G4A10
G11B10
CEI G28A18N 1 G288-10

4>---------GllC10

i. Bus Bar 7. L.C, Motor 12, Flasher

2. L. G. Power Circuit Breaker 8, L.G, Down Limit Switch 13, L.C, Warning Horn
3. L.G. Warning Circuit Breaker 9, L. G. Up Limit Switch 14, Throttle Warning Limit Sw
4. L. G. Flap Ind. Circuit Breaker 10, L.G. Down Brake 15, L.G. Safety Limit Switch
5. L. G. Down Ind. Light (Green) Limit Switch 16, Landing Gear Switch
6. L. G. Up Ind. Light (Red) ii, L.G, Up Brake Limit Sw 17. L.G. Warning Limit Switch

LANDING GEAR CONTROL AND POSITION INDICATOR

Models C33A, E33A, and E33C

6-36
Issued: December, 1969
 T"
CIA~O

~1
NOTE: CIRCUIT SHOWN WITH AIRCRAFT ON

5A)e THE GROUND AND THROTTLE OFF

G23A18
G15B18 NC L3 G21A18

ga3 1
ao*
m ~P,
G16A18
DWN
NO
F122-18
G22A18z1G3 (3241\18

I NO G399-10

TO ~--1 G26A18N G25A18N

G2A10 THROTTLE -L
WARNING I I I NC
1. Landing Gear Circuit Breaker
F100-18 2. Throttle and Landing Gear Warn Circuit Breaker
NC

T
G15A18 3. Landing Gear Control Switch
O
4. Landing Gear Down Limit Switch
G49-10
5. Landing Gear Up Brake Switch
6. Landing Gear Down Brake Switch
DWN
7. Landing Gear Safety Switch
NO
GND 8. Landing Gear Up Limit Switch
w13s1s I

G48-10
i IP 9. Landing Gear Motor
10. 90 MPH Pressure Switch
11. Landing Gear Safety System Switch
UP 12. Landing Gear Safety Relay
AIR G10A12 -e Glosl2 -eczss-la
UP 13. Throttle Control Switch
GllA12
G4B12 14. 120 MPH Pressure Switch
r

i
I 15. Diode

LRED DWN
16.
17.
18.
Bus
Landing Gear Down Indicator
Landing Gear Up Indicator
I I I I I GllB12 19. Landing Gear and Flap Indicator
I L
G6A10 I Lights Circuit Breaker
WHITE BLACK
G31B10
I VP

G12A10
iP 1 LATCHING SOLENO~D

G333-10
G8A10C8B10
QA~O
G8s10 1.
fh~
m22C31Alo-C3~-r
I
90 n:pH
G13A10 LC~CCG32A10
C’IA1ON 5
G15B18

If 6 ON
W1C;8 I
G33A10

,,sT
G14A~8
19 O_FF G3 5A18
o,,
G34A18N
_Sp---c29Als
G30A18N G33B18
19
ON 120 MPH

J,
DWN

LANDING GEAR WITH SAFETY SYSTEM (OKTIONAL)

ModelsC33A, E33A, and E33C

6-37
Irnlc?c~: December. 1969
 isA P
;I,
L37A14

C IL----t-- BLACK

B I--------~- WHITE B

A l---C RE D ~---------I A

i. Strobe Light Circuit Breaker

2. Fouler Supply
3. Strobe Light

STROBE LIGHT, HOSKINS (OPTIONAL)

Models C33A, E33A, and E33C

eisA
L76A20 ’2
L76B20

I
L79A20N ~4
L79B20N

113 n
WHITE

BLACK RED

1. Strobe
I El
Light Circuit Breaker
2. PowerSupply
3. Strobe Light

STROBE LIGHT, BULLOCK(OKTIONAL)

Models C33A, E33A, and E33C
6-38 Issued: December, 1969
 DI I
r nn la~F\ I
IO(REFJ
t I (REF) PllA6 --O 80A

ad
RED----1~--YELLOW

L
P29A18
YELLOW
P1B6;--$ O

P1C18
Fl F B

RED
GND i
P17B16N
P10A6
P23AG

lo~o
P28A18 BLACK
BLUE

REDm
~m7A16N
P30B16
P4A18N
(REF) BAT
P30Al6

P22A18N
GND
F R /rP29A18NP
(REF)ge
P3A18N
P31A16-L~-n P3ZA16
C~ Im P12.d14
P20A18
-L
P18A18

rP29A18N GND FLD BAT

I IP

i. Bus Bar
2. 80A Circuit Breaker
3. 10A Circuit Breaker
4. Alternator (70A)
5. Indicator #330 Lamp 10. Battery Relay
6. Overvoltage Relay 11. Connector
7. Alternator Switch 12. Plug and Cable Assembly
8. Voltage Regulator 13. Battery Switch
9. Suppressor 14. Perm. Splice

ALTERNATOR (70A)
Model C33A (CE-1 thru CE-87)

6-39
Issued: December, 1969
 33-590011-lC+7

TO BATTERY RELAY (REF)

T Il**rA----
P4A18N ’I 10A
P17A16 0
P30B16

t´•
P18A1 0

A
~Le P23A6 PllA6

P3A18N P31A16 P17B16N

I 1 I
IOA
P12A14

P19A20 P10A6

P18A18
n a\P
~CE-88 THRU CE-147

P21A20N THRU CE-159

-L

P32A16 P17A16N

P22A18NI
m

rr
BAT

I
P10A6

i. Bus Bar 7. Overvoltage Indicator

2. Alternator Circuit Breaker 8. BatterySwitch
3. Overvoltage Relay Circuit Breaker 9. Suppressor
4. Alternator 10. Alternator Switch
5. Voltage Regulator and Overvoltage Relay 11. Connector
6. Connector

ALTERNATOR (70A)
Model C33A (CE-88 thru CE-159)

6-40 Issued: December, 1969

TO BATTERY RELAY (REF)
’1V
P4A18N P30A16---C+i B
OA

t´• P30B16
P17A16N 6

t´•
3
PllA6

A P19A20

P3A18N P31A16 P17B16N P18A18

I i IOA
P12A14

P10A6

1
P32A16
P18A18
2 s
P19A20

P21A20N

I~3A 3 P17A16N

P32B16

P22A1
L3

m
F BAT P1OA

r R7
1. Bus Bar 7. Overvoltage Indicator
2. Alternator Circuit Breaker 8. BatterySwitch
3. Overvoltage Relay Circuit Breaker 9. Suppressor
4. Alternator- 10. Alternator Switch
5. Voltage Regulator and 11. Connector
Overvoltage Relay 12. Fuse
6. Connector

ALTERNATOR (70A)
Model C33A (CE-160 thru CE-179)

6-41
Issued: December, !969
33´•5Y001~-1C/12

TO BATTERY RELAY (REF)

7"
P4A18N P31A18
I 1IA

i
P3A18N
i/’
P32B18
P30B16rP17A18N--´•HC
P17B18N
O

A
PllA6

(t~
i I
´•BI P9A18

I
P19A18

I
IOA

ct~

P
P32C18
o------P42Al

Zct‘O 1~GA
?R1

P2dA18N

i
P10A6

P4LA18N’T1

~CIINSTALLED ON CE-199 AND AFTER AND

P4dB18 ON CJ-l AND AFTER AND ON PRIOR
AIRCRAFT SERIALS MODIFIED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH S.I. 0111-350

P40A18
GND
P22A18N1
BAT
im~
r
P10A6

i. Bus Bar 7. Alternator- Out Indicator

2. Alternator Circuit Breaker 8. Battery Switch
3. Overvoltage Relay Circuit Breaker 9. Suppressor
4. A Ite rnato r 10. Alternator Switch
5. Voltaffe Regulator and Overvoltage ii. Connector
Relay 12. Alternator Out Relay
6. Connector 13. Fuse
14. Resistor

ALTERNATOR (70A)
MODEL E33A (CE-180 thru CE-248)
MODEL E33C (CJ-1 thru CJ-13)

6´•42 Issued: September, 1971

TO BATTERY RELAY (REF) IC1 I[Fj
P4A18N P31A18
184

i;
C

rP1?A18N (JI
P30B16

o
PllA6

P3A18N
P32B18 P17B18N P
I I
´•di’ p9Al

2
P19A18
IA

ctr’ ~------------------P42A18
2 1

P32C18 e;, 18GA P20A18N

I
P10A6

P41A18N1

P40B18

I P51A20

P40A18
~jJ IBP
AUX F2
I L
P32C18
F1
P22A1 8N
J,
P32A18

1. Bus Bar 8. Battery Switch

2. Alternator Circuit Breaker 9. Suppressor
3. Overvoltage Relay Circuit Breaker 10. Alternator Switch
4. Alte rnator 11. Not Used
5. Voltage Regulator and Overvoltage 12. Alternator Out Relay
Relay 13. Fuse
6. Connector 14. Filter Capacitor
7. Alternator- Out Indicator 15. Resistor

ALTERNATOR (70A)
Model E33A (CE-249 thru CE-265)
Model E33C (CJ-14 thru CJ-22)

6-43
Issued: September, 1971
TO BATTERY RELAY (REF)

P4A18N P31A18 IP
10A
C

IP17A18N-~-I P
P30B16

O P11A6

P3A18N
P32B18 P17B18N PI

II I
P19A18
IA

i 2
R

GREEN--bP42A18 3

P32C18 ~C-- B LACK P26A18N

I
P10A6

RED

1 P40B18

P51A20

IIar
P40A18

AUX F2

P32C18
IL´•\~r\ JA OC3~P3
F1

P22A18N

i C33A-369-265

i. BusBar ’7. Aiternator- Out Indicator

2. Alternator Circuit Breaker 8. BatterySwiech
3. Overvoltage Relay Circuit Breaker 9. Suppressor
4. Alternator 10. Alternator Switch
5. Voltage Regulator and Overvoltage 11. Not Ilsed
Relay 12. Alternator-Out Sensor
6. Connector 13. Fuse
14. Filter Capacitor
ALTERNATOR (70A)
Model E33A (CE-266 thru CE-612)
Model E33C (CJ-23 thru CJ-104)

6-44 C7
 El
rA-------1
DN

BLACK

hn
O BLUE

10AeC20A18
I

18GA B
K1A18
TO IGNITION
L-l-D~T
BROWN

18GA C
I I,

VP

C22A18 L-------~

RED

C21A18

MTR

BLACK

i. Pitch Trim and Ignition

Boost Circuit Breaker
2. Control Column Coil Cord
3. Control Switch
4. Trim Actuator Assembly
5. Shunting Resistor
(CE 245 and after, CJ 10 and after)
6. Speed Adjust Resistor
(CE 180, CE 182, CE 239 and after)

ELEVATOR TRIM (OPTIONAL)

Models C33A, E33A, and E33C
6-45
Issued: December-1969
33-590011-16"7

H3A12 H4A12

r----~

L
11 _
t

HllA16----t--H12A18 ’-’’A
E B

C I I 6
H7A1
1I"’"’"
A
H6A1eN~
I. Bus Bar
2. Circuit Breaker Switch
3. Ammeter
4. Timer
5. BrushBlock
6. SLipRing
L,,,,~
7. Deice Boot

PROPELLER DEICE (OPTIONAL TWO-BLADED)

Models C33A, E33A, and E33C

H3slo
r_K,/filWr?-B4B1

t:

B1’SHBB10
H8B14
6
~1 B
F r-----------~
HllB14´•--+----H12B14 A
X
H9B14---~---H10B14 Il

C I I
H7B14H13A16N´•-~ C

r
A
H6B14N~
i. Bus Bar
2. Circuit Breaker Switch
3. Ammeter
4. Timer I
a. Brush Block
6. Slip Ring Q’~
7. Deice Boot
PROPELLER DEICE (OPTIONAL THREE-BLADED)
Models C33A, E33A, and E33C
6-46
Issued: December. 1969
 18----j FUE L LEVEL

94A18----´•------~ FUEL LEVEL (OPTIONAL)

10A~Y &1A18

E3Al8-----j CYLINDER HEAD

TEMP. INDICATOR

r --I- El
HIGH LOW I
1. Bus Bar !PRESS b PRESS I
2. Circuit Breaker
3. Auxiliary Fuel Control Panel
Pump-High Pressure

7i
4. Auxiliary Fuel
5. Auxiliary Fuel Pump-Low Pressure O
Quick Disconnect
LI_ OFF

&2A18 QCIOA18

t
BLACK

Q´•
´•O BLACK

BLACKI 8´•
BLACK

FUEL BOOST PUMPS (HIGH AND LOW PRESSURE)

Model E33C
6-47
Issued: Decembercl969
33-6900’11-16"7

E10A8 EllA18 E12A18N

K1A18
I
E13A18N
ACE
C20A18

i. Pitch Trim and Ignition Boost Circuit Breaker

2. Fuel Boost Light
3. Fuel Pressure Switch

FUEL BOOST LIGHT

Model E33C
6-48 Issued: December. 1969
 f’
st5A

C40A20

C41A20

C41B20
0´• C42A20
OFF

BLACK WHITE

1"610 V35-369-60

OFF

i. Avionics Bus
2. Constant Copilot Solenoid Valve
3. Constant Copilot Switch
4. Constant Copilot Wheel Switch
5. Constant Copilot Autopilot Circuit Breaker

CONSTANT COPILOT (OPTIONAL)

Model E33A (CE-236 thru CE-612)
Model E33C
6-49
C7
 PITCH

Clr TRIM

CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE

AND OIL TEMPERATURE

FUEL
FLOOD LIGHTS
P CI 9UANTITY

TURN
CABIN AND MAP LIGHTS
COORDINATOR

LANDING GEAR
RADIO AND INSTR LIGHTS
POSITION

STARTER
LIGHTER
RELAY

AUXILIARY
FLAP MOTOR
FUEL PUMP

DOOR WARN AND

FLAP POSITION
ALTERNATOR OUT

THROTTLE AND LANDING

ALTERNATOR FIEL~A GEARWARNING
TO
PllB4
BATTERY
LANDING
MASTER
LANDING GEAR GEAR PROP
RELAY
SAFETY I DEICE
r H25A10
P5B4

O
II I
LANDING TAXI NAV ROT STROBE PITOT
LIGHT LIGHT LIGHTS BEACON LIGHTS HEAT

PllA4 P23A4
P26A8

TG ALTERNATOR 36´•369´•69

P27A18
-Z TO STARTER RELAY

i. DC Bus
P21A18N 2. Avionics Bus
3. Avionics Protection Relay
4. Power Terminal Board

POWER DISTRIBUTION
Model 533 (CD-1235 thru CD-1254)
Model F33A (CE-290 thru CE-349)
Model F33C (CJ-26 thru CJ-30)
6-50 C3
 PITCH TRIM

TACHOMETER

MANIFOLD PRESSURE

OIL TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE

CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE

FLOOD LIGHTS
PP FUEL 4UANTITY

CABIN AND MAP LIGHTS r In TURN COORDINATOR

RADIO AND INSTR LIGHTS O LANDING GEAR POSITION

LIGHTER D D STARTER RELAY

FLAP MOTOR O O AUXILIARY FUEL PUMP

FLAP POSITION O O DOOR WARN AND ALTERNATOR OUT

ALTERNATOR FIELD a O THROTTLE AND LANDING GEAR WARNING

TO
PllB4
BATTERY LANDING
MASTER
RELAY
LANDING GEAR
SAFETYGEAR I DEICEPROP
r HZSA10
P5B4
II
P PllC4 It L C I D
LANDING TAXI NAV ROT STROBE PITOT
LIGHT LIGHT LIGHTS BEACON LIGHTS HEAT

PllA4

TO ALTERNATOR nss-sss-loo

1. DC Bus
2. Power Terminal Board

POWER DISTRIBUTION (Vertical Instruments)

Model F33A(CE350 thru CE-373)
Issued: DecembeT, 1972 6-50A
33-590011-10/15

PITCH TRIM

TACHOMETER

MANIFOLD PRESSURE

OIL TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE

CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE

FLOOD LIGHTS FUEL QUANTITY

s

CABIN AND MAP LIGHTS a a TURN COORDINATOR

P49A4
TO STANDBy
RADIO AND INSTR LIGHTS STARTER RELAY GENERATOR
P48A4

LIGHTER O a AUXILIARY FUEL PUMP

FLAP MOTOR O a LANDING GEAR POSITION

FLAP POSITION DOOR WARN AND ALTERNATOR OUT

O
ALTERNATOR FIELD THROTTLE AND LANDING GEAR WARNING
TO
PllB4
BATTERY LANDING
MASTER
LANDING GEAR GEAR PROP
RE LAY
I
I

SAFETY DEICE
r H25A10
P5B4

I 1
LANDING TAXI NAV ROT STROBE PITOT
LIGHT LIGHT LIGHTS BEACON LIGHTS HEAT

PllA4

TO ALTERNATOR

A36´•369-306

1. DC Bus
2. Power Terminal Board

POWER DISTRIBUTION (Vertical Instruments)

Model F33A (CE-374 thru CE-408)

8-505 IsPued: Decemhe~. 1972

 82 B1

A2 Al

BREAKERSo
P49A4
TO AVIONICS
CIRCUIT

P34A18
AVIONICS MASTER
rL

P48A4 P49A4
REFER TO STANDBY GENERATOR

CYLINDER HEAD AND

START RELAY
OIL TEMPERATURE

AUXILIARY
FUEL QUANTITY
FUEL PUMP

TRIM Of O TURN COORDINATOR

CABINAND
AUTO PILOT
MAP LIGHTS

INSTRUMENT
LIGHTER
FLOOD LIGHTS

FLAPMOTOR RAD’OAND
INSTRUMENT LIGHTS

LANDING GEAR
FLAP POSITION
POSITION

DOOR AND ALTERNATOR

ALTERNATOR FIELD
OUT wARNING

LANDING GEAR I I THROTTLE AND LANDING

SAFETY SWITCHA V
GEARWARNING
TO PllB4
BATTERY
MASTER
LANDING GEAR
RE LAY

r
P5B4

LANDING TAXI NAV ROT STROBE PITOT

LIGHT LIGHT LIGHTS BEACON LIGHTS HE AT

PllA4

TG ALTERNATOR F33A-369-300

i. DC Bus
2. Power Terminal Board

POWER DISTRIBUTION (with standby generator).

Model F33A (CE-409 thru CE-812)
Model F33C (CJ-31 thru CJ-104)

07
0-500
 TO AVIONICS
CIRCIJ[T BREAKERS

AVIONICS MASTER

CYLINDER HEAD AND

START RELAY
OIL TEMPERATURE

AUXILIARY
FUEL PUMP Y y FUEL QUANTITY

TRIM O~ O TURN COORDINATOR

AUTO PILOT CABINAND

MAP LIGHTS

INSTRUMENT
LIGHTER
FLOOD LIGHTS

FLAPMOTOR RADIOAND
INSTRUMENT LIGHTS

FLAP POSITION n LANDINGGEAR

POSITION

DOOR AND ALTERNATOR

ALTERNATOR FIELD
OUT wARNING

LANDING GEAR
THROTTLE AND LANDING
SAFETY SUrITCH~ V
GEARWARNING
TO
PllB4
BATTERY
MAST EP,
LANDING GEAR
RE LAY

r
P5B4

LANDING TAXI NAV ROT STROBE PITOT

LIGHT LIGHT LIGHTS BEACON LIGHTS HEAT

PllA4

TG ALTERNATOR
F33A369301

1. DC Bus
2. Power Terminal Board

POWER DISTRIBUTION (without standby generator)

Model F33A (CE-409 CE-612)
thru
Model F33C ICJ-31 fhcu.C;J-~W)

6´•50D
C7
 PITCH

llr TR’M

CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE

AND OIL TEMPERATURE

TO AVIONICS
CIRCUIT BREAKERS

FUEL
FLOOD LIGHTS
P G1UANTITY

TURN
CABIN AND MAP LIGHTS
COORDINATOR

LANDING GEAR
RADIO AND WSTR LIGHTS
POSITION

STARTER
LIGHTER
RELAY

AUXILIARY
FLAP MOTOR
FUEL PUMP

FLAP POSITION

THROTTLE AND LANDING

ALTERNATOR FIELDA V GEARWARNING
TO PllB6
BATTERY LANDING
MASTER GEAR
LANDING GEAR
RELAY
SAFETY
r
P5B4
O
PllC6 1" t~ D

LANDING TAXI NAV ROT STROBE PITOT

LIGHT LIGHT LIGHTS BEACON LIGHTS HEAT

PllA6

TG ALTERNATOR G33´•369´•90

1. DCBus
2. Power Terminal Board

POWER DISTRIBUTION
Model G-33 (CD-1255 thru CD-1289)

C1 6-505
 REF’ TO
STAND BY
GENERATOR

82 B1
P48A4 I P49A4

A2 Al

TO AVIONICS
CIRCUIT BREAKERS

CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE

AND OIL TEMPERATURE

FLOOD LIGHTS I II I FUEL

QUANTITY

TURN
CABIN AND MAP LIGHTS
COORDINATOR

LANDING GEAR
RADIO AND INSTR LIGHTS
POSITION

STARTER
LIGHTER
RELAY

AUXILIARY
FLAP MOTOR
FUEL PUMP

PITCH TRIM
FLAP POSITION

THROTTLE AND LANDING

ALTERNATOR FIELDA V GEARWARNING
TO P11B6
BATTERY I I LANDING
MASTER GEAR
LANDING GEAR
RELAY
SAFETY
\r
P5B4

LANDING TAXI NAV ROT´• STROBE PITOT

LIGHT LIGHT LIGHTS BEACON LIGHTS HEAT

PllA6

3.
TO ALTERNATOR oj3´•Jss´•soa

POWER DISTRIBUTION
Model 033 (Cb-1290 thru Cb-1304)

6-506 C7
 TO STANDBY
r
_ _
--P58A18- --7 GENERATOR
CD-1290 AND AFTER

W1A20 TO STALL WARNING

TO POWER
D1STR18UT10NJ-P584 P5A4
IP

IP
P4A20
I O- P4B20N
1

P28A20
gA
y- P28B203A
P29A20 -----r\j-P29 B20
TO COURTESY
L8’A20
LIGHTS (OPTIONAL)
P1A2

P3A2 I
P24B2
7-
TO S’TARTER P2A2N
AND IGNITION
-L

P24A2-´•----1 I L-P24B2

P25B20

P i. 1.
2.
3.
4.
Diode
Battery Master Relay
Battery Master Switch
Fuse
OPTIONAL 1 5. Shunt
8. Ammeter
7. Battery
8. External Power Relay
9. External Power Recepticai
10. Diode

BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER

Model F33 (CD-1235 thru CP1254)
Model 033 (CD-~255 thru CD-1304)
V358´•369´•78A
Model F33A (CE-290 thru 06-612)
Model F33C (CJ-26 thru CJ-30)
07
6-506
 P38A L8

W1A20 TO STALL WARNING

TO POWER
DISTRIBUTION P5B4 P5A4

P4A20
I C~- P4B20N
1

1 L63A20N

3 P28A20 P28
3A V

3A
4 CP29A20 ----------~-P29

5
TO COURTESY
6 LB1A20
LIGHTS (OPTIONAL)
P1A2
TO ENGINE
INSTRUMENT
P3A2 I
LIGHTS (VERTICAL) P24B2
~h 7-
TO STARTER P2A2N
AND IGNITION

I-

P24A2
I LP24B2
P25A20
V358´•369´•308

P25B20

1. Diode
2. Battery Master Relay
3. Battery Master Switch
4. Fuse
OPTIONAL 1 5. Shunt
6. Ammeter
7. Battery
8. External Power Relay
9. External Power Receptical
10. Diode

BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER

Model F33A (CE-350 thru CE-408)

6-50H 01
 P38A18cL------) TO STANDBY GENERATOR

W1A20 TO STALL WARNING

TO POWER
DISTRIBUTION P5B4

P4A20
Q- P4B20N
1

AMMETER 5 ~-P28A20 -----~cP28B20

5A
AMMETER -1 6 ~-P29A20 ----------~IP29 820
TO COURTESY
L81A20-----~ LIGHTS (OPTIONAL)
P1A2

P3A2 I
P24B2
-r
TO STARTER P2A2N
AND IGNITION

P24A2

P25B20
Diode

f´•
i.
2. Battery Master Relay
3. Battery Master Switch
4. Fuse
5. Shunt
OPTIONAL
6. Engine Instrument Cluster
7. Battery
8. External Power Relay
9. External Power Receptical
10. Diode

V35&3BB6A

BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER

F33A (CE409 thru CE´•1304)
F33C (CJ´•31 th~u CJ-1304)
6-5’
07
 33-590011-1C/15

I- -I

K1A20
i J1A18

Oca LR 1

J2A18

0------------- K2A20
BAT

GRD ~BOI

J3A18N
-L

TO AVIONICS PROTECTION

P271A;8.-- -I

TO BATTERY AM)
I EXTERNAL POWER

K5A2N

i, Engine Start Relay Circuit Breaker

2, Ignition Switch
3. RH Magneto
4. LH Magneto
5, Starter
6. Starter Relay

v3,s-3~9.a

STARTER AND IGNITION

Model 533 (CD-1235 thru CD-1254)
Model F33A (05-290 thru CE-315 and CE-324)
Model F33C (CJ-26 thru CJ-30)
Aircraft prior to incorporation of S, i, 0410-354, Revision I
6-52
Issued: December, 1972
 I- I

J1A18
K1A18 I I"
LR
I

R I
J2A18
SW

K2A18
BAT

GRD ~BDI

J3A18N

TD AYIONICB PROTECTION

P271A;8 -I

K4A2 P3A2 TO BATTERY AND

EXTERNAL POWER
K5A2N

j
AVIONICS PROTECTION NOT INSTALLED ON MODEL
033 SERIALS CD-1256 AND AFTER OR ON MODEL
F33A SERIALS CE-350 AND AFTER
F33C SERIALS CJ-31 AND AFTER

i. Engine Start Relay Circuit Breaker

2. Ignition Switch
3. RH Magneto
4. LH Magneto
5. Starter
6. Starter Relay

G33-369898

STARTER AND IGNITION

Model G33 (CD-1255 thru CD-1304)
Model f33A (CE-316 thru CE-612)
Model F33C(CJ-31 thru CJ-104)
and prior airplanes in compliance with S.I. 0410´•344 Rev. I

07 i

6-52A
 BLACK H1A18

BLACK

i. Circuit Breaker
2. Cigarette Lighter

CIGARETTE LIGHTERS
Models F33, G33, F33A and F33C

Issued: August. ’1971 6-53

33-590011-1C/11

TO

BATTERYI
AND EXTERNAL
POWER
J--WIADO 5A
W1B20 ----t- W1C20

’rW32A20
W32B20

i. Stall Warn Circuit Breaker

V35B36911
2. Stall Detector S\vitch
3. Stall Warning Horn

STALL WARNING
Models F33, G33, F33A and F33C

s P~
F4A18 F4B18
10A

F5A18N

_L

V358-36913

1. Pitot Heat Circuit Breaker

2. Pitot Heater

PITOT HEAT (OPTIONAL)

Models F33, G33, F33A and F33C

Issued: August, 1971

6-54
 5A

F1A20

F2A20N B

r V358´•369-12

i. Turn Coordinator Circuit Breaker

2. Turn Coordinator Indicator

TURN COORDINATOR
Models F33, G33, F33A and F33C

20A----- L28A12
L28B1210_,,,,,,,
--2 OA---------- L1 6A12
L16B12~,,,,,,,,
1. Landing Light Circuit Breaker
2. Landing Light
3. Taxi Light Circuit Breaker
V358-369´•18
4. TaxiLight

LANDING AND TAXI LIGHTS

Models F33, G33, F33A and F33C

1971 6-55
Issued: August;
 M5A2~--i TO ALTERNATOR

5A L19A20

L17A20

L18A20 L19A20

L17A20

L18B20 L19B20

L17C20

L19C20
L18C20

El

L36B20N

L36A20N

1. Navigation Lights Circuit Breaker

2. RH Navigation Light
3. Tail Navigatidn Light
4. LH Navigation Light

NAVIGATION LIGHTS
Model F33 (CD-1235 thru CD-1254)
Model G33 (00-’1255 thru CD-1304)
Model F33A (CE-290 thru CE-435)
Model F33C (CJ-26 thru CJ-30)
6-56 t CQ
 M5A20 TO ALTERNATOR

II
5A

20
NAV LIGHT 20 NAV LIGHT 20 NAV
LICIHT

GND-80 t3BB20N GND-20

I
-L
i
L36A20N

*7.5 I V358-389´•208

CE-524 AND AFTER

CJ-52 AND AFTER

i. Navigation Lights Circuit Breaker

2. RH Navigation Light
3. Tail Navigation Light
4. LH Navigation Light

NAVIGATION LIGHTS
Model F33A (06-436 thru CE-612)
Model F33C (CJ-31 thru CJ-104)

6-56A
C7
 E43A20 E13A20

E42A20N E44A20N

II
1 3 4

LH RH

125 521
o P o

L
E15B20 J E14B20

E15A20 E14A20

76 ~2n
000
543
og o1 O 76~2R

O O
Er8A20 E16A20

C]
O O

Q
I

43 ~2n I II 43~ 2n

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD V3536B16A

IS MOUNTED ON INDICATOR
TERMINALS

**GROUND THE FOLLOWING INSTRUMENT WIRES

AT A SINGLE POINT: E31A20N (CYLINDER HEAD),
E42A20N AND E44A20N (FUEL QUANTITY). DO
NOT GROUND ANY OTHER WIRES AT THIS POINT.

I. FuelQuantity Circuit Breaker

2. Printed Circuit Board
3. Fuel Quantity Indicator
4. Inboard Fuel Cell Transmitter
5. Outboard Fu~l CellTransmitter

FUEL OUAN71TY
Model 533 (CD-1235 thru CD-1254)
Model G33 (CD-1255 thru CD-1304)
Model F33A (CE-290 thru CE-349)
Model F33C (CJ-26 thru CJ-30)
c3
6-568
 s

I I

i C----E42A20N E44A20N
_1

2 ~----E43A20 L-_~- El 3 420 2

3 3

4 ~E15A20 4

5 1 I 1 5

6 L66A20--------I 6

)------L65A20[5,
GROUND THE FOLLOWING INSTRUMENT WIRES
AT A SINGLE POINT: E37A20N (OIL
TEMPERATURE), E30A20N (CYLINDER HEAD
TEMPERATURE), E42A20N AND E44A20N (FUEL
OUANTITY). DO NOT GROUND ANY OTHER
WIRES AT THIS POINT.

OUTBOARD oureoARD

E1"~_ _ _ _
_i L _ _ _ _
I _
_I
LEFT FUEL TANK RIGHT FUEL TANK
E19A20N

i 111~1ZN

L~ TO ENGINE INSTRUMENT LIGHTS

i. Cir~uil ereuker
2. Fuel Quan~i)y Indiro)or 35-36975
3. Inboard Fuel Oucinti~y Tr~nrmi(ter
4. Ouiboard Fuel Qu~nti,v Tron~mi,ter

FUEL QUANTITY (Vertical Instruments)

Model F33A (CE-350 thru CE-408)

C1 1 6-56C
 E43A20 E13A20

E42A20N F44A20N

1. I
4 SI 1 3 4

LH RH

1 2 5 5 1
O O

J LE14B20
E15B20

E15A20 E14A20

76~2n
000
543
00 9 O1 O
o o
E1SABO E16A20

O
O O

Q
r I

~2n 43+

*PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD IS MOUNTED ON

INDICATOR TERMINALS, CE-409 THRU CE-470; CJ-31
V3636616A
THRU CJ-51. IT IS MOUNTED ON THE FORWARD
UPPER SIDE OF THE FIXED INSTRUMENT PANEL,
CE-471 THRU CE-479.

sGROUND THE FOLLOWING INSTRUMENT WIRES

AT A SINGLE POINT: E31A20N (CYLINDER HEAD),
E42A20NAND E44A20N (FUEL QUANTITY), DO
NOT GROUND ANY OTHER WIRES AT THIS POINT,

1, Fuel Quantity Circuit Breaker

2. Printed Circuit Board
3. Fuel Quantity Indicator
4. Inboard Fuel CellTransmitter
5. Outboard Fu~l CellTransmitter

FUEL QUANTITY (OPTIONAL)

Model F33A (CE-409 thru CE-479)
r
Model F33C (CJ-31 thru CJ-51)

6-56[) C11
 E43A20 E13A20

E42A20N E44A20N
4 3 4
I. _L

LH RH

B I II IF1
1/ \1

E15A20 E14A20

76~2n

E18A20 E16A20

i 21) 43 i

*PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD IS MOUNTED ON V3b36B168

GLARESHIELD (UPPER FORWARD

SUPPORT
PORTION OF FIXED INSTRUMENT PANEL)

I +GROUND THE FOLLOWING INSTRUMENT WIRES

AT A SINGLE POINT: E31A20N (CYLINDER HEAD),
E42A20N AND E44A20N (FUEL QUANTITY). DO
NOT GROUND ANY OTHER WIRES AT THIS POINT.

1. Fuel Quantity Circuit Breaker

2. Printed Circuit Board
3. Fuel Quantity Indicator
4. Inboard Fuel CellTransmitter
5, Outboard Fuel Cell Transmitter

FUEL QUANTI‘TV (OPTIONAL)

Model F33A (CE-480 thru CE-612)
Model F33C (CJ-52 thru CJ-104)

C11 6-566
 E43A20 E13A20

E42A20N E44A20N

I I
1 3 4

7 I+
LH RH

i 2 5 I 11 5 2 1:
O O

El5B20 ´•I LE14B20

E15A20 E14A20

alS‘I
160 4n
ie5 O4 O3 o09 O1 D
cj o
E1Sk2dN E16A20N

_L [1 I
O O

Q
I I

I I

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD

*PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD IS MOUNTED ON INDICATOR

F33369-302
TERMINALS, CE-409 THRU CE-470; CJ-31 THRU CJ-51. IT IS
MOUNTED ON THE FORWARD UPPER SIDE OF THE FIXED
INSTRUMENT PANEL CE-471 THRU CE-479.

*GROUND THE FOLLOWING INSTRUMENT WIRES

AT A SINGLE POINT: E31A20N (CYLINDER HEAD),
E42A20N AND E44A20N (FUEL QUANTITY). DO
NOT GROUND ANY OTHER WIRES AT THIS POINT.

i. Fuel Quantity Circuit Breaker

2. Printed Circuit Board
3. Fuel Quantity Indicator
4. LH FuelCell Transmitter
5. RH FuelCell Transmitter

FUEL QUANTITY (STANDARD)

Model F33A (CE-409 thru CE-479)
Model F33C (~J-31 thru CJ-51)

6´•56F C11
 E43A20 E13A20

t´•

E42A20N E44A20N
41 3 4
3
_L _L

LH RH

1/ \1

E15A20 E14A20

60 4n

E18A20N E16A20N

I I

*PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD IS MOUNTED ON

F33´•369´•302P.
GLARESHIELD SUPPORT (UPPER FORWARD
PORTION OF FIXED INSTRUMENT PANEL)

L tGROUND THE FOLLOWING INSTRUMENT WIRES

AT A SINGLE POINT: E31A20N (CYLIMDER HEAD),
E42A20N AND E44A20N (FUEL QUANTITY). DO
NOT GROUND ANY OTHER WIRES AT THIS POINT.

1. Fuel Quantity Circuit Breaker

2. Printed Circuit Board
3. Fuel Quantity Indicator
4. LH Fuel Cell Transmitter
5. RH Fuel Cell Transmitter

FUEL OUANTltY (STANDARD)

Model F33A (CE-480 thru CE-612)
IModelF33_C_(CJ-52 thru CJ-104)

C11 6-57
 El
g OFF
91A18 Q2A18
10A

ON

V358-369-22

1. Auxiliary Fuel Pump Circuit Breaker

2. Auxiliary Fuel Pump Switch
3. Auxiliary Fuel Pump Motor

FUEL BOOST PUMP

Models F33 and F33A (CE-290 thru CE-349)

&5A18--------) TO LANDING GEAR POSITION IND.

PI OFF

&1A18 ~r &2A18
10A
O~YO
ON

G33369-87

1. Auxiliary Fuel Pump Circuit Breaker

2. Auxiliary Fuel Pump Switch
3. Auxiliary Fuel Pump Motor

FUEL BOOST PUMP

Medal 033
Model F33A (CE-350 thru CE-612)

6-58 07
 33-590011-1(=/11

Q4A18 FUEL QUANTITY

10A
-t Q1A18

E3A18 --´•--i
CYLINDER HEAD
TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR

Q1A18

r--r-
HIGH LOW
PRESS Y PRESS

LOFF-1’
Q3A18 Q4A18

1. Fuel Quantity, Cylinder Head Temperature,

Y
BLACK
and Auxili’ary Fuel Pump Circuit Breaker
2. Auxiliary Fuel Control Panel
3. Auxiliary Fuel Pump High Pressure
4. Auxiliary Fuel Pump Low Pressure MOT

Q3A18N BLACK

I
V358-36923

FUEL BOOST PUMP

Model F33C

Issued: Au6´•ust, 1971 6-59

 15A) s
UP C12A14

C2A14 DN Q

C2B14i C4B14C4A14P
DN C6A14

i. Flap Motor Circuit Breaker

2. Flap Control Switch
3. Flap Down Limit Switch
C3
UPIC C3A14
i
C5A14
4. Flap Up Limit Switch
5. F’lap Motor
C3B14WHITE I WIRE FURNISHED
GREEN BY VENDOR

BLACK V358-369-24

FLAP MOTOR
Models F33, G33, F33A and F33C
Issued: August, 1971
6-60
 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
DIRECTLY CONNECTED
1 TOINDICATOR

C16A20

C18A20
T
C18B20 3

C17A20
T
C17B20 4

C19A20N PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD

o
-o

O
3
O
1. Flap Position Indicator Circuit Breaker
2. Printed Circuit Board 2

3. Flap Position Indicator O

4. Flap Position Transmitter

I
+OO O 1
O

V35-369-1~

FLAP POSITION INDICATOR

Models F33, 033, F33A and F33C

6´•61
Issued: August, 1971
 20A)PI

UP

I
UP G2A12

vb
G35A12I
El o
G6A12 ~---O

G1ZA12 G7A12N
G12C12 -L
G8A12

G3A12
-DwrJ
I
G10B12

1
G10A12
AIR
DWN

COM i? GllA12
NOTE:CIRCUIT IS SHOWN WITH
G4A12 AIRCRAFT ON THE GROUND
NC
GND
G18C20 GllB12

C13B20
j
WHITE
i. Landing Gear Circuit Breaker
REF. LANDING 2. Landing Gear Control Switch
UP
GEAR AND RED 3. Landing Gear Up Brake Switch
THROTTLE /A\ 4. Landing Gear Down Brake Switch
WARNING B DWN 5. Landing Gear Up Limit Switch
6. Landing Gear Down Limit Switch
BLACK
7. Landing Gear Safety Switch
8. Landing Gear Motor
G20A12N

WIRE FURNISHED I3Y

VENDOR

LANDING GEAR WITHOUT SAFETY SYSTEM

Model F33 (CD-1235 thru CD-1254) vnss-369-~a

Model F33A (CE-290 thru CE-349)

Model F33C (CJ-26 thru CJ-30)

6-62 C3
 20A)il
TO LANDING
G12A12
GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR
UP

O BT vp G2A12

G6820

G6A12-~--0

DWN 4 I G7A12N
-L

G35p12 LI~UP rC8A12 ---t-O

G3A12
~G1OC1Zt GB812 iDWN
G10B12
0--G3B12

DWN
AIR
G4B12
G10A12
G12C12

COM ii GllA12
NOTE:CIRCUIT IS SHOWN WITH
G4A12 AIRCRAFT ON THE GROUND
NC
GND
G18C20 GllB12

I G13B20 GllC12
1-´• i. Landing Gear Circuit Breaker
REF.LANDING~ WHITEUP 2. Landing Gear Control Switch
GEAR AND RED h 3. Landing Gear Up Brake Switch
THROTTLE /A\ 4. Landing Gear Down Brake Switch
WARNING O DWN 6. Landing Gear Up Limi~ Switch
6. Landing Gear Down Limit Switch
BLACK
7. Landing Gear Safety Switch
8. Landing Gear Motor

G20A12N
-L
WIRE FURNISHED BY
VENDOR

G33´•369-81

LANDING GEAR WITHOUT SAFETY SYSTEM

Model G33 (CD-1255 thru CD-1304)
Model F33A (CE-350 thru CE-537, CE-542, CE-544 and CE´•547)
Model F33C (CJ-31 thru CJ-61,CJ-67, CJ-68, CJ-75 and CJ-76)

Cg 6-62A
 r----
NC P--h.NC
LEFT

I_P~O070A1F-TNo
SOUAT
SWITCH

1
069C12

L _ _
_I_ _J
UPBRAKE SWITCH 070812
069812

06812

06A12
20*´•)

r--~ObC12 i I TO
LANDING GEAR
AND THROTTLE
r I WARNING
--J
OWN 81*KI IW17CH I 02Al2

012A12
CONTROL
SWITCH

r,,7
0bA12
ol?cl? I
035A12 OllL~12
r- _L

I) 068A11-----~--0

1 I I I 03A12
070812 I
L-___~
UP LIMIT SWITCH I I I I I I 015A20

i~J-t"
"""~I
012012

r---~
03812----t--03A12

ObiA12 013320
LL-I__I I I
DOWN LIMIT SWITCH
04B11

WHITE
i
04A12

MOTOR

"’"n

NO1´•1.068 12
018020

BLACK

020A12N r

Q WIII ~VINISHID 81 VINDOL :bGUH:T NC

SWITCH LNCJ_ __j

133-369-31

LANDING GEAR WITHOUT SAFETY SYSTEM

Model F33A (05-535 thru 05-541, 05-543, CE545, 05-546 and
CE-548 thru 05-612)
Model F33C (CJ-62 thru CJ-66, CJ-69 thru CJ-74 end CJ-77
thru CJ-104)

6´•62B 07
 L I

20A)s 5A)e
TO LANDING
G52A20
GEAR ~’ARNING
2. Lalldill~ Gc:tr nlltl Tllrottle
3. L;lndin~ Clear Up nrnkP S\\-itcIl
TO
THROTTLE
NO

El DWN
wHITE
jX)13 4. L:tndill~ Gear Dr,sll nl´•ake S\\´•itc´•)1
5. Landing Gear Up Limit S~ilch
WARNING G11I312 6. Lnnding Gear Dowii Limit Switch

TREDn
7. L;llldirl~ Gear hlotor

G2A12 G15A20 nLACK I 8.

10. Diode
Genr S;1Tety S~´•itrh Cirr´•l~it nrc:tkt´•1´•
9, 90 hIPH P1´•clisure S~itcll

ONC G23h20 Il. L;llltlin~ Ccnr SllI.ety Rcl;\v

G11A12
G6A12 12, Lnndin~ Cenr SJety S~itrh
C4A12 C20A12N
4 DWN4 NO 13. Lalldin~r Gear Safety Systcln S\\itcIl
C12B12
-L AIR 14. 120 ~IPH Pressure Switch

C-L3hZO
I
NOt Y IL1 lj Tllrotfle Coalrol Sn~ilch
(IPINO D G10X12
COM 16. IJandin~ Grnl- Co,ltrol SI~´•itc´•h

G10n17
I
G18C20-~AND THROTTLE
GND WARNISC
G12X12L------------t--t G24A12
o NC

UP I I I ~NO LATCHINC SOLESOID

DWN
r G3A12
\VIRE FU~INISHED I)Y VESDOI~

f+G6A12
G5A20

G12A12----~ I C;8 1312

G7A12N
t I
C8A12

G3A12
I 1

I
I

i C;31~12
ir------7
T_
CoLi
I,;,.,,,
I
-G: IA12

G22A12
Im
~.55A12N L 1
5 (;21A12--~7b
OFF
7‘ F: ST L--_J
IA GON1 3 OFF

n
m
G2YA12(;30A12S
mt~ _L IF 12cn
IJ (;56A12

m
90

L___j ON
(_;SA20
I)WN m

hi

LAND(NG GEAR WrTH SAFETY SYSTEM IOPTIONAL)

Model F33 (CD-1235 thru CD-1254)
Model F33A (CE-290 thru CE-349)
odel F33C (CJ-26 thru CJ-30)
3 6-626
 NOTE: CtRCUIT SHOWN WITH AIRCRAFT
ON GROUND AND THROT~LE OFF

20A)IP
1, Landing Gear Circuit Breaker
2. Not Used
3. Landing Gear Up Brake Switch
UP NO WHITE
~--C11C12f 5a:)0 4. Landing Gear Down Brake Switch

UPI~ Landing Gear Up Limit Switch

5.
DWN
CllB~2 6. Landing Gear Down Limit Switch
RED
7. Landing Gear Motor

I
C35A12
NC 8. Landing Gear Safety Switch Circuit Breaker
G2A12 G6B20 9. 90 MPH Pressure Switch
BLACK
10, Diode
TOLANDING t-G6C20 NC GllA12 G23A20 11, Landing Gear Safety Relay
GEAR POSITION G6A12 12, Landing Gear Safety Switch

1
G4A12 G20A12N
MDICATOR DWN NO 13. Landing Gear Safety System Switch

TO LANDING
~L A~R 14. 120 MPH Pressure Switch
OP 15. Throttle Control Switch
~BAR LlAP~O UP~NO s GIOA12 NOt 16, Landing Gear Control Switch
COM
G15A20
I I II ~Ct---tt--+GIOCta--e-- G10B12 --1 LANDING
17. Fuse

NC NC
G1SCZO ´•AND THROTTLE
~P G13A20 GND WARNING
G24A12
I~

I
UP

i
r;NC
G3B12
NO
DWN
G4B12
LATCHING SOLENOID

WIRE FURNISHED BY VENDOR

10D12

ffcS~1L
G5A20
C12A12 1 GBB12

f
GSA11 I I
I
.1.
´•:-i::t
c7nlzN I 0--~C;3B12 G31A12 t~F?

i.
I

Im
i
G14A20

U.
G22B12
G21A12
5 ;l‘b
OFF
TEST
6ONI 3

[t
OFF
G29AZO
m -~bC30AzoN _L
G56A12 90 MPH
G8C12

G5A20
ON 120 MPH
DWN I ’J

LANDING GEAR WITH SAFETY SYSTEM

LANDING GEAR WITH SAFETY SYSTEM (OPTIONAL)

Model G33 (CD-1255 thru CD-1304)
Model F33A (CE-350 thru CE-357, CE-542 and CE-547)
Model F33C (CJ-31 thru CJ-61, CJ-67, CJ-68, CJ-75 and CJ-76)

6-62D CJ
 MOT

.H´•nE
UP
DOWN

UP RED
,o

.I
G6A12
UPBRAKE
SWITCH
BL~CK

G6820
NC

NC DOWN BRAKE
t
G20A12N
G6C12

i
CIRCUIT
BREAKER j DOWN
NO

INO
UP
LIMTSWITCH
SWITCH
LEFT
S(IUAII
SWITCH
eL) NC

UP G12D1Z
TO LANDING GEAR
ANDTHROTTLEWARNING
NC
G70812 G70A1?
,,,I,

r
G18BZO
SWITCH

NO

DOWN
G4B12
GGDCli

G69B12
G12C12

G6YA12

G6BB12

G2A12 G3B12
G15A20
RIGHT
SQUAT
SWITCH

G,3Aza G13B20

G1eCZO

rtGS"i?
IPIPETISK.ITCII
CIRCUIT BREAKER ~b]
G12A12
G68A12
I G23AZO

G3A12
G14A20
G6A20
GIAIZN( FUSE SAFETY

I, GZZA20 G22B12 5 2
oN G881Z
aFF r,,, 4 3
A
f--G31L\12

G30AZON1 6
OFF SAFETY RELAY
r---~
ON 120MPH G8C1
DOWN
PRESSURE
THROTTLE
CONTROL SWITCH
CONTROL G56A12
SWITCH
SWITCH
DIODE
LATCHINGSOLENOID

GZ1A12
GEinl?N
L___J
WIRE FURNISHED BY YENOOR
i
NOTE: CiRCUITSHOWhWITH AIRCRAFT
d
S0MPH
ONGROUNDANDTHROTTLEOFF
PRESSURE
SWI)Cil
G64AA12

G131611116

LANDING GEAR WITH SAFETY SYSTEM (OPTIONAL)

Model F33 (CE-538 thru CE-541, CE-543, CE-545, CE-546, CE-548 thru CE-608)
Model 6336 (CJ-62 thru CJ-66, CJ´•69, thru CJ-74. CJ-77 th~u CJ-99)

C6 6-625
 MOTOR

,p

I DOWNt
,p RED
NO
G6A12
VPBRAKE
SWITCH
BL:CK TOAIRCONDITIONER

NC
G6BZO

NC

S;a
DOWN BRAKE G20A12N H33F18
SWITCH _

G4A12 I I
DOWN -I-~
NO
CIRCUIT LEFT 4 NC
BREAKER SOUATI
UP LIMIT
INO SWITCH

Tre;
SWITCH
TO LANDING GEAR
AND THROTTLE WARNING
UP

NC
G12012
i´•~
G70A12
DOWN LIMIT
N,
SWITCH I I I I I I G69C12

NO ~--CG48(2

GlsBzo I I I DOWN
G69B12
G12C12

t
G69A12
G70612
068812

02112 GOB1?
G1SI\10 rNO
RIGHT I
SOUAT
SWITCHI
G1BB?O

r
UP
G67A20

;~;;-c13Azo’ G13B20

G18C2D
4"_I
ftcean
SAFETY SWITCH
CIRCVITBREAKER 61\)
GIZAI
UBLIAIZ
I I I G23PZO
G3A12
G14A20 ~---------C---G5AZO
I

G7A12NPI GZZA?O-----t-------C~
FUSE

6A
I SAFETY
SYSTEM
SWITCH

o,
OFF TEST
4
OZgA20
e.G31A12
;7bG30A2ON
1 6 1
3
OFF

L _U_ ----1

ON I20MPH
DOWN
PRESSURE
THROTTLE
CONTROL
SWITCH
CONTROL
SWITCH G56A12
SWITCH
d L*TCHING S(ILENOID
DIODE

GzlAI2
oasnlzw
NI.I IV.RII.,O BY Y.NOOR L___~
sapETvnELav
I
NOTE: CIRCUITSHOWNWITH AIRCRAFT
ONGROUNDANDTHROTTLEOFF 90MPH
PRESSURE
SWITCH
G64AA12

LANDING GEAR WITH SAFETY SYSTEM (OPTIONAL)

Model F33 (CE-609 thru CE-612)
Model F33C (CJ-100 thru CJ-104)

C7 6-63
 I,ANDIN~
")B a (L GI-:AR
LOCK

I
L17A20 TO LANDING GEAR AND SWITCHES
L18A20
TO
NAVIGATION THROTTLE WARNING
t--G15A20-----7C,
L19A20
LIGHTS m
G44A20

1 RH
M5A20 a G41A20

I
M5B20 L50A20N
QI-0

f L51A20 --j
TO
ALTERNATOR
G43A20 G42A20 -f- G42I320
2

G44B20 ’7" T L49A20 IPJ CEI

2
C44C20
G41B20
RH
TO LANDING 1
G40A20N
C44D20 G391\20 GEAR AND _C
THROTTLE 3~ 1 6 UP Im
G39A20 -f G39B20
WARNING
NOSE
IPf 18 G25A20 7’ 1 I I I I
G48B20 -e G48A20
C53A20

G55D20 I 191 ´•cC-l I I I G51BL0 -´•-C´•G51A20

G55C20 m 6

~1
M4A20I LEFT RIGHT
G55B20

NOSE
10 DWN

G45A20
1

G55A20 2
G36A20
HAND HAND G33A20 G33B20

G
i.R GEAR
IN
2
G45B20 -+9---~

1
Im
1
NOSE
1

TRANSIT rG31A20N
G54B20 G54A2C) 61 1 I I I I I I 1 3 r I 1 6 UP m
G36A20 c G36B20
G54D20 G54C20 -p_’ r LH

m 1 5 1 I I I I i I L~ G47820’ G47A20
SWITCH TYPE CIRCUIT BREAKER

:::i: I I I I 1 4 If I I I I I I
C50D20 t G50A20

G44C20 m 6

3 DwN
1. Landing Gear And Throttle Warn Circuit CQ 1
Breaker
G33A20
2. Navigation Lights Circuit Breaker m
21 m G32A20 -e c32szo
3. Landing Gear Position Circuit Breaker
4. Warn Lights Test Switch
5. Warn Lights Dim Relay 2 I m
6. Landing Gear Position Lights 1 m G33B20
.H
Gear In Transit Light G44D20 m 1
8. Terminal Board
G26A20N
I I I I ~1
9. Terminal Board I\Ulil I I 1 3
10. Diode I I 1 7 1 G25A20 -f- G25B20
11. Dim Resistors I I I 1 5
12. RH Gear "Up" Lock Switch L------i I L------,G4 6 820 G46A20
13. RH Gear "Down" Lock Switch
14. Nose Gear "U~" Lock Switch G49 820 --´•t- G49A20
15. Nose Gear "Down" Lock Switch
16. LH Gear "Up" Lock Switch
17. LH Gear "Down" Lock Switch I DWN
V35836966

LANDING GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

Model F33 (CD-1235 thru CD-1252)
Model F33A (CE-290 thru CE-308)
Mollzi F33C (CJ-26 thru CJ-30) C3
6-64

I’
 B(i´• ~)O
i
L17~20
To TO I,ANDINCi C;EAR ~NL) S~ITCIIL:s:
L18A20 NAVIGXTION T~IROTTLE WARNING; t--C15A2U
L19A20
LIGHTS 3 m
G44A20
~57r\20
1 RH
M5A20
C41A20
FUEL BOOST PUhIP G57A20

15A18-~
M5B20 L50A20N
Q-LD

L51A20 --j
TO
ALTERNATOR
G43r120

G32A20
G42A20 -C- G42U20
2

i t--L6B18 -L
G44B20 I t L49A20
I~
G4´•1C20 2
m
C41B20
6
RH
TO LANDING 1
G44~I20 ~40r\20N
C3PA2D GEAR AND
10 7
UP m
THROTTLE 3 6
C39~20 G33020
WARhTING
NOSE
1 8
G25A20 7
5
G48820 -e GC8X20
G53A20
L L L
G55D20 1 9 1 ~L-l r 1 G51~20 -e G51A20

G55C20 Cr50l320 6
M4A20
G55B20 ~r I I I I I I I i I owN ~1
I 1

LEFT RIGHT NOSE G55X20 36X20 G45A20

2
I I nAsD HA?I;D G38A20 --t- G38B20
3~320

G C
r
Ij~J 2
m
G
G45B20
L NOSE
IN
1
TRANSIT O ’O G3?A20N
G54B20
G54A20 Isl I I I I I I I I I I I 1 6 L:P m
G54D20 LG36A2Ci G36B20
G54~20 1 ~cp"l I i I I I I ~p+ti-+tJ t
t~J I I 0---f LH

SWITCH TYPE CIRCUIT BREAKER

m 5
G57A20
G47B20 f- G17X20
Z G26f320
0
4
G50B20 t G:OA20
:~:::::j G4´•3C20 m
3 1_ .w, ~1
1. Landing Gear’And Throttle Warn Circuit
1
Breaker
2. Navigation Lights Circuit Breaker IP G6C20
G33A20
2´• 1 m G32A20 -t G32 B20
3. Landing Gear Position Circuit Breaker
4. Warn Lights Test Switch
TO LANDING
m
5. Warn Lights Dim Relay
6. Landing Gear Position Lights 1 hi! GEAR C33B20
2

,H
7. Gear In Transit Light I
G44h´•120 m
8. Terminal Board G26A20N
9. Terminal Board I\Uil I I 11 3
10. Diode I I I G25A20 -t- G25B20
’11. Dim Resistors I I I I 1 5
12. RH Gear "Up" Lock Switch L--------J L------
I G46 U20 -t- G46A20
13. RH Gear "Down" Lock Switch
4
14. Nose Gear "Up" Lock Switch G49 820 -t- G49A20
15. Nose Gear "Down" Lock Switch
16. LH Gear "Up" Lock Switch
17. LH Gear "Down" Lock Switch I DWN
18. Relay IJ33G’J88

19. FuelSeltct I,ight

LANDING GEAR POSITION INDICATOR
Model F33 (CD-1253 thru CD-1255)
Model F33A (CE-309 thru CE-349)
c3 6-64A
 LANDING

aiS´• 5A)B s(~L GEARLOCK

~i
L17A20 TO LANDING GEAR AND SWITCHES
TO
L18A20 NAVIGATION THROTTLE WARNING t- G15A20
LIGHTS 3 UP Im
L19A20
G44A20 ~--3 RH
G57A20 1
M5A20 G41A20
IC~ G57A20

I Q-LO 2
G43A20 G42A20 --t-
G42B20

M5B20 L50A20N
-L
ii L51A20 ---5
TO
ALTERNATOR
G32A20

L49A20 n 2 Im
G54F20 G41B20
6 RH
TO LANDING 1
O G54EZO G39A20
G40A20N
GEAR AND
B 7 3 r I 1 6 UP (B
THROTTLE
G39A20 -f G39B20
WARNING NOSE
i~f 18 G25A20 7 1 I I I---~C- G48B20 G48A20
5

G53A20

G5jD20 191~1 T I I I I t-~t- G51B20~G51A20

M4A20G55C20
G55B20 10
m G50B20 6

DWN
oL7
I G45A20
LE FT RIGHT NOSE G55A20 G36A20 2
HAND HAND G38A20 -t- G38 B20
3B20
r /i m
G G
G45820
L L NOSE
IN 1
118 TRANSIT
I, G37A20N

G54B20 G54A20 3 m
G3 6A20 G36B20
G54D20 G54C20 LH

G47 820 -C G47A20

SWITCH TYPE CIRCUIT BREAKER I I I I I I i G57A20 G26B20
Z 4
INO G50B20 t G50A20

.54F20 I 1 /5
-L
6DWN
Gear And Throttle Warn Circuit 1
1. Landing
Breaker G3;3A20
G6C20 2
2. Navigation Lights Circuit Breaker G32B20
~h G32A20
3. Landing Gear Position Circuit Breaker
4. Warn Lights Test Switch I I I
5. Warn Lights Dim Relay
TOLANDING 2 Im
GEAR I I L+- G33B20
6. Landing Gear Position Lights LH
7. Gear In Transit Light L---- G54E20 1
G26A20N
8. Terminal Board
3
9. Terminal Board m G25A20 r,25B20
10. Diode
11. Dim Resistor 5
12. RH Gear "Up" Lock Switch I G46 B20 G46A20

13. RH Gear "Down" Lock Switch 4

14. Nose Gear "Up" Lock Switch G49 B20 G49A20
15. Nose Gear "Down" Lock Switch 1 6
16. LH Gear "Up" Lock Switch
17. LH Gear "Down" Lock Switch DwN
G33-369-92
18. Relay
LANDING GEAR POSITION INDICATOR
Model G33 (CD-1255 thru CD-1304)
Model F33A (CE350 thru CE-612)
Model F33C (CJ-31 thru CJ-104) 07
6-64B
 NOTE: CIRCUIT SHOWN WITH
AIRCRAFT ON GROUND
AND THROTTLE
CLOSED
TO LANDING GEAR

POSITION
INDICATORG47B20
G46B20
r-l) o
rG48B20
NC
OPEN G53A20

azo
-I
RE;F
NO~ IcloA12--)
CLOSE GllA12--~ GEARLANDING
61 G18P20r AIR1
N
L X COM
G1 5A20
G18B20 --e-
G18C20
P r NC

GND
G13B20
G28A20N

G13A20
G27A20
I. Landing Gear and Throttle Warning Circuit Breaker
2. Throttle Control Switch UP
3. Flasher

-Ca´• 4. Landing Gear Safety Switch

5. Landing Gear Warning Horn
8. Landing Gear Control Switch
DOWN

G33-369-80

LANDING GEAR AND THROTTLE WARNING

Model F33(CD-1235 thru CD-1254)
Model G33(CD-1255 thru CD-1289)
Model F33A(CE-290 thru CE-547 except CE-545 and CE-546)
Model F33C(CJ-26 thru CJ-68 except CJ-62 thru CJ-66)
66 6-646
 NOTE: CIRCUIT SHOWN WITH
AIRPLANE ON GROUND
AND THROTTLE CLOSED

LANDING GEAR AND

THROTTLE WARNING
TO
CIRCUIT BREAKER
LANDING GEAR
POSITION
INDICATOR
THROTTLE

G17A20-- ~- - G53APLG52A20
5A
CONTROL
SWITCH

OPEN G15A1-0
NC O

CLOSED

NOG18A20 REFrLANDINGGEA~-

G69A 1 2------j
I
FLASHER
f"""G68B12---/
G27A2o
XG18B20---~-----G18C20
RSQUAT
SWITCH

I__ ____1
L

G28AZON

I
G13B20

CISXIU

LANDING
DN ´•6~-
LANDING GEAR
GEAR
WARNING
CONTROL
L J
HORN
F33-369-319

LANDING GEAR AND THROTTLE WARNING

Model F33A (CE-545 thru CE-612 except CE-547)
Model F33C (CJbP thru CJ-66, CJ-69 thru CJ-74 and
cJ-n thru CJ-104)

C7 6-65
33-590011-10/11

(El
0--~-------- P14I318
r T
I ~y I

P15A4 1^G F

TO POWER
DISTRIBUTION

T 1.
2.
Generator Circuit Breaker
Voltage Regulator
PllA6 3. Generator Switch
4. Generator

5A
P14A18

P10A4
P15A4

BFG

F33369-93

GENERATOR (35A)
Model F33

6-66 Issued: August, 1971

 PgCIB
II _L
P
S-16 S
-1(IA- pgA1B

ck IF

A-16---~---1 )A

GND-16

TO POWER F-
DISTRIBUTION
It~ A+

rp 1 1A4---- 60A--- P10A6

*P~1A6 P10A18

~I
G33

1. Alternator Field Circuit Breaker

2. Alternator Switch
9. Voltage Regulator
4. Alternator
5. Capacitor
6. Alternator Circuit Breaker

033-38479

ALTERNATOR (Optional)
Model 933 (CD-1235 thru 00-1254)
Model 033 (CD-1255 thru 091-1279 except CD-1276

6-66A
Is~ued: December. 1972
 P9C18
_L
P
S
--5A-P9A18

ch F-16---~--I IF

A-16

i
GND-16
A

TO POWER F’

DISTRIBUTION
A+

T Pl1A4 --60A----P10A6
tP11AG I P10A18

71
G33

i. Alternator Field Circuit Breaker

2. Alternator Switch
3. Voltage Regulator
4. Alternator
5. Capacitor
6. Alternator Circuit Breaker

G35369-105

ALTERNATOR
Model 033 (CD-1276, CD-1280 thru CD-1304)

6-660 CQ
 t P5B4
PllA4 80A P10A4
REF: r r
POWER L_ __J

DISTRIBUTION

BRIGHT DIM TEST SIGNAL

IP
1342

SIGNAL
51 OUT
n
BLACK ´•t~
m
P19A20,,~(r
I~-P19B20 r_ RED
GROUNDSIGNAL
IB1
P20A20f IN

5A
PI I
PI
t M5A2"
M5B20

I rM4A20N
i;t~l L6B20 -----i
TO FUEL
SELECTOR
LIGHT

L51A20
L
P16B20

r-l

P16A20
5A
m
5A -L’ g P10~
AUX
Fl
P9A20 L50A20N F2 ~L
EJ TO LANDING GEAR
-L
POSITION INDICATOR 5---- L49A20

A P14A16

B
I P12A20
3A
P13B20
OFF P13A20
I
v

C I- P17A20N
I J,
ON
m
r
F33n´•3sossn

1. Bus
2. Alternator Field Circuit Breaker
3. Navigation Lights Circuit Breaker
4. Alternator Out Circuit Breaker
5. Alternator Circuit Breaker
6. Alternator
7. Alternator Master Switch
8. Fuse
9. Overvoltage Relay
10. Low Voltage Sensor
11. Alternator Out Light
12. Warning Light dim Relay
13. Diode
14. Warning Lights Switch
15. Resistor
16. Capacitor

ALTERNATOR
Model F33A (CE-290 thru CE-481)

c3 6´•6’
 I
PllA4 80A P10A4
I

A
BRIGHT DIM TEST SIGNAL

1 3 4 2
P19A20

ha;
SIGNAL
P18A20-+GREEN
P9A20 M5A20 51 OUT
IPJ n

P1BB20
1_ BLACK´•tOGROUNDSIGNAL
I
P20A20
fRED IN

P16B20

P19C20P20B20Q8A20
M4A20N
L51A20
P16A20

m
I
TO FUEL BOOST LIGHT P10A4

F1AUX
L50A20N F2 ~L
R psnlo ~NDINGGE*R
I
POSITION INDICATOR ~-L49A20
P14A20
A

B P12A20
3A
P13B20
OFF. P13A20
I
C C- P17A20N
1_ I P
ON

1. Bus
2. Alternator Field Circuit Breaker
3. Navigation Lights Circuit Breaker
4. Door and Alternator Out Circuit Breaker
5. Alternator Circuit Breaker
6. Alternator
7. Alternator Master Switch
8. Fuse
9. Overvoltage Relay
10. Low Voltage Sensor
11. Alternator Out Light
12. Warning LightDim Relay
13. Diode
14. Warning Lights Switch
15. Resistor
16. Capacitor

ALTERNATOR
´•Model F33C (CJ-26 thru CJ-51)

6-68 Cg
 P5B4
PllA4 80A P10A4
1) r
REF:
POWER m
DISTRIBUTION

10

SIGNAL
51 OUT
n
BLACK GROUND
I a--P19
SIGNAL
P19A20 RED
f M

R:~EJ5A
.I- t-M5A20

I
(~ii 16B20

TO FUEL
SELECTOR
LIGHT
P20A20

P1OCSO

P20B20
asnzo

L51A20
L
P16B20

r:
lgi
P16A20
112 W

"Bcao
~L
5A
m
EF
OFF
,IEl 1_1
5A P9A20
P10A4
TO FUEL BOOST AUX
3-;
LIGHT
Fl
L50A20N F2
P9B20 TO LANDING GEAR
POSITION INDICATOR
L4BA20 -L
I P14A16
P13A20
P12A20 ~Arl P13A20
I
I
i’´•7
B
m
C
P17A20N
1.
F33A´•369´•107B

CJ-52 AND AFTER ONLY

CE-489 AND AFTER EXCEPT
CE-511 AND CE-512
CJ´•52 AND AFTER

1. Bus
2. Alternator Field Circuit Breaker
3. Navigation Lights Circuit Breaker
4. Alternator Out Circuit Breaker
5. Alternator Circuit Breaker
6. Alternator
7. Alternator Master Switch
8. Fuse
9. Overvoltage Relay
10. Low Voltage Sensor
11. Alternator Out Light
12. Warning Light dim Relay
13. Diode
14. Warning Lights Switch
15. Resistor
16. Capacitor

,ALTERNATOR
IModel F33A (CE482 thru CE-612)
IModel F33C (CJ-52 thru CJ-104)
07 6-68A
 10
ALTERNATOR

T
L6B20

LI

d
,u,,

SELECTOR
LIGHT

~33-369-313

FUEL SELECTOR LIGHT

Model F33A (CE-290 thru CE-464)
Model F33C (CJ-26 thru CJ-51)

TO
ALTERNATOR

L6B20

WHITE WHITE

FUEL

IIL6C20N9 SELECTOR

LIGHT

L6A20N

I f33-369-312

FUEL SELECTOR LIGHT

Model 5334 (CE-465 thru CE-612)
Model F33C (CJ-52 thru CJ-104)

6´•68B C7
 ~1 LI
H14A10 ~f HljAlO Ii
H25A10

1~ ’r
I
H17A14 C

H18A14 D

H19A14 E

I I F
H21A14
II~
I I
I I A
I

H23A14hT
H22A14
V358-369-42
A’"

B H20A14
bl,
r~
C
H16A14N1 2. .1ret m A Prop Deice Circuit Breaker

v 3. Connector
4. Tirnel´•
5. Slip Ring Assenlblg
6. Deice Boot
\L\ 7. Brush Dlocle
8. Bus

PROPELLER DEICE (THREE BLADED)

Models F33, G33, F33A and F33C

r P IEl
LH25A10I H14A10H15A10 B

1 H17A14 C

H18A14 D

H19A14 1’ "E

H21A14 F

H23A14N

B C- H20A14 1 V358´•369-43

Y I (A ~-H22A14
c ~H16A16N
i. Prop Deice Circuit Breaker
2. Ammeter
3. Connector
4. Timer
5. Slip Ring Assembly
6. Deice Boot
(P 7. Brush Block
8. Bus

PROPELLER DEICE (TWO BLADED)

Models F33, G33, F33A and F33C

Issued: 6-69
Au~ust, 1971
 5A

E5A20

c Bg-- E41A20
E31A20N
E40A20N
1. ~L
E32A20

TO OIL TEMP

GROUND THE FOLLOWING INSTRUMENT WIRES

V358-369-47
AT A SINGLE POINT: E31A20N (CYLINDER HEAD),
E42A20N AND E44A20N (FUEL OUANTITY). DO
NOT GROUND ANY OTH ER WIRES AT TH IS POINT.

i. Cylinder Head and Oil Temperature Circuit Breaker

2. Cylinder Head, OilTemperature, and Oil Pressure Indicator
3. Cylinder Head Temperature Transmitter Bulb

CVLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE INDICATOR

Models F33, G33, F33A (CE-290 thru CE-349) and F33C

6- 70 Issued: September, 1971

 YY

3A20
5A

E41A20

5 C--------E40A20

6 L67A20 TO ENGINE INSTRUMENT LIGHTS

GROUND THE FOLLOWING INSTRUMENT WIRES

AT A SINGLE POINT: E31A20N (OIL
TEMPERATURE), E39A20N (CYLINDER HEAD
TEMPERATURE), E42A20N AND E44A20N (FUEL
OUANTITY). DO NOT GROUND ANY OTHER
WIRES AT THIS POINT.

i. Breaker 35-369-73
2. Cylinder Head Temperature Indicator
3. Cylinder Head Temperature Tranrmitter

CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE INDICATOR (Vertical Instruments)

Model F33A (CE-350 thru CE-408)

Issued: December, 1972 6- 704

 5A

E5A20

P
j~ _8~_ E41AZD ---I TO CYL HD TEM~

E31A20N

E32A20

I~

E33A20N

I
i. Cylinder Head and Oil Temperature Circuit Breaker
2. Cylinder head, OilTemperature, and Oil Pressure Indicator
3. Oil Temperature Transmitter Bulb

GROUND THE FOLLOWING INSTRUMENT WIRES

AT A SINGLE POINT: E31A20N (CYLINDER HEAD),
E42A20N AND E44A20N (FUEL OUANTITY). DO
NOT GROUND ANY OTH ER WI R ES AT THIS POINT.

01L TEMPERATU 11 E I ND ICATO R

Model F33 (CD-1235 thru CD-1254)
Model G33 (CD-1255 thru CD-1304)
Model F33A (CE´•290 thru 65-349)
Model F33C (CJ-26 thru CJ-51)
6- 700 r Cg
 *C
E35*20N TJIA?ON
_r I

1 I I I 1

2 -----l L-~-- 1
I- E34A20 E5A20 2

3 E36A20 J

4 E37A20 E32A20 4

5 E38A20 7 1 I I r E33A20 5

6 I I I I I 1
1 I 6

El
L68A20
L69A20

WHITI lsD BLPICK

1Ljl
L~ To Eneine lnrtrument
i. Cir~uit Breoker
Lighi~
2. Oil Preriure Indirator
3. Oil Temperature Indirotor
4. Oil Preirure Tranrmi~)er
5. Oil Temperature 35-369-74

*Y
GROUND THE FOLLOWING INSTRUMENT WIRES
AT A SINGLE POINT: E31A20N (OIL
TEMPERATURE), E30A20N (CYLINDER HEAD
TEMPERATURE), E42A20N AND E44A20N (FUEL
QUANTITY). DO NOT GROUND ANY OTHER
WIRES AT THIS POINT.

OIL TEMPERATURE AND OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR (Verticel Instruments)

Model F33A (CE-350 thru CE-408)

Issued: December, 1972 6´• 700

 CYLINDER HEAD

IEl 5Agi
ESA10
AND 011 TEMP
CIRCUIT BREAKER

INST POWER 1

t~e CYL HEAD TEMP

INIT OlaUND I? --II I
TRANSMITTER BULB

CYL HEAD TEMP 3

OIL TEMP 4
E4OA29N

E31A20
I
OIL TEMP
TRANSMITTER
BULB

E33A20N
1.
1( ~OROUND THE FOLLOWING INSTRUMENT WIRES
AT A SINGLE POINT: ESIA1ON (CYLINDER HEAD),
E42A29N AND E44A20N (FUEL QUANTITIJ. DO
NOT GROUND ANY OTHER WIRES AT THIS POINT.

F33R388299

CYLINDER HEAD AND OIL TEMPERATURE INDICATOR

Model F33A (CE-409 thru CE-612)
Model F33C (CJ-52 thru CJ-104)
C7
6-70D
 I

E7A20

I I
E27A20N

BLACK

3 C~---------E30A20

4 C--------E29A20 RED

s ~----E28A20

L70A20 L---e WHITE

TO ENGINE INSTRUMENT
LIGHTS

i. Ciriuit Breokor
2. Manifold Pre~rure IndiIo,or
3. Manifold Prariure
35-369-72

MANIFOLD PRESSURE INDICATOR (Vertical Instruments)

Model F33A (CE-350 thru CE-408)

6-70E
Issued: December,l972
33-590011-10/15

E9A20

a I i
E26A20N

BLACK

32 E23AZO_i El
4 C----F24426 ,R

5 ~---------E25A20

L71A20 WHITE

L
TOENGINEINSTRUMENT
LIGHTS

i. Circuit Breoker
2. Fuel Flow Indico,or 35-369-71
3. Fuel Flow Tranrducer

FUEL FLOW INDICATOR (Vertical Instruments)

ModelF33A (CE-350 thru CE-408)

6-70 5 Issued: December, 1972

 IE22A20N

2 EllA20
I’
I
4 BLACK

1 111 !1; I )El

L72A20

WHITE

TOENOINEINSTRUMENT
LIGHTS

I. Circuit Breaker
2. Tachometerlndicator
3. Tachometer Pickup Probe 35-3~9-77

TACHOMETER (Vertical Instruments)

Model F33A (CE-350 thru CE-385)
6-706
Issued: December, 1972
33-590011-10/15

IEZZAZON

2’ Ell*20

I
4 BLACK

1 III ill IIP

L72LL20

_1 i
WH17E
(I

TOENGINEINSTRVMENT
LIGHTS

i. Cirtuif Breok~r
2.
3. Ta~hom´•tsr PiIkup Probe 35-369-77~
4. Rerir,or

TACHOMETER (Vertical Instruments)

Model F33A (CE-386 thru CE-408)

0-70H Issued: December, 1972

 i. Indicator REPLACEMENT PARTS
2. Thermocouple Harness MUST BE IDENTICAL
RED TANOR
3. Thermocouple Probe OR ENTIRE UNIT

t’YELLOWi
MUST BE REPLACED

RED TANOR
YELLOW

V35´•369´•33

EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE

Model F33 (CD-1235 ti~ru Cr13-1254)
Model G33 (CD-1255 thru 00-1904)
Model F33A (CE-290 thru CE-349, CE-409 thru CE-G1P)
Model F33C (cJ-ns thru CJ-104)

r45a2ou

I
´•C~---- YELLOW 3

RED 1 9

INITIIVMINT

REPLACEMENT PARTS
MUST BE IDENTICAL
OR ENTIRE UNIT MUST
BE REPLACED. i. EOT Indito,or
2. EGT Bulb

35-369-70

EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE INDICATOR (Vertical Instruments)

Model F33A (CE-350 thru CE-408)

c7 6-701
 15A-eL25A14(01
L25814

L27A14N L26A14N

I i

i. Rotating Beacon Circuit Breaker

2. Upper Rotating Beacon
3. Lower Rotating Beacon

ROTATING BEACON
Models F33, G33, F33A and F33C

6´•71
Issued: September, 1971
33´•ti900n;lC/15

PI il´•´•
6la.o-
L38A20~II
L23A20

L8A20
L15A20

1
L29A20 WHITE

1
BLACK
IP

L104A20 L8B20
L105A20N 10
1
L29B20N

L104B203
4

i OPTIONALoLO
.b"’" L8C20

L10A1ON L42A20 --O

f
L1OB2ON

-L L31A20

L32A20

III1 P
L41A20 ---O

L32B20
L31B20

10~--´• OPTIONAL
v
I
I
‘i,
i. Cabin and Map Lights Circuit Breaker
2´•Compass and OAT Light Switch
3. OAT Light
4. Glareshield Connector
5. Compass Light
6. Cabin Light Switch
7. Cabin Light
8. Reading Light Switch
9. Reading Light
10. Map Light Switch
11. Map Light V358-369-50

CABIN AND MAP LIGHTS

Model F33 (CD-1235 thru CD-125Q)
Model F33A (CE-290 thru CE-349)
Model F33C (CJ-l thru CJ-30)
6-72 ~ssued: December, 1972
 eLa~
WHITE -I

GREEN
T I I SWITCH

L23A20
t-~ BLACK
I v- --v

C30A18N
CONTROL WHEEL
-L COILED CORD m

L38A20

I L29A20

C-L104B20
L29szoi~

i
L15A20

-C
L104A2043
L105A2ON L105B2ON

L100A20

L100B20i"lL101A20N THIRD SEAT L10!B20N

I

READING LIGHT

´•-I~- L107A20

L100C20 L101C20N

FOURTH SEAT
1. Cabin and Map Lights Circuit Breaker

READING LIGHT
2. Cabin Lights S\c~itch
3. Light

´•-I~- L108A20
4.
5.
8.
Reading Light Switch
Reading Light
Coiled Cord
7. Light Switch
8. Glareshield Connector
L101~20N 9. Compass Light
10. OAT Indicator Light
L100D20 1L Map Light
FIFTH

SEAT(OPTIONAI,)
READING I.IGHT

Llosazo

SWITCH 031´•P(991

CABIN AND MAP LIGHTS

Model F33 (CD-1255 thru CD-1304)
Model F33A (CE-350 thru CE-469)
Model 6336 (CJ´•31 thru CJ-51)

66 6-72A
 IG1
eLn
L’

GRffN
T i I SWITCH

L23AZO I
t--~--;-- BLACK
I
C30A18N

1. m

L38~10
[P

i.’ L29BZON

P _rLlosa20N
E3 L105520N
lPf
_41

L100A20

LIOIA20N
O-L
L

THIRDSEAT LIOI~ZON
READING LIGHT

0--L’O’A20

C11
LIWCIO L101C20N
1. Cabin and Ma), Lightr Circuit Breaker
FDURTH SEAT 2 Cabin Lights Scvic~h
READING LIGH7 3´• Cabin Light
4. Reading Light Switch
5. Aeabing
6. Coiled Cor~
L ~OBA20
O-- 7´• Light SWifCh
8. Clarerhield Connector

L100020
1P It. Map Light
L101020N

READING LIGH’T
(OPTIONAL~

I I
O--L

SWITCH

SIXTH SEAT
REI\DING LIGHS
LIO(E10N
iap´•rlov~rl

0-- L11OA20

Falas~eln

CABIN ANB MAP LIGHTS

Model F33A (CE-360 thru CE-612)
Model F33C (CJ91 th~u CJ-104)

6´•728 C7
 TO ELECTROLChlINOUS
PANEL LIGHTS OPTIONAL
L33A20

L6A20
L33B20L35A20N
L34A20

tL6B20
L6G20L6C20
L6F20
L21A20N L6E20

z
1Lslnzo g

L2B20 L2C20 L2D20 ------7~-- L2E20

-I -I
L21B20N --O

le
L2F20

L2G20

i. Flood Lights Circuit Breaker

2. Dim Contro~Rheostat
3. Dim Control Tranaistor
4. Trim Tal, Light
5. L,,d,,, Gear Visual Li~ht
fj~ Fuel Select Light
7. Clr,ck Light (Optional) 35369109

8. I;lareshic´•ld Connectot
y~ C;larc:shield Flood’Ligtis

INSTRUMENT FLOOD LIGHTS

Model F33 (CD-1235 thru CD-1254)
Model F33A (05-290 thru 05-349)
Model F33C (CJ-26 thru CJ-30)

C1 6-72C
 III

TO ELECTROLUMINOUS
PANEL LIGHTS OPTIONAL
L33A20

’$L33B20L35A20N
L6A20
L34A20 --t-)

L6C20
L6G20
L6F20
L103A20N
L6D20
PI
2 1

L102B20 L102C20 L102MO0 L102E20

-I -I
L103B20N--0

I-
L102F20

L102G20

i. Flood Lights Circuit Breaker

2. Dim Control Rheostat
;3. Dim Control Transistor
4. Trim Tab Light
5. Landing Gear Visual Light B
6. Not Used vn~a-369-51
7. Not Used
8. Glareshield Connector
9. Glareshield Flood Lights

INSTRUMENT FLOOD LIGHTS

Model G33 (CD-1255 thru CD-1304)
Model F33A (05-350 thru CE-469)

6-72[) 63
 ´•gsA
L33A20

IIlii
t------ L33 B20
C-20

B-20 L34A20 81
L35A20N

E-20

L6A20

t_-L~6C20
~T1 L103A20N
L102A20
L6F20

ti:
L6D20
81 B
2 1

L102B20 L102C20 L102C20

-I
L103B20N-O

---L-

L102C20

L102C20

1. Flood Lights Circuit Breaker

2. Dim Control Rheostat
3. Dim Control Transistor
4. Trim Tab Light
5. Landing Gear Visual LigM 88
6. Not Used
v35e3as-54s
7. Not Used
8. Glareshield Connector
9. Glareshield Flood Lights

INSTRUNIENT FL000 UGHTS

Yodel F33A (CE470 thru CE-612)
Model F33C (CJ-52 thru CJ-104)

6-73
C7
 43A20
5A

L45*?ON
I
L44A20

LTSA20---4 10 RADIO LIGHTS

L43120
V
L1)4 820 -3- 8L*CK ~--WHITE--t-- LB6R

CL84A2 TO OPTIONAL
ENGINE
INSTRUMENT
/O 01
ENGINE
GAGE
POST LIGHTS

ILACK~
L80A20
O
10
OPTIONALFL)OHT )O 0/
yL80A20´• ---i MANIFOLD
INSTRUMENT
ucnrs
I
L801)

LACK WHITE

00
1 TACHOMETER
OMNI 1 OMNI 2

~LICK WHITE

O O
LH FUEL
QUANTITI

8LACK----I ~--------WHIIE
-L-L

lo oi
RH FULL
OUANTITY

I)LACK WHITE

O O
r,,,,,.,
i. Rodio ond Lighll Cirruil ~r´•oL´•r

i. Din, Con)rollh´•ol,~t
A’MMETER
i. DilnlControl Irclnli~)or

4. Omni Lioh,l
5. 181481 Liph,~
6. 611 No. 3

1. 8ur No. 4 OMNI LIGHTS CONNECTED TO FLIGHT INSTRUMENT

DIMMING WHEN OPTIONAL IIIOH1INS’IIUM1NI
LIGHTS INSTALLED
OU-38986A

ENGINE INSTRUMENT WEDGE LIGHTS

Model F33 (CD-1235 thru CD-1254)
Model G33 (CD-1255 thru CD-1394)
r Model F33A (CE-290 thru CE-349)
Model F33C (CJ´•26 thru CJ-51)
6=/4
1 03
 I
~L46A20-ITO FLIGHT INSTRUMENT LIGHTS

d ~L----L44A20 OMNI II

1145*20Nf.OFF L43820

L80B20

L44A3c
L84A20
L80A20
OMNI I
ENGINE
MIXTURE
oaor
El CONTROL
AMMETER

RH FUEL LI ~.PIOP
QUANTITy r II ANTI-ICE
I
PRESSURE ~J \.LHFUEL
QVANTITY

i. 8ur No.l

2. Bur No.l
TP´•CHOM(TER EI 9. Po~t Light
4. Omni Lighfr
L84B20
OMNIINDICIIOR LIGHTS *II
CONNECTED TO FLIGHT
INSTRUMENT LIGHT CIRCUIT
IF OPTIONAL FLIGHT INSTRUMENT
LIGHTS ARE INSTALLED

G33-369´•84 A

ENGINE INSTRUMENT POST LIGHTS

Models F33, G33. F33A (CE-290 thru CE-349) and F33C

Issued: September, 1971

6-74 A
 ;I
j (I,
P o
m o

!L.
o

vl
WHEN OPTIONAL FLIGHT INSTRUMENT DIMMING IS INSTALLED.
CONNECT 180420 TO THAT DIMMING TRANSISTOR

143A20

m
8z
n-O
Z
m
L45A20N
z
I
-I
c,
mn
bC L44A20

8"L~3:20
r,2

6n
CoV1
I

MANUAL PRESSURE I
L70A20
38nl0W
I v Y L75A20------j RADIO LIGHTS

OIL PIESSURI’ LbBe~20 h ro oprloua~

L73820
B C L80A20- j FLIGHT INSTRUMENT
O DIMMING
TACHOMETER L72A20

OIL TEMP F-- L69P~202? L73C20 LB0A20

r FUEL FLOW I L71AZ

AMMETER 5-- L64A

L73D20
EGT L74A20

1- Cir~uit Bre.ker
LH FUEL OUANTITYI L65A20 L80820
2. Rheos,~t-Rodio ~nd Engine Instrument Dimming
r
3. Tr.nsir~or-R.dio end Engine Instrument Dimming
g cr~t.ora HEAD TEMP Lb7b~2O--7 L73:20 4. lerirtor-En9inF Inrtrumlnl Lightl
5. Omni Indi~otor Lights
CJ
a R H FUEL OUANTITY

OMNI II
O

35-369-76

(O

h)
 L43A20
54

L45A20N

L44A20

L75*10-----~ TO RADIO LIGHTS

L43B20
LB4820 --f- BLACK ---I t--
WHITE -t- LB6B20N

CL84A2
TO OPTIONAL
ENGINE
INSTRUMENT
’Jo ol
EPIOINE
GAGE
POST LIGHTS

~LACK WHITE
LBDA2D

FLIGHT
´•ool
00
/--~801420´•-- INSTRUMENT MANIFOLD
AND
L1OHTS FUELPRES URE
LBOI

BLACK WHITE

´•L~1I
00
TACHOMETER
OMNI 1 OMNI 2

ACK WHITE

00
LH FUEL
OUANTITY

BLACK WHITE

00
RH FUEL
OVANTITY

BLACK WHITE

Liphti Cirruit k´•a~´•r lo

O oi
O L86A20N

r
I. Rodio ond Inilrum´•nt

2. Dim Control Rhooitot AMME~ER

3. Dim Control Tron,iitor

Omni Lighh
5. Wodp´• Ligh,i

n CONNECTI~ TO TuOn7 INlrRUMPNT

DIMMING WHEN OPTIONAL FLIGHT INSTRUMENT
LIGHTS INSTALLED
033-38985A

ENGINE INSTRUMENT WEDGE LIGHTS

Model F33A (CE-409 thru CE-474)

c3 6-74C
 RADIO AND
INSTRUMENT LIGHTS
h
L43A20 CIRCUIT BREAKER
54

DIM CONTROL
RHEOSTAT

L45A20N
I
L44A20

L4:1ZO
8-20 TO OPTIONAL ENGINE
_ _ ____
L84A20---- -I
INSTRUMENT POST LIGHTS

DIM CONTROL ~LACKWHITE

TRANSISTOR E-1D

ENGINE
GAGE

LIOA20

~g, ’U
yL80A10--- INSTRUMENT MANIFOLD
AND
LIOHIS FUELrRES U~E

WHITE

BU
TACHOMETER
OMNII OMNI1

WHITE

Bt~
LH FUEL
OUINIITI

~L*CK WHITE
INSTRLIGHTS 71

Btfi
L84~10

RH FUEL
OUANTITI

LIGHT GND 8 L86B10N

1. Radio and Inltrul´•nt Li(lhll Clr~uil

1. Dir Con,rollh´•ol,at

5. Ois Control Tranciltor

4. Olnni Light,

5. Rul No. 3

i. .ul No. m I´•LIOHT INSTIUMINI

DIMMING WHEN OPTIONAL FLIGHT INSTRUMENT
Inttrula´•nt Clu~(´•r
LIGHTS INSTILLED
G33YB86C

ENGINE INSTRUMENT LIGHTS

Model F33A (CE-470 thru CE-612)
Model F33C (CJ-52 thru CJ-104)

6-741) r
C7
 BLACK -------7 WHITE
I I

100(P
CLOCK

BLACK ------1 WHITE

IOOI’
AIR SPEED

BLACK ----------------1 WHITE

P
to o(
GYRO HORIZON

BLACK
I
00 7´•
ALTIMETER

BLACK I---------------- WHITE

I I

(O OIY
ADF

BLACK -------1 WHITE

I-L

IOO/II
TURN COORDINATOR

BLACK -------I WHITE

10 0(’
DIRECTIONAL GYRO

BLACK ------------7 WHITE

rL1-l 01 L82820N

100 LBZA20N
L12B20 VERTICAL SPEED
1-

BLACK rWHITE

~L1
O
3
L82CZON
L6F20Lb020
LI?~?O
L12A20

I
AIR PRESSURE L12A20

I
L12P20

TO RADIO AND
b´
L30A20N
L
INSTRUMENT LIGHTS
1. Wedge Lighl
2. Bur No. 1
3. Bur No. 2 033-369-86
4. Flop Pori~ion
5. Trim 70b Light
6. Lending Gear ViruaI Light
7. Clo~k

FLIGHT INSTRUMENT WEDGE LIGHTS (OPTIONAL

Model F33(CD-1235 thru CD´•1254)
Mofel G33 (CD-1255 thru CD-1304)
Model F33A (CE-290 thru CE-469)
Model F33C (CJ-26 thru CJ-52)
63 6-746
 LBOA20 LBOBZO

BLACK -------I I WHITE

(OO/Y
CLOCK

I
BLACK WHITE

ri-fl II
,oo,
AIR SPEED

BLACK WHITE

r-Lcs g
too,
OYRO HORIZON

BLACK ------1 WHITE

lo01Y
AL71ME7IR

BLACK WHITE

-1--I- II
,oo,
ADF

BLACK --´•-----------------´•I WHITE

I L.

loo18
_

TURN COORDINATOR

BLACK ------T WHITE

to ol’
DIRECTIONAL GYRO

BLACK I------ WHITE

LB1B20N

O OIY
LB2A10N
VERIICIL SPEED -L
L121)20

L1?D

i;h
~LUE

Il
oI)LACK---t-- WHITE
3
LB?C?DN
-L L12C20
L6F20

~-C6020b
UZA20
AlR PRESSURE

’~IP bl
L90*20

LllC20
L30A20N

I. W´•dp´• Li~ht 6. L~ndinl O´•.r Vilu.l Liph)

2. Bui No. 1 7. ClocL
tC
L46820
2
,I
3.
4.
Bui No. 2
Flop Poii(ion
8.
9.
Dimminp Troniiilor
Rh´•oila)
I
L45A20N
b L46A20-p~´•’
5. Tiim Tab Li(lh( 10. Radio and In~trum´•n, I L44A20
Lighle Cirruil I)r´•o~´•r rC~
11. Omni fndicator Lamp, TO ENGINE
12. Conltol Wh´•´•l CIDIL Poll Li~ht
G3338886C INSTRUMENT LIGHTS
13. Cobl´•

FLIGHT INSTRUMENT WEDGE LIGHTS (OPTIONAL)

Model F33A (CE-470 thru CE-612)
Model F33C (CJ-53 thru CJ-104)

6´•74F C7
 RADIO AND INSTRUMENT
LIGHTS CIRCUIT BREAKER
43*20
54

L4SA20N
I
L44A20

L75*20 r0 1~DIO LIOHrl

R~ I r

I49810 V V
L84Pi?0
13BUI NO. 3 BUS NO 4
I
L84BZO~BLACK------, ~--WHITI---t--qa6elON

LIGHTSB
CL84A1 lo ol
WEDGE

TO OPTIONAL
ENGINE ENGINE
INSTRUMENT GAGE
POST LIGHTS

BLACK---7 ~-----WHlrC
-L-L
LB0A10

L~ TO OPTIONAL
FLIGHT
To~ol
yL80A20- -j INSTRUMENT
MANIFOLD
AND FUEL
LIGHTS
PRESSURE
LB0B20

OMNI LIGHTS
BLACK WHITE

ek ~D
oO
TACHOMETER
OMNI 1 OMNI 2

BLACK WHITE

00
LH FUEL
OUANTITY

BLACK WHITE

00
RH FUEL
OVANTITY

BLACK---7

B
L84820 lo ol LB6AZON

AMMfTER r
INSTR LTS 7

GND 8 L86B20N

II´•´•I´•l
INSTRUMENT
n ,O ,,,,,r INIIRVMINr
DIMMING WHEN OPTIONAL FLIGHT INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
LIGHTS INSTALLED
F33A´•369´•298

OPTIONAL INTERNALLY LIT INSTRUMENTS

Model F33A (CE-409 thru CE-474)

C1 6-746
 RADIO AND INSTRUMENT
LIGHTS CIRCUIT BREAKER
L43A20
54

L45A20N
-L
L44A20

L43B20
I L84A20 TO OPTIONAL ENGINE
INSTRUMENT POST LIGHTS
8-20

O BUI NO. 3 .US NO. 4

P
CONTROL L84A20 --L~--L84B20 --t- BLACK--, WHITE--´•t--086820N

C-20DIM
TRANSISTOR
WEDGE
-1-I-

LIGHTS"rool
E-20 I ENGINE
GAGE

BLACK WHITE

LBOA20

d r0 OPrlDNPII O O
FLIGHT
MANIFOLD
INSTRUMENT
AND FUEL
LIGHTS
PRESSURE
LB0B20

OMNI LIGHTS
BLACK WHITE

PI
00
TACHOMETER
OMNI 1 OMNI 2

BLACK WHITE

00
LH FUEL
OUANTITY

BLACK WHITE

Go
00o/
RH FUEL
OUANTITY

BLACK WHITE

LB4820 Cllo00
3 8bA20N

INSTR LTS 7
AMMETER r’
GND 8. LB6B20N

P ENGINF
INSTRUMENT
n
DIMMING WHEN OPTIONAL FLIGHT INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
LIGHTS INSTALLED
F33A-369-298A

OPTIONAL INTERNALLY LIT INSTRUMENTS

Model F33A (CE-475 thru CE-612)

6-74H 07
 -f TO INGIN~ INSTllUMENT LIGHTS

OFF
im
I
L45A20N

L46r20 b _L
0 1(7 L47A20

L12A20
L1282

TRIM TAB

AIR SPEED
*IrlmETra B I
TURN AND BANK

ADF

PRESSURE

CYRO I M I(*TI OF CLIMB B /I

HORIZON
FLAP POSITION

CLOCK LB0A20

DIREtTIONAL OYRO

i. BUS NO. 1
s~J180810
OMN12
P

2. BUS NO. 2 OMNII

3. POST LIGHT
4. RADIO AND INSTRUMENT LIGHT CIRCUIT BREAKER

5.RHEOSTAT

6. DIMMING TRANSISTOR G33´•368%31\

PLIGHT INSTRUMENT POST LIGHTS

Model P33 (CP1235 thru CP1254)
Model 433 (CP1255 thru CP1304)
Model F33A (CE-350 thru CE474)
Model F33C (CJ-l thru CJ-52)

07 6-74
 P

~--L46B20 L47A20

t i
8-20

-20

E-20

L12A20

L1282

TRIM TAB

~/ir
AiR SPEED
El I El alrlmrrra I El
TURN AND BANK

ADF

PRESSURE

M I O lbrs O, CLIMB /I El
HORIZON

FLAP POSITION

IEl
CLOCK ~LBOA20
’-r M
El ~rDl)rCTION4L GlsO

i. BVS NO.

2. BUS NO. 2
1LBOB20 OMN12
P

OMNII

3. POST LIGHT

4. RADIO AND INSTRUMENT LIGHT CIRCUIT BREAKER

S.RHEOSTAT G33-369-838

6. DIMMING TRANSISTOR

FLIGHT INSTRUMENT POST LIGHTS

Model F33A (05475 thru CE-612)
Model F33C (CJ-53 thru CJ-104)

07 6-75
 sA

TO INSTRUhIENT
FLOOD LIGHTS

L1A20

L4A20
L1B20j"
L3A20

L9A20N

REDi I
INVERTER

BLACK

L5A20

L5B20
I I

RED RED RED

LACK BLA BLA

RH
LH
CENTER CIRCUIT
SWITCH
PANEL BREAKER
PA~JEL
IP I I PANEL

V358369-’57

i. Flood Lights Circuit Breaker

2. Electroluminous Panel Lights Dim Transistor
3. Dim ControlRheostat
4. Inverter
5. Electroluminous Panel

ELECTROLUMINOUS PANEL LIGHTS

Model F33 (CD-1235 thru CD-1254)
Model G33 (CD-1255 thru CD-1304)
Model F33A (CE-290 thru CE-469)
Model F33C (CJ-26 thru CJ-51)

6-76 C3
 ´•~´•´•´•’´•-I
L1A20
TO INSTRUMENT
FLOOD LIGHTS

L4A20
PL1B20~´•
L3A20

L9A20N

I
INrER

L4B18N
RED-1L5AZO
BLACK

RED
i´• L5B20

’7"
RED
L5C20

I
RED
1 I
I BLACK BLACK BLACK L5F20N
L5D20N L5E20N

e: CENTER
RH
CIRCUIT
SWITCH
PANEL BR~AKER
PANEL
g I~ PANE L

V35B38957A

i. Flood Lights Circuit Breaker

2. Electroluminous Panel Lights Dim Transistor
3. Dim Control Rheostat
4. Inverter
5. Electroluminous Panel

ELECTROLUIIIIINOUS PANEL LIGHTS

Model F33A (CE-470 thru CE-612)
Model F33C (CJ-62 thru CJ-104)

C7 6-76A
 r DN

BLACK

YELLOW

clnzo-do---clnzo --/L BLUE

10A
20GAI B

BROWN

20GA C
I I,

VP

C7A20 L---------l

RED

C8A20

5~"TR
L~
61 I ILI
BLACK

F33-369´•94

i. Pitch Trim and Ignition

Boost Circuit Breaker
2. Control Column Coil Cord
3. Control Switch
4. Trim Actuator Assembly
5. Shunting Resistor
6. Speed Adjust Resistor
7. Pitch Trim Switch

ELEVATOR TRIM (OPTIONAL)

Model F33 (00-1235 thru CD-1254)
Model 033 (CD-1255 thru CD-1304)
Model F33A (CE-290 thru 05-469)
Model F33C (CJ-26 thru CJ-51)

6-766 63
 PI
WHT/BLK
_CC30*IBN El

I I ORN
r
C1A20 C1B20
10A
DN

YEL

20GA

i t
WHT/RED

C c

L UP

C7A20

RED

CBA2O i

)I)
IP
BLACK----------
____,,.,,, *.D *1711 ONLI
BLACK

1. Pitch Trim and Ignition Boort Circuit Brsoker

2. Control Column Coil Cord

3. Control Switch

4. Trim Actuotor Aiiemblv

5. Shunting R´•~i,)or (F33A)
6. Sp´•~d Adiuct Rerirtor (F33A)
7. Pitch Trim Switch

ELEVATOR TRIM
Model f33A (CE-470 thru 06-612)
~Hodel F33C (CJ-52 thru CJ-104)

07 6-77
33-590011-1C/11

T’
8(5A

C20A20

C21P20 8
C23A20
C24A20N

OFF
1
BLACK WHITE

oio

OFF
V35369-60

i. Avionics Bus
2. Constant Copilot Solenoid Valve
3. Constant Copilot Switch
4. Constant Copilot Wheel Switch
5. Constant Copilot Autopilot Circuit Breaker

CONSTANT COPILOT (OPTIONAL)

Models F33, G33, F33A and F33C
6-78
Issued: August, 197 1
 33-590011-10/12

BLANK PAGE

Issued: September, 1971 6- 78A

 SWITCH TYPE
CIRCUIT BREAKER

10A

L76A18

BLACK
RED
I
CABLE ASSEMBLY

B
RED

WHITE

BLACK
~_ ~hvi
~I WING LAMP

CABLE ASSEMBLY

I I
Al RED A
I
B’ WHITE

BLACK´• I-
C’

WING LAMP

CABLE ASSEMBLY

A RED

B WHITE
C BLACK

1_"L36BC2
REFER 70 NAVIGATION LIGHTS

POWER SUPPLY

BLAC/f\ RED1\ RANGE

WHITE BLUE

F33A-369-96A
TAIL CONE LAMP ASSEMBLY

STROBE LIGHT GRIMES (OPTIONAL)

Models G33 and F33A

6-788 1 C1
 sA

9
L37A14

QI ID
c )L--4- BLACK
---1-
B’ WHITE f----( B

AL RED -5---( A

i. Strobe Light Circuit Breaker

2. Power Supply
V35-369-63
3. Strobe Light

STROBE LIGHT HOSKINS (OPTIONAL)

Models F33, G33, F33A and F33C

´•I L76A20 2
L76B20

4
L79B20N

WHITE

BLACK RED

(01
i. Strobe Light Circuit Breaker
2. PowerSupply
V358-369-62
3. Strobe Light

STROBE LIGHT BULLOCK (OPTIONAL)

Models F33, G33, F33A and F33C
6-79
Issued: August, 1971
 C
1~ 47A20N

IA

TO ALTERNATOR

P20B20

P19C20 &8A20

i. Diode
QgA2O
2. Resistor
3. Fuel Boost Indicator
4. Fuel Boost Pressure Switch
1 3 4 2

BRIGHT DIM TEST SIGNAL

F33C-369-95

FUEL BOOST LIGHT

Model F33C

6-80 Issued: August, 1971

 2A
L81B20 L81CZ~
L81A20 V i
L81 7)20

L81E20-------------O

I~

V358-369´•67

i. Battery Bus
2. Courtesy Light Fuse
3. Courtesy Light Switch
4. Courtesy Light

COURTESY LIGHT (OPTIONAL)

Model 533 (CD´•1235 andu CD-1254)
Model G33 (CD-1255 thru CD-1304)
Model F33A (CE-350 thru CE-464)
Model F33C (CJ-26 thru CJ-51)

2A
L81B20

L81D20

L81E20

BLACK BLACK V36B36967A

1. Battery Bus
2. Courtesy Light Fuse
3. Courtesy Light Switch
4. Courtesy Light

couRrEsv LIGHT (OPTIONAL)

6110401 6224 (CE-465 thru
CE612)
622C (CJ-52 thru CJ-104)

6-81
C7
 PlfllllN P33B18N

GEN BAT
TEST TEST

P43A18
TO
POWER p~sn4
r---~
DISTRIBUTION( DIODE
FUSE
P49A4
B1 82 TEST

OFFI -I P38~(B I LC~

P34A18
r. "1 P5n4
BATTERY
037618 038618 C
FUSE MASTER
All A2
REF. RELAY
P34Bls To
P42A18
BATTERY
psln18

xl P34E18

pssnle
RELAY
x2

P35C18
P40818P40A,, 1

P56818

I I I 056018

035818
P35Ac181 P36A18N
pslels

1 RHEOSTAT
xz
150’:
RELAY
,1 L~ LrmiZ;1~ 2w

FUSE p56D18
psse18
I
P34D18 P59E18
AUDIO "’i OVERVOLTAGE RELAY
AMPLIFIER ~--O
046818 i
P47A4 P39P~18
P54A18N
P46A4
r61 2

I I
psoa18N

TRANSPONDER P5SB18

STANDBY
4cn
COMM NAV COMM NAV GENERATOR
L~ 1 2 2

I-
O O
r RESISTOR 041018

NAV
COMM 1
P411B181 REISIX~RI I P~3Cls I (~LITRANSISTOR
TO
20
GA~ NAV 2 053818
ZE’UER DIODE DIODE

zocn P54n
p52A18
i ’---1
TERMINAL
TO BOARD
20
GA~ NAV 1
20 GA
I ToAVlONlcs
041018

TO
20
GB~ COMM 2 L~ GROUNDED TO I I II TRANSISTOR
STRUCTURE
zo~n

susanRllsEo
1973 MODEL
P53P118
TO
20G~-i COMM1
I 1 ~5369103A
20 GA

i_l_l
NAV
COMM 2

STANDBY GENERATOR
Model G33 (CD-1290 and after)
Model F33A (CE-374 and after)
Model F33C (CJ-52 and after)

c3
6-82
 BVS BAR LANDING GEAR POWER

H41A10 CIRCUIT BREAKER

_

2A12----j
204

AIR

CONDITIONER5WlrCH (2 O

4-b´•
LOWI 31
EVAPORATOR BLOWER
101
Ill H28A10 RLD
H27A10 BLACK
H29A10 ORANGE -L
121
AIR CONDITIONER
CIRCUIT BREAKER HIGHI

H26A10

H2611D
1‘´•9 1
i
Off II
51 37418
NC
36*18 H33A1
I
10A
6
:Hw~e:nTL’ L__J L ~NeJ
L_
LOW PRESSURE
HIGH PRESSURE
SWITCH
SWITCH

3381

30A1B

RH LANDING GEAR
5
POSITION SWITCH H30C1
H35A1B
H32818

~6-
H33rls
BLACK
i
LS1A2

51820
r
DIODE i:
COMPRESSOR CLUTCH

TO LANDING I REF TO ALT OVT

GEAR POSITION DIODE
L IIGHT’IJ H33D1
INDICATOR
TO
k~-H33F18----eH33C1
LANDING\ I
HJ)1118 O
OEPIR
~070P112 LLrS~-S--H31C18 ~r

LH SOUAT FLIGHT POSITION

H40A10
SWITCH SWITCH
1 H30B18
4 (PARTIAL OPEN)

s I I- CLOSED~-
10
3 RED
11 I ~--H3BA20 CONDENSORI
RC42CF OOR
7 K
0--H39A I_WH17E CTUATOR H31A1B

2 CONDENSER
DOOR sl*rx
I
P19D20 101~-P19820
~r 6
LIGHT
RESISTOR L _ _
OPEN _I
9A20--/ 1~--P20A20
CONDENSER b
1 LH LANDING GEAR
~aoa
~4
I s
OPEN LIGHT POSITION SWITCH
Ic~oiro 4
r- CIRCUIT
O TO ALTERNATOR
N~ IH43A20N--CH43B20----4
54 NAVIGATION LIGHT
1
H4082
NC
OPEN
I-
5P
M4A20N L
REF _L CONDENSER DOOR
LIGHT
ALTERNATOR POSITION SWITCH
DIMMING
L
RELAY
13364´•320
SHOWN IN GEAR DOWN a LOCKED THROTTLE
BACK AND AIR CONDITIONIR OFF

AIR CONDITIONER
Model F33A (CE-602 thru CE-612)

C7 6-83
 SECTION

R E P LAC E IVI E NT
SCHEDULE
 SECTION 7

II

Replacement Schedule
OVERHAUL AND REPLACEMENT SCHEDULE inspections for wear, corrosion and/or lack of lubrication.
In these areasperiodic inspections should be performed
The first overhaul or replacement should be performed not until the operator can set his own inspection periods based
later than the required period. The condition of the item at on experience.

the end of the first period can be used as a criteria for

determining subsequent periods applicable to the individual
NOTE
airplane or fleet operation providing the operator has an
approved monitoring system.
The required periods do not constitute a

The time periods for inspections noted in this manual are guarantee the item will reach the period without
based on and environmental malfunction as the aforementioned factors
average usage average
conditions. cannot be controlled by the manufacturer.

NOTE

SPECIAL CONDITIONS CAUTIONARY NOTICE

On condition items are to be overhauled or

replaced when inspection or performance of

Airplanes operated for Air Taxi or other than normal
operation and airplanes operated in humid tropics or cold these items reveal a potentially unsafe or

and damp climates, etc., may need more frequent unservicable condition.

7-1
C14
 BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
SHOP MANUAL

ITEM OVERHAUL OR REPLACE

Landing Gear

Main Gear Every 2000 hours

Nose Gear Every 2000 hours

Actuator assembly tall except P/N 35-810075-13) Every 2000 hours

Actuator assembly (P/N 35-810075-13) Every 4000 hours except

as a trainer, 2000 hours

Retract motor Every 2000 hours

Retract motor brushes Every 500 hours or on

condition

Shimmy dampener Every 1000 hours

Wheels and tires On condition

Brake assembly On condition

Master cylinder On condition

Shuttle valve assembly On condition

Parking brake valve On condition

All hose On condition

Power Plant

*Engine Every 1500 hours

Engine controls On condition

Engine vibration isolator mounts At engine change

Exhaust system On condition

Starter Overhaul at engine

overhaul, or replace
on condition

Alternator On condition or at engine

overhaul

Oil Cooler On condition (replace

when contaminated)

7-2 C16
 BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
SHOP MANUAL

ITEM OVERHAUL OR REPLACE

Power Plant (Cont’d)

Propeller

McCauley At engine overhaul, but

not to exceed 1200 hours
3 years, whichever
I
or

occurs first

Hartzell 2000 hours or 5 years I

Flotorp At engine overhaul, but
not to exceed 1000 hours

Propeller controls On condition

Propeller Governor At engine overhaul

Pressure pump Every 1500 hours

Pressure pump intake filter Every 500 hours

All hose Hoses carrying flammable

liquids at engine overhaul
or every 5 years. All other
hoses on condition

Vacuum pump Every 1200 hours

Flaps And Flight Controls

Flight Controls On condition

Elevator tab actuator On condition

Flap motor and drives Every 2000 hours

Flap motor brushes On condition

Flap gearbox Every 2000 hours

Flap actuators Every 2000 hours

Flap flexible shaft Every 2000 hours

Fuel System

Fuel cells On condition (If fuel

reservoir is installed,
inspect foam insert
material for
deterioration
Replace foam insert
material every 10 years)

C16 7-3
 BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
SHOP MAN UAL

ITEM OVERHAUL OR REPLACE

Fuel System (Cont’d)

Wing fuel quantity transmitters On condition

Fuel cell drain valve On condition

Fuel system check valves On condition

Fuel selector valve Inspect every 600 hours

Overhaul every 1200 hours

Fuel boost pump Every 1200 hours

All hose Hoses carrying flammable

liquid at engine overhaul
or 5 years. All
every
other hoses on condition

Instruments

Turn coordinator On condition

Altimeter Every 24 months per FAA

directive (Inspect and
calibrate)

Directional gyro On condition

Gyro horizon On condition

Gyro pressure gage On condition

Engine gage units On condition

Airspeed indicator On condition

Rate-Of-Climb On condition

Fuel flow/manifold pressure indicator On condition

Tachometer On condition

Clock On condition

Flap position indicator On condition

Free air temperature indicator On condition

All hose On condition

Pressure system intake filter Every 500 hours

Pressure system inline filter Every 300 hours

Air pressure regulator valve On condition

7-4 C16
 BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
SHOP MANUAL

ITEM OVERHAUL OR REPLACE

Electrical System

Battery master relay On condition

All other relays On condition

Voltage regulator On condition

Starter relay On condition

Battery (Emergency locator transmitter) Replace 50% of useful

at
life las stated on the
battery) or any time the
transmitter is used more
than one cumulative hour

Standby generator (14 or 28 volt) Every 1500 hours

Standby generator brushes (28 volt) Every 500 hours

Miscellaneous

Hand fire extinguisher Inspect every 12 months

recharge as necessary.

Cabin heating and ventilating ducts On condition, inspect

every 12 months

Heater muff On condition

Oxygen regulator On condition

Oxygen cylinder (Light weight) ICC 3HT 1850 Hydrostatically test every
3 years or replace every
24 years or 4380 fillings
(ICC Regulation)

Oxygen cylinder (Heavy weight) ICC 3AA 1800 Hydrostatically test every
5 years (ICC Regulation)

Vacuum regulator Replace when all vacuum

driven instruments operate
erratically

Air conditioner filter On condition

Air conditioner compressor On condition

Seat belts or shoulder harness Every 12 months or

on condition

C16 7-5
 BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA SERIES
SHOP MANUAL

ITEM OVERHAUL OR REPLACE

Miscellaneous (Cont’d)

Wing bolts Replace 10 years after the

initial inspection or
on condition. See
Section 4

"Refer to Teledyne Continental Motors Service Bulletin M74-20 Rev I dated November 7,
1974 or later issue.

7-6 C16
 SECTION

PERIODIC
INSPECTIONS
 SECTION 8

Periodic Inspections
 E33C, F33C SPIN INSPECTION (ACROBATIC acrobaticmaneuvers other than spins (no spins at all). The

CATEGORY) regular 100-Hour Inspection (P/N 98-32227G or

subsequent), Intermediate 100-Hour Inspection (PIN
This inspectionrequired an all E33C, and F33C (CJ-1 and
is 98-38999 or subsequent), or Continuing Care Inspection
acrobatically spun (even if
af ter) ai rplanes, whi ch are bei ng Guide (P/N 98-367110 or subsequent) MUST also be
the spin time is only a small part of total time). This complied with.
inspection is NOT required if an airplane is performing

FREQUENCY PART IINSPECTION CORRECTIVE ACTION MECHIINSP

1. 50 Rudder pedal bell- Check for cracks. If cracks are found contact
Hours crank support assembly I I Beech Aircraft Corporation
Commercial Services Department.

2. 1 50 Elevator to Elevator Check screw holes (4 per If hole diameter is more than
Hours torque fitting casting elevator) for
proper .194 inch ream hole to .208
joint hole diameter. -e .002 inch diameter and install
NAS 2903-4 or NAS 6203-4>(
oversize bolt. If hole diameter
exceeds .210 inch for oversize bolts
contact Beech Aircraft Corporation
Commercial Services Department
for rework instructions. Torque bolt
or screw to 30 to 40 inch Ibs.

Check hole size in elevatorl If hole diameter is

greater than .251
inboard hinge mount hole inch, replace elevator torque
in center of elevator fitting.
torque fitting.
Check elevator rod end If hole diameter is greater than .379
mounting hole in the inch ream to .436 inch .001
elevator torque fitting inch and install one

for proper diameter. BS 105740-X-XC-0500 bushing.

3. i 50 Horizontal and vertical I Horizontal stabilizer If bolt holes are more than .253 inch
Hours stabilizer attachment bolt I forward spar: Check in diameter or elongated, ream the

holes (stabilizer spars diameter of 4 outboard bushings to .270 ~.002 inch

and bulkheads) bolt holes on each side 1 diameter and install NAS 2904-14
(2 upper and 2 lower), oversize bolts.
If hole diameter exceeds .272 for
Horizontal stabilizer rear oversize bolts contact Beech
spar: Check diameter of Aircraft Corporation Commercial
2 outboard bolt holes on Services Department for
each side (1 upper and rework instructions.
1 lower). Torque the nuts to 85 to 100
inch Ibs.

If any of these holes are

oversize, check all other

horizontal stabilizer bolt
holes and vertical stabilizer
bolt holes far correct
diameter.

Check torque on all nuts. Torque the nuts to 85 to 100 inch

pounds.
4. 50 1 Inboard ´•elevator hinge Check for straightness Replace if bent or worn.

Hours bolts I and wear.

Elevator pushrods to Check for straightness Replace if bent or worn smaller

elevator torque fitting and wear. than .370 inch diameter.
bolt.

C13 8-1
FREQUENCY I PART INSPECTION I CORRECTIVE ACTION MECHIINSP

5. 50 Upper and middle Inspect for cracks, Replace if any of noted conditions
Hours rudder hinges corrosion and excessive exist.
wear.

Lower rudder hinge Inspect for cracks, Replace if any of noted conditions
corrosion and excessive exist.
wear.

6. 50 Elevator hinge joint Check bearing for Replace if noted conditions

Hours looseness and hearing exist.
bracket for cracks,
corrosion and excessive
wear.

Check bushing diameters. If I.D, is over .188 inch or O.D.

is under .310 inch, replace
bushings.
Check elevator hinge If greater than .200 replace
brackets hole diameter. bracket.

Check elevator hinge Replace if noted conditions exist.

bracket for cracks,
corrosion and excessive
wear.

Check bolts for wear. Replace if plating is worn or

corroded.

Check reassembled joint Install new parts as required.

for looseness.

7. 50 1 Elevator pushrods Check for straightness, Replace pushrod if bent or cracked.

Hours and cracks.

Check rod end bearing for I Replace rod end bearing if

excessive freeplay. excessive freeplay is noted.
Check rod end mounting If more than .378 inch in diameter,
hole diameter. replace rod end.

8. 50 Trim Tab Check for cracks. Replace if noted conditions exist.

Hou rs

Check freeplay as indicatedl Replace tab bushing and/or tab

in Chapter 27-30-00. pushrod ends andlor trim tab
actuator shaft and/or trim tab hinge
if excessive freeplay is noted.

9. 50 1 Elevator Check for cracks, If cracks are found contact Seech

Hours especially between Aircraft Corporation Commercial
outboard hinge and Service Department for repair.
elevator balance horn.

0. 50 Trim tab pushrod Check straightness Replace if bent.

Hours assemblies

1. 50 Trim tab actuator Check output shaft for Replace It bent.

Hours straightness.
Check actuator installation I Check attach bolts for proper
for looseness, torque.
2~ 50 Elevator bellcrank Check pushrod mounting If more than ,379 inch, press
Hours hole forproper lout existing bushing and press
diameter. in one BS105740´•X´•XC-0968
bushing and drill .377 t .002
inch diameter hole thru bushing.

8´•2 C13
FREQUENCY PART INSPECTION CORRECTIVE ACTION MECHIINSP

13. 50 Bolt (elevator pushrods Check for straightness and Replace if bent or worn smaller
Hours to elevator bell crank) wear. than .370.

14. 50 Inboard elevator hinge Check for cracks. Check Replace if noted conditions exist.
Hours casting hinge bearing for looseness

C13 8-3
 100-HOUR INSPECTION GUIDE

CAUTION exceeded by more than 10 hours, and then

only if the
additional time is required to reach place where the
a

Any time an airplane is repainted, inspect all inspection can be satisfactorily accomplished. However, if
p lacards to assu reth at they are not covered with an inspection is done at 110 hours, the next inspection is

paint, are easily readable, and are securely due 90 hours later with no extension allowed. The first
attached, overhaul or replacement MUST be performed no later than
the required period.
The owner or operator is primarily responsible for
maintaining the airplane in an airworthy condition, While this guide may be used as an outline, detailed
including compliance with all applicable Airworthiness information of the many systems and components in the
Directives as specified in Part 39 of the Federal Aviation ai rplane will be found in the various sections of this manual
Regulations. It is further the responsibility of the owner or (especially Sections 2, 3, 4 and 7) and the pertinent vendor
operator to ensure that the airplane inspected
is in publications. It is also recommended that reference be
conformity requirements of Parts 43 and 91 of the
with the made to the applicable Maintenance Handbooks, Service
Federal Aviation Regulations. Beech Aircraft Corporation Instructions, Service Letters, Service Bulletins,
has prepared this inspection guide to assist the owner or Installations Instructions, and Vendor’s Specifications for
operator in meeting the foregoing responsibilities. This torque values, clearances, settings, tolerances, and other
inspection guide is not intended to be all-inclusive, for no requirements. It should further be verified that all interior
such guide can replace the good judgment of a certified and exterior placards are legible and in place during the

airframe and powerplant mechanic in the performance of inspection. In the final analysis, it is the responsibility of the
his duties. As the one primarily responsible for the owner or operator to ensure that the airframe and
airworthiness of the airplane, the owner or operator should powerplant mechanic inspecting the airplane has access to
select only qualified personnel to maintain the airplane, the previously noted documents as well as to this
inspection guide.

NOTE NOTE

Additional inspection forms are available under In addition to the inspections prescribed by this
Part Number 98-322270 or subsequent schedule, the altimeter system and all ATC
revision. transponders MUST be tested and inspected at
24-month intervals in compliance with the
The time periods for the inspections noted in this schedule requirments specified in FAR Parts 91.170 and
are based on normal usage under average environmental 91.177 under Title 14 of the Code of Federal
conditions. Airplanes operated in extremely humid tropics, Regulations.
or in exceptionally cold, damp climates, etc., may need

more frequent inspections for wear, corrosion, lubrication, CAUTION

andior lack of maintenance. Under these adverse
conditions, perform periodic inspections in compliance After the firsttwenty-five hours of engine
with this guide frequent intervals until the operator
at more operating time, a new, remanufactured or
can set his own inspection periods based on the newly overhauled engine should be given the
contingencies of field experience. An annual inspection 100-hour inspection including draining and
MUST be accomplished within each 12-month period for renewing lubricating oil.
compliance with the Federal Aviation Regulations. To the
extent that the airplane is operated in excess of 100 hours NOTE
per year, Beech Aircraft Corporation strongly recommends
that the airplane be inspected at 100-hour intervals rather Model E33C and F33C airplanes being spun
than annually. The 100-hour interval between performance MUST also have the ACROBATIC INSPECTION
of the procedures specified herein should NEVER be at 50 hours,

8-4 Ci3
A. OPERATIONAL INSPECTION MECH. INSP.

1. STARTER Check for proper operation, unusual noises and dragging.

Check starter energized light (if installed) and/or loadmeter to ensure
starter disengagement when the starter switch is released

2. FU EL PRESSU R E Check for p roper fuel pressu re ii mits and fl uctuations

3. CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE Check for proper operation,

temperature and fluctuations

4. ALTERNATOR/GENERATOR Check for proper output and unusual

noises

5. STANDBY GENERATOR Check for proper operation in test mode

6. PROPELLER OPERATION Cycle propeller and check for proper rpm

drop and smoothness of operation

7. PROPELLER DEICER Check for proper operation and amperage draw

on ammeter

8. OIL PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE Check for proper pressure,

temperature limits and unusual fluctuations

9. MAGNETOS Check the performance of the magneto by performing the

MAGNETO DROP-OFF CHECK specified in Sect. 3 of P/N 35-5900968
Shop Manual

10. POWER CHECK Check per engine manufacturer’s manuals

11. AMMETER Check for proper indication and unusual fluctuations

12. H EATING AN O VENTI LATINO SYSTE M Check for proper operation, heat
and airflow output. Check controls for freedom of operation

13. FIREWALL SHUTOFF VALVE Check for proper operation and freedom
of movement

14. IDLE RPM AND MIXTURE SETTINGS Check for both proper rpm and
mixture settings. Check controls for freedom of operation

15. IDLE CUT-OFF Check for proper operation and freedom of movement

16. IGNITION SWITCH Rotate the ignition switch through the OFF position
travel; if the engine stops firing,the switch is
to the extreme limit of switch
normal. If the engine continues to run with the switch held in the past OFF
position, it is an indication that one magneto is still "hot" or ungrounded.
When the switch is released from the past OFF position, it should
automatically return to normal OFF and the engine should stop running.
However, any ignition switch exhibiting this abnormal condition should
be replaced

17. ALL ENGINE CONTROLS With the engine running, check for proper
operational limits, engine response and rigging. Check friction locks for
proper operation

18. FUEL QUANTITY GAGES Check for proper operation and unusual
fluctuations

C13 8-5
A. OPERATIONAL INSPECTION (Cont’d.) MECH. INSP.

19. AUXILIARY FUEL PUMP Check pump for proper operation, unusual
noise and fluctuations

20. FUEL TANK SELECTOR Check for proper operation and feel for positive
detent and proper placarding

21. ALL LIGHTS Ch eck for cond ition, attach ment, cracked or broken lenses.
Check switches, knobs and circuit breakers for looseness and operation

22. STALL WARNING SYSTEM Check for proper operation

23. RADIO OPERATION Check for proper operation, security of switches

and knobs

24. FLAPS Check for noisy operation, full travel and proper indication

25. PITOT HEAT Check amperage draw on ammeter and for proper heating
of the unit

26. FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS Check for condition and proper operation

27. BRAKES Check for condition and wear, ease of operation and proper
release of the parking brake. Check for unusual brake chatter........

23. EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER Check for proper operation

and assure that the ELT is armed when the airplane is returned to service

29. AIR CONDITIONER Operate the air conditioner and verify that the
retractable condenser moves to the ground extended position when

tu rned on and retu ms to the retracted position when tu rned off. Check for
proper operation and unusual noise

30. OXYGEN SYSTEM Functionally check the oxygen system for proper
operation. Check the oxygen bottle shutoff valve for proper operation

31. SWITCHES, CIRCUIT BREAKERS Check for proper operation

32. FLIGHT CONTROLS, TRIM CONTROLS AND TRIM INDICATOR Check

freedom of movement and proper operation through full travel with and
without flaps extended. Check electric trim controls for operation

B. POWER PLANT MECH. INSP.

1. NACELLE SKIN Check for deformation and obvious damage or cracks.

Check for loose ormissing rivets

2. NACELLE STRUCTURE Check for cracks and deformation. Check for

loose or missing rivets and concealed damage

3. COWLING Check for condition, security and adjustment of latches.

Open the upper cowling and clean. Inspect for cracks

4. COWL FLAPS Check for travel, deformation and security. Inspect for
cracks

5, SPARK PLUGS Clean, test and regap spark plugs, Tighten spark plugs
to proper torque and check ignition harness condition and for proper
attachment

8-6 Ci3
B. POWER PLANT (Cont’d.) MECH. INSP.

6. COMPRESSION Perform differential compression test

7. BATTERY Inspect for clean, tight connections and add distilled water to
maintain level of 3/e inch above the top of the separators. Inspect the
a

vents and overflow tube for obstructions. Check for security and proper
attach ment. Check for corrosion. Make certain the battery is clean. Water
or dirt on battery surfaces can cause the battery todischarge

8. PLUMBING Inspect plumbing and associated accessories for condition

(su ch as cracks and fraying) and attachment. Check plumbing clearance
and secure against possible chafing

9. BRAKE FLUID RESERVOIR Check reservoir for security, attachment,

open vent, proper fluid level and for leaks

10. ENGINE OIL TANK OR SUMP Check for cracks, leaks, proper fluid level,
deformation and security

11. CRANKCASE Check security of crankcase half bolts

12. OIL SUMP DRAINS AND SCREENS Clean screens, check for holes in the
screens and for obstructions. Check for proper torque after installation

13. O1L COOLER Check oil cooler, lines and fittings for condition, security,
chafing and leaks

14. PROPELLER AND MOUNTING BOLTS Check for condition and security.
Check the tip of the blades for evidence of lightning strikes. If there is
evidence of lightning strikes, consult the propeller manufacturer, the
eng ine manuf actu rer and Beech Ai rcraft Corporation. Inspect the blades
for cracks, dents, nicks, scratches, erosion, corrosion, security and
movement in the hub

15. PROPELLER SPINNER Check for deformation, security and cracks..

16. PROPELLER HUB Check for cracks, excessively leaking seals and
condition. Check propeller dome pressure

17. ALTERNATOR/GENERATOR Check for condition and attachment.

Check wiring for proper attachment and possible chafing. Check for
unusual noise

18. ALTERNATOR Inspect as indicated in BEECHCRAFT Service Instruction

0546-359 Rev II or subsequent

19. STARTER Check for condition, attachment and chafed or loose wires

20~ GENERATOR BELT Cheek for proper tension and worn or frayed
condition. Check tension adjustment bolt for tightness

21. STANDBY GENERATOR Check for condition, attachment, security of

wires and for chafing

22. MAGNETOS Check contact points for proper clearance. Points with
deep pits excessively burned areas must be discarded, Inspect the cam
or
follower felt pad for proper lubrication and clean the compartment with a
clean, dry clef h. Check ignition harness for proper connection, security
and fraying. Check timing

013 8-7
 B. POWER PLANT(Cont’d.) MECH. INSP.

Check cylinders and exhaust manifold for

obvious leaks,security and cracks; check baffles for cracks and security.
Check cylinders for broken cooling fins and loose or missing base nuts

24. EXHAUST SYSTEM Check for deformation, security, cracks, leaks,

loose or missing nuts andclamps. Check for thin wall condition which
may occur due to normal internal erosion on stacks which have long
service time

25. FIREWALL. -’Cliedk for wiiiikles, damage or’crijcks. Check~all electrical

and control access holes for proper sealing

26.. HOSE AMD´•DUCTS Check all fuel, oil.and air hose or duct for leakage,
cracks, deterioration and damage. Check fittings for security

27. ENGINE ACCESSORIES Check for condition, security~ and leaks. Check
wiring, hoses and tubes for chafing, security and leaks

28. ENGINE~ MOUNTS Check for cracks; corrosion and security. Inspect
rubber cushions, mount bolts and nuts and grounding straps for
condition and security

29. CABIN HEATER SYSTEM Check for cracks, distortion, corrosion, leaks
and obstructions per Section 3 of P/N 35-5900968 Shop Manual

30. PROPELLER GOVERNOR Check for leaks and control arm for security

I´• 1 31. ENGINE CONTROLS Check controls and associated equipment for condi!ion,
attachment, alignment and rigging. Every 300 hours remove the cable connec-
tion bolts and check for weer

32. IGNITION HARNESS Inspect for fraying and attachment

33. ELECTRICAL WIRING AND EQUIPMENT Inspect electrical wiring and

equipment and accessories for fraying and~ attachment
associated

34. ALL DRAINS AND PLUGS Check for condition, security and
obstructions. Check for leaks and correct tightness

35. PRESSURE PUMP INTAKE FIL~ER´•- Inspect-filter for condition,

cleanliness and security. Check filter container for cracks

36. AIR eONDITIONERCOMPRESSOR Check for securit"y and attachinent.

.Check refrigerant and oil levels. Check belt f6r tension andworn or frayed
condition. (See Sect. 2 and 3)

37. INDUCTION AIR FILTER Check for condition, cfeanliness and security

38. INDUCTION SYSTEM AND ALTERNATE AIR Check the hot and cold
flexible air ducts for delamination of the innerlining. Check the alternate
air valve forblockage, security, cracks, operaiion and wear

39. CARBURETOR HEAT SYSTEM Check for blockage, security, operation

and wear

40. CARBURETOR Clean the screen and check for damage. Drain the inlet
chamber and rear section. Install screen and check for leaks. Check the
primer solenoid for operation and to ensure secure mounting

C1’1
8g
B. POWER PLANT (Cont’d.) MECH. INSP.

41. FUEL INJECTION CONTROL VALVE Clean the screen and check for
damage. Install screen and check for leaks

42. FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM Inspect all fuel injection components, lines
and fittings for evidence of fuel leaks, fraying and cracking

43. Oil SEPARATOR (Vacuum System) Clean the screen as directed in

Section 3 of P/N 35-5900968 Shop Manual (or subsequent) Check for
condition, mounting and proper operation. Install the screen and check
for security. Inspect for cracks .........,.,.,._

44. VACUUM SYSTEM AIR FILTER (Located behind instrument panel) Check
for security of attachment, replace as required .........,.,.,._

45. VACUUM RELIEF VALVE Clean and inspect filter, check for security of
attachment

46. ELECTRIC PROPELLER DEICER

A. Check for service damage to the deicer heaters, brush rods, springs
and brushes. Check for attachment and security

B. Check the lead strap and all other clamps, connectors and wiring for
electrical soundness, security and attachment

C. Check the slip rings for roughness, cracks, burned or discolored

areas and for deposits of oil, grease or dirt. Check for security and

attachment

D. Check deicer boots for wrinkles, loose or torn areas

C. CABIN AND BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT MECH. INSP.

1. SKIN Inspect skins for deformation, cracks and loose or missing rivets. If
damage is found, check adjacent structure

2. STRUCTURE Check for cracks and deformation. Check for loose or

missing rivets and concealed damage

3, CABLES AND PULLEYS Inspect for condition, attachment, alignment,

clearance, proper operation, binding and tension. Check turnbuckles for
cracks and cables for fraying

4. LANDING GEAR GEARBOX AND ACTUATING LINKAGE Check for

leakage, wear, condition and attachment. Check for unusual noise.
Check oil level by engaging and turning the emergency handcrank ’/2 turn
to determine that oil is being picked up on the worm gear. The oil level
should be maintained no more than necessary to cover ’/2 of the diameter
of the worm gear

5. FLAP MOTOR AND SHAFTS Check for condition, security and wear at all
points. Check cable housing for security and check jam nuts for tightness

6. AUXILIARY FUEL PUMP AND FUEL LINES Check far condition, security
and leaks, Check lines for signs of chafing or cracks

7. BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER AND PARKING BRAKE VALVE Check for

condition, security and leaks, Check lines for signs of chafing or cracks

C13
8-9
C. CABIN AND BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT (Cont’d.) MECH. I INSP.

8. RUDDER PEDALS Check for freedom of movement. Check cables, push

pull rods, bellcranks, pulleys, turnbuckles, fairleads, for proper routing,
condition and security. Check rudder pedal fore and aft positions far
wear. Check locks and pins to ensure positive lock

9. CONTROL COLUMN, TRIM CONTROL AND INDICATOR (Electric and

Manual) Check for freedom of movement. Inspect pulleys, sprockets,
bearings, actuators, chains and turnbuckles for condition, security and
operation. Check trim indicator for proper indication

10. ENGINE CONTROLS Check for ease of operation through full travel.
Check friction locks for proper operation

11. ELECTRICAL WIRING AND EQUIPMENT Check for condition, security

and signs of chafing

12. PLUMBING Check all plumbing and connections for security, leakage
and general condition

13. WINDOWS AND DOORS Inspect windows for scratches, crazing and
general condition. Inspect doors for security of attachment. Check
latching mechanism for proper engagement and ease of operation

14. INSTRUMENTS AND INSTRUMENT PANEL Inspect instrument panel,

subpanels, placards and instruments for condition and attachment.
Check all knobs for security. Inspect shock mounts, ground straps for
cracks and security

15. SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND SHOULDER HARNESSES Inspect cabin

seats, seat belts and shoulder harnesses for proper operation, condition
and security of attachment. Inspect floorboards for condition and seat
attachment. Check for operation of the seat stops

16. OXYGEN SYSTEM Check condition of the oxygen system and check the
oxygen masks for cleanliness and stowage

17. VENTILATING SYSTEM Check all fresh air and heat outlet vents for
proper movement and operation

18. FUEL SELECTOR VALVE Inspect for leakage, security, freedom of

movement, proper detent feel and condition. Clean strainers and inspect
for condition. Check for proper placarding

19. FILTERS Inspect pressure system inline filter for condition, cleanliness
and security. Replace pressure system inline filter and all other individual
instrument air filters andlor time change master filter on vacuum system
airplanes in accordance with Section 8 of PIN 35-5900988 Shop
Manual

20. EMERGENCY EXIT HATCH Check emergency release handle and latch
assembly for proper operation. Check that the hatch moves out freely.
Check the complete latch assembly for condition and all moving parts for
proper operation. With the hatch installed, check for proper latching and
seal.Resafety the emergency exit with .020 inch dia. copper wire after
opening

21. STATIC SYSTEM Check and drain water from the static lines

8-10 C13
D. WINGS AND CARRY-THROUGH STRUCTURE (Cont’d.) MECH. I INSP.

1. SKIN Check for deformation and obvious damager Check for cracks,
loose or missing rivets. If damage is found, check adjacent structure.
Check for indications of hard landing or excessive flight loading

2. STRUCTURE Check for cracks, deformation and concealed damage.

Check for loose or missing rivets

3. ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS Inspect for cracks, proper fit and
attachment

4. CABLES AND PULLEYS Inspect for condition, attachment, alignment,

proper operation and tension. Check for fraying of cables and cracks in
turnbuckles

5. AILERONS Check for condition and security. Check for cracks, loose or
missing rivets and freedom of movement. Check hinge bearings and
brackets for condition, push-pull rods for security and rod ends for
corrosion

6. FUEL TANKS, CAPS AND VENTS Inspect fuel tank vent lines and filler
capsas directed in Section 3.........................................................................

7. PLUMBING Check for leakage, chafing, condition and security

8. ELECTRICAL WIRING AND EQUIPMENT Inspect far chafing, damage,

security and attachment

9. FLAP LIMIT SWITCHES Check for condition and security, freedom of

operation

10. FLAPS AND ACTUATORS Check for condition, security, binding or

chafing of actuator cables. Check flap skin and structure for cracks, loose
or missing rivets. Check roller bearings and tracks for condition,

push-pull rods for security and rod ends for corrosion. Check stop area
for condition and damage

11. FLAP POSITION TRANSMITTER Check for security and operation

12. WING SPAR Check for corrosion and condition (See Service
Instructions No. 0514-035, Rev. II or subsequent)

13. WING BOLTS Check wing bolts for proper torque at the first 100-hour
inspection and at the first 100´•hour inspection after each reinstallation of
the wing attach bolts.

CAUTION

Confirm torque requirements per Section 41

14. RADAR ANTENNA COVER Check th e fiber glass for secu rity, attach ment
and cracks

15. FUEL VENTS, AIR INLETS, PITOT TUBE AND STALL WARNING VANE
Check for condition and obstructions

C13 8-11
E. NOSE GEAR MECH. INSP.

i. WHEEL AND TIRE Check wheel for cracks and tire for wear, damage,
condition and proper inflation

2. LANDING GEAR STRUT Inspect the shock strut and components for
cracks, attachment, proper inflation and evidence of leakage

3. ACTUATING LINKAGE Check for wear at attach points. Check for cracks
and security

4. GEAR DOORS AND LINKAGE Check doors fordamage and cracks to the
linkage for wear and cracks at the attach
structure and skins. Check
points. Check for condition and security

5. NOSE GEAR STEERING LINKAGE Inspect linkages for tightness,

condition and security. Linkage boots for condition

6. SHIMMY DAMPER Check for condition and attachment. Check attach

points for cracks. Check fluid level per the Shop Manual.............

7. STRUT FLUID LEVEL Check and maintain the proper hydraulic fluid
level in the strut as outlined in Section 2........................................................

8. STRUT AND A-FRAME HINGE BOLTS Inspect for cracks and security of
attachment

9. STATIC CABLE (If installed)- Inspect for condition and proper clearances
and attachment

10. VISUAL INDICATOR Check for condition

F. MAIN GEAR AND BRAKES MECH INSP.

1. BRAKE, LINES, LINING AND DISCS Check for condition, wear and
security. Check lines for chafing and signs of leakage or cracks. Check
discs for wear or warping. Check brake discs for cracks

2. WHEELS AND TIRES Check wheels for cracks and tires for wear,
damage, condition and proper inflation

3. ACTUATOR GEARBO~, MOTOR AND SWITCHES Check for leakage,

condition and security

4. LANDING GEAR STRUTS Inspect the shock struts and components for
cracks, attachment, proper inflation and evidence of leakage.........

5. ACTUATING LINKAGE Check for wear and cracks at attach points.

Check for condition and security

6. GEAR DOORS AND LINKAGE Check doors fordamage and cracks to the
structure and skins. Check linkage for wear and cracks at the attach
points. Check for condition and security. Determine that all clevis
retaining pins are in place and secured with cotter pins..............

7. STRUT FLUID LEVEL Check and maintain the proper hydraulic fluid
level in the struts as outlined in Section 2

8. STRUT AND A-FRAME HINGE BOLTS Inspect for cracks and security of
attachment....i

8-12 C13
G. MAIN GEAR OPERATION MECH. I INSP.

NOTE

Since battery voltage is not sufficient to properly cycle the

landing gear for this inspection, use only an external power
sou rce capable of del iveri ng and mai ntai n i ng either 1 4.25

.250r 28.25 .25VDC, according to the airplane’s electrical

-e

system throughout the extension and retraction cycles

when performing the landing gear retraction inspection.

For more specific information which may be necessary to

accomplish the following items, refer to Section 5 of P/N
35-5900968 Shop Manual and this Shop Manual.

1. DOORS Check door operation, fit and fair. Check for unusual noise

2. POSITION LIGHTS Check for security, adjustment, wiring for breaks,

condition of insulation, loose connections and proper indication

3. WARNING HORN Check for proper operation

4. UPLOCK CABLE TENSION Check uplock cable mechanism for
condition and security. Check uplock cable for proper tension and for
possible fraying

5. EMERGENCY EXTENSION Check system for freedom of operation and

positive engagement of the downlocks. Check for unusual noise

6. DOWNLOCK TENSION Check for proper deflection force on the main

gear knee joints

7. UPLOCK ROLLERS Check condition and clearance of uplock rollers

and lubricate as indicated in the appropriate Shop Manual. Check for
binding

8. LIMIT SWITCH RIGGING Check for security and proper adjustment of

the limit switches. Refer to the P/N 35-5900968 Shop Manual for correct
landing gear gearbox internal clearance

9. SAFETY SWITCH Check for security, proper rig and operation

10. GENERAL OPERATION Place the airplane on jacks and cycle the
landing gear while checking to ascertain that the position light switches
operate in conjunction with the position of the landing gear. Check the
condition and operation of complete landing gear system

11. DYNAMIC BRAKING ACTION Verify proper operation of dynamic

braking action

12, ASSIST STEP Inspect retractable step for cable and safety link
condition, proper adjustment and operation. Check fixed steps far
security

C13 8´•13
H. NOSE GEAR OPERATION I MECH. INSP.

NOTE

Since battery voltage is not sufficient to properly cycle the

landing gear for this inspection, use only an external power
sou rce capable of delive ri ng and mai ntaining either 14. 25

.25 or 28.25 .25 VDC, according to the airplane’s electrical

system throughout the extension and retraction cycles
when performing the landing gear retraction inspection.

For more specific information which may be necessary to

accomplish the following items, refer to Section 5 of P/N
35-5900968 Shop Manual.

1. DOORS Check door operation, fit, and fair. Check for unusual noise.

2. NOSE GEAR UP TENSION Check the up tension on the nose gear as

indicated in the appropriate Shop Manual

3. DOWNLOCK TENSION Check the downlock tension on the nose gear as

indicated in the appropriate Shop Manual

4. GENERAL OPERATION Place the airplane on jacks and cycle the

landing gear while checking to ascertain that the position light switches
operate in conjunction with the landing gear position. Check the
condition and operation of the complete landing gear system

5. VISUAL INDICATOR Inspect for proper adjustment and operation

6. NOSE GEAR STEERING Check for condition and security

I. REAR FUSELAGE AND EMPENNAGE MECH. INSP.

1. SKIN Check for deformation, cracks and obvious damage. Check for
loose or missing rivets. If damage is found, check adjacent structure

2. INTERNAL FUSELAGE STRUCTURE Check for cracks and deformation.

Check for loose and missing rivets. Check bulkheads, doorposts,
stringers and doublers for corrosion, cracks and buckles

3. STRUCTURE Inspect the two most aft bulkheads for cracks, distortion,
loose rivets or other obvious damage

4. CABLES AND PULLEYS Inspect for condition, attachment, alignment,

clearance, proper operation and proper tension. Check for fraying of
cables

5. CONTROL SURFACES Check for deformation, cracks and security.

Check far loose at missing rivets. Check far freedom of movement. Check
for security of rudder and elevator torque fitting, hinges and bond cables

6. TRIM TABS AND ACTUATORS Check for security and wear. Check
allowable free play per Section 4. Check hinges and trim tab actuator for
security and wear. Check trim tabs for cracks and control rods for
attachment. Lubricate trim tab hinges per Section 2 of P/N 35-5900968
Shop Manual.

8-14 C13
 i. REAR FUSELAGE AND EMPENNAGE MECH. INSP.

7. STATIC PORTS Check for obstruction and clean as necessary

8. PLUMBING Check for leakage, cracks, chafing, condition and security

9. ELECTRICAL WIRING AND EQUIPMENT Inspect for chafing, damage,

security and attachment

10. STATIC LINES Check condition of static lines and drain

11. ASSIST STEP BUNGEE Inspect for condition and attachment

12. ANTENNAS Check for condition and security .........,.,...._

J. GENERAL

1. Airplane cleaned and serviced

2. Airplan.e lubricated in accordance with the appropriate Shop Manual

lubrication chart

3. Inspect all placards to assure that they are easily readable and securely
attached

For a complete or annual inspection of the airplane, all items on the airplane that are noted on this guide should be i nspected.

ELECTRIC PROPELLER DEICER WARNING

50 HOUR INSPEC;TION
Before moving the propeller, make certain that
The various components of the propeller deicer system the ignition switch is OFF and that the engine
should be inspected every 50 hours for the appearance of has cooled completely. There is always some
;Ibnormnl conditions. The following inspections may provide danger of a cylinder firing when a propeller is
a mc;lns for detecting and correcting such abnormal condi- moved.
tions before they render the deicer system inoperative.

a. Set the brakes and operate the engine at near take- c. Remove the spinner dome and open all access

off power. Turn the deicer systems switch ON and observe doors pertaining to the wiring and components of the deicer
the nmmeter for at least 3 minutes. If the ammeter needle system. Turn the deicer switch ON and station an assistant
does within the shaded band (except for a flicker at
not rest in the cockpit to observe the system ammeter. Flex all ac-
.10 second intervals when the step switch of the timer cycles) wiring, particularly the lead straps, leads from the
cessible
refer to the troubleshooting chart for the probable sources of slip ring assembly, and the firewall electrical connectors and
trouble. their wiring. Any movement of the ammeter, other than the
b. With the engine shut off, turn the deicer switch cycling flicker that occurs at 30 second intervals, indicates a
ON and feel the deicer boats on the propeller for the proper short or open circuit that must be loc;lted and corrected.
sequence of heater operation. The presence of local hot d. To extend the life of the lead strap between the

spots indicates service damage to the deicer heaters, which hub clamp and clip, reposition the bend in the strap at a point
should be repaired before more serious damage develops, at least II?, inch from the existing location of the bend.
e. Check for damaged brush rods or springs and for
worn or damaged brushes.

CAUflON PROPELLER DEICEF~

100 HOUR INSPECTION
While following the instructions of step b,,
move the propeller back and forth to prevent a. Check for radio noise or radio compass
arcing between the brushes and slip ring. interference by operating the engine at near take-off power

C13 8-15
 with the radio gear turned on. If, under these conditions, Ihe mounting screws and reposition the brus)l block until
noise or interference occurs when the dciccr switch is ON the proper ;Ingle crisis between the brush block and slip
and disappears when the switch is OFF, refer to the rings. The spa6jng established in step i.musl also be
troubleshooting chart for the probable source of trouble, maintained after the proper contact angle is established.
b. Check all clamps, clips, mountings, electrical k. With the dcicer system operating and a man in the
cl,tlncctions and connectors for tightness and electrical cockpit observing the ammeter, visually inspect and
soundness. Check also for loose, broken or missing safety physically nexthe wiring from the brush blocks to each
wire, component of the dcicer system and to the aircraft power-
c.Closely check the deicer boots for wrinkled, loose supply. Jumps of the ammctcr needle (other than the
or particularly around the outboard end and at
torn areas, momentary nicker that occurs when the timer switches at
the p"’int where the strap passes under the hub clamp. Look 30-second intervals) indicate loose or broken wiring in the
Tot abrasion or cuts along the leading edge of the flat or area under examin;ltion at the moment. In such instances,
thrust face. if the heater wires are exposed in damaged continue to nex the wiring in the area that first indicated
areas or if Ille rubber is found to be tacky, swollen or trouble while checking the continuity throudl I),e
rlctcriorated las from contact with oil or solvent fluids), individual wires of the affected harness until the source ot

replace the damaged deiccr boot. trouble is located. Use the wiring diagram to trace the
d. Check li~at IJ~e Ilub clamps are tight. Inspect for circuitry of the deicer system.
cracks or.othcr damage. Check to see that the cushioning
nlatcrial is not missing or damaged in the area under the
liub clainp or on the edge of the spinner dome. Manually
operate (I1C proplellcr from "high pitch" to "low pitch" WARNING
while cllecking that the deicer lead straps do not come
under tension. Before moving the propeller, make certain that
e. Check the slip rings for gouges, roughened surfaces, the ignition switch is off and that the engine
cracks, burned or discolored areas, and For deposits of oil, has cooled co~nplctcly. Tllcre is always sonic
grease, or dirt. Clean greasy or contaminated slip rings with danger of a cylinder firing wllcn a propeller is
solvent (a product of Corrosion Reaction moved.
Cunsu I tan ts, Inc., of Philadelphia, Pennsylvania). A ftcr such
a cleaning, allow a run-in time of 5 hours of engine
operation before turning on the deicer system. CA UTION
f. If uneven wear or wobble is detected, check the
alignment of the slip rings to the prop shaft with a dial
indicator. While turning the prop to check the slip ring While following the instructions of step k, move

alignment, push in on the prop to eliminate play in the the and forth to prevent arcing
propeller back
propeller thrust bearing. If the runout over 360 degrees of between the brushes and slip ring.
rotation is over 0.005 inch or if over any 4-inch are: it
exceeds 0.003, inch, refer to the paragraph on Slip Ring
I\lignment.
g. Examine the brush mounting bracket and housing LANDING GEAR DOORS INSPECTION AFTER
for cracks, deformation, or other indications of damage. LOWE~NG A HIGH SP~ED
M;lke sure that connections are tight and that the leads are
not chafed or binding, a. Visually check the Innding gear doors and linkage
II. Check to sec that each brush rides fully on its slip for cr;~cks and/or distortion; p;ly particular attention to the
ring over 360 degrees of rotation. If the brush is not inboard doors.
properly aligned, add shims under the brush block or
elongate Ll,e holes in tl~e mounting bracket to raise or lower
tile brush block to the proper position. If the brushes ride CAUTION
BOTII high and low with respect to the slip rings in 360
degrees of rotation, the slip ring assembly is eccentrically Prior to jacking the airplane, ensure thnt;rn un-

Il,ountcd and Ille spinner bulkhead must be replaced, balanced condition does not exist. Fl,el should
i. Check for proper spacing between the brush block be distributed evenly in both wings to prevent an

and slip rings as indicated in Deicer Brush ReDlacement.lf unbalanced condition which would cnuse the;lir-
IJlis distance is not within the specified limits, loosen the plane to be unstable on the jack.
nlounting and reposition them in the elongated holes
screws

until the block is properly positioned. IF necessary, add

sllilns between the thrust bearing plate and mounting h. Pl;lce thc:lirpl;lne on a j;lck.
bracket until the brush block is p,´•opcrly located. c. 12clnlcl the IllnJinlr Fcnr ;,nd Ih;ll ~loors
j. Estimate the contact angle of the brush block in close propcrlynnd havc;l snug fit.
relation to the slip rings. If this angle is not approximately d. tawer the Inntling gear And remove the airplane
degrees, as indicated in Dcicer Brush Replacement, loosen from the jack.

8´•16 C13
FLAP INSPECTION AFTER EXTENSION AT HIGH tuator for cracks and distortion. and flea dli~´•f sh;lft for
SPEED distortion.
C. Check the points of actu;ltor attachment to both

rollers and bolts for visible damage and the wing and the flap for cracks and distortion.
;I. Check flap
di\roriion. d. Check the skin for cracks and distortion.
h. Check fl;~p fles drive ends ;11 the motor and ac-

C13 8´•17
35 SERIES

SHOP
NI ANUAL
Raytheon Aircraft Company

’]3eechcraft
BONANZA 35 SERIES
D-l thru D-10119, except D-10097

Shop Manual
 Published by
RAYTHEON AIRCRAFT COMPANY
P.O. Box 85
Wichita, Kansas 67201
U. S. A.

NOTE

Where seech Aircraft Corporation is referred to in this publication,

it will be taken to read Raytheon Aircraft Company.

The export of these commodoties, technology or software are subject to the US Export
Administration Regulations. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. For guidance on
export control requirements, contact the Commerce Department’s Bureau of Export Ad-
ministration a 202-482-4811 or at www.bxa.doc.gov.

aiymeee ~3 Member ot GAMA

O´•nera~ rarlalon
Aircraft Company CA~HA Manufacturers Association
 RECORD OF REVISIONS

35 Series
MFG REV
NO DESCRIPTION ISSUE DATE ATP REV DATEI INSERTED BY

3/22/96 2/23/98 ATP/MB

819 See Highlights

820 See Highlights 9/3/01 1/9/02 ATP/RCL

821 See Highlights 8/29103 10/29103 ATP/JB

 BONANZA SERIES
SHOP MANUAL

Record of Revisions

Rev. Rev. Rev.

Datelnserted By Datelnoerted By Datelnserted By
No. No. No~

f319 2/25/98
MB

ATP/
B20 1/9/OF RCL

P~I U1/B/03

When a revision is inserted, the revision number, the date the revision is inserted into the manual, and the initials
of the person(s) inserting the revision should be recorded on this page.
 RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS

p ATP REV INSERT DATE REV REMOVE

REV NO DESCRIPTION ISSUE DATE DATE BY REMOVED INCOR BY

4-2 Sec 4 pS 4-6 1 1/15/93 2/23/98 ATP/MB

3-1 Sec 3 pg 3-2 10/31/97 2/23/98 ATP/MB

 ~eechcraft
BONANZA SERIES
SHOP hllANUAL

RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS

REVISION CHAPTER/ DATE INSERTED DATE REASON REMOVED

NUMBER PAGE INSERTED BY REMOVED REMOVED BY
AFFECTED
2/23/98 ATP
3: 2/23/98

NOTE: Insert this Record of Temporary Revisions after the Record of Revisions page.

Page 1
 Raylheon Aircraft Company

BONANZA 35 SERIES SHOP MANUAL

P/N 35-590096, REVISION B21, DATE: AUGUST 29, 2003

The sections which have been revised or added are listed below with the Highlights of each change. Remove the
affected pages and insert the 821 Revision in accordance with the attached Instructions Page. Enter the revision
number and the date inserted on the Record of Revisions page of this manual. The Highlights Page may be retained
with the manual for future reference.

HIGHLIGHTS

Volume
DescrSption of Change
Chapter/Section

Revised format of manual.

7 Changed references to FARs to Title 14 Code of Federal Regulations (14 CFR).

Changed voltages. Added and changed inspection requirements. Changed inspection
interval for Main Fuel Cell Flapper Valve. Added Unscheduled Maintenance Checks
data to this section. Minor text changes.

8 Added WARNING on circuit breaker. Added new items. Changed inspection require-
ments.

Pagel
821 Aug 29/03
 Raytheon Aircraft
BEECH BONANZA 35 SERIES SHOP MANUAL

P/N 35-590096-B, REVISION B20, SEP 3/01

HIGHLIGHTS

The chapters which have been revised are listed below with the Highlights of each change. Remove the affected

pages and insert the B20 revision in accordance with the attached Instruction Page. Enter the revision number
and the date inserted on the Record of Revisions page of this manual. The Highlight Page may be retained with
the manual for future reference.

Chapter/Section Description of Change

Section 2 Added WARNING to identify cables, plumbing, electrical connectors and wiring to facili-
tate correct reassembly.
Section 3 Added procedures for FORWARD CARRY-THROUGH SPAR COVER REMOVAU
INSTALLATION.

Pagel
B20 Sep 3/01
 ~eechcraft
BONANZA
SHOP MANUAL

P/N 35-590096819, DATED MARCH 22, 1996

HIGHLIGHTS
The sections which have been revised or added are listed below with the Highlights of each change. Remove
the affected pages and insert the 319 revision in accordance with the attached Instruction Page. Enter the
revision number and the date inserted on the Record of Revisions page of this manual. The Highlights Page
may be retained with the manual for future reference.

Chapter/Section Description of Change

Section 2 Moved page 14A to page 16 with improved lubrication information.

Section 3 Revised one page of art.

Revised the elevator/rudder balancing.
Section 4 Added Temporary Revision 4-1 affecting the Flap Drive Cable Connection.

Added elevator/rudder removal.

Added elevator/rudder installation.

Added elevator tab removal.
Added elevator tab installation.
Added 3 new pieces of art.

Section 7 Elevator/rudder inspection was added to the Inspection Guide.

Section 8 Changed overhaul schedule on the main and nose landing gears.
Added newer overhaul schedules specific to the different engine serials. Referenced
the latest Teledyne Continental Motors Service Bulletin as the source on the newer
overhaul schedules.

Changed overhaul schedule on fuel boost pump.

Added overhaul schedule on magneto (TCM/Bendix).

Page 1
619 Mar 26/96
 RaylheMI Aircraft Company
INSTRUCTION PAGES FOR REVISION 35-590096821
to the
BONANZA 35 SERIES SHOP MANUAL
35-5900968 (Reissued: November 15, 1960)

REMOVE INSERT
PAGE SECTION PAGE SECTION DATED

Title Page Title Page Aug 29/03

Logo Page Logo Page

"A" Page "A" Page 821

"B" Page "8" Page 821

"C" Page "C" Page 821

"D" Page "D" Page 821

"E"Page "E"Page 821

All 7 1 thru 30 7 Aug 29/03

All 8 1 thru 7 8 Aug 29/03

NOTE These instruction pages may be discarded after the above revision has
been properly incorporated into the Maintenance Manual.

Page 1 of 1
 Raytheon Aircraft Company
BONANZA 35 SERIES SHOP MANUAL

LIST OF EFFECTIVE REVISIONS

PART NUMBER DATE SECTIONS AFFECTED

35-5900968 November 15, 1960 8Reissue

35-59009681 October 27, 1961 2, 4 and 6

35-59009682 January 15, 1964 2, 3, 4 and 5

35-59009683 October 25, 1965 2, 3 and 5

35-59009684 February 11, 1966 2, 3, 4 and 5

35-59009684*11 December 1969 3 and 5

35-59009684*12 January 1970 6

35-59009684/16 March 1971 3

35-59009684/17 June 1971 2 and 3

35-59009684/18 September 1971 2, 3 and 6

35-59009684M9 March 1972 4

35-59009684/20 November, 1972 3

35-59009684/21 December 1972 6

35-59009685 November 1, 1973 6

35-59009686 November 29, 1974 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5

35-59009687 June 5, 1975 3

35-59009688 October 17, 1975 6

35-59009689 February 10, 1977 2, 3 and 4

35-590096810 March 7, 1977 6

35-590096811 May 12, 1976 1, 2, 3 and 6

35-590096812 July 31, 1978 7

35-590096813 March 15, 1979 1, 3 and 4

35-590096814 September 27, 1979 1, 2, 3, 6 and 8

35-590096815 February 3, 1984 2, 4 and 8

35-590096816 January 31, 1986 1 and 2

35-590096817 August 28, 1987 1,2 and 3

35-5900968 18 May 18, 1989 3

821

Basic publications are assigned a part number which appears on the title page with the date of the issue. Subsequent revisions are identified by the addition d a
revision code after the part number. Al after a part number denotes the first revision to the basic publication, A2 the second, etc occasionally, it is necessary to
completely reissue and reprint a publication for the purpose of obsoleting a previous issue and outstanding revisions thereto. As these replacement reissues are made,
the code will also change to the next successive letter of the alphabet at each issue. For example, B tor the first reissue, C for the second, etc

When ordering a handbook, give the basic number, and the reissue code when applicable, it a complete up-to-date publicationis desired Should only revision pages
be required, give the basic number and revision code for the particular set of revision pages you desire.
 Raytheon Aircraft Company
BONANZA 35 SERIES SHOP MANUAL

LIST OF EFFECTIVE REVISIONS (Continued)

PART NUMBER DATE SECTIONS AF~ECTED

35-590096819 March 22, 1996 2, 3, 4, 7 and 8

35-590096820 September 3, 2001 2 and 3

35-590096821 August 29, 2003 7 and 8

821
 Raytheon AiKraft Company
BONANZA 35 SERIES SHOP MANUAL

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

SECTION PACE DATE SECTION PAGE DATE

Title
Page Aug 29/03 25 Sep 1971
Logo Page 26 Sep 27/79
"A" Page 821 27 Sep 1971
"8" Page 821 28 May 12/78

"C" Page 821 3 1 Original

"D" Page 821 2 thru 28 Dec 1969
"E" Page 821 2C 28/87
Aug
3 Oct 22/65
Record of Revisions
4 thru 6K Aug 28/87
Record of Temporary 7 May 12/78
Revisions 8 thru 10A Aug 28/87
1 11 Aug 28/87
1 Jan 31/86
2 thru 4 12 Jun 5/75
Nov 29/74
5 thru 108 12A thnu 12C Mar 22/96
Aug 28/87
11 13 Mar22/96
Aug28/87
14 thru 14C Aug 28/87
12 thru 128 Mar 15n9
14D Nov 29/74
13 Mar 15/79
14 and 14A 148 thru 140 Aug 28/87
May 12/78
148 15 Nov1972
Sep27n9
16 Feb 11/66
15 Sep 27/79
16 and 17 Nov 29/74 16A and 168 Nov 29/74
16C Nov1972
2 1 Sep 3/01 17 thru 18C Mar f5n9
2 FeblOn7 19 Mar15n9
3 Jan15/64 20 Jan15/64
4 and 5 Original 21 thru 22A Nov 29/74
6 Oct 22/65 23 Sep 1971
7 Oct 27/61 24 Original
8 Oct 22/65 25 May 18/89
9 Oct 27/61 26 and 26A Nov 29/74
10 and 11 Original 27 Original
12 Feb 3/84 28 and 28A Jun 1971
13 Jan 31/86 288 Sep 1971
14 Nov 29174 28C May 12/78
15 and 16 Mar 22/96 29 thru 30A May 12/78
17 Jun 1971 308 thru 30F Feb 10/77
18 and 19 Feb 11/66 30G thru 30K 28/87
Aug
20 and 20A Nov 29174 30L thru 305 Feb 10/77
208 thru 201 Aug 28/87 31 Mar 1971
21 and 22 May 12/78 32 May 12/78
22A and 228 Feb 10/77 32A thru 32C Sep 3/01
23 Feb 10/77 33 Sep 3/01
24 Sep 27/79 33A thru 33C Sep 3/01

821
 Ray~hwm Aircraft Company
BONANZA 35 SERIES SHOP MANUAL

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES (Continued)

SECTION PAGE DATE SECTION PAGE DATE

34 Jun 1971 5 thru 7 Original

34A thru 34F Mar 15/79 8 and 8A Nov 1/73
35 thru 36A Sep 27/79 9 Oct 27/61
368 thru 36H Nov 29/74 10 and 11 Original
37 May 12/78 12 Oct 27/61
38 Jan 15/64 13 thru 16 Original
39 thru 400 May 12/78 17 and 18 Oct 27/61
41 thru 428 Nov 29/74 19 Original
43 thru 51 Jan 15/64 20 Oct 27/61
52 thru 54 Feb 11166 21 thru 24 Original
55 thru 61 Nov 29/74 25 Oct 27/61

1 Original
26 and 27 Original
4
28 thru 31 Oct 27/61
2 thru 4S Feb 3/84
32 and 33 Oct 17/75
5 Oct 27/61
6 thru 60 Mar 22/96
34 and 35 Original
36 thru 39 Oct 27/61
7 Jan 15/6´•4
8 thru 88 Mar 1972
40 Original
41 thru 47 Oct 27/61
9 FeblOn7
48 thru 52A Jan 1970
1O thru 1 OH Mar 22/96
53 Jan 1970
11 and 12 Mar 22/96
13 and 14 Mar 15/79
54 Sep 1971
54A and 548 Dec 1972
15 and 16 Feb 11/66
54C and 540 Mar 7/77
17 thru 19 Nov 29/74
55 and 56 Jan 1970
5 1 thru 4 Original 56A and 568 Dec 1972
5 Dec 1969 57 Mar 7/77
6 Original 58 and 59 Jan 1970
7 Jan 15/64 60 Dec 1972
8 and 8A Dec 1969 60A Mar 7/77
9 and 10 Dec 1969 61 thru 63 Mar 7~77
11 Feb 11/66 64 Jan 1970
12 Nov 29/74 64A and 648 Dec 1972
13 Feb11/66 64C Novln3
14 Oct 22/65 640 Sep 27n9
15 Dec 1969 648 Nov 1/73
16 thru 1 8 Nov 29/74 65 Sep 27/79
66 Mar 7/77
6 1 May12n8
67 Jan 1970
2 Jan 1970
68 Nov 1173
2A Oct17n5
68A Mar 7/77
28 Nov 1/73
69 Mar 7/77
3 Original
70 Jan 1970
4 Oct 27/61
71 and 72 Mar 7/77

821
 RaytheMI niluraff Company
BONANZA 35 SERIES SHOP MANUAL

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES (Continued)

SECTION PAGE DATE SECTION PAGE DATE

73 Jan1970 90A Dec1972

74 Sep 1971 908 Mar 7/77
74A Oct 17/75 90C thru 90F Dec 1972
748 Mar 7/77 91 and 92 Jan 1970
75 Jan 1970 92A Sep 1971
76 Sep 1971 93 Mar 7/77
76A Oct 17/75 94 thtu 96 Jan 1970
768 Mar 7/77 96A Sep 1971
77 Oct 17/75 968 Nov 1/73
78 and 78A Sep 1971 97 Mar 7n7
788 Mar 7/77 98 and 98A Dec 1972
78C Oct 17/75 988 Nov 1n3
79 Mar 7~77 98C and 98D Mar 7/77
80 Dec 1972 988 Oct 17/75
80A Mar 7/77 99 Mar 7/77
81 and 82 Jan 1970 100 Oct 17/75
82A and 828 Sep 1971 100A Mar 7/77
83 and 84 Sep 1971 1008 Nov 1/73
85 Dec 1972 100C Mar 7/77
86 and 86A Oct 17175 101 thru 104A Mar 7n7
868 and 86C Mar 7/77 105 thru 107 Mar 7/77
87 Jan 1970
7 1 thru 30 Aug 29/03
88 Mar 7/77
88A Sep 1971 8 1 thru 7 Aug 29/03
89 Dec1972
90 Sep 1971

821
 SECTION

INTRODUCTION
 Il

SECTION 1

Introduction
 SECTION I

THE BONANZA SHOP MANUAL

The Shop Manual is directed toward

helping the experi- out prior notice.
enced mechanic in his day-to-day work in the shop. Simple,
repetitive maintenance and removal procedures are left out;
at the same time we have tried to add key points of special- NOTE
ized procedures so organized that reading through many
pages of descriptive text is not required to find them. We Servicepublication reissues or revisions are not
think the results are a shop manual that the mechanic can automatically provided to the holders of this
use every day. It is small in size but large in scope and manual. For Information on how to obtain a tevi-

usability. sion service applicable to this manual, refer to

As distinguished from the Bonanza Owner’s Manual which

the latest revision of BEECHCRAFT Service Bul-
I
contains flight procedures, servicing information, and the
minor maintenance that the owner needs to know, the Bo-
nanza Shop Manual furnishes the experienced mechanic WARNING
with detailed instruction and information peculiar to the
BEECHCRAFT Bonanza. Illustrations, diagrams, and tables Use only genuine BEECHCRAFT or

are used to present complex information in a concise form. BEECHCRAFF approved parts obtained from
Text is kept brief while covering important points in mainte- BEECHCRAFT approved sources, in connec-
nance and overhaul. tion with the maintenance and repair of Beech
airplanes.
The Bonanza Shop Manual will grow as new information be-
comes available. Revisions will be issued whenever needed Genuine BEECHCRAFT parts are produced and inspected

to keep information type in-

current and to add more of the under rigorous procedures to ensure airworthiness and suit-
formation included in the original issue. The wiring diagrams ability for use in Beech airplane applications. Parts pur-
for those airplane serials prior to D-9818, are contained chased from sources other than BEECHCRAFT, even

within Section 6 of this Shop Manual. though outwardly identical in appearance, may not have had
the required tests and inspections performed, may be ditfer-
Refer to the BEECHCRAFT Bonanza Wiring Diagram Manu- ent in fabrication techniques and materials, and may be
al P/N 35-590102-7 for the wiring diagrams pertaining to the dangerous when installed in an airplane.
Bonanza Model V358, airplane serials D-9818 through
D-10119 except D-10097. Salvaged airplane parts, reworked parts obtained from non-
BEECHCRAFT approved sources, or parts, components, or
For serials 0-10097, D-10120 and after refer to structural assemblies, the service history of which is un-

BEECHCRAFT Bonanza Wiring Diagram Manual P/N known be authenticated, may have been subject-
or cannot

35-590102-9. ed to unacceptable stresses or temperatures or have other

hidden damage, through routine visual or
not discernible
CORRESPONDENCE usual nondestructive testing techniques. This may render
the part, component or structural assembly, even though
If question should arise concerning the care of your air-
a originally manufactured by BEECHCRAFT, unsuitable and
plane, itis important to include the airplane serial number unsafe for airplane use.
with your inquiry. The serial number is stamped on the
model designation plate, located in one of the following lo- BEECHCRAFT expressly disclaims any responsibility for
cations: on the fuel selector cover, on the belly of the alr- malfunctions, failures, damage or injury caused by use of
plane forward of the differential mechanism inspection non-BEECHCRAFT approved parts.
cover or on the fuselage inboard of the RH flap.

NOTE
NOTlCE
It shall be the responsibility of the owner/
Beach AircraftCorporation expressly reserves operator to ensure that the latest revision of
the right to supersede, cancel and/or declare publications referenced in this handbook are
obsolete any part, part numbers, kits or pub)lca- utilized during operation, servicing, and mainte-
tion that may be referenced in this manual with- nance of the airplane.

B18 1-1
 BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA 35 SERIES
SHOP MANUAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE

INTRODUCTION I-1

II GENER~L INFORh/lXTION ..........2-I

III SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION ~ND .............j-L

IV MAJOR DISASSEMBLY ......................................4-L

V ~1XJOR ~I.-\INTENXNCE AND OVERH.-\UL .j-I

vl ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS .........6-1

VII PERIODIC INSPECTION GUIDE ...............7-1

VIII OVERH.~UL AND REPL.I\CE~IENT SCHEDULE .................S- 1

817 1-3
 ALPHABETICAL INDEX

A
A

Air Conditioning System, Refrigerative (Cont’d)

Access Openings
Illus. 2-4 Condenser
Fuselage..........
Dlus. 2-5 Control Rigging........´•... 3-30C
Wing..............
Installation. ´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•3-30C
Actuator Electric
Illus. 3-6G Removal........... ´•´•´•´•´•´•3-30B
Trim Tab
Actuator, Flap ...................´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•Illus.
5-13 Evaporator
Assembly 5’12 Filter Replacement ..........´•...´•´•.´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•--´•´•-´•´•´•´•´•´•3-30D

5’12 Installation.......
Disassembly
´•´•´•´•´•-´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•3-30D

´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•~’12 Removal ´•´•´•3-30D

Overhaul
e6A Functional ´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•3-U)B
Removal and Jnstallation.....
Leak Detection 3-308
Actuator, Landing Gear....... ´•´•´•´•´•........Illus. 5-15
5’14 Maintenance ...3-30A
Overhaul
Precautionary Measures 3-308
Removingand mstalling............ ...´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•..4-5

3-30F
Adjustment and
3-368 Ventilation Blower 3-30D
Test Procedure
Installation..............´•´•-´•´•.´•´•´•´•´•´•´• .....3-30D
Adjustment
Removal................~´• .......3-30D
Brake Master Cylinder
3-26 Air Filters, Gyro Instrument i-305
Linkit~e.. . . . . .´•. . . ´•. . . ´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´• ..........2-2
Cabin Entrance Door 3-32B Airplane Three Dimensional View....
´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•3-34 Alternator ....3-34F, Dlus. 3-20
Carburetor Idler.........................´•´•.´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•
Installation... 3-34F
Compressor Belt.......... ............2-23, 3-30D
´•..........3-14A Removal..
Engine FuelPump
´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•-´•´•´•´•´•3-34F

New Alternator Preparation........... 3-34F

Flap Limit Switch.................... 3-18, ~lus. 3-19
Troub~eshooting,.,.,.. ´•3-40D
Landing Gear
....3-18A .2-20A
Microswitch Approved Engine Oils
Landing Gear Position Arm, Control Column
3-22 Installation........... ´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•.....3-t
Light
Rtmoval.................. ...,.3-2
Landing Gear Pressure
Switch 3-18B Assembly
Nose Wheel Travel Gerdes, Master Cylinder 5-17, Illus. 5-18
Main Gear Strut 5’8A
Stop ......´•´•.´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•-´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•..´•....3-22A

3-28, Illus. 3-20 Nose Gear Shock Strut 5-14

Stall Warning Switch...........,...´•...´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•
Static Ground Cable 2-23 Paramount, Master Cylinder 5-16, Illus. 5-18
Assist Step.......... 3-25
SuctionRelief Valve ....´•´•´•..´•.´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•3-30G

3-34C, 3-34D 3-25

Voltage Regulator........... Adjustment
Aileron Autopilot
3-10.4, Illus. 3-12 BEECHCRAE;T New-Matic 3-30K
Balancing
´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•Illus. 3-3 Illus. 3-30K, 3-30L, 3-MM
Control System...........´•´•..
Control Trimmer .......3-5 Troubleshooting Guide ...........´•´•´•~´•´•´•-´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•.......3-30N

Rigging @rl through D-1500) ...........3-2

Rigging @-1501 and after)

B
Tabs ..............´•´•´•.´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•3’5

Air Conditioning System, Evaporative 3-29 Balancing

3-29 Aileron............................´•.´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´• 3-IOA. Illus. 3-12
Wick Jig
3-30 Control Surfaces 3-IOA
Air Conditioning System, Refrigerative.............
Illus. 3-30C, 3-30E Elevatormudder 3-17A, Illus. 3-13
Battery.....~.........................´•.´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•-´• 2-201-1. Illus. 3-’0
Charging...... ...´•´•..´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•..´•´•....2-UB

Beech Brake
Compressor
3’30D Disassembly ........................´•´•´•.´•´•´•´•.´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•.e8

LiningWeaf 3-26
Oil Level .........~......´•......´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•2-UB

Reassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . ´•´•´•´•.´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´• ........4-8

Removal. . . . . . . . .´•. .´•´•.´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•3-30D
Compressor Belt Replacement
3-30B BEECHCRA~
Removal. . . . . . . ´•.´•´•´•.´•´•´•.´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´• 3-3081 New-Matic Autopilot
3-30B Illus. 3-30K, 3-30L, 3-MM
Tension........... ´•´•´•..´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•´•2-23,

1-5

BfT
 ALPHABETICAL INDU(

B C

Belt Adjustment Cabin Door (Cont’d)

Compressor 2-23,-~j0D Lock..................,........................................... 3-32B
Generator ..................................................Illus. 3-20 Teleflex Cable, Removing and
Bladder Type Fuel Cell Installing 4-10
Removal and Installation,.................................. 3-14E Cabin Trim, Cleaning 2-22
Rcpair........................................................... 3-14F Cable
Blower,Ventilation ..........................,................3-30D Adjustment. Static Ground................................... 3-’3
Boot Repair, Electric Installation, New Tab.................. 3-6K
Propeller Deicer 5.16 Tension, Temperature Effect on Illus. 3-ZC
Brake System ................................................lllus. 3-27 Capacities, Fuel Cell 2-208
Bleeding, Dual Brake System................................ 3-25 Carburetor Idle Adjustment............ ........3-33
Gravity Bleeding 3-25 Care and Repair of Fuel Cells. 3-14F
Pressure Bleeding............................... 3-25 Inside Patch ........3- 14G
Determining Goodyear Brake Outside Patch 3-14F
Lining Wear 3-26 Changes, Nose Gear Improvement....... 3-27A
Firestone Brake Adjustment.. 3-26 Chart Electrical Utilization Load 3-3611
Firestone Brake Overhaul 4-8A Circuit Breaker Panels IHus. 3-20
Goodyear Brake Adjustment 3-26 Cleaning
Goodyear Brake Lining, Removal Engine ....2-22A
and Replacement Exterior ...........2-22
(One Pressure Cylinder Type) Q´•6A Interior, Cabin Trim.......... 2-22
(Two Pressure Cylinder Type)..... ......................4-7
Oil Separator Screen .....3-30C
Goodyear Brake Unit, Disassembly Oil Tank and Cooler
(One Pressure Cylinder Type) 4-68 Prior to D-4866................................................ 3-15
Goodyear Brake Unit, Disassembly Rubber Seals .2-22
Repair and Reassembly of Suction Relief Valve Screen .....................3-30G

(Two Pressure Cylinder Type).......... ..........4-7 Windshield and Windows 2-22

Master Cylinder 3-26, Illus. 3-27 Clearing Static Lines 3.28
Linkage Adjustment 3-26 Clutch, Magnetic
Overhaul........... 5-16 Installation........................... .........,.....3-7
Removal and Installation.................................3-26A Removal......................................................... 3-6K
Parking Brake ............2-19 Compressor, Air Conditioner
Parking Brake Valve 3-26A, Illus. 3-27 Belt Tension.......................... ..2-23, 3-30D
Servicing ........................................................2-20C
Installation................................... ........3-30D
Shuttle Valve....................................... 3-26A, Illus. 3-27 Oil Level ...2-228
Breaker Paint Adjustment, Removal................................ .........................3-30D

Magneto ...........3-34A Condenser, Air Conditioner

Brush Control Rigging...................... ...3-30D
Block Resistance Installation..................... .................................3-30D

Check, Propeller 3-57, Illus. 3-57 Removal.........................................................3-30D

Generator, Minimum Length .........................lllus.
3-20 Continuity Test, Propeller
Generator, Replacement of........................ 3-35 Deicer 3-57
Repiacement, Propeller Control
Deicer............................................ 3-55, Lllus. 3-55 Column............................................................. Ilius. 3-2B
Starter, Minimum Length..............................lllus. 3-20 Arm Installation 3.2
Wear Limits Electrical Arm Removal 3-2
Trim Tab Actuator............................... ..............3-7 Chain Rigging......... 3-2
Bulb Replacement Guide...............................,...... 2-28 Single. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Bulkhead Inspection ............................................3-32A Flight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3~2
Bullock Unit....................................................... 3-30S Lock............................................................................ 2-19
Surfaces, Balancing................................................ 3-10A
System
Aileron. Illus. 3-3
C Elevator........................................................... Illus. 3-4
Inspection 3-2
Cabin Door Rigging 3.2
Adjustment 3-328 nlus. 3-3, 3-4, 3-8

1´•6
817
 ALPHABETICAL INDEX

C E

Control(Cont’d) Elevator
System (Cont’d) Balancing .....3-12A, Illus. 3-13
Rudder Illus. 3-8 Control System Illus. 3-4

Controller, Turbocharger ......3-368 Illus. 3-36C, 3-36D Rigging (D-1 through D-2680) .3-5
Converter Troubleshooting, Strobe Light......... .3-30S Rigging (D-2681 through 0-5725) ...............3-6A
Correcting End Play in Main Gear Fitting ........3-22A Rigging (D-5726 and after) ..3-6C

Cowl Flap Rigging ............................3-16C

Tab Hinges Inspection .....3-6J
Forward Cowl Flap Rigging ....................3-17
Tab Indicator Rigging ......3-61
Tab Inspection 3-6D
Cylinder Retesting, Oxygen ..,2-23
Tab Rigging...´• ´•....3-6E

D Tab Rigging to Correct for Yaw 3-6J

Trim Tab Installation ...lllus. 3-6F

Deicer Inspection Procedure, Trim Tab Actuator Removal .3-6H
Electric Propeller ...........7-1 Trim Tab Actuator Installation 3-6H

Deicer Resistance Check, Propeller 3-57 Emergency Locator Transmitter 3-32A

Deicer Timer Check, Propeller .3-56 Empennage, Removal and Installation ............4-10B
Deicing, Electric Propeller .....3-55 Engine
Dimensions, Aircraft .........,.,._..
........._2-2 Approved Alternate .......4-10B

Disassembly Change Requirements ...´•.4-13

Beach Brakes ...............4-8 Cleaning
Gerdes, Master Cylinder ............5-16, Illus. 5-18 Fuel Pump Adjustment ...................3-14A
Main Gear Strut ..............5-5, Illus. 5-6, 5-7, 5-8 Instruments -3-30J
Nose Gear Strut 5-4, Illus. 5-2, 5-3 Mounts ......................................4-13

Paramount, Master Cylinder ..........5-18 Illus. 5-18 Oils .´•2-20A

Shimmy Dampener 5-8A, Illus. 5-9 Removal and Installation ...4-108

Door Adjustment, Cabin Entrance. .3-328 Starting .2-18

Door Adjustment, Landing Gear ......3-188, Illus. 3-23 Stopping ..............................´•´•.´•´•´•2-19

Door Lock, Cabin ...........3-328 Turbocharger ´•.lllus. 4-11, 4-12

Drop-Off Check, Magneto ...3-346 Evaporator, Air Conditioner

Dual Brake System Bleeding ...3-25 Filter Replacement ......´•3-30F
Installation 3-30F
Removal .3-30F
E Exterior
Cleaning .2-22
Electric Paints 2-24

Propeller Deicing .........,3-55 Extended Storage and High Wind, Mooring ........2-79
Trim Tab Actuator lllus. 3-6G
Brush Wear Limits .........3-7
Installation .............3-6K F
Removal 3-6J
Trim Tab System .........3-6J Filters
Electrical System .......lllus. 3-20 Gyro Instrument Air .......3-30J
Alternator ...........lllus. 3-20 Pressure System 3-30H, Illus. 3-30H
Battery Illus. 3-20 Firestone Brake Adjustment ...3-26
Circuit Breaker Panels .Illus. 3-20 Flap Actuator .....4-6A, Illus. 5-13
Flap Limit Switches ...lllus. 3-19 Assembly .5-12

Flap Motor .....lllus. 3-19, 3-20 Disassembly .5-12

Fuel Transmitters Illus. 3-20 Overhaul ..............................´•..´•´•´•5-12

Generator Brushes 3-34D, Ilius. 3-20 Flap System .......3-17, Illus. 3-19
Magnetos .3-34/4, 4-13, Illus. 3-20 Limit Switches ...3-17, Illus. 3-19
Stall Warning Switch ...lllus. 3-20 Motor. .3-18, 4-5
Starter Illus. 3-20 Illus. 3-19

Starter Solenoid .......lllus. 3-20 Position Indicator and

Utilization Load Chart .....3-36H Adjustment ...3-18, Illus. 3-19
Voltage Regulator ..........3-341), 3-348, Illus. 3-20 Settings ´•.....´•.Hlus. 3-19

Wiring Diagrams Index .......6-2 Shaft 4-5, 4-6

1-7
817
 ALPHABETICAL INDEX

F G

Track Inspection ...........4-6 Heat Exchanger Inspection ...3-29

Track Wear Limits .........4-6A Heat Test, Propeller Deicer ............_.,..
...3-56

Flaps, Cowl ..................................3-16C

Heater Exchanger, Inspection .3-29
Rigging Forward, TSIO Engine .3-17 Hinges Inspection, Elevator Tab 3-6J
Flares ..3-34 Hoisting
Flight Controls ...............3-2
Flyable Storage. 2-208
Freeing Turbocharger Shafts .3-368 1
Front Seats
Installation ...............3-33 Idler Adjustment, Carburetor .3-34
Removal 3-33 Ignition ........._

Fuel Cell Indicator Rigging, Elevator Tab 3-61

Capacities 2-208 Index, Electrical Wiring Diagrams 6-2

Flapper Valve Inspection ......................3-15 Inspections
Fuel Level Replacement Transmitters in the Main Control System .............3-2
Fuel Cell ...3-148, 4-14, Illus. 4-14, 4-15, 4-16 Deicer, Electric Propeller .....7-1
Fuel Pump Adjustment Engine .3-14A Elevator Tabs 3-60
Fuel System 3-14, Illus. 3-148, 3-16A, 3-168 Elevator Tab Hinges 3-6J
Auxiliary .............lllus. 3-16 Flap Track ........._

Bladder Type Fuel Cells ...3-14E Fuel Tank Vent Lines .....3-148
Fuel Cells, Care and Repair 3-14F Fuselage Bulkheads .......3-32A
Patch, Outside .........3-14F Guide .7-1, 7-2
Patch, Inside ...........3-14G Heat Exchanger ...........3-30
Servicing 2-208 Heat and Vent
Transmitters .............3-148 Main Fuel Cell Flapper Valve ..................3-15
Vent Lines, Inspection .....3-148 Periodic 7-1
Fuel Unit Illus. 5-11 installation
Assembly .5-10 Compressor, Air Conditioner 3-30D

Disassembly ...............5-10 Compressor Belt, Air Conditioner ..............3-30D

Repair ......................................5-10
Condenser, Air Conditioner 3-30D

Testing .5-10 Control Column Arm ..........._._..

Fuselage Bulkheads, Inspection of ............,3-32A Electric Trim Tab Actuator .3-6J

Fuselage and Empennage Skin Plating ........lllus. 2-7 Elevator Trim Tab Illus. 3--6F
Elevator Trim Tab Actuator .3-6H
Empennage ................................4-108

G Engine. ........._._._
.4-108

Evaporator, Air Conditioner ........._._.__

3-30F
Generator G35 Front Seats ...........3-33
Belt Adjustment .......lllus. 3-20 Light Tray 2-28
Brush Replacement .......3-348 Magnetic Clutch .............3-7

Overvoltage Relay .........3-36 Magnetos 3-34A

Standby System ...........3-35 New Tab Cable 3-6K

Goodyear Propeller Deicer Boot............... .4-17, Illus. 4-18
Brake Adjustment .........3-26 Teleflex Cable ......................,.......4-10A

Brake Linings, Removal and Replacement Vacuum Pump ...........3-30G

(One Pressure Cylinder Type) 4-6A Velcro Tape with Replacement Cells........... .3-14E

(Two Pressure Cylinder Type) 4-7 Windshield ..................................4-t7

Brake Unit, Disassembly Wing Tip Tank ...........3-14C

(One Pressure Cylinder Type) 4-6A Instrument
Brake Unit, Disassembly Engine ................._
3-30J
Repair and Reassembly of Pressure 3-30H

(Two Pressure Cylinder Type) ................4-7 Filters 3-301

Gravity Bleeding .............3-25 Wedge Lighting .........,2-26
Grimes Strobe Light .........3-32 Interior, Cleaning .............3-22
Ground Cable and Adjustment, Static .........,.2-23
Guide, Autopilot Troubleshooting 3-30N J
Guide Inspection ................................7-1

Gyro, Autopilot Troubleshooting .3-30N Jacking ..2-17

Heat and Vent System, Inspection of ..3-29, Illus. 3-26C Jig, Air Conditioner Wick .........,.,._..
.Illus. 3-30

1-8 817
 ALPHABETICAL INDEX

L M

Landing Gear Main Landing Gear

Actuator Overhaul 5-14, Illus. 5-15 Fitting, Correcting End Play 3-22A

................4-5 Removal and Installation ´•4-5

Actuator, Removing and Installing
Correcting Play
End in Main Strut
Gear ...3-22A Assembly ´•5-8A
Landing Fitting
.3-188, Illus. 3-23 Disassembly 5-5, Illus. 5-6, 5-7, 5-8
Door Adjustment
Limit Switches Repair 5-5
............................,.3-18A

Motor, Removing and Installing 4-5 Main Spar, Removal and Installation ..............4-2A
Nose Gear Improvement Changes ..............3-22A Maintenance
...3-22 Conditioning System
Air ...3-308
Position Light Adjustment
...3-188, Illus. 3-23, 3-24 Emergency Locator Transmitter ..............3-32A
Rigging
Propeller Blade 2-22A
Rigging Nose Wheel Steering Mechanism ......3-22A
Manufacturer’s Tolerance Table .5-9
Safety Switch Adjustment ..........3-18A, Illus. 3-23
Safety System ..............................3-18A
Master Cylinder, Brake .3-26, Illus. 3-27
Shock Strut, Main........5-5, 5-8A, Illus. 5-6, 5-7, 5-8 Linkage Adjustment .´•...´•3-26

Shock Strut, Nose 5-4, Illus. 5-2, 5-3 Overhaul .......................´•´•´•´•..´•´•´•´•´•´•´•5-16

...3-18, Illus. 3-23, 3-24 Removal and Installation ...3-26A

System
ThrottleWarning Switch Microswitch Adjustment Landing Gear ..........3-188
...3-25, \\\us. 3-24 Models, Serials, DiHerences ...1-16
Adjustment
Travel Stop Adjustment ...3-22A Mooring (Extended Storage and High Wind)........2-19
Uplock Adjustment ............3-22A, Illus. 3-23, 3-24 Motor

Uplock Roller Lubrication ...2-20 Flap .3-18, 4-5, 4-6, Illus. 3-19, 3-20
Leading Edge, Wing, Installation 4-2A Landing Gear............. .4-5, Illus. 3-20, 3-23, 3-24

Leading Edge, Wing, Removal .4-2A

Leak Test Procedure, Turbocharger ..............3-368
Leak Detection, Air Conditioner 3-308 N

Leveling. .2-17

Light New-Matic Autopilot, BEECHCRAFT 3-30K,

Bulb Replacement Guide ...2-28 Illus. 3-30K, 3-30L, 3-30M
Instrument, Wedge .........2-28 New Tab Cable Installation 3-6K

Strobe 3-32 Normal Tie-Down .......................´•.´•´•´•´•´•2-19

Tray Installation ´•....2-28 Nose Gear

Limit Switch, Flap .3-18, Illus. 3-19 Improvement Changes .....3-22A

Limit Switch, Landing Gear............ 3-188, Illus. 3-24 Removal and Installation .....4-4

Load Chart, Electrical Utilization 3-36H Shock Strut Assembly ............5-4, Illus. 5-2, 5-3
Locator, Emergency Transmitter 3-32A Shock Strut Disassembly ..........5-4, Illus. 5-2, 5-3
Lock, Cabin Door ...........3-328 Strut Repair ............................´•´•..´•´•5-4

Lock, Control ..................................2-19

Nose Wheel
....,3-33, Illus. 3-34 Scraper ´•´•3-34
Locks, Roton
Lubrication Steering Mechanism .3-22A
....................................2-19

.Illus. 2-14, 2-14A, 2-15 Travel Stop Adjustment ...3-22A

Diagram
Landing Gear Uplock Rollers 2-20

M
OilSystem .............................´•´•´•´•´•´•.3-15

Servicing ´•2-20
Magnetic Clutch
Installation ´•´•.3-7 Tank and Cooler
Removal 3-6K Oils, Approved Engine ´•..2-20A

Test .............´•.3-7 Openings, Access .Illus. 2-4. 2-5

Torque
Magneto, Bendix, Eismann, Slick 3-348 Optional Stability Augmentation
Breaker Point Adjustment .3-34A System ´•Illus. 3-14

Drop-Off Check ......´•.´•..3-34C Overhaul

Installation ...3-34A, 3-348, 4-13 Brake Master Cylinder ..............5-16, Illus. 5-18
Removal Replacement Schedule ´•8-2
....................................4-13

.......´•...3-34A, 3-348 Shimmy Dampener ........´•5-8A

Timing
Main Fuel Cell Flapper Valve Inspection ............3-15 Overvoltage Relay ...´•.....3-34D

1-9
B17
 ALPHABETICAL INDEX

O R

Oxygen System Removal and Installation (Cont’d)

Cylinder Retesting .......2-228 Condenser, Air Conditioner 3-300

Servicing 2-22A Control Column Arm .........3-2

Electric Trim Tab Actuator 3-6J
Empennage .................,..............4-10e

P Engine............ .......4-108
Evaporator 3-30F

Paints ..2-24 Flap Motor

Parking Brake ...............2-19 Flap Shaft
Parking Brake Valve .3-26A, Illus. 3-27 Front Seats ...............3-33
Pedal Rig Tool, Rudder .3-10, Illus. 3-10 Landing Gear Actuator .......4-5
Periodic Inspections ...........7-1 Landing Gear Motor .........4-5
Pitot System 3-26A, 3-28, Illus. 3-288 Light Tray 2-28
Magnetic Clutch 3-6K
Plating, Skin
Fuselage .........lilus. 2-7, 2-9 Main Landing Gear .........4-5

Wing illus. 2-11 Nose Landing Gear

Position Indicator and Retract Rod ...............4-5

Adjustment Flap .3-18, Illus. 3-19 Teleflex Cable ..............................4-10A

Position Light Adjustment Ventilation Blower, Air Conditioner ............3-30D

.............3-22 Vertical Instrument Instructions 3-30J
Landing Gear
Positioning, Three Bladed Propeller ..............4-14 Windshield ..................................4-17

Pressure Wing Tip Tank ...........3-14C

Bleeding, Brakes ...........3-25 Repair

SwitchAdjustment Landing Gear ..............3-188 Main Gear Strut .............5-5

System, Instrument .......3-30H Nose Gear Strut ...........5-4

Illus. 3-30H, 3-301 Replacement Fuel Level Transmitters in

Filters, Instrument 3-30J, Illus. 3-301 the Main Fuel Cells .......3-148,
Propeller 4-12, Illus. 4-12, 4-13, 4-14
Brush.Block Resistance Check........3-57, Illus. 3-57 Replacement and Overhaul Schedule .............8-2

Deicer, Electric .............3-55 Retract Rod Removal and Installation ..............4-5

Boot Installation .4-17, Illus. 4-18 Rigging

Boot Removal ...........4-17 Control Column Chain .......3-2
Boot Repair .............5-16 Control Surfaces ...........3-2
Brush Replacement 3-55, Illus. 3-55 Cowl Flap ..................................3-16C

Continuity Test ...........3-57 Elevator Tab Indicator 3-61

Heat Test ...............3-56 Elevator Tab to Correct for Yaw 3-6J

Inspection Procedure ........................7-1

Forward Cowl Flaps ..........................3-17

Slip Ring Alignment .....3-57 Landing Gear .3-188, Illus. 3-23, 3-24
Timer Check .............3-56 Nose Wheel Steering Mechanism ..............3-22A

Propeller Blade Maintenance .2-22A Roton Locks .....3-33, Illus. 3-34

Publications, Supplementary Rubber Seals ...............2-22
BEECHCRAFT ...........1-14A Rudder Control System Illus. 3-8

Vendor 1-12 Rudder Pedal Rig Tool ..lllus. 3-10

Rudder, Rigging ...............3-9

R S

Reassembly Safety Switch Adjustment, Landing

Beech Brakes ...............4-8 Gear .........3-18A. Ilius. 3-23
Shimmy Dampener .........5-9 Safety System. Landing Gear .3-18A
Relay, Overvoltage .........3-34E Schedule. Overhaul and Replacement ..............8-2
Relief Valve Adjustment, Suction 3-30 Scraper, Nose Wheel .........3-34

Regulator Adjustment, Voltage............ 3-34D, 3-348 Seals, Rubber ..............2-22

Removal and Installation Seats. G35 Front ...........3-328
Bladdei Type Fuel Cell 3-148 Seats, H35 Front .............3-33
Brake Master Cylinder .....3-26A Servicing
Air Conditioner ´•..3-30D Air Conditioner .....2-228, 3-29
Compressor,
Air Conditioner ..............3-30D Battery 2-20H
Compressor Belt.

1-10 817
 BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA 33/35 SERIES
SHOP MANUAL
pt

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

S Strobe Light
Bullock 3-30S
Servicing (Cont’d) Grimes 3-32
Brake System 2-200 Trouble Analysis 2-30S
Oxygen System 2-22A Troubleshooting the Power Unit 3-305
Wing Tip Tanks 2-208 Converter Troubleshooting 3-305
Shimmy Damper Illus.5-9 Trigger Circuit Troubleshooting 3-305
Assembly 5-9 Suction Relief Valve, Adjustment 3-30A
Disassembly 5-8A,Illus.5-9 Suction Relief Valve Screenl
Overhaul 5-8A Cleaning j-30A
Table of Tolerances 5-9 Supplementary Publicat~ons
Testing 5-10 BEECHCRAFT 1-15
Shock Strut, Main Illus.5-2,5-7 Vendor 1-1;
Assembly 5-8 Switches
Disassembly 5-5 Flap Limit 3-1~,Iiius.j-19
Repair 5-5 Landing Gear Limit Illus.3-18A
Servicing 2-208 Safety, Landing Gear Illus.3-23
Shock Strut, Nose Illus.5-2,5-3 Throttle Warning Illus.3-24
Assembly 5-4 Systems
Disassembly 5-4 Aileron Control lllus.3-3
Repair 5-4 Air Conditioning, Evaporative 3-30
Servicing 2-208 Air Conditioning, Refrigerative 3-30A
Shop Manuat, Introduction 1-1 Electric Trim Tab 3-63
Shuttle Valve, Dual Brake Electrical 2-22?Ilius.3-20
System 3-26A,Illus.3-27 Elevator Control Iiius.3-4
Single Control Column 3-2 Filters, Pressure 3-303,Iilus.3-30I
Skin Plating Illus.2-7,2-9,2-11 Flap 3-17,111us.j-19
Slip Ring Alignment 3-57 Flight Controls 3-2.111us.3-3,3-4,3-8
Spar, Main Removal Fuel, Servicing 2-20B,Illus.3-14D 3-16
and Installation 4-2,4-4 3-16A,~-16B
Spark plugs 3-34A Heat and Vent 3-30
Special Tools Illus.2-12,2-13 Inspection, Flight Control 3-2
Stability Augmentat7on System Illus.3-14 Landing Gear 3-18,4-4,Illus.3-23,3-24
Stall Warning Adjustment 3-28 Landing Gear Safety 3-18A
Stall Warning Switch Illus.3-20 Oil, Servicing 2-20,3-15
Stall Warning System 3-28,Illus.3-20 Optional Stability
Standby Generator System 3-36 Augmentation Illus.3-14
Starter 3-36,Illus.3-20 Pitot and Static Air 3-26A,Illus.3-28E
Starting Eng~ne 2-18 Pressure 3-30H,Illus.3-30H,3-301
Starting Turbocharged Eng~ne 2-18 Rudder Control Illus.3-28
Static Air System 3-26A,Jllus.3-28B Stability Augmentation Zllus.3-14
Static Ground Cable and Vacuum 3-300
Adjustment 2-23
Static Lines, Clearing 3-28 T
Stations Diagram 2-3
Steering Mechanism, Nose Wheel 3-22A Tab
Step, Assist 3-25 Ai~eron 3-5
Stopping Engine 2-19 Elevator Illus.3-6F,3-6E
Storage Elevator Tab Actuator 3-6H
Flyable 2-205 Hinges Inspection, Elevator 3-63
Indefinite 2-20F Ri ing, Elevator 3-61
Preparation for Service 2-21 9E9
evator Tabs 3-60
Temporary 2-20F Rigging to Correct for Yaw 3-65

B17 1-10A
 BEECHCRAFT
BONANZA 33/35 SERIES
SHOP MANUAL

Table Teleflex, Cable Installation 4-10

Manufacturer’s Tolerances 5-9 Temperature Effect on Cable
Models, Serials, Differences 1-16 Tension Illus.3-2C
of Contents 1-3 Testing, Emergency Locator
of Lubricants 2-14 Transmitter 3-32A
of Torques, Wing Bolts 4-2 Testing, Shimmy Damper 5-10
Taxiing 2-19 Throttle Warning Horn AdJustment 3-25

1-10B 817
 ALPHABETICAL INDEX

T T

Tie-Down, Normal ..............................2-19

Turbocharger (Cont’d)
Tip Tank Exhaust and Air Induction Illus. 4-11
Installation 3-148 Schematic Illus. 3-366
Removal ................_
.3-14C System ......................................4-12

Servicing ........._____
2-208
Tires
Recapped Not Recommended 3-26A U
Servicing ..........,2-20D
Tube Type Uplock Rollers, Lubrication of
Dismounting .............4-8A Landing Gear .............2-20

Mounting ...............4-8B
Tubeless Type

Converting Wheels for Inner Tubes ............4-10 V

Dismounting ........._._.,._
.............4-9
Inflation 4-9 Vacuum System
Mounting 4-9 Adjustment of Suction Relief Valve ............3-30G
Tool, Rudder Pedal Rig ...lllus. 3-9 Cleaning Oil Separator ...3-30G
Tools, Special .....lllus. 2-12, 2-13 Cleaning Suction Relief Valve Screen ..........3-30G
Torque Test, Magnetic Clutch ...3-7 Instalring Vacuum Pump ...3-30G
Towing ........................................2-17
Replacing Gyro Instrument Air Filters ..........3-30G
Transmitter, Emergency Locator 3-32A Valve
Travel Stop Adjustment, Nose Wheel ............3-22A Parking Brake .3-26A, Illus. 3-27
Trigger Circuit Troubleshooting; Shuttle .........3-26A, Illus. 3-27
Strobe Light .............3-305 Suction Relief ..............................3-10A

Trim Tab Actuator, Electric 3-6J, Illus. 3-6G Velcro Tape Installation with
Brush Wear Limits ...........3-7 Replacement Cells .3-14E
installation 3-6K Vendor Publications, Supplementary ..............1-12
Trim Tab Installation, Elevator Illus 3-6F´• Vent Lines, Inspection of Fuel Tanks ............3-148
Trouble Analysis, Strobe Light 3-308 Ventilating System 3-29, Ilius. 3-28C
Troubleshooting Voltage Regulator .Illus. 3-20, 3-34[)
Air Conditioning System ...3-308
Alternator System .........3-40D
Aitimeter .3-49 W
Directional Gyro ...........3-50
Flap Control Indicator Circuit 3-43 Warning Horn, Landing Gear ...3-5
FuelQuantity Indicator Circuit 3-46 Warning System, Stall 3-28, Illus. 3-20
Generator System .......3-40C Wear Limits, Electrical Trim Tab
Gyro Horizon .............3-49 Actuator Brush
Guide, Autopilot .........3-30N Wheel Disassembly and Assembly 4-88
Ignition System .........,3-42 Wick Jig, Air Conditioner .Illus. 3-30
Landing Gear Position Indicator ..............3-428 Windshield
Magnetic Compass .........3-50 and Window Cleaning .......2-22
Manifold Pressure Gage ...3-46 Installation ..................................4-17

Navigation Light Circuit .....3-45 Removal ....................................4-17

Pitot and Static Pressure System ..............3-51 Wing

Propeller Deicer System 3-58, 3-59 Adjustment 4-4
Rate of Climb Indicator .....3-47 Leading Edge and Main